BS EN 1992-1-1:2023

Eurocode 2 - Design of concrete structures

Part 1-1: General rules and rules for buildings,

bridges and civil engineering structures

bsi. @seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023 BRITISH STANDARD

National foreword
This British Standard is the UK implementation of EN 1992-1-1:2023.
It s upersedes BS EN 1992-1-1:2004+A1:2014, BS EN 1992-2:2005 and
BS EN 1992-3:2006, which will be withdrawn on 30 Ma rch 2028.
The UK participation in its preparation was entrusted to Technical
Committee B/525/2, Structural use of concrete.
A list of organizations represented on this committee can be obtained on
request to its committee manager.
National choice is allowed in this standard where explicitly stated
within notes. The National Annex to this standard contains the
national choices to be used for buildings and civil engineering works
constructed in the UK.
The first generation of EN Eurocodes was published between 2002
and 2007, with conflicting British Standards withdrawn in 2010. This
document forms part of the second generation of EN Eurocodes.
The second generation of EN Eurocodes is expected to be published
between 2023 and 2026. These documents are being published as soon
as they are available. This is being done to enable users to prepare
for the transition from the first generation to second generation of
EN Eurocodes.
UK adoptions of the first generation of EN Euro codes will be withdrawn
by BS! on 30 March 2028. Until that date, the first generation documents
should be considered as the applicable standards for buildings and civil
engineering works constructed in the UK unless otherwise specified by
the relevant authority or in the specification for a particular project.
This standard is intended to be used with its National Annex and other
referenced documents, including other second generation Eurocodes, as
an interdependent suite of documents.
While the use of provisions in this standard in conjunction with first
generation Eurocodes is not precluded, it should be undertaken with
care and should only be done when users are satisfied that it will not
result in a lower level of reliability than the minimum level set in the first
generation Eurocodes and associated UK National Annexes.
Contractual and legal considerations
This publication has been prepared in good fa ith, however no
representation, warranty, ass urance or undertaking (express or
implied) is or will be made, and no responsibility or liability is or will be
accepted by BSI in relation to the adequacy, accuracy, completeness or
reasonableness of this publication. All and any such responsibility and
liability is expressly disclaimed to the full extent permitted by the law.
This publication is provided as is, and is to be used at the
recipient's own risk.
The recipient is advised to consider seeking professional gu idance with
respect to its use of th is pu blication.
This publication is not intended to constitute a contract. Users are
responsible for its correct application.
@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
BRITISH STANDARD BS EN 1992-1-1:2023

©The British Standards Institution 2023

Published by BSI Standards Limited 2023

ISBN 978 0 539 16233 2

JCS 91.010.30; 91.080.40
Compliance with a British Standard cannot confer immunity from
legal obligations.
This Brit ish St andard was published under the authority of the
Standards Policy and St rategy Committee on 30 November 2023.

Amendments/corrigenda issued since publication

Date Text affect ed

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023

EUROPEAN STANDARD EN 1992-1-1

NORME EUROPEENNE
EUROPAISCHE NORM November 2023

JCS 91.010.30; 91.080.40 Supersedes EN 1992-1-1:2004, EN 1992-2:2005, EN

1 992 -3 :2006

English Version

Eurocode 2 - Design of concrete structures - Part 1-1:

General rules and rules for buildings, bridges and civil
engineering structures
Eurocode 2: Calcul des structures en beton - Partie 1-1 Eurocode 2 - Bemessung und Konstruktion von
: Regles generates - Regles pour les batiments, les ponts Stahlbeton- und Spannbeto ntragwerken · Tei! l·l:
et Jes o uvrages de gen ie civil Allgemeine Regeln und Regeln fiir Hochbauten,
Brucken und lngenieurbauwerke

This European Standard was approved by CEN on 23 Ju ly 2023.

CEN members are bound to comply with the CEN/CENE LEC Inte rnal Regulations wh ich stipulate the cond itions for g iving this
European Standard the status of a national standard without any alteration. Up-to-date lists and bibliographical references
concerning such national standards may be obtained on application to the CEN-CENELEC Management Centre or to any CEN
member.

This European Standard exists in three official versions (English, French, German). A version in any other language made by
translation under the responsibility of a CEN member into its own language and notified to the CEN-CENELEC Management
Centre has the same status as the official versions.

CEN members are the national standards bodies of Austria, Belgium, Bulgaria, Croatia, Cyprus, Czech Republi c, Denmark, Estonia,
Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembou rg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway,
Poland, Portugal, Republic of North Macedonia, Ro mania, Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Turkiye and
United Kingdom.

EUROPEAN COMMITTEE FOR STANDARDIZATION

COMITE EUROPEEN DE NORMAL ISAT ION
EUROPA ISCHES KOMITEE FOR NORMUNG

CEN-CENELEC Management Cen tr e : Rue de la Science 23, B-1040 Brussels

© 2023 CEN N I rights of exploitation in any form and by any means reserved Ref. No. EN 1992-1-1:2023 E
worldwide for CEN national Members.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Contents Page

European foreword .......................................................................................................................................... 12

0 Introduction ........................................................................................................................................ 14
1 Scope ...................................................................................................................................................... 17
1.1 Scope of EN 1992-1-1 ....................................................................................................................... 17
1.2 Assumptions ........................................................................................................................................ 17
2 Normative references ...................................................................................................................... 17
3 Terms, definitions and symbols ................................................................................................... 19
3.1 Terms and definitions...................................................................................................................... 19
3.2 Symbols and abbreviations............................................................................................................ 31
3.2.1 Latin upper case letters................................................................................................................... 31
3.2.2 Latin lower case letters ................................................................................................................... 36
3.2.3 Greek letters ........................................................................................................................................45
3.3 Symbols in Annex A........................................................................................................................... 53
3.3.1 Latin upper case letters................................................................................................................... 53
3.3.2 Latin lower case letters ................................................................................................................... 54
3.3.3 Greek lower case letters ................................................................................................................. 54
3.4 Symbols in Annex 1............................................................................................................................ 54
3.4.1 Latin upper case letters ................................................................................................................... 54
3.4.2 Latin lower case letters ................................................................................................................... 54
3.4.3 Greek lower case letters ................................................................................................................. 5 5
3.5 Symbols in Annex J............................................................................................................................ 55
3.5.1 Latin upper case letters ................................................................................................................... 55
3.5.2 Latin lower-case letters ................................................................................................................... 56
3.5.3 Greek lower-case letters ................................................................................................................. 57
3.6 Symbols in Annex L........................................................................................................................... 58
3.6.1 Latin upper case letters ................................................................................................................... 58
3.6.2 Latin lower case letters ................................................................................................................... 58
3.6.3 Greek letters ........................................................................................................................................ 59
3.7 Symbols in Annex R .......................................................................................................................... 59
3.7.1 Latin upper case letters ................................................................................................................... 59
3.7.2 Latin lower case letters ................................................................................................................... 60
3.7.3 Greek letters........................................................................................................................................ 60
3.8 Abbreviations ..................................................................................................................................... 60
3.9 Units ....................................................................................................................................................... 61
3.10 Sign conventions ................................................................................................................................ 61
4 Basis of design .................................................................................................................................... 61
4.1 General rules ....................................................................................................................................... 61
4.1.1 Basic requirements........................................................................................................................... 61
4.1.2 Structural reliability and quality management...................................................................... 62
4.1.3 Design service life ............................................................................................................................. 62
4.2 Basic variables.................................................................................................................................... 62
4.2.1 Actions and time-dependent effects ........................................................................................... 62
4.2.2 Geometric data ................................................................................................................................... 64
4.3 Verification by the partial factor method ................................................................................. 64
4.3.1 Partial factor for shrinkage action .............................................................................................. 64
4.3.2 Partial factors for prestress action ............................................................................................. 64
4.3.3 Partial factors for materials .......................................................................................................... 65
4.4 Requirements for connection of elements to concrete members.................................... 65

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
2
 BS EN 199 2-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

5 Materials ............................................................................................................................................... 66
5.1 Concrete ................................................................................................................................................ 66
5.1.1 Gener al .................................................................................................................................................. 66
5.1.2 Properties and related conditions .............................................................................................. 66
5.1.3 Strength ................................................................................................................................................ 67
5.1.4 Elastic deformation .......................................................................................................................... 68
5.1.5 Creep and shrinkage ........................................................................................................................ 68
5.1.6 Design assumptions ......................................................................................................................... 70
5.2 Reinforcing s teel................................................................................................................................ 72
5.2.1 General .................................................................................................................................................. 72
5.2.2 Properties ............................................................................................................................................ 72
5.2.3 Welding of reinforcing bars........................................................................................................... 73
5.2.4 Design assumptions ......................................................................................................................... 73
5.2.5 Reinforcement bar couplers ......................................................................................................... 74
5.2.6 Headed bars for reinforcement ................................................................................................... 74
5.3 Prestressing steel .............................................................................................................................. 74
5.3.1 General .................................................................................................................................................. 74
5.3.2 Properties ............................................................................................................................................ 75
5.3.3 Design assumptions ......................................................................................................................... 76
5.4 Prestressing systems ....................................................................................................................... 77
5.4 .1 General .................................................................................................................................................. 77
5.4 .2 Anchorage zones................................................................................................................................ 78
6 Durability and concrete cover ...................................................................................................... 78
6.1 General .................................................................................................................................................. 78
6.2 Requirements for durability ......................................................................................................... 78
6.3 Environmental exposure conditions .......................................................................................... 79
6.4 Exposure resistance classes .......................................................................................................... 83
6.5 Concrete cover.................................................................................................................................... 84
6.5.1 Nominalcover .................................................................................................................................... 84
6.5.2 Minimum cover .................................................................................................................................. 84
6.5.3 Allowance in design for deviation in cover.............................................................................. 88
7 Structural analysis ............................................................................................................................ 89
7.1 General .................................................................................................................................................. 89
7.2 Structural modelling for analysis ................................................................................................ 89
7.2.1 Geometric imperfections ................................................................................................................ 89
7.2.2 Idealisation of the structure .......................................................................................................... 93
7.2.3 Geometric data ................................................................................................................................... 93
7.3 Methods of analysis .......................................................................................................................... 95
7.3.1 Linear elastic analysis ..................................................................................................................... 95
7.3.2 Linear elastic analysis with redistribution .............................................................................. 96
7.3.3 Plastic analysis ................................................................................................................................... 98
7.3.4 Non-linear analysis........................................................................................................................... 98
7.4 Second order structural analysis of members and s ystems with axial force .............. 99
7.4 .1 General .................................................................................................................................................. 99
7.4 .2 Creep ................................................................................................................................................... 100
7.4.3 Methods of analysis ....................................................................................................................... 100
7.4.4 Compression member with biaxial bending ........................................................................ 102
7.5 Lateral instability of slender beams........................................................................................ 103
7.6 Prestressed members and s tructures .................................................................................... 103
7.6.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 103
7.6.2 Prestressing force .......................................................................................................................... 104
7.6.3 Immediate losses ofprestress ................................................................................................... 104

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
3
BS EN 1992-1-1:20 23
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

7.6.4 Time dependent losses of prestress ........................................................................................ 106

7.6.5 Effects ofprestressing at ultimate limit state ...................................................................... 107
8 Ultimate Limit States (ULS) ......................................................................................................... 108
8.1 Bending with or without axial force ........................................................................................ 108
8.1.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 108
8.1.2 Stress distribution in the compression zones ...................................................................... 110
8.1.3 Bending in slabs .............................................................................................................................. 110
8.1.4 Confined concrete .......................................................................................................................... 111
8.2 Shear ................................................................................................................................................... 113
8.2.1 General verification procedure ................................................................................................. 113
8.2.2 Detailed verification for members without s hear reinforcement................................ 117
8.2.3 Members with shear reinforcement........................................................................................ 121
8.2.4 In-plane shear and transverse bending ................................................................................. 126
8.2.5 Shear between web and flanges ................................................................................................ 127
8.2.6 Shear at interfaces ......................................................................................................................... 129
8.3 Torsion and combined actions .................................................................................................. 134
8.3.1 General considerations for torsion .......................................................................................... 134
8.3.2 Internal forces due to torsion in compact or closed sections......................................... 134
8.3.3 Internal forces due to torsion in open sections ................................................................... 135
8.3.4 Torsional resistance of compact or closed sections .......................................................... 135
8.3.5 Design procedure for combination of actions...................................................................... 136
8.3.6 Interaction formula ....................................................................................................................... 137
8.4 Punching ............................................................................................................................................ 137
8.4.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 137
8.4.2 Shear-resisting effective depth, control perimeter and shear stress .......................... 138
8.4.3 Punching shear resistance of slabs without shear reinforcement ............................... 142
8.4.4 Punching shear resistance of slabs with shear reinforcement...................................... 145
8.5 Design with strut-and-tie models and stress fields ............................................................ 148
8.5.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 148
8.5.2 Struts and compression fields ................................................................................................... 150
8.5.3 Ties ...................................................................................................................................................... 152
8.5.4 Nodes .................................................................................................................................................. 152
8.5.5 Transfer of concentrated forces into a member ................................................................. 155
8.6 Partially loaded areas ................................................................................................................... 157
9 Serviceability Limit States (SLS) ............................................................................................... 160
9.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 160
9.2 Stress limitations and crack control.. ...................................................................................... 161
9.2.1 General considerations ................................................................................................................ 161
9.2.2 Minimum reinforcement areas to avoid yielding ............................................................... 163
9.2.3 Refined control of cracking......................................................................................................... 165
9.3 Deflection control........................................................................................................................... 171
9.3.1 General consideration .................................................................................................................. 171
9.3.2 Simplified deflection control by span/depth-ratio for buildings ................................. 171
9.3.3 Simplified calculation of deflections for reinforced concrete building structures 173
9.3.4 General method for deflection calculations.......................................................................... 174
9.4 Vibrations.......................................................................................................................................... 175
10 Fatigue ................................................................................................................................................ 176
10.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 176
10.2 Combination of actions................................................................................................................. 176
10.3 Internal forces and stresses for fatigue verification ......................................................... 176
10.4 Simplified verification of reinforcing or prestressing steel.. .......................................... 178

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
4
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

10.5 Simplified verifica tion of concrete under compression................................................... 178

10.6 Simplified verification of concrete under shear ................................................................. 179
10.7 Simplified verifica tion of shear at interfaces ....................................................................... 179
11 Detailing of reinforcement and post-tensioning tendons ............................................... 180
11.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 180
11.2 Spacing of bars ................................................................................................................................ 180
11.3 Permissible mandrel diameters for bent bar s .................................................................... 181
11.4 Anchorage of reinforcing steel in tension and compression .......................................... 182
11.4.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 182
11.4.2 Anchorage of straight bars.......................................................................................................... 183
11.4.3 Anchorage of bundles ................................................................................................................... 186
11.4.4 Anchorage of bars with bends and hooks .............................................................................. 187
11.4.5 Anchorage of bars with welded transverse reinforcement ............................................ 187
11.4.6 Anchorage ofU-bar loops ............................................................................................................ 188
11.4.7 Anchorage of headed bars in tension...................................................................................... 188
11.4.8 Anchorage of bonded post-installed reinforcing steel ..................................................... 190
11.5 Laps of reinforcing steel in tension and compression and mechanical couplers ... 191
11.5.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 191
11.5.2 All types of laps ............................................................................................................................... 191
11.5.3 Laps of bundles ............................................................................................................................... 19 5
11.5.4 Laps using U-bar loops ................................................................................................................. 196
11.5.5 Laps using headed bars ................................................................................................................ 198
11.5 .6 Mechanical couplers ..................................................................................................................... 200
11.5 .7 Full penetration butt weld and fillet weld splices .............................................................. 200
11.6 Post-tensioning tendons .............................................................................................................. 201
11.6 .1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 201
11.6.2 Minimum spacing of ducts .......................................................................................................... 201
11.6.3 Minimum radius of curvature and straight length of tendons adjacent to anchorages
............................................................................................................................................................... 202
11.6.4 Anchorages, couplers and deviators of post-tensioning tendons................................. 203
11.7 Deviation forces due to curved tensile and compressive chords ................................. 203
12 Detailing of members and particular rules .......................................................................... 204
12.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 204
12.2 Minimum reinforcement rules .................................................................................................. 204
12.3 Beams ................................................................................................................................................. 206
12.3.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 206
12.3.2 Longitudinal reinforcement ....................................................................................................... 208
12.3.3 Shear and torsion reinforcement ............................................................................................. 209
12.3.4 Suspension reinforcement for indirect support ................................................................. 211
12.4 Slabs .................................................................................................................................................... 211
12.4.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 211
12.4.2 Shear reinforcement ..................................................................................................................... 213
12.5 Slab-column connections and column bases ........................................................................ 213
12.5.1 Punching shear reinforcement.................................................................................................. 213
12.5.2 Integrity reinforcement against progressive collapse of flat slabs.............................. 216
1 2.6 Columns ............................................................................................................................................. 217
12.7 Walls and deep beams .................................................................................................................. 218
12.8 Foundations ..................................................................................................................................... 219
12.9 Tying systems for robustness of buildings ........................................................................... 221
12.9.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 221
12.9 .2 Dimensioning of ties ..................................................................................................................... 222
12.9 .3 Required resistances for ties ..................................................................................................... 222

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
5
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

12.10 Supports, bearings and expansion joints............................................................................... 223

13 Additional rules for precast concrete elements and structures.................................... 226
13.1 Gener~ ............................................................................................................................................... 226
13.2 Specific requirements ................................................................................................................... 226
13.3 Concrete ............................................................................................................................................. 226
13.3.1 Strength for heat curing ............................................................................................................... 226
13.3.2 Creep and shrinkage ..................................................................................................................... 226
13.4 Structural analysis ......................................................................................................................... 22 7
13.4.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 227
13.4.2 Losses ofprestress during heat curing................................................................................... 227
13.5 Design and detailing of pre-tensioning tendons ................................................................. 228
13.5.1 Arrangement of tendons .............................................................................................................. 228
13.5.2 Anchorage zones ............................................................................................................................. 229
13.5.3 Transfer ofprestress ..................................................................................................................... 229
13.5.4 Anchorage of tensile force at ULS ............................................................................................. 230
13.5.5 Shear resistance ofprecast members without shear reinforcement .......................... 231
13.6 Floor systems for buildings ........................................................................................................ 232
13.6.1 Distribution of loads...................................................................................................................... 232
13.6.2 Diaphragm action ........................................................................................................................... 233
13.6.3 Tying systems for buildings........................................................................................................ 233
13.7 Connections and supports ........................................................................................................... 234
13.7.1 Connections ...................................................................................................................................... 234
13.7.2 Supports ............................................................................................................................................. 236
13.8 Pocket foundations for buildings ............................................................................................. 236
13.8.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 236
13.8.2 Pocket foundations with keyed surface ................................................................................. 236
13.8.3 Pocket foundations with smooth or rough surfaces .......................................................... 237
14 Plain and lightly reinforced concrete structures ................................................................ 238
14.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 238
14.2 Concrete ............................................................................................................................................. 238
14.3 Structural analysis ......................................................................................................................... 238
14.4 Ultimate limit states ...................................................................................................................... 239
14.4.1 General ............................................................................................................................................... 239
14.4.2 Design resistance to bending with axial force ..................................................................... 239
14.4.3 Shear ................................................................................................................................................... 239
14.4.4 Torsion ............................................................................................................................................... 240
14.4.5 Ultimate limit states induced by structural deformation (buckling) .......................... 240
14.5 Serviceability limit states ............................................................................................................ 242
14.6 Detailing of members and particular rules ........................................................................... 243
14.6.1 Structural members ...................................................................................................................... 243
14.6.2 Construction joints......................................................................................................................... 243
14.6.3 Strip and pad footings ................................................................................................................... 243
Annex A (informative) Adjustment of partial factors for materials ........................................... 244
A.1 Use of this annex ............................................................................................................................. 244
A.2 Scope and fields of application .................................................................................................. 244
A.3 General ............................................................................................................................................... 244
Annex B (normative) Time dependent behaviour of materials: strength, creep, shrinkage
and elastic strain of concrete and relaxation ofprestressing steel ............................. 251
B.1 Use of this annex ............................................................................................................................. 251

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
6
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

B.2 Scope and field of application .................................................................................................... 251

B.3 General ............................................................................................................................................... 251
B.4 Development of concrete strength and stiffness with time ............................................ 252
B.5 Basic formulae for determining the creep coefficient ...................................................... 253
B.6 Basic formulae for determining the s hrinkage s train ...................................................... 256
B.7 Tests on elastic deformations, creep and shrinkage ......................................................... 258
B.8 Detailed analysis for creep at variable loading ................................................................... 259
B.9 Relaxation ofprestressing steel................................................................................................ 260
Annex C (normative) Requirements for materials ........................................................................... 262
C.1 Use of this annex............................................................................................................................. 262
C.2 Scope and field of application .................................................................................................... 262
C.3 Concrete ............................................................................................................................................. 262
C.4 Reinforcing steel ............................................................................................................................. 262
C.5 Prestressing steel ........................................................................................................................... 265
C.6 Couplers ............................................................................................................................................. 268
C.7 Headed bars ..................................................................................................................................... 269
C.8 Post-ins talled reinforcing steel systems ................................................................................ 269
Annex D (informative) Evaluation of early-age and long-term cracking due to restraint . 271
D.1 Use of this annex............................................................................................................................. 271
D.2 Scope and field of application .................................................................................................... 271
D.3 General ............................................................................................................................................... 271
D.4 Assessment of temperature history ........................................................................................ 272
D.5 Stress calculations ......................................................................................................................... 274
D.6 Crack width calculations ............................................................................................................. 275
Annex E (normative) Additional rules for fatigue verification .................................................... 276
E.1 Use of this annex ............................................................................................................................. 276
E.2 Scope and field of application .................................................................................................... 276
E.3 General ............................................................................................................................................... 276
E.4 Verification using damage equivalent s tress range ........................................................... 276
E.5 Explicit verifications using Palmgren-Miner Rule .............................................................. 278
Annex F (informative) Safety formats for non-linear analysis ..................................................... 281
F.1 Use of this annex ............................................................................................................................. 281
F.2 Scope and field of application .................................................................................................... 281
F.3 General ............................................................................................................................................... 281
F.4 Partial factor method (PFM) ...................................................................................................... 282
F.5 Global factor method (GFM) ....................................................................................................... 283

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
7
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

F.6 Full probabilistic method ............................................................................................................ 284

F.7 Model uncertainty .......................................................................................................................... 284
Annex G (normative) Design of membrane-, s hell- and slab elements...................................... 286
G.1 Use of this annex ............................................................................................................................. 286
G.2 Scope and field of application .................................................................................................... 286
G.3 Design of membrane elements in ULS .................................................................................... 286
G.4 Design of s hell- and slab elements in ULS.............................................................................. 288
G.5 Refined control of cracking in membrane elements in SLS ............................................ 291
Annex H (informative) Guidance on design of concrete structures for water-tightness .... 293
H.1 Use of this annex ............................................................................................................................. 293
H.2 Scope and field of application .................................................................................................... 2 93
H.3 General ............................................................................................................................................... 2 93
H.4 Tightness classes ............................................................................................................................ 293
Annex I (informative) Assessment of Existing Structures.............................................................. 296
1.1 Use of this annex ............................................................................................................................. 296
1.2 Scope and field of application .................................................................................................... 2 96
1.3 General ............................................................................................................................................... 296
1.4 Basis of assessment ....................................................................................................................... 297
1.5 Materials ............................................................................................................................................ 299
1.6 Durability- Minimum cover for bond ..................................................................................... 301
I.7 Structural analysis ......................................................................................................................... 302
1.8 Ultimate Limit States (ULS) ......................................................................................................... 303
1.9 Serviceability Limit States (SLS) ............................................................................................... 310
1.10 Fatigue ................................................................................................................................................ 310
1.11 Detailing of reinforcement and post-tensioning tendons ............................................... 311
1.12 Detailing of members and particular rules - Minimum reinforcement rules ........... 314
Annex J (informative) Strengthening of Existing Concrete Structures with CFRP................. 315
J.1 Use of this annex ............................................................................................................................. 315
J.2 Scope and field of application .................................................................................................... 315
J.3 General ............................................................................................................................................... 315
J.4 Basis of design ................................................................................................................................. 315
J.5 Materials ............................................................................................................................................ 316
J.6 Durability .......................................................................................................................................... 318
J.7 Structural analysis ......................................................................................................................... 318
J.8 Ultimate Limit States (ULS) ......................................................................................................... 319
J.9 Serviceability Limit States (SLS) ............................................................................................... 324

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
8
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

J.10 Fatigue................................................................................................................................................ 325

J.11 Bond and anchorage ofCFRP systems .................................................................................... 326
J.12 Detailing of members and particular rules .......................................................................... 332
J.13 Additional rules for precast concrete elements and structures ................................... 333
J.14 Lightly reinforced concrete structures .................................................................................. 333
J.15 Material requirements for ABR strengthening systems .................................................. 333
Annex K (normative) Bridges ................................................................................................................... 334
K.1 Use of this annex ............................................................................................................................. 334
K.2 Scope and field of application .................................................................................................... 334
K.3 Terms, definitions and symbols ................................................................................................ 334
K.4 Basis of design ................................................................................................................................. 334
K.5 Materials............................................................................................................................................ 334
K.6 Durability and concrete cover ................................................................................................... 334
K. 7 Structural analysis ......................................................................................................................... 336
K.8 Ultimate limit states (ULS) .......................................................................................................... 336
K. 9 Serviceability limit states (SLS) ................................................................................................ 336
K.10 Fatigue verification ....................................................................................................................... 337
K.11 Detailing of reinforcement and post-tensioning tendons ............................................... 346
K.12 Detailing of members and particular rules .......................................................................... 346
K.13 Additional rules for precast concrete elements and structures ................................... 348
K.14 Plain and lightly reinforced concrete structures................................................................ 349
K.15 Amendments to Annex G ............................................................................................................. 349
Annex L (informative) Steel Fibre Reinforced Concrete Structures ........................................... 350
L.1 Use of this annex ............................................................................................................................. 350
L.2 Scope and field of application .................................................................................................... 350
L.3 General ............................................................................................................................................... 350
L.4 Basis of design - Partial factors for materials ...................................................................... 350
L.5 Materials............................................................................................................................................ 351
L.6 Durability - Minimum cover ....................................................................................................... 354
L.7 Structural analysis - Plastic analysis ....................................................................................... 354
L.8 Ultimate Limit States (ULS) ........................................................................................................ 355
L.9 Serviceability Limit States (SLS) - Crack control................................................................. 358
L.10 Fatigue................................................................................................................................................ 359
L.11 Detailing of reinforcement and post-tensioning tendons ............................................... 359
L.12 Detailing of members and particular rules .......................................................................... 359
L.13 Additional rules for precast concrete elements and structures ................................... 361

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
9
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

L.14 Lightly reinforced SFRC structures .......................................................................................... 361

L.15 Requirements for Materials: SFRC ........................................................................................... 362
Annex M (normative) Lightweight aggregate concrete structures ............................................. 364
M.1 Use of this annex ............................................................................................................................. 364
M.2 Scope and field of application .................................................................................................... 364
M.3 General ............................................................................................................................................... 364
Annex N (informative) Recycled aggregates concrete structures ............................................... 367
N.1 Use of this annex ............................................................................................................................. 367
N.2 Scope and field of application .................................................................................................... 367
N.3 General ............................................................................................................................................... 367
Annex 0 (informative) Simplified approaches for second order effects .................................. 370
0.1 Use of this Annex ............................................................................................................................ 370
0.2 Scope and field of application .................................................................................................... 370
0.3 Critical load of building structures .......................................................................................... 3 70
0.4 Critical load of isolated members............................................................................................. 371
0.5 Slenderness ratio and effective length of isolated members ......................................... 372
0.6 Slenderness criteria for isolated members........................................................................... 373
0.7 Simplified analysis of isolated members based on nominal curvature ...................... 373
0.8 Second order elastic method ...................................................................................................... 376
Annex P (informative) Alternative cover approach for durability ............................................. 378
P.1 Use of this Annex ............................................................................................................................ 378
P.2 Scope and field of application .................................................................................................... 378
P.3 Minimum cover ............................................................................................................................... 378
P.4 Indicative strength classes for durability.............................................................................. 380
Annex Q (normative) Stainless reinforcing steel.. ............................................................................. 381
Q.1 Use of this annex ............................................................................................................................. 381
Q.2 Scope and field of application .................................................................................................... 381
Q.3 General ............................................................................................................................................... 381
Q.4 Minimum cover for durability ................................................................................................... 382
Q.5 Fatigue verification ........................................................................................................................ 383
Annex R (informative) Embedded FRP reinforcement ................................................................... 384
R.1 Use of this annex ............................................................................................................................. 384
R.2 Scope and field of application .................................................................................................... 384
R.3 General ............................................................................................................................................... 384
R.4 Verification- Partial factors for FRP reinforcement .......................................................... 384
R.5 Materials ............................................................................................................................................ 385

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
10
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

R.6 Durability - Concrete cover......................................................................................................... 387

R. 7 Structural analysis ......................................................................................................................... 387
R.8 Ultimate Limit States (ULS) ........................................................................................................ 387
R.9 Serviceability Limit States (SLS) - Special rules for FRP reinforcement .................... 389
R.10 Fatigue................................................................................................................................................ 390
R.11 Detailing of FRP reinforcement ................................................................................................ 390
R.12 Detailing of members and particular rules .......................................................................... 392
R.13 Additional rules for precast concrete elements and structures ................................... 394
R.14 Lightly reinforced concrete structures .................................................................................. 394
R.15 Material requirements for FRP reinforcement ................................................................... 395
R.16 Surface reinforcement for large diameter bars .................................................................. 395
Annex S (informative) Minimum reinforcement for crack control and simplified control of
cracking ............................................................................................................................................. 396
S.1 Use of this annex ............................................................................................................................. 396
S.2 Scope and field of application .................................................................................................... 396
S.3 Minimum reinforcement areas for crack width control .................................................. 396
Bibliography .................................................................................................................................................... 400

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
11
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

European foreword

This document (EN 1992-1-1:2023) has been prepared by Technical Committee CEN/TC 250 "St ructural
Eurocodes", the secretariat of which is held by BSI. CEN/ TC 250 is responsible for all Structural
Eurocodes and has been assigned responsibility for structural and geotechnical design matters by CEN.

This European Standard shall be given the status of a national standard, either by publication of an
identical text or by endorsement, at the latest by September 2027 and conflicting national standards shall
be withdrawn at the latest by March 2028.

Attention is drawn to the possibility that some of the elements of this document may be the s ubject of
patent rights. CEN shall not be held responsible for identifying any or all such patent rights.

This document supersedes EN 1992-1-1:2004, EN 1992-2:2005 and EN 1992-3:2006 and their

amendments and corrigenda.

The first generation of EN Eurocodes was published between 2002 and 2007. This document forms part
of the second generation of the Eurocodes, which have been prepared under Mandate M/515 issued to
CEN by the European Commission and the European Free Trade Association.

The Eurocodes have been drafted to be used in conjunction with relevant execution, material, product
and test standards, and to identify requirements for execution, materials, products and testing that are
relied upon by the Eurocodes.

The Eurocodes recognize the responsibility of each Member State and have safeguarded their right to
determine values related to regulatory safety matters at national level through the use of National
Annexes.

The main changes compared to the previous edition are listed below:

the scope of EN 1992-1-1 was extended to higher material strengths - for concrete up to class ClOO,
for reinforcing steel to 8700, for prestressing steel strand to Y2060 - and covering stainless steel;

a new performance-based method for durability design of concrete structures was introduced;

ULS design models were updated for confined concrete, shear and punching shear without and with
shear reinforcement, strut-and-tie modelling, and size effect considered where relevant;

provisions for anchorage and laps of reinforcing steel were updated to consider non-linear bond
characteristics and size effect, and new anchorage methods for U-bar loops, headed bars and post-
installed bars were integrated;

an informative annex provides statistical data of material and d imensional properties as basis for the
partial factors;

creep and shrinkage models were updated and unified for normal strength and high strength -
concretes;

assumed material characteristics not directly used in design are listed in Annex C as basis for
specifications and interface to product standards;

a new informative annex gives provisions for early-age thermo-mechanical design;

a new informative annex gives requirements for use of non-linear finite element methods;

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
12
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

informative annexes provide guidance for the assessment of existing structures, for strengthening
with FRP materials, for steel fibre reinforced concrete structures, for recycled aggregates concrete
structures, for embedded FRP reinforcement, and for minimum reinforcement for crack cont rol and
simplified control of cracking.

Any feedback and questions on this document should be directed to the users' national standards body.
A complete listing of these bodies can be found on the CEN website.

According to the CEN-CE NELEC Internal Regulations, the national standards organizations of the
following countries are bound t o implement this European Standar d: Austria, Belgium, Bulgar ia, Croat ia,
Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hu ngary, Iceland, Ireland,
Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Netherlands, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Republic of Nort h
Macedonia, Romania, Serbia, Slovakia, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Switzerland, Ti.irkiye and the United
Kingdom.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
13
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

0 Introduction

0.1 Introduction to the Eurocodes

The Structural Eurocodes comprise the following standards generally consisting of a number of Parts:
EN 1990, Eurocode: Basis of structural a nd geotechnical des ign

EN 1991, Eurocode 1: Actions on structures

EN 1992, Eurocode 2: Design of concrete structures

EN 1993, Eurocode 3: Design of steel structures

EN 1994, Eurocode 4: Design of composite steel and concrete structures

EN 1995, Eurocode 5: Design of timber st ructures

EN 1996, Eurocode 6: Design of masonry structures

EN 1997, Eurocode 7: Geotechnical design

EN 1998, Eurocode 8: Design of structures for earthquake resistance

EN 1999, Eurocode 9: Design of aluminium st ructu res

New parts are under development, e.g. Eurocode for design of structural glass.

The Eurocodes are intended for use by designers, clients, manufacturers, constructors, relevant
authorities (in exercising their duties in accordance with national or international regulations),
educators, software developers, and committees drafting standards for related product, testing and
execution standards.
NOTE Some aspects of design are most appropriately specified by relevant authorities or, where not specified,
can be agreed on a project-specific basis between relevant parties such as designers and clients. The Eurocodes
identify such aspects making explicit reference to relevant authorities and relevant parties.

0.2 Introduction to EN 1992 (all parts)

(1) EN 1992 applies to the design of buildings, bridges and civil engineering structures in plain,
reinforced and prestressed concrete. It complies with the principles and requirements for the safety and
serviceability of structures, the basis of their design and verification that are given in EN 1990, Basis of
structural and geotechnica/ design.
(2) EN 1992 is only concerned with the requirements for resistance, serviceability, durability and fire
res istance of concrete structures. Other requirements, e.g. concerning thermal or sound insulation, are
not considered.
(3) EN 1992 is subdivided into various parts:
EN 1992-1-1. Design of concrete structures - Part 1-1: General rules and rules for buildings, bridges
and civil engineering structures,

EN 1992-1-2, Design of concrete structures -Part 1-2: Structural fire design,

EN 1992-4, Design of concrete structures -Part 4: Design of fastenings for use in concrete.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
14
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

0.3 Introduction to EN 1992-1 -1

(1) EN 1992-1-1 describes the principles and requirements for safety, serviceability and durability of
concrete structures. It is based on the limit state concept used in conjunction with a partial factor method.
(2) EN 1992-1-1 also serves as a reference document for other CEN TCs concerning structural matters.
(3) Numerical values for partial factors and other reliability parameters are recommended as basic
values that provide an acceptable level of reliability. They have been selected assuming that an
appropriate level of workmanship and of quality management applies. When FprEN 1992-1-1 is used as
a base document by other CEN/TCs the same values need to be taken.
0.4 Verbal forms used in the Eurocodes

The verb "shall" expresses a requirement strictly to be followed and from which no deviation is permitted
in order to comply with the Eurocodes.
The verb "should" expresses a highly recommended choice or course of action. Subject to national
regulation and/or any relevant contractual provisions, alternative approaches could be used/adopted
where technically justified.
The verb "may" expresses a course of action permissible within the limits of the Eurocodes.
The verb "can" expresses possibility and capability; it is used for statements of fact and clarification of
concepts.
0.5 National Annex for EN 1992-1 -1

National choice is allowed in this document where explicitly stated within notes. National choice includes
the selection of values for Nationally Determined Parameters (NDPs).

The national standard implementing EN 1992-1-1 can have a National Annex containing all national
choices to be used for the design of buildings, bridges and civil engineering works to be constructed in
the relevant country.

When no national choice is given, the default choice given in this document is to be used.

When no national choice is made and no default is given in this document, the choice can be specified by
a relevant authority or, where not specified, agreed for a specific project by appropriate parties.

National choice is allowed in EN 1992-1-1 through notes to the following:

4.2.1.5(3) 4.3.1(1) 4.3.2(1) 4.3.2(2)
4.3.3(1) 4.3.3(4) 5.1.3(3) 5.1.4(2)
5.1.5(4) 5.1.6(1) 5.1.6(2) 5.2.1(5)
5.2.2(1) 5.3.1 (3) 5.3.2(1) 5.4.1(1)
6.3(3) 6.3(5) 6.4(1) 6.5.2.1(2)
6.5.2.2(1) 6.5.2.2(2) 6.5.2.2(3) 6.5.2.2(4)
6.5.2.2(5) 6.5.2.2(6) 6.5.2.2(9) 6.5.3(1)
7.3.2(5) 8.2.1(3) 8.2.2(5) 8.4.2(1)
8.4.4(4) 8.4.4(5) 8.4.4(6) 9.2.1(6)

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
15
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

9.2.3(2) 11.4.2(2) 11.4.2(3) 11.5.2(2)

11.6.3(2) 12.3.1(1) 12.4.1(1) 12.6(1)

12.7(2) 12.9.3(1) 14.2(1) 14.4.5.2(1)

A.3(1) A.3(3) A.3(6) B.3(1)

B.6(1) C.6(1) C.7(1) C.8(2)

E.4.2(1) F.5.2(1) F.7(2) F.7(8)

H.4.2(4) 1.4.2.1(2) 1.5.2.1(3) 1.5.2.2(1)
1.8.3.1(1) 1.9.1(2) j.4(1) J.5.1(2)
K.5(2) K.6(2) K.6(3) K.6(4)

K.7(2) K.7(3) K.8(2) K.8(3)

K.8(4) K.8(5) K.8(6) K.9(2)

K.9(3) K.10.1(2) K.11(2) K.11(3)

K.11(4) K.11(5) K.12.2(1) K.13(2)

K.13(4) K.15(1) L.4(1) L.5.1(1)

L.5.5.2(1) L.6(4) L.7(1) L.11.2(1)
L.12.3.1(2) Q.3(1) Q.4(2) R.4(1)

R.5.1(2)

National choice is allowed in FprEN 1992-1-1 on the application of the following informative annexes:

Annex A Annex D Annex F Annex H

Annex I Annex ) Annex L Annex N

AnnexO Annex P Annex R AnnexS

The National Annex can contain, directly or by reference, non-contradictory complementary information
for ease of implementation, provided it does not alter any provisions of the Euro codes.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
16
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

1 Scope
1.1 Scope of EN 1992-1-1

(1) This document gives the general basis for the design of structures in plain, reinforced and pres tressed
concrete made with normal weight, lightweight and heavyweight aggregates. It gives specific rules for
buildings, bridges and civil engineering structures, including temporary structures; additional
requirements specific to bridges are given in Annex K. The rules are valid under temperature conditions
between - 40 °C and + 100 °C generally. This document complies with the principles and requirements
for the safety, serviceability, durability and robustness of structures, the basis of their design and
verification that are given in EN 1990.
(2) This document is only concerned with the requirements for resistance, serviceability, durability,
robustness and fire resistance of concrete structures. Other requirements, e.g. concerning thermal or
sound insulation, are not considered.
(3) This document does not cover:
resistance to fire (see EN 1992-1-2);

fastenings in concrete (see EN 1992-4);

seismic design (see EN 1998 (all parts));

particular aspects of special types of civil engineering works (such as dams, pressure vessels);

structures made with no-fines concrete, aerated or cellular concrete, lightweight aggregate concrete
with open structure components;

structures containing steel sections considered in design (see EN 1994 (all parts)) for composite
steel and concrete st ructures;

structural parts made of concrete with a smallest value of the upper sieve aggregate size
D 1ower < 8 mm (or if known Dmax < 8 mm) unless otherwise stated in this Eurocode.

1.2 Assumptions

(1) The assumptions of EN 1990 apply to EN 1992-1-1.

(2) It is assumed that t he requirements for execution and workmanship given in EN 13670 are complied
with.

2 Normative references
The following documents are referred to in the text in such a way that some or all of their content
constitutes requirements of this document. For dated references, only the edition cited applies. For
undated references, the latest edition of the referenced document (including any amendments) applies.
NOTE See the Bibliography for a list of other documents cited that are not normative references, including
those referenced as recommendations (i.e. in 'should' clauses), permissions ('may' clauses), possibilities ('can'
clauses). and in notes.

EN 197-1, Cement - Part 1: Composition, specifications and conformity criteria for common cements

EN 206, Concrete - Specification, performance, production and conformity

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
17
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

EN 1504-4, Products and systems for the protection and repair of concrete structures - Definitions,
requirements, quality control and evaluation of conformity - Part 4: Structural bonding

EN 1542, Products and systems for the protection and repair of concrete structures - Test methods -
Measurement of bond strength by pull-off

EN 1990:2023, Eurocode - Basis ofstructural and geotechnical design

EN 1991 (all parts), Eurocode 1 - Actions on structures

EN 1992-1-2:2023, Eurocode 2 - Design of concrete structures - Part 1-2: General rules - Structural
fire design

EN 1992-4, Eurocode 2 - Design of concrete structures - Part 4: Design offastenings for use in concrete

EN 1993 -1-9, Eurocode 3 - Design ofsteel structures - Part 1-9: Fatigue

EN 1997 (all parts), Eurocode 7 -Geotechnical design

EN 13670, Execution of concrete structures

EN 13791:2019,Assessmentofin-situ compressive strength in structures and pre-cast concrete components

EN 14651, Test method for metallic fibre concrete - Measuring the flexural tensile strength (limit or
proportionality (LOP), residual)

EN ISO 14130, Fibre reinforced plastic composites - Determination of apparent interlaminar shear
strength by short beam-method (ISO 14130)

EN ISO 17660, Welding - Welding of reinforcing steel

ISO 10406 (all parts), Fibre-reinforced polymer (FRP) reinforcement of concrete - Test methods

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
18
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

3 Terms, definitions and symbols

3.1 Te rms and definitions

For the purposes of this document, the terms and definitions given in EN 1990 and the following apply.
3.1.1
anchoring mortar
mortar based on organic or inorganic binder, or a mixture of these, installed at a fluid or paste consistency
with the aim to anchor reinforcing steel bars in a drilled hole in concrete structures and to transfer the
axial forces in the reinforcing steel bar to the concrete structure

3.1.2
beam
linear member subject primarily to flexure and shear with cross-section width not exceeding 4 times its
cross-section depth (otherwise it should be considered as a slab) and an effective span of not less than 3
times the cross-section depth

3.1.3
biaxial bending
simultaneous bending about two principal axes

3.1.4
braced members or systems
structural members or subsystems, which in analysis and design are assumed to be stabilised by bracing
members and hence, not contributing to the overall horizontal stability of a structure

Note 1 to entry: Unbraced members are not stabilized by bracing members.

3.1.5
bracing members or systems
structural members or subsystems, which in analysis and design are assumed to contribute to the overall
horizontal stability of a structure

3.1.6
buckling
failure due to instability of a member or structure under compression buckling or flexural buckling

3.1.7
buckling load
load at which buckling occurs; for isolated elastic members, it is synonymous with the Euler load

3.1.8
carbon s teel
weldable non-alloy reinforcing steel

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
19
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

3.1.9
chord
compression or tension part of a member idealised as having a narrow width and which interacts with
adjacent membrane elements through longitudinal shear

3.1.10
column
linear member subjected primarily to axial compression forces, with cross-section width not exceeding
4 times its cross-section depth (otherwise it should be considered as a wall) and the length is at least
3 times the cross-section depth

3.1.11
compression field
region of a stress field where concrete is subjected to uniaxial compressive stresses

3.1.12
confinement reinforcement
reinforcement which can increase the uniaxial concrete compressive strength and the deformation
capacity through the favourable effect of transverse compressive stresses or can reduce the required
anchorage length by preventing cover spalling

Note 1 to entry: It can consist of stirrups, links, U· bars, headed bars or hoops placed perpendicular or atan angle
to the axis of the member.

Note 2 to entry: Confinement reinforcemen t can reduce the design anchorage length if it is anchored into th e
body of the section.

3.1.13
couplers
steel reinforcement products used fo r the mechanical splicing of steel reinforcing bars

3.1.14
cover, concrete
distance between the surface of a reinforcement bar or tendon (including links and stirrups and surface
reinforcement where relevant) and the nearest concrete surface

3.1.15
cover, minimum
minimum value of the concrete cover provided in order to ensure (i) safe transmission of bond forces,
(ii) protection of the steel against corrosion (durability)

3.1.16
cover, nominal
specified value of the concrete cover defined as a minimum cover plus an allowance in design for
deviation

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
20
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

3.1.17
crack formation phase
phase of the cracking process which occurs when stresses exceed the cracking resistance and in which
the full crack pattern is not yet developed, typically it is the type of cracking due to imposed deformations
with large crack spacings, and for which an increase in the imposed strain will not increase crack width
but instead it will form new cracks

3.1.18
crack width, calculated
calculated crack width at surface of member

3.1.19
creep, basic
creep occurring in concrete when there is no moisture transfer with the surrounding environment

3.1.20
creep, drying
creep, additional to basic creep, occurring in concrete when there is moisture transfer with the
surrounding environment, the total creep is the sum of basic and drying creep

3.1.21
deep beam
beam for which the effective span I.rr is less than 3 times the overall cross-section depth h

3.1.22
deformation capacity
ability of a member or part of it or a structure to deform while maintaining its resistance

3.1.23
damp patch
area which, when touched, might leave a light film of moisture on the hand but no droplets of water (i.e.
beading)

3.1.24
diaphragm
planar member able to resist in-plane forces

3.1.25
effective tension area
concrete area in tension around reinforcement within which the crack opening is effectively controlled
by the reinforcement (area of concrete that needs to be subject to tension up to the tensile resistance of
concrete to produce a new crack)

3.1.26
effective depth
in a cross-section, distance from the extreme compression fibre to the centroid of the resultant force of
the longitudinal tension reinforcement

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
21
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

3.1.27
effective length
length used to account for the shape of the deflection curve; it can also be defined as buckling length, i.e.
the length of a pin-ended column with constant axial force, having the same cross-section and buckling
load as the actual member

3.1.28
European Technical Product Specification
European Product Standard (EN), or
European Technical Assessment (ETA) based on a European Assessment Document (EAD), or
product documentation based on a transparent and reproducible assessment that complies with all
requirements of the relevant EAD

3.1.29
execution s pecification
document covering all drawings, technical data and requirements necessary for the execution of a
particular project

3.1.30
expos ure resistance classes
classes for defining the resistance of concrete against corrosion induced by carbonation (XRC) or by
chlorides (XRDS) and damage caused by freeze/thaw attack (XRF)

3.1.31
external tendon
tendon external to the concrete, either within the depth of the cross-section or on the surface of the cross-
section

3.1.32
first order effects
action effects calculated without consideration of the effect of structural deformations, but including
geometric imperfections

3.1.33
flat slab
slab supported directly by columns, can be solid, ribbed or waffle

3.1.34
general anchorage zone
zone in which the tendon force is dispersed over the member cross-section until a linear stress
distribution may be assumed

3.1.35
headed bar
reinforcing bar with head attached at one or both ends

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
22
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

3.1.36
hook
end part of a reinforcement, bent at not less than 135°

3.1.37
hoop
closed reinforcement or spiral reinforcement enclosing longitudinal reinforcement in compression
members

3.1.38
indented reinforcement
reinforcing steel with at least two rows of indentations, which are uniformly distributed over the entire
length

3.1.39
internal for ce
resultant of stresses in cross-section of a member (axial force, shear force, bending moment, torsion)

3.1.40
internal tendon
tendon which is placed inside the concrete either with bond or without bond to the concrete

3.1.41
isolated member
member for which no load redistribution to adjacent members is possible

3.1.42
isolated precast element
precast element for which no load redistribution to adjacent members is possible

3.1.43
lattice girder
two dimensional or three dimensional metallic structure comprising an upper chord, one or more lower
chords and continuous or discontinuous diagonals which are welded or mechanically connected to the
chords

3.1.44
lightweight aggregate concrete
concrete having a closed structure and an oven-dry density of not less than 800 kg/m 3 and not more than
2 000 kg/ml, consisting of or containing a proportion of artificial or natural lightweight aggregates having
a particle dry density of less than 2 000 kg/m3

3.1.45
linear member
structural element, straight or curved, with one dimension significantly larger than the others (such as
beams and columns)

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
23
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

3.1.46
link
reinforcement bent to form single or multiple legs that surrounds longitudinal reinforcement, if provided
in the form of links these can be closed or open with sufficient anchorage at their ends

Note 1 to entry: See also "Stirrup" which has a similar definition as "Link", but does not include single leg Z- or
C-shaped reinforcement.

3.1.47
local anchorage zone
zone in the immediate vicinity of the tendon anchorage or coupling device in which the tendon force is
transmitted from the anchorage or coupling device to the concrete

3.1.48
loop
U-shaped reinforcement where both legs transmit their forces to other reinforcement or to concrete
through bond

3.1.49
main reinforcement
in one-way slabs, the bending reinforcement placed in the direction perpendicular to the supports, in
other members the longitudinal reinforcement with the largest overall capacity

3.1.50
membrane
planar member subjected primarily to in plane forces

3.1.51
nodal region
region of a stress field where the force is transferred amongst concurrent compression fields and/or ties

3.1.52
node
point of intersection of struts and/ or ties transferring forces amongst them

3.1.53
nonlinear analysis
analysis method using models that account for mechanical and geometrical non-linear behaviour

3.1.54
ordinary reinforcement
reinforcement which is not prestressed, where not specified otherwise, it is made of reinforcing steel

3.1.55
plain reinforcement
reinforcement with a smooth surface

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
24
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

3.1.56
plain or lightly reinforced concrete members
structural concrete members having no reinforcement (plain concrete) or less reinforcement than the
minimum amounts as defined in Clause 12

3.1.57
planar member
structural member with a dimension in one direction (depth) significantly smaller than those in the other
directions (width) with width/ depth> 4 (such as slabs, walls and shells)

3.1.58
pocket (or socket) foundation
member (precast, cast-insitu or partly precast) forming a tight pit for embedding the bottom of a precast
column, fixed with infilled cast-insitu concrete

3.1.59
post-installed reinforcing steel system
deformed straight reinforcing steel bar and anchoring mortar installed using tools for drilling and
preparing the hole (e.g. roughening and cleaning) as well as for injection of the mortar (e.g. dispenser,
nozzles, piston plug, if applicable)

3.1.60
post-tensioning
prestress technique which consists in applying the prestress to tendons positioned in a hardened
concrete member within a complete assembly of anchorages, sheathing with coating (for unbonded
applications) or ducts to be grouted (for bonded applications)

3.1.61
precast concrete element
factory produced or site manufactured element cast and cured in a place other than its final location in
the structure

3.1.62
precast concrete product
concrete element manufactured in accordance with a product standard by an industrial process under a
factory production control system and protected from weather conditions during production

3.1.63
precast structure
structure assembled from precast concrete elements, connected to ensure the required structural
integrity

3.1.64
prestress
effect of prestressing process, namely, internal forces in the sections and the deformations of the
structure

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
25
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

3.1.65
prestressing process
process of prestressing consists in applying forces to the concrete structure and the tendons

3.1.66
prestressed reinforcement
reinforcement made of strands, wires or bars subjected to a prestressing process, where not specified
otherwise, it is made of prestressing steel

3.1.67
pre-tensioning
process by which tendons are stressed before and remain stressed during their embedment in cast
concrete

3.1.68
pre-tensioning tendon
te ndon in which the prestressed reinforcement is embedded in and bonded directly to concrete

3.1.69
reinforcement
assembly of bars and/or tendons, prestressed (prestressed reinforcement) or not (ordinary
reinforcement), embedded in or connected to concrete members, which, where not specified otherwise,
is made of steel and is bonded to the concrete

3.1.70
r ibbed reinforcement
reinforcing bars with at least two rows of ribs uniformly distributed over the entire length

3.1.71
ribbed slab
slab with narrow ribs spanning in one direction

3.1.72
second order effects
additional action effects caused by structural deformations

3.1.73
secondary reinforcement
in one-way slabs, the bending reinforcement placed in the direction parallel to the supports

3.1.74
shear reinforcement, shear assemblies
stirrups, links, headed bars or bent-up bars specifically placed to resist action effects caused by shear and
torsion

3.1.75
shell
planar member, either plane or curved, that carries both in-plane and out of plane forces
Note 1 to entry: Cylindrical shells are simply curved, spherical shells are double curved.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
26
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

3.1.76
shrinkage, basic
shrinkage occurring in concrete when there is no humidity transfer with the surrounding environment

Note 1 to entry: Basic shrinkage is also known as autogenous shrinkage.

3.1.77
shrinkage, drying
shrinkage, additional to basic shrinkage, occurring in concrete when there is humidity transfer with the
surrounding environment

Note 1 to entry: The total shrinkage is the sum of basic and drying shrinkage.

3.1.78
slab
planar member loaded primarily perpendicularly to its plane for wh ich the minimum panel dimension is
not less than 4 times the overall thickness, possibly acting also as diaphragm

3.1.79
slab, s olid
slab without voids or r ibs

3.1.80
spiral reinforcement
continuously wound reinforcement in form of a helix, cylindrical or prismatic

3.1.81
s tabilized cra cking
phase of the cracking process in which the crack pattern is fully developed and an increase in the actions
will normally result in an increase in t he crack opening

Note 1 to entry: This type of cracking is typically associated with applied external loads, when such loads are
sensibly above the cracking loads.

3.1.82
stainless s teel
stainless reinforcing steel in accordance with EN 10370

3.1.83
stirrup
reinforcement bent to form double or multiple legs that surrounds longitudinal reinforcement

Note 1 to entry: Stirrups can be closed or open with sufficient anchorage at their ends.

3.1.84
stress field
stress state in a structure equilibrating the external actions

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
27
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

3.1.85
strut
resultant of a compression field, part of a strut-and-tie model

3.1.86
strut-and-tie model
model composed of the resulta nt forces of a stress field with struts for the compression fields a nd ties for
the tension reinforcement

3.1.87
support, direct
bearing by contact forces pushi ng against the member

3.1.88
support, indirect
support with local tensile stresses in the supporting mem ber caused by applied loads

3.1.89
technical documentation of post-tensioning system
documentation containing all information relevant for design and construction of post-tensioned
structures in accordance with this Eurocode

3.1.90
tendon
in post-tensioned applications, the tendon is a complete assembly consisting of anchorages, prestressing
steel (strand, wire, bar), and sheathing with coating for unbonded applications or ducts with grout for
bonded applications; in pre-tensioned applications, the tendon is an individual element of prestressed
reinforcement

3.1.91
tendon protection level
designation of a class or level of corrosion protection provided to tendons

3.1.92
tie
tension member as part of a strut-and-tie model representing concentrated or distributed
reinforcements

3.1.93
transverse reinforcement
reinforcement arranged perpendicular to the bar considered

Note 1 to entry: In linear members it can consists of stirrups, links or hoops enclosing the longitudinal
reinforcement considered; in planar member it consists of straight reinforcement parallel to the free surface.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
28
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

3.1.94
unbondedtendon
tendon for post-tensioned members where bond of the prestressed reinforcement to the member is
permanently prevented by encasing it in sheathing with soft filler or by placing the tendon outside the
concrete section (see external tendon)

3.1.95
w affle slabs
slab with narrow ribs spanning in both directions

3.1.96
wall
planar member subjected primarily to in plane forces, with cross-section width exceeding 4 times its
thickness (otherwise it should be considered as a column) and the height is at least 3 times the section
thickness

Terms and definitions in Annex I

3.1.97
corrosion penetration depth
loss in cross-sectional radius of a bar due to homogeneous corrosion (not pitting corrosion or localized
zones)

3.1.98
pitting corrosion
form of localised corrosion that leads to the creation of cavities or holes in the metal

Terms and definitions in Annex J

3.1.99
adhesive
material that possesses enough adhesive strength to join CFRP reinforcement to a concrete surface

3.1.100
adhes ively bonded CFRP reinforcement
externally or Near Surface Mounted CFRP reinforcement bonded to concrete using adhesive to provide a
longitudinal shear connection

3.1.101
CFRP bar
thermally hardened, unidirectional CFRP reinforcement industrially manufactured in various shapes
used as NSM reinforcement

3.1.102
Carbon Fibre Reinforced Polymer
CFRP
fibre-polymer composite material comprising industrially manufactured carbon fibres embedded in a
polymer matrix

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
29
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

3.1.103
Carbon Fibre Reinforced Polymer (CFRP) system
composite comprising carbon fi bres with an accompanying adhesive material that is bonded to an
adequately prepared concrete strata for the purpose of strengthening a structural concrete component

3.1.104
concrete cover separation
failure mode occurring at the end of adhesively bonded reinforcement, where a shift in tensile force may
detach the concrete cover and the entire adhesively bonded reinforcement

3.1.105
externally bonded reinforcement
EBR
adhesively bonded CFRP reinforcement installed externally to a concrete surface

3.1.106
externally bonded stirrups
externally bonded CFRP system, embracing the member in closed or U-shaped form

3.1.107
Near Surface Mounted (NSM) reinforcement
adhesively bonded CFRP bar installed in slots cut into the existing concrete cover zone

3.1.108
sheets
textile surface structure comprising dry parallel fibre bundles arranged in one or more directions

3.1.109
slot
small recess cut into the concrete cover zone with predetermined dimensions along the member filled
with adhesive in which adhesively bonded CFRP st rips or bars (NSM) are embedded

3.1.110
strip
thermally hardened, unidirectional CFRP reinforcement industrially prefabricated in various rectangular
flat shapes used as NSM or EBR reinforcement

Terms and definitions in Annex L

3.1.111
Steel Fibre Reinforced Concrete
SFRC
concrete to which steel fibres are included into the concrete matrix to achieve post cracking residual
st rengt h

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
30
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

3.1.112
residual flexural strength
stress at the outer most tension layer of a SFRC cross-section in bending corresponding to a certain crack
width determined using linear elastic material behaviour and the ass umption that plane sections remain
plane during bending

3.1.113
residual tensile s trength
uniaxial tensile stress corresponding to a certain crack opening derived from the residual flexural
strength using design rules provided in Annex L

3.1.114
residual strength class
classification that defines the response of a SFRC beyond the cracking strain of concrete. This class defines
the strength of the SFRC concrete without additional reinforcing bars or prestressing

3.1.115
ductility class
classification that is defined by the ratio between the residual flexural strengths at CMOD1 and CMOD3

Terms and definitions in Annex R

3.1.116
Fibr e Reinforced Polymer
FRP
fibre-polymer composite material comprising industrially manufactured fibres embedded in a polymer
matrix

3.1.117
fibre reinforced polymer (FRP) reinforcement
assembly of profiled or roughened fibre reinforced polymer reinforcement bars, embedded in or
connected to concrete members

3.2 Symbols and abbreviations

For the purposes of this doc ument, the follow ing symbols apply.

3.2.1 Latin upper case letters

A Correction factor
Ac Cross-sectional area of concrete
Ace Compressive area
Ac.elT Effective concrete area
Ace Area of confinement core of partially loaded area
Aco Loaded area in partially loaded area
Ac1 Contributing area in partially loaded area
Ac Equivalent area of reinforcement

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
31
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

A8 , Elongation at maximum force

Ak Area enclosed by centrelines of connecting walls of cross section
Ar Cross-sectional area of prestressed reinforcement
Ap,red Red uced cross-sectional area of prestressing steel
As Cross-sectional area of ordinary reinforcement
Ase Cross-sectional area oflongitudinal reinforcement in the compression chord;
confinement reinforcement
As,conf Cross-sectional area of one leg of confinement reinforcement
As,confx. As,confy Value of As,conr in t he x andy-directions, respectively
Asr Cross-sectional area of the transverse reinforcement in a flange
As; Cross-sectional area of bonded reinforcement across interface
Asint Robustness reinforcement in flat slabs
A,1 Effective area of tensile reinforcement
As,min Minimum cross-sectional area of reinforcement
As,min,h Minimum amount of horizontal reinforcement
As,min,v Minimum amount of vertical reinforcement
As,min,wt Area of minimum reinforcement to be placed at the most tensioned face of the section
part under consideration to control cracking
As,min,w2 Area of minimum reinforcement to be placed at the least tensioned face of the section
part under consideration to control cracking
As.web Reinforcement area to be provided in the web over a height limited by the neut ral axis
and the centroid of reinforcement with a spacing not exceeding 300 mm, to control
cracking
Ast Cross-sectional area of longitudinal reinforcement in the tension chord; transverse
re inforcement
Astd Tie down reinforcement in laps of headed bars
As~mln Minimum transverse reinforcement
As,v Amount of vertical reinforcement
Asw Cross-sectional area of shear re inforcement
Asw,min Minimum cross-sectional area of shear reinforcement
As,rcq.span Amo unt of required flexural non-prestressed reinforcement
C Coefficient for fatigue strength of concrete under compression
Cm Coefficient used to obtain an equivalent constant moment to calculate second order
effects in elements with differing end moments
D11 Diameter of a circular hoop or spiral re inforcement (defined by the bar's ax is)
D1ower Smallest value of the upper sieve size Din an aggregate for the coarsest fraction of
aggregates in the concrete permitted by the specification of concrete [EN 206]
Dmax Declared value of the upper sieve size D of the coarsest fraction of aggregates actually
used in the concrete [EN 206]

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
32
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

D upper Largest value of the upper sieve size Din an aggregate for the coarsest fraction of
aggregates in the concrete permitted by the specification of concrete [EN 206]
E Effect of actions
Ecd Design value of modulus of elasticity of concrete
Ec,eff Effective modulus of elasticity of concrete accounting for creep deformations
Secant modulus of elasticity of concrete
Ec,2a Secant modulus of elasticity of concrete at age of 28 days
Design value of modulus of elasticity of prestressing steel
Design value of modulus of elasticity of ordinary reinforcing steel
El Bending stiffness
Eleff Effective bending stiffness
E, Action effect (force or stress) at time t
E 1::0 Internal force or stress at time t=O
Ewe Force or stress assuming the structure was built without changes in the support
conditions
F Action
F ed Design value of the compression force in a compression chord or in a st rut (compression
positive)
Design value of an action
Design value of the change of the axial force in the flange over the length f),,x
Design value of actions
Fictitious magnified horizontal force to account for global second order effects
FEd,sup Design support reaction due to the loads applied on the beam or the slab
Fr., Relevant fatigue action (e.g. traffic load or other cyclic load)
F n,oEd First order horizontal force due to wind, imperfections etc.
F H,1Ed Fictitious horizontal force
Fn.1 Transverse force representing a geometrical imperfection
Ftd Design value of the tension force in a tension chord or tie or in the transverse
reinforcement
Fvi Vertical load to calculate F H,i
Fve Buckling load of the bracing structure
Fvaa Flexural buckling load of a cantilever, restricted by the floors, with base rotation
Fves Buckling load due to localised lateral storey defor mations
FvEd Total design vertical load on the bracing structure and the members braced by it
FRd Design value of the resistance ofa tie or ofa tension chord
Ged Design value of the elastic shear modulus
Characteristic value of a permanent action

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
33
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

H Distance between the points of application of two aligned forces

I Second moment of area of concrete section
Second moment of area of cracked concrete section
lg Second moment of area of the gross concrete cross-section
](t,to) Creep function or creep compliance, representing the total stress-dependent strain per
unit stress
L Total height of the building above the base
Spans of slab in x- and y-directions
Bending moment in linear members
First order end moments, including effect of imperfections such that IM02I ~ IM01I
Maximum first order moment due to the fundamental load combination, including the
effect of imperfections
Maximum first order moment due to the quasi-permanent load combination
Nominal 2nd order moment
Mer Cracking moment of the section in presence of the simultaneous axial force N Ed, which
may be calculated on the basis of the concrete tensile strength /ctm assuming linear stress
distribution and neglecting any contribution from reinforcement
Design value of the applied internal bending moment
Design moment about y-axis, including second order moment, where relevant
Design moment about z-axis, including second order moment, where relevant
Moment capacity
Moment resistance about y -axis for the given axial force
Moment resistance about z-axis for the given axial force
M rep Cracking moment with extreme fibre tension reaching the relevant tensile strength for
sections without prestressing
MR,min Bending strength of the section with A s,min in presence of the simultaneous axial force N Ed

Moment when strain in tension reinforcement equals l)-d

Reduction in the design support moment for a beam or slab continuous over a support
that can be considered to provide no res traint to rotation; additional moment to
calculate chord forces
N Axial force in linear members; number ofload cycles
N* Number ofload cycles corresponding to Ll<TRsk
Na Axial force in column above floor or diaphragm
Elastic buckling load (Euler)
Axial force in column below floor or diaphragm
Design value of the applied axial force
Design value of the axial force in the web
N obs Number of lorries per year

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
34
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Design value of axial resistance

Design value of axial res istance without accompanying moments
Design value of the sum of the additional axial forces in the tension and in the
compression chords due to shear in a cross-section
N years Design service life of bridge
p Prestressing force
Design value of the prestressing force
Characteristic value of the prestressing force
Factor for t raffic type
Characteristic variable action
Q(t) Total amount of hydration heat
R Resistance
Rax Restraint factor
Rax,1 Restraint factor corresponding to the boundary conditions present after concreting
Rax,2 Restraint factor corresponding to the boundary conditions present when the maximum
temperature drop is expected to occur
Rax.3 Restraint factor corresponding to the boundary conditions prevalent during the
development of drying shrinkage
Rcr Cracking risk
Design value of the resistance
Re. Rpo,2 Tensile yield strength of reinforcing steel
R ea.er Project parameter related to the admissible risk of cracking
RH Relative humidity of the ambient environment in%
RHeq Internal relative humidity of concrete at equilibrium, accounting for self-desiccation in
high performance concrete
Structural resistance based on a non-linear verification performed using the mean
values of the material properties and the nominal geometrical dimensions; tensile
strength of reinforcing or prestressing steel
R min Minimum radius of curvature of tendons
R po, 1 Tensile yield strength of prestressing steel
s First moment of area above and about the centroidal axis
Individual design actions for interaction fo rmula
Individual design resistances for interaction formula
First order moment of area of the req uired tension and compression reinforcements
with respect to the centroid of the gross cross-section
T Torsional moment; tension force in lapped headed bars
Temperature of the restraining structure
Tension forces in legs ofU-bar loops

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
35
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Tei Temperature of fresh concrete

Te,max Maximum temperature in concrete due to hydration heat
T Ed Design value of the applied torsional moment
Teo~ Th Tp, Tv Tensile force in horizontal ties to columns, internal, peripheral and vertical ties
Tmax Maximum temperature during heat treatment
LlTmin Long term maximum temperature drop
TRd,c Design value of axial resistance related to concrete failure in laps using U-bar loops
TSMu Tension stiffening effect at ultimate limit state
TSMy Tension stiffening effect at yield
V Shear force in linear members
Vbcd Design shear force carried by the bottom chord
VEd Design shear force in the section considered
VEdi Shear force acting parallel to the interface
Vol Volume of traffic (tonnes/year/track)
Ll VEd Portion of shear force which may be subtracted from VEd due to favorable circumstances
V*R Coefficient of variation of structural resistance
VRd.hog Resistance provided by hogging reinforcement in flat slabs
VRd.int Resistance of flat slabs without shear reinforcement for robustness
VRd.w,int Resistance of flat slabs with shear reinforcement for robustness
Vied Design shear force carried by the top chord

3.2.2 Latin lower case letters

a Distance; geomet rical data; distance from concrete surface to the centre of the outside
layer of re inforcement (Figure 9.3)
Effective shear span with respect to t he control section
Oes,O Des without considering effect of prestressing or external load
Projection of a foundation from the column face
Qj Amplitude of buckling shape to be considered as an imperfection for bucking analysis of
arches
Distance by which moment curve is shifted to account for shear effect
Exponent governing the shape of the simplified skew bending interaction diagram
Distances between the centre of the support area and the point of contraflexure in slabs
under concentrated loads
Opd Parameter for calculating the punching shear resistance based on Op
Maximum distances from the centre of the support area to the two points (on the x- and
on the y-axis, respectively) where the bending moments m Ed.x. respectively m Ed.y. are zero
Distance between concentrated forces pushing against each other

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
36
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Us,min Minimum interface reinforcement along edges of composite slabs

av Mechanical shear span
Dv,O av wit hout considering effect of prest ressing or external load
Dx Distance from concrete surface to the centre of the outer reinforcement layer in the x
direction
Dy Distance from concrete surface to the centre of the outer reinforcement layer in they
direction
a,b Dimensions of load introduction block
ao, bo Dimensions of loaded area Aco
Do.red, h o.red Reduced dimensions ofloaded area due to eccentrically applied load
Dimensions of contributing area Ac1
Dimensions of rectangular head of headed bars
Deformation parameter considered which may be, for example, a strain, a curvature, or
a rotation or even a deflection
Value of a 6 calculated for uncracked and fully cracked conditions, respectively
b Overall width of a cross-section, or actual flange width in a Tor L beam
bo Length of control perimeter at face of supporting area
bo.s Length of control perimeter at a distance of O,Sdv from column edge
bo.s,s Control perimeter placed at the location of the shear reinforcement perimeter
b o.Sout bo for the verification outside the shear reinforced area
Geometric mean of the minimum and maximum overall widths of the cont rol perimeter
Width of a strut
Maximum width of the confined concrete core at confinement re inforcement
Value of bes in the x andy-directions, respectively
Width of element
Effective width of flange in T, Lor box sections
her.hog Effective width fo r consideration of hogging re inforcement in flat slabs
b; Distance between longitudinal reinforcement bars fixed by confinement reinforcement
Width of the support strip
Minimum width of the cross-section between tension and compression chords and
neutral axis
b w,nom Nominal web width due to the disturbance of ducts
c Concrete cover of reinforcement (to the surface of the bar, ;::: Cnom). In 9.2 it refers to the
bar which is closest to the concrete surface
Ct/r Factor considering curvature distribution
Cact Actual concrete cover
Nominal value of the concrete cover for designing the anchorage length

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
37
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Nominal value of Cd in presence of confinement

Cmin Minimum concrete cover c provided to ensure sufficient bond strength and protection
against corrosion
Cmin,b Minimum concrete cover c due to bond requirement
Cmin,dur Minimum concrete cover c due to durability requirement
Cnom Nominal value of the concrete cover c which is specified in drawings and is basis for
calculating fire resistance
Additional minimum cover for abrasion
Allowance in design for deviation of the concrete cover
LlCdur,redl, Reduction of minimum cover for use of additional concrete protection
ilCdur,red2

Llc Additional reduction or addition to cover

LlCmin,30 Reduction of minimum cover for structures with design life of 30 years
ilCmin,exc Reduction of minimum cover for superior compaction or curing
LlCmin,p Additional minimum cover for prestressing tendons
Cs Clear distance between parallel reinforcement bars
Cu Effective width of concrete area carrying tensile forces due to the deviation of curved
chords
Cv Parameter to determine dv,out
Cvi, Cvz Coefficients for the shear resistance at interfaces
Coefficients for the shear resistance at interfaces under fatigue action
Cx, Cy, Cyb Concrete covers to reinforcement measured in x andy direction and at bends,
respectively
d Effective depth of a cross-section
Design value of the effective depth
Size parameter describing the crack and the failure zone roughness taking account of
concrete type and its aggregate properties
Height of shear key
doom Nominal value of the effective depth determined on the basis of Cnom
Effective depth of the prestressed reinforcement
Effective depth of the ordinary re inforcement
Shear-resisting effective depth of the reinforcement at the first and second shear
re inforcement perimeter
dv,out dv outside of the second reinforced perimeter
dvx, dvy Shear-resisting effective depth of the reinforcement in x andy direction, respectively
Effective depth of the reinforcement in x andy direction, respectively
e Eccentricity
Eccentricity of applied load in partially loaded area

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
38
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

eo First order eccentricity

Second order eccentricity
Eccentricity of the resultant of shear forces with respect to the centroid of the control
perimeter
Components of eb in x andy direction, respectively
ed.min Minimum eccentricity due to uncertainties related to modelling and analysis
e; Additional eccentricity covering the effects of geometrical imperfections
Eccentricity of the axial forces related to the centroid of the section at control section,
positive when the eccentricity is on the side of the flexural reinforcement in tension
Total eccentricity
ey', e./ Dimensionless eccentricity along the y-axis and z-axis, respectively
/bed Design resistance of bedding material
/bm,req Required minimum mean bond strength of post-installed bar
fc Compressive strength of concrete
/cd Design value of concrete compressive strength
fcd,c Design value of strength of confined concrete
/crJ,rat Design value of concrete fatigue strength
fcd,pl Design value of plain concrete compressive strength
!:i.fcd Design value of strength increase due to transverse compressive stress or confinement
/ck Characteristic concrete cylinder compressive strength at age trer
{ck, ref Value of/ck at reference age trer
/ck.28 Value of/ck at reference age of 28 days
fem Mean concrete cylinder compressive strength at age trcr
/cm(t) Mean concrete cylinder compressive strength at age t
fcmp Mean compressive strength of concrete after heat curing
/ ct Tensile strength, highest stress reached under concentric tensile loading
fctd Design value of the tensile strength of concrete
/ ctd.pl Design value of plain concrete tensile strength
fc~cff Mean value of the tensile strength of the concrete effective at the time when cracking
may first be expected to occur;
fctk;0,05 Characteristic axial tensile strength of concrete (5 % fractile)
/ ctk;0,95 Characteristic axial tensile strength of concrete (95 % fractile)
/ctm Mean axial tensile strength of concrete at age trer
/ctm.11 Mean flexural tensile strength of concrete
Actual tensile strength of prestressing steel
Design yield strength of pres tressing steel
Characteristic tensile strength of prestressing steel

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
39
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

f pO,J k Characteristic 0,1 % proof-stress of prestressing steel

fr Relative flexibility of rotational restraints at the ends of a support
/R Minimum relative rib area of reinforcing steel
/Rd Design value of bearing strength
J~.eff Tensile stress in reinforcement when MRd is reached
ft Tensile strength of reinforcement
Tensile strength provided by reinforcement in membrane elements in x- and y-
directions, respectively
Yield strength of reinforcement
Design yield strength of reinforcement
Characteristic value of yield strength of reinforcement or, if yield phenomenon is not
present, the characteristic value of 0,2 % proof strength
J~wd Design yield strength of shear reinforcement
/o,2k Characteristic 0,2 % proof-stress of reinforcement
h Overall depth of a cross-section or of a part of a cross-section
h col Largest side length of column
h c,eff Height of the effective concrete area around reinforcement
ho Hydrostatic head
hF Foundation depth;
hr Thickness of a flange at the junction with the web
Notional size of concrete member
Radius of gyration
is Radius of gyration of total group of reinforcemen t
Radius of gyration with respect to y-axis and z-axis, respectively
k Coefficient; Factor
k Ratio related to strain hardening of reinforcement
kb, k b,slmpl Coefficient for bond conditions
k b end Parameter accounti ng for the bend angle atiend

Bond efficiency factor

Coefficient reflecting the extent of cracking and the effect of non-linear material
properties in the bracing system
kcip Factor considering increased uncertainty and variability in Ye for concrete geotechnical
members
kconf,b, k conf,s Effectiveness factor for confinement
Coefficient accou nting for casting effect on bond conditions
Coefficient to determine the design compressive strength of plain concrete
Coefficient for moment resistance depending on ductility class of reinforcement

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
40
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

kdowel Factor depending on the roughness of the interface

Coefficient for calculating the nominal web width due to the disturbance of d ucts
ke an adjusting factor for the modulus of elasticity of concrete considering the type of
aggregates.
kn, k ri Stress exponent in S-N curves
kn, kn,simpl Coefficient for type ofloading (axial vers us flexure)
Coefficient which allows for the effect of non-uniform self -equilibrating stresses, which
lead to a reduction of the apparent tensile strength
Coefficient to calculate resistance for robust ness
Coefficient to accounting for the effect of cracking, for tension stiffening and for the fact
that creep deformations are less than proportional to the creep coefficient in cracked
sections
Factor for calculating the design anchorage length
Factor to increase anchorage to lap length
Coefficient to consider beneficial effect of eccentric tendons on punching shear
resistance in prestressed slabs
Exponent to model the evolution of relaxation with time
Shear gradient enhancement coefficient for punching
Coefficient accounting for the influence of axial forces on the shear slenderness of slabs
submitted to concentrated forces
k, In the context of second order effects, correction coefficient for equilibrium curvature
depending on axial force
k, Coefficient accounting for the effect of cracking on the shrinkage deflection
kst Resistance factor of the transverse reinforcement in laps using U-bar loops and headed
bars
Factor considering effect or ratio of actual cover/ minimum cover
Coefficient accounting for the effect of the nature and d uration of the load on tension
stiffening effects for cracking
Coefficient considering the effect of high sustained loads on concrete compressive
strength
kr cmp Coefficient accounting for the reduction in temperature from ti to tz
k t.pl Coefficient to determine the design tensile strength of plain concrete
kn Coefficient considering the effect of high sustained loads on concrete tensile strength
kv Factor depending on roughness of interface
k vµ Coefficient considering effect of axial force
kw Factor converting the mean crack width into a design crack width
Factor considering effect of axial force and eccentricity
k t/r kt/r,simpl Coefficient accounting for increase of crack width due to curvature
Unintentional angular displacement for internal tendons (per unit length)

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
41
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Ratio of concrete st ress to 0,4fcm, used to account for non-linear creep

Coefficient for determining os.111n
In the context of second order effects, correction coefficient for equilibrium curvature
accounting for creep
I (or L) Length; span
lo Effective length of the member
/ob Distance /ob between points of zero moment
101 Distance between tors ional restraints
Half wavelength of the buckling mode with the lowest buckling load
Design value of anchorage length of reinforcing steel
Part of t he anchorage length in the nodal region
Design anchorage length of post-installed reinforcing steel
Design anchorage length measured along the centre line of bars with bends and hooks in
tension
Anchorage length of pretensioning tendon
Dispersion length of effect of pretensioning tendon
Transmission length of pretensioning tendon
Actual lap length
Design value of lap length of reinforcing steel
Clear height of the member
fw,p Length of passing crack
m Number of load bearing members in one storey that bear a significant part of the vertical
load
Design value of the applied internal bending moment per unit width in planar members
Value of m Ed in the x andy-directions, respectively
Design value of the applied internal torsion moment per unit width in planar members
Design value of the flexural strength per unit width of a planar member res isting
positive moments
Design value of the flexural strength per unit width of a planar member res isting
negative moments (value positive)
Value of mRd in the x andy-directions, respectively (without the influence of tors ion
moments)
Value of mRi in the x andy-d irections, respectively (without the influence of torsion
moments)
n Non-dimensional axial force
Number of anchored bars or pairs of lapped bars in the potential splitting failure surface
Number of legs of confinement reinforcement crossing the potential splitting failure
surface

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
42
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

n; Number of acting stress cycles for stress level i

Number of storeys
Proportion of traffic crossing bridge simultaneously
ncrans Number of transverse bars in the bend
Number of layers with bars anchored at the same point in the member
nz Number of bars anchored in each layer
Exponent to consider effect of steel stress on anchorage length
p Water pressure
P Rd Maximum transverse bearing stress on tendon
Water pressure difference between the ends of a passing crack
Leakage rate through cracks
Distributed load
Design value of variable load
r Radius of curvature
Factor to account for variation in prestress in serviceability and fatigue verifications
when prestressing is favourable
Ratio of end moments lrml :5 1,0
rsup Factor to account for variation in prestress in serviceability and fatigue verifications
when prestressing is unfavourable
1/r Curvature at a particular section
s Spacing of the shear reinforcement or confinement reinforcement measured along the
longitudinal axis of the member
Spacing of the confinement reinforcement along the bar to be anchored
Sf Spacing of transverse reinforcement
So Distance from the column face to the axis of the first perimeter of punching
reinforcement
S1 Spacing between shear links in radial direction
Sc Coefficient for different early strength development of concrete and concrete strength
St Spacing oflongitudinal ribs
Spacing of transverse ribs
Centre-to-centre spacing of longitudinal bars
St.surf.max Maximum spacing of surface reinforcement in beams with downstand
Sbu,max Maximum longitudinal spacing of bent-up bars
Smax.col Maximum spacing of transverse reinforcement along the column
St.1nax Maximum longitudinal spacing of shear assemblies/stirrups
Sslab.max Maximum spacing of bars for slabs
Sstlr,max Maximum spacing for tors ion assemblies/ stirrups

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
43
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Str,max Maximum t ransverse spacing of shear legs

Sr Spacing of shear links in the radial direction
Sr,m,cal Calculated mean crack spacing when all cracks have formed or where not all cracks have
formed, the maximum length along which there is slip between concrete and steel
adjacent to a crack
Sr,m,ca1.x. Sr,m,cal,y Calculated mean crack spacing in the x direction and in they direction, respectively
s, Average spacing of shear links in the tangential direction at the investigated control
perimeter; spacing of transverse reinforcement along the bar to be anchored
Sx Bar spacing in a group of headed bars
t Thickness of a strut; length over which the support reaction is distributed
t Time being considered, age of the concrete
Lit Time interval
terr Effective wall thickness
teq Equivalent time to consider effect of heat treatment loss of prestress
t rac Tensile force in horizontal ties to walls
tp Duration of heat curing
to Age of concrete when the event under consideration occurs (prestressing, settlement,
start of drying, loading age)
to,adi Concrete age at loading adjusted for strength class of cement and temperature
to;r Temperature-adjusted concrete age at loading
t1 Time when the maximum concrete temperature due to heat hydration is reached
tz Time when concrete starts to develop tensile stresses
t, Age of concrete when support conditions change
tcrit Critical time for early-age cracking. Time at which thermal equilibrium with the
restraining structure is achieved (within 2 °C) and the greater part of basic shrinkage
has already developed
tdor Dormant time, e.g. time from concreting until stresses begin to develop
trer Age of concrete at which the concrete strength is determined in days
ts Age of concrete at the beginning of drying
tr Temperature-adjusted concrete age in days
u Perimeter of concrete cross-section, having area Ac
VEd Principal out of plane shear force per unit width in planar members
VEd.x, VEd,y Out of plane shear force in planar members on the cross-sections perpendicular to the x
andy direction, respectively
W k.cal Calculated crack width
Wk.caJ,1 Crack width at end of a through-crack, where the crack is wider
w k.ca1,2 Crack width at end of a through-crack, where the crack is thinner
Wk.cal,e Equivalent width of a passing crack, of variable width

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
44
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Wk,lim_, t Limiting crack width for water-tightness

WHm.cal Limiting crack width to be compared with the calculated crack width W1<.ca1

x Dept h of the neutral axis at serviceability limit state

Llx Length under consideration for shear transfe r
Xcs Distance between the neutral axis and the axis of confinement reinforcement
Xg Depth of neutral axis of uncracked section
x,y,z Coordinates
Xmin Minimum depth of the compression zone to guarantee water-tightness in elements
subjected to flexure
Xsb Depth of the compression zone assuming a stress block
Xu Depth of the neutral axis at ultimate limit state
z Inner lever arm of internal forces for shear design
Zcp Distance between the centroid of the concrete section and the tendons
Zred Reduced depth of section at segment joint due to joint opening

3.2.3 Greek letters

a Angle; ratio
a Inclination of reinforcement across interface
Bend angle
Coefficient accounting for the effect of the strength class of cement on basic shrinkage
Function to determine tangent modulus of elasticity of concrete
a c,th Coefficient of thermal expansion of concrete
Coefficients accounting for the effect of the strength class of cement on drying
shrinkage
Modular ratio, a. =Es/ Ee
ae.ef Modular ratio, ae.ef = Es/ Ec.eff
arem Coefficient accounting for the effect of concrete strength on time evolution of drying
creep
Reduction coefficient for length or height
Factor accoun ting for cracks along post-installed bar
Reduction coefficient for number of members
Coefficient to determine basic shrinkage and drying shrinkage, respectively
Sensitivity factor for the reliability of the resistance
Substitution rate of recycled concrete aggregates
asc Exponent accounting for the strength class of cement on the adjusted loading age
a s.th Coefficient of thermal expansion of reinforcement
Angle between the principal shear force and the x-axis

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
45
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Angle between shear reinforcement and the member axis perpendicular to the shear
force
Coefficients for determination of transmission length
Coefficient for determination of anchorage length considering type of verification
(fatigue or other)
Sum of the absolute values of angular displacements over a d istance for the calculation
of prestressing losses due to friction
Target value of reliability index
Ratio of longitudinal force in new concrete due to composite action
Angle of inclined cross-sections for determining the shear resistance in case of direct
strutting in deep beams or in presence of concentrated loads near to the support
/Jbc,fcm Coefficient accounting for the effect of concrete strength on the basic creep coefficient
/Jbc,t-tO Coefficient describing the evolution with time of basic creep and accounting for age of
loading
Coefficient describing the evolution with time of basic shrinkage
Coefficient which depends on the distribution of 151 and 2 nd order moments
Coefficient for determining the compressive concrete strength which depends on the
age of the concrete t
Coefficient accounting for the effect of concrete strength on the drying creep
coefficient
/Jdc,RH Coefficient accounting for the effect of relative humidity on the drying creep coefficient
/3dc,to Coefficient accounting for the effect of age of loading on the drying creep coefficient
/3dc,t-t0 Coefficient describing the evolution with time of drying creep and accounting for the
effect of notional size and age at loading
Coefficient describing the evolution with time of drying shrinkage and accounting for
the effect of notional size
/Jc Coefficient acco unting for concentrations of the shear forces along a control perimeter
/JEul Euler coefficient
/3rck Coefficient accounting for concrete strength and slenderness, used in the nominal
curvature method
Coefficient accounting for the effect of notional s ize and concrete strength on the time
development of drying creep
Angle between the tendon and the axis of the member, for the sign, the angle indicated
in Figure 8.4 is positive
/JRll Coefficient accounting for the effect of relative humidity on drying shrinkage
f3, Coefficient to account for duration of loading or of repeated loading on average strain
y Partial factor (safety and serviceability)
y(to,adj) Exponent accounting for t he influence of age of loading in the time development of
drying creep
Ye Partial factor for concrete

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
46
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

YCE Partial factor for the modulus of elasticity of concrete

YF Partial factor for actions, also accounting for model uncertainties and dimensional
variations
YFf Partial factor for fatigue actions
Ym Partial factor for a material property
YP Partial factor for prestressing actions P
"{P,fav, YP,unfav Partial factor for favourable and unfavourable prestress effects
YaP.sup, Yar.inf Partial factors for change in stress in unbonded prestressing tendons associated with
deformation of the member
YQ Partial factor for variable actions Q; also accounting for model uncertainties and
dimensional variations
Global resistance factor accounting for the uncertainties related to the material
properties, geometrical dimensions and the resisting model
YRd Partial factor associated with the uncertainty of the resistance model
rs Partial factor for reinforcing or prestressing steel
Ysh Partial factor for shrinkage action
Yv Partial factor for shear and punching resistance without shear reinforcement
Ywater Specific weight of water
Ya Partial factor for model uncertainty
8 Deflection
80,eqp Maximum short-term horizontal deflection due to the quasi permanent load
combination determined assuming uncracked cross-sections
Maximum short-term horizontal deflection due to the fundamental load combinations
from a first order analysis determined assuming uncracked cross-sections
Otoads Linear elastic deflection due to the relevant combination of actions
Ratio of the redistributed moment to the elastic bending moment
Linear elastic deflection due to s hrinkage
Compressive strain in the concrete
f:ct Strain at maximum stress
Compressive strain in the concrete at the peak stress fc
f:c2,c Value of £ c2 in case of confined concrete
f:cbs Basic shrinkage strain
Ecbs,fcm Notional basic shrinkage coefficient, accounting for the effect of concrete strength and
strength class of cement on basic shrinkage
£c1( to) Elastic strain due to a constant stress ac(to) applied at time to
£cc(t,to) Creep strain due to a constant stress ac(to) applied at time to
Eeds.fem Notional drying shrinkage coefficient, accounting for the effect of concrete strength
and strength class of cement on drying shrinkage

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
47
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

E'c:m Mean strain in the concrete between cracks at the same level of t"sm
Shrinkage strain
Ultimate compressive strain in t he concrete
£ cu,c Value of &cu in case of confined concrete
feds Drying shrinkage strain
&ca(t,to) Time-depende nt strain due to a constant stress ac(to) applied at time to
&co(t,ac) Time-dependent strain due to a stress history ac(t)
£ free Imposed strain
E'imp Imposed strain in element
Strain in the prestressing steel
Strain difference between prestressing steel and surrounding concrete
Strain increase in the prestressing steel
l'restr Strain developing in rest rained element
Strain in reinforcing steel
Mean strain in the reinforcement closest to the most tensioned concrete surface under
the relevant combination of actions, including the effect of imposed deformations and
taking into account the effects of tension stiffening. Only the additional tensile strain
beyond the state of zero strain of the concrete at the same level is considered
l'ud Design strain of reinforcing and prestressing steel at maximum load
&uk Characteristic strain of reinforcement or prestressing steel at maximum load
&yd Design yield st rain of reinforcement
Average strain in x-direction, of the flexural chords under tension and compression
Strain in flexural chords under tension and compression
Value of the maximum principal tensile strain in concrete
Value of maximum principal compressive strain in membrane element
s Distribution coefficient allowing for tension stiffening at a section
sr Reduction factor for fatigue strength of bent bar
11 Ratio of strains used to define stress strain model
Coefficient for determination of t ransmission length of pretensioning tendon
accounting for position during concreting
1/c Strength reduction coefficient for shear resistance TRd.c
17cc Factor to account for the difference between the undisturbed compressive strength of
a cylinder and the effective compressive strength that can be developed in the
structural component
I/cc.rat Value of I/cc for fatigue actions
l71w,Ec Coefficient related to Ee in lightweight concrete
l/1w.rc Coefficient related to fc in lightweight concrete
l71w,fct Coefficient related to fc, in lightweight concrete

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
48
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

l7pm Coefficient accounting for the influence of membrane forces due to restrained
deformations on the shear slenderness of slabs submitted to concentrated forces for
existing structures

17s Strength reduction coefficient for the contribution of the shear reinforcement
17sys Coefficient accounting for the performance of punching shear reinforcing systems
I} vise Dynamic viscosity
e Angle between the compression field and the member axis; rotation under bending
moment
Spreading angle of a concentrated force
Angle between the compression field and a tie
Angle between the compression field in a flange and the longitudinal axis
Angle between the compression field and the member axis under fatigue actions
Inclination representing a geometrical imperfection
Minimum allowed value of e
Rotation capacity
Rotation demand
Slenderness ratio lo/i
Correction factor to calculate upper and lower stresses of damage equivalent stress
spectrum caused by LM71
Ac,o. Ac.1. Ac,2,3, Ac,4 Factor accounting for permanent stress, member type, traffic volume and design
service life, number of loaded tracks
Ali m Limiting slenderness for isolated members below which second order effects may be
neglected
As Damage equivalent factor for fatigue
As,1, As.2, As,3. As.4 Factor accounting for member type, traffic volume, design service life, number of
loaded lanes/tracks
Ay Slenderness ratio, lo/iy with respect to they-axis
Ai Slenderness ratio, lo/ii with respect to the z-axis
µ Coefficient of friction between the tendons and the ir ducts
µv Coefficient of friction at concrete interfaces
µ v.rai Coefficient of friction at concrete interfaces for fatigue action
v Strength reduction factor for concrete cracked due shear or other actions
Vpart Confinement factor of partially loaded area; factor for capacity of headed bars
s Ratio of bond strength of pres tressing and reinforcing steel
s1 Adjusted ratio of bond strength taking into accoun t the different diameters of
prestressing and reinforcing steel
Sbc1 Adjustment parameter for basic creep to account for test results
Sbc2 Adjustment parameter for time development function of basic creep to account for test
results

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
49
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(bsl Adjustment parameter for basic shrinkage to account for test results
(bs2 Adjustment parameter for time development function of basic shrinkage to account for
test results
Adjustment parameter for drying creep to acco unt for test results
Adjustment parameter for time development function of drying creep to account for
test results
Adjustment parameter for drying shrinkage to account for test results
Adjustment parameter for time development function of drying shrinkage to account
for test results
(v Effective damping ratio (vibrations)
Structural component of effective damping ratio (vibrations)
p Reinforcement ratio
Pc Oven-dry density of concrete in kg/m3
Peon( Ratio of the reinforcement providing confinement referred to the diameter of the bar
to be anchored or spliced
p; Ratio of bonded reinforcement across interface
Reinforcement ratio for bonded longitudinal reinforcement in the tensile zone due to
bending referred to the nominal concrete area d · bw
p1,x, Pl.y Value of p1 in x- andy-directions, respectively
Pm in Minimum reinforcement ratio
Pr Tensile reinforcement ratio accounting for the different bond properties of reinforcing
bars and prestressing tendons
Tensile reinforcement ratio accounting for the different bond properties of re inforcing
bars and prestressing tendons, referred to the effective concrete area
Pw Shear reinforcement ratio
Pw.min Minimum shear reinforcement ratio
P w.stlr Minimum ratio of shear and torsion reinforcement in the form of stirrups
Px.py Reinforcement ratio in x- and y-directions, respectively
P 1000 Value of relaxation loss (in%), at 1 000 ho urs after tensioning and at a mean
temperature of20 °C
arnd Design value of principal tensile stress in uncracked concrete in pretensioned member
Stress range (2 a.)
Uc Compressive stress in the concrete
Ucable Tensile stress in stay and extradosed cable
Ucd Design value of compressive stress in the concrete
Ocd,max,eqlb Upper and lower stress of damage equivalent stress amplitude for N=10Gcycles,
acd,min,cqu respectively
O'cd,max_,i, O'cd_,,min.,,i Maximum and minimum compressive stress in stress level i
Ucp Axial stress

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
50
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

a cp,QP Stress in the concrete adjacent to the tendons, due to self-weight and initial prestress
and other quasi-permanent actions where relevant.
a,, Tensile stress in concrete
a c2d Design value of the transverse stress in concrete due to confinement or minimum
transverse compression stress due to external actions (compression positive)
a c,lim Limited compressive stress for shear strength in plain concrete
a ced Design value of the mean compression stress perpendicular to a free surface near bars
to be anchored or spliced
at1 Design value of the average stress, tension positive
a Edx, a Edy. <E<txy Membrane stresses
<7gd Design value of ground pressure
an Compressive stress across interface
ap Stress in prestressing steel
Llap Stress variation in prestressing tendon from state of zero strain
a p,max Maximum prestressing stress imposed at the active end by the jack
a pd Design value of the stress in the tendon
a p; Initial stress in prestressing steel
a pk.i nf Lower characteristic value of pres tress
a pk.sur Upper characteristic value of prestress
a p,m (x,t) Mean value of the prestressing stress after accounting for the immediate losses and the
time-dependent losses at time t and a distance x from the active end
a pmo Tendon stress immediately after release
apm.co Long-term stress level in prestressing tendons at the state of zero (elastic) strain of the
concrete at the same level
aRdu Design resistance of partially loaded area
as Serviceability value of steel stress, determined on the basis of a cracked section
a,<1 Design value of the reinforcing steel stress at the cross-section
a sd' Maximum tensile stress in the reinforcing steel of headed bars developed by the head
a s.um Limiting value of the serviceability steel stress in order to comply with a given limiting
crack width
a,, Stress in the tension reinforcement calculated on the basis of a cracked section under
the loading conditions causing first cracking
Oswd Design value of the stress in the shear reinforcement
a uk Characteristic breaking strength of stay and extradosed cable
Liarrcq Variation of tensile stress in stay or extra dosed cable under frequent traffic loads
Llap,c+s+r Time dependent losses of prestress
Liapd Design value of stress increase in tendon; design value of stress range in prestressing
steel under fatigue load combination

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
51
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Absolute value of the variation of stress in the tendons at location x, at time t, due to
the relaxation of the prestressing steel
Increase of the stress from the effective pres tress to the stress in the ultimate limit
state for prestressed members with permanently unbonded tendons
Prestressing losses due to friction
Stress range resistance at N* cycles from relevant S-N curve
Design value of stress range in reinforcing steel under fatigue load combination
Llas,max Maximum reinforcing steel stress range under relevant load combination
ll<Js,equ Damage equivalent stress range for reinforcement
Thermal loss induced by heat treatment
T ep Shear stress in the concrete from acting shear force
t Ed Average acting shear stress over a cross-section
t Ed,i Design value of the shear stress at interfaces
t Rd Shear resistance governed either by yielding of shear reinforcement or crushing of
concrete
Shear stress resistance of members without shear reinforcement (average shear stress
over a cross-section)
l Rdc,min Minimum shear stress resistance allowing to avoid a detailed verification for shear
(average shear s tress over a cross-section)
< Rd.cs Shear stress resistance of planar members with shear reinforcement subjected to
concentrated forces
t Rd,i Shear stress resistance at interfaces
t Rdm Shear stress resistance reduced by influence of transverse bending
T'Rd,max Maximum shear stress resistance of planar members with shear reinforcement
subjected to concentrated forces
t Rd.pl Design strength of plain concrete in shear
t Rd,sy Shear stress resistance governed by yielding of shear reinforcement
<t,i Torsional shear stress in wall i
Torsional shear stress resistance
Tt,Rd,sw, 'l't,Rd,sl, Torsional shear stress resistance governed by yielding of shear reinforcement, by
Tt,Rd,max yielding of longitudinal reinforcement or by crushing of the concrete in the
compression field
Diameter of a reinforcing bar
Equivalent diameter of a bundle of reinforcing bars
Diameter of confinement reinforcement
Outer diameter of a post-tensioning duct
</Jcq Equivalent bar diameter for bond calculations when tensile reinforcement is composed
by bars of different diameters
Diameter of circular head of headed bar

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
52
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

</>mand Mandrel diameter for bent reinforcement bars

</>mand,min Minimum value of </>rnand
Nominal diameter of the pretensioning tendon
Equivalent d iameter of tendons
Diameter of t ransverse reinforcement between the bar to be anchored and the free
surface; diameter of welded transverse bar
t/>trans Diameter of t ransverse bars within bend
Diameter of of punching shear reinforcement
</>w,max Maximum diameter of punching shear reinforcement
Factor taking into account eccentricity, including second order effects; dynamic factor
for railway bridges

lfJ Damage equivalent impact factor q;\'a10r <P for road and railway bridges
<p(t,to) Creep coefficient, defining creep between times t and to, related to elastic deformation
at 28 days
<p(SOy,to) Creep coefficient after SO years of loading
<po,05, <p1<;0,05 Lower-bound value and characteristic value of creep coefficient corresponding to a
5 % cut-oft; based on a normal distribution
<po,10. <p1<;0,10 Lower-bound value and characteristic value of creep coefficient corresponding to a
10 % cut-off, based on a normal distribution
<po,90. <p1<;0,9o Upper-bound value and characteristic value of creep coefficient corresponding to a
90 % cut-off, based on a normal distribution
<po,95, <p1<;0.95 Upper-bound value and characteristic value of creep coefficient corresponding to a
95 % cut-off, based on a normal distribution
<pbc(t,to) Basic creep coefficient
(/ldc( t,to) Drying creep coefficient
</leff,b Effective creep ratio for local second order effects
(/leff.s Effective creep ratio for global second order effects
<p"(t,to) Creep coefficient, adjusted for non-linearity due to concrete stresses above 0.4.fcm
x Aging coefficient which may be taken equal to 0,8 for long term calculations
Mechanical reinforcement ratio
Required mechanical tension reinforcement ratio at mid-span to resist the moment
due to the design loads (at support for cantilevers)

3.3 Symbols in Annex A

3.3.1 Latin upper case letters
Coefficient of variation of the variable i
Coefficient of variation of the resistance

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
53
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

3.3.2 Latin lower cas e letters

fc,ais Actual insitu concrete compressive strength in the structure
fc.1s Compressive st rength of a core taken at a test location within a structural element or
precast concrete component expressed in terms of the strength of a 2: 1 core of diameter
~ 75mm

ftm Mean value of yield strength of reinforcing steel or, if yield phenomenon is not present,
the characteristic value of 0,2 o/o proof strength

3.3.3 Greek lower case letters

aR Sensitivity factor for the reliability of the resistance

fJ•g< Target value of reliability index
YM Partial material factor
µ, Bias factor of the variable i defined as ratio X1.m/X1,k
l]is lnsitu factor of the concrete compressive strength defined as ratio fc.ais / fc
µ RM Bias factor of resistance

3.4 Symbols in Annex I

3.4.1 Latin upper case letters
AAR Alkali-aggregate reaction
Asq Cross-sectional area of a square plain bar
D max Declared val ue of the upper sieve s ize of the coarsest fraction of aggregates used in
concrete
DEF Delayed ettringite formation
Px Corrosion penetration depth
Vrc.is Coefficient of variation of le.is
Vrc,is,lim Limit val ue of Vrc,is fo r the adj ustment of the partial factors for concrete
V(y Coefficient of variation of yield strength of reinforcement
Vry,lim Limit value of Vry for the adjustment of the partial factor for reinforcement
V,, Coefficient of variation of the material property X
Xk Characteristic value of the material property

3.4.2 Latin lower case letters

bw,i' hw,i-1' Coefficients to evaluate bw for shear resistance in case of shear reinforcement not
hw,i+ l fulfilling the maximum longitudinal spacing of shear assemblies/stirrups or bent-up bars
given in Clause 12
Additional distance with respect to concentrated loads of reaction forces acting on
compression flanges

Cm in,xy Minimum value of concrete cover between ex and Cy fo r designing the ancho rage in case
oflow concrete cover

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
54
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

d sys Relevant depth considered for determination of 17sys

fck,is Characteristic in-situ compressive strength of concrete cores expressed in terms of the
strength of a 2:1 core of diameter<:: 75 mm (5 % fractile)

/ck.rt Residual characteristic compressive cylinder strength of concrete

f ctk,is;0,05 Characteristic measured insitu axial tensile strength of concrete (5% fractile)
k 1bs,c Coefficient for bond calculation in case of low concrete cover
kn Characteristic fractile factor for a sample size n
Coefficient for shear stress resistance of members with shear reinforcement
Coefficient for determining ORdt

Coefficient for shear stress resistance of members without shear reinforcement

Parameter to be used to evaluate f ck from fc k,is and that account for the
representativeness of the insitu compressive concrete strength

Mean val ue of the variable X from n sample res ults

n Number oftest results
Sx Estimated value of the standard deviation of the variable X from n sample results
Basic variable i

3.4.3 Greek lower case letters

Yder Partial factor covering uncertainties related to calculation of deformations
81 , 82 Coefficients for the design value of the reinforcement stress at the cross-section to be
anchored by bond over lbd in case of bends and hooks
Coefficients for the design anchorage length lbd for plain bars
Design value of the reinforcement stress at the cross-section to be anchored by bond over
lbd in case of bends and hooks

ORd,t Maximum des ign stress applied to partially loaded area not requiring transverse
reinforcement
Design value of the reinforcement stress at the cross-section developed by bends and
hooks
</>sq,eq Equivalent bar diameter for bond calculation of square cross-section bars
Maximum rotation of slab around supporting area

3.5 Symbols in Annex J

3.5.1 Latin upper case letters
A,. Cross-sectional area of a CFRP system
D Diameter of circular column section
D cq Equivalent d iameter of member with rectangular cross section
Ef Mean modulus of elasticity in longitudinal direction of ABR CFRP

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
55
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Design bond force resistance of the ABR CFRP

Bond strength per unit length
FfEd,cr Force in CFRP at first crack in the strengthened area
Fr,NSM,max The maximum force in the NSM CFRP system, taking the shift of the tension envelope
into account
ilFr,min Minimum value of ilFr under the fatigue load combination
ilFr,max Maximum value of ilFr under the fatigue load combination
LlFr Force change in CFRP under the fatigue load combination
LlFfEd Difference in FRP tension force between cracks
LlFFEd,fat Design difference in the change in force in the CFRP system between cracks
Ll Fmd,fatt Fatigue resistance limited by an elastic response in the bond of the CFRP to the concrete
surface
Ll Fmd,fat2 Fatigue resistance of the CFRP system subject to N* stress cycles
LlFmd Bond resistance between cracks
LlFrn,equ Maximum difference in CFRP stress under the relevant load combination between cracks

N* Number of stress cycles

Design resistance against concrete cover separation

3.5.2 Latin lower-case letters

Distance from end of CFRP flexural strengthening to adjacent point of zero bending moment
Distance of adhesively bonded CFRP reinforcement from free edge
br Width of the adhesively bonded CFRP reinforcement sheets or strips or square bars

Width of slot for NSM CFRP re inforcement

Reduction factor taking into account the stress cycles
Design bond strength of the anchorage

/bsm Mean bond stress of reinforcing steel

fctrn,surf Mean surface tensile strength of concrete

fAck Characteristic compressive strength of the adhesive

fAtk Characteristic tensile st rength of the adhesive
frud Ultimate design short-term tensile strength of the ABR CFRP
f fuk Characteristic short-term tensile strength of the ABR CFRP
frwd Design shear strength of the CFRP system
Llftto. Difference and maximum difference in CFRP stress between cracks, respectively
Llfmo,max
Llffk,B Basic value of adhesive bond strength between cracks

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
56
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Increase of bond strength between cracks resulting from clamping from curvature of the
beam
Increase of bond strength between cracks resulting from bond friction
Bond resistance between adjacent cracks
Height of CFRP shear reinforcement crossing shear crack
kcc Confinement factor for columns strengthened with CFRP
kc.surf Coefficient considering the concreting position for estimation of surface tensile strength
ke Confinement effectiveness factor for rectangular columns
kr Coefficient for determining the effective thickness for a number of layers
kh Confinement effectiveness factor for helical wrapping
kf3 Exponent for determining factor for stress cycles
kr Factor considering corner radius
k sys,b J, Product-specific system factor
k sys,b2,
k sys,b3

Bond length of the adhesively bonded CFRP reinforcement

lbf,max,k Characteristic maxim um value of effective bond length of ABR CFRP
nr Number ofCFRP layers
Corner radius
Sr Centre to centre spacing of FRP strips
Sfok Maximum bond slip
Scr,1n in Minimum spacing of bending cracks
Nominal th ickness of the adhesively bonded reinforcement
ts lot Depth of slot for NSM CFRP reinforcement bar or strip

3.5.3 Greek lower-case letters

Product-specific system factor for long-term behaviour of concrete
Product-specific system factor for long-term behaviour of the adhesive
Angle formed between the CFRP system and longitudinal axis of a member in bending
Reduction factor for fatigue
Reduction factor for bond capacity taking account of anchorage length
Angle formed between the CFRP system and the transverse axis of a column strengthened
by CFRP confinement
YBA Partial factor for adhesively bonded CFRP reinforcement for bond
Yr Partial factor for tensile strength of adhesively bonded CFRP reinforcement
Efud Long-term design strain of adhesively bonded CFRP reinforcement
Gfuk Characteristic ultimate strain for the adhesively bonded CFRP re inforcement

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
57
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Reduction factor applied to the tensile stress of the EBR CFRP sheet or strip
Stress range of an NSM CFRP re inforcement subjected to fatigue
Bond strength of concrete with NSM CFRP reinforcement strips
Bond strength of adhesive with NSM CFRP reinforcement strips
Design value of the shear st ress resistance of adhesive
Design shear stress in adhesively bonded CFRP stirrups for shear induced crack separation
Tftk Maximum bond strength of adhesively bonded CFRP reinforcement
Design shear resistance of the member without shear strengthening
Design shear resistance of a section with CFRP shear strengthening
TRd.f Contribution of ABR CFRP shear strengthening to design shear resistance
Diameter of NSM CFRP bars

3.6 Symbols in Annex L

3.6.1 Latin upper case letters
CMOD1 = 0,5 mm is the crack width (Crack Mouth Opening Displacement) for which the
characteristic residual flexural strength,/R.tk, is determined (defined in EN 14651).
CMOD3 = 2,5 mm is the crack width (Crack Mouth Opening Displacement) for which the
characteristic residual flexural strength,fR.3k, is determined (defined in EN 14651).
Act Area of the tension zone (in m2 ) of the cross-section involved in the failure ofan
equilibrium system

3.6.2 Latin lower case letters

/ R.tk Characteristic residual flexural strength at CMODi = 0,5 mm representing the residual
strength class
/R.Jk Characteristic residual flexural strength at CMOD3 = 2,5 mm representing the performance
class
/Fis.er Effective residual tensile strength for crack widths at the serviceability limit state
accounting for fibre orientation
/F11,er Effective residual tensile strength for crack width = 0,5 mm accounting for fibre orientation
to be used in the constitutive law for bi-linear stress distribution
/Ftsd Design residual tens ile strength for crack widths at the serviceability limit state accounting
for fibre orientation
/ Frid Design residual tensile strength for crack width= 0,5 mm accounting for fibre orientation to
be used for bi-linear stress distribution
/F13.er Effective residual tensile strength for crack width= 2,5 mm accounting for fibre orientation
to be used in the constitutive Jaw for bi-linear analysis
/Ftud Design value of the res idual tensile strength accounting for fibre orientation
/Ftu.or Effective residual tensile strength of SFRC for given crack width accounting for fibre
orientation and volume effect
/Ft3d Design residual tens ile s trength for crack width = 2,5 mm accounting for fibre orientation to
be used for bi-linear stress distribution

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
58
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

kAs Parameter that limits the replacement of minimum longitudinal reinforcement by fibres
kdur Coefficient to determine the distance to which the residual tensile strength ofSFRC s hall be
disregarded
kF Coefficient to determine clear bar spacing as a function of the fibre length
lcs Structural length used to convert the stress-crack width relationship of SFRC to a stress-
strain relationship compatible with concrete design
Sr,m,cal, F Mean crack spacing of SFRC members subject to bending
Wu Maximum crack opening accepted in the structural design

3.6.3 Greek letters

llduct Coefficient to determine required As for which plastic analysis can be used without direct
check of rotation capacity
ar Coefficient for determining Sr,m,ca~F
r,>F Partial factor for SFRC in tension
J'/ cF• J'/ sw• J'/p Parameters expressing that the shear capacity contributions from steel fibres and ordinary
reinforced concrete are not 100 % additive
EF1u Ultimate tensile strain for SFRC
E ftud Design tensile strain limit used for SFRC cross-sections with or without axial force
according to 5.1.7 and 8.1.5
EF.o Equivalent strain value used to define the post-cracking constitutive law for non-linear
analysis
KG Factor taki ng into account the size of the tensile zone involved in the failure state
Kk,max Factor defi ni ng the upper limit of the ratio between characteristic and mean res idual
flexural strengths
Ko Factor taking into account the orientation of the steel fibres in the concrete matrix in
relation to the orientation of the principal tensile stress arising from the action effects
P Fw,min Minimum shear reinforcement ratio
< Rd,cF Design value of the shear strength ofSFRC
rRd.s F Design value of the shear strength ofSFRC with shear reinforcement

<t.Rd,swF Design value of the torsional resistance in the transversal direction

<t.Rd,slF Design value of the torsional resistance in the longitudinal direction

3.7 Symbols in Annex R

3.7.1 Latin upper case letters
A" Cross-sectional area oflongitudinal FRP reinforcement
Ar.surf FRP surface reinforcement
Long term strength reduction factor to account for temperature, for creep and for
environmental conditions, respectively
Design value of modulus of elasticity of FRP- reinforcement
ErwR Design value of modulus of elasticity of FRP shear reinforcement

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
59
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

3.7.2 Latin lower case letters

h tct Design tensile strength of FRP reinforcement
htko Characteristic tensile strength of FRP reinforcement at the rupture strain E/tko
hrk,iooa Characteristic long term tensile strength of FRP reinforcement
!bdiooa Long term bond strength of FRP reinforcement
f rwk,1ooa Characteristic long term tensile strength of FRP shear reinforcement
hwRd Design tensile strength of FRP shear reinforcement

3.7.3 Greek letters

~RP.th Coefficient of thermal expansion of FRP reinforcement
YFRP Pa rtial factor for FRP reinforcing material
E"mct Strain of FRP reinforcement at design tensile strength frtd
E"ftk,i ooa Long term rupture strain of FRP reinforcement
E"ftko Rupture strain of FRP re inforcement
E"fwRd Strain of FRP shear reinforcement at design tensile strength f rwRd
rRd.f Shear resistance of a member with FRP reinforcement
Pir Longitudinal reinforcement ratio for FRP reinforcement
<1f Serviceability value of stress in the FRP reinforcement, determined on the basis of a
cracked section
<1f,lim Limiting value of the serviceability stress in the FRP reinforcement in order to comply with
a given limit ing crack width
<1ftd Design value of stress in the FRP reinforcement at the cross-section
<Pr Diameter of a FRP reinforcement bar

3.8 Abbreviations
AVCP Assessment and Verification of Constancy of Performance.
CS, CN, CR Classes of Concrete with Slow/ Normal/Rapid strength development
CFRP Carbon Fibre Reinforced Polymer reinforcement adhesively bonded t o the concrete
surface
ERC Exposure Resistance Class
FPC Factory Production Control
FRP profiled or roughened glass or Carbon Fibre Reinforced Polymer reinforcement
GFRP Glass Fibre Reinforced Polymer reinforcement
lg Logarithm with basis 10
LWAC Ligthweight Aggregate Concrete
PE Polyethylene
n. a. not applicable

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
60
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

SCM Supplementary cementitious materials B.3

SFRC Steel Fibre Re inforced Concrete
SLS Serviceability Limit State
SSRC Stainless Steel Resistance Class
ULS Ultimate Limit State

3.9 Units
Angle Degrees/Radians
E-Modulus For unit dependent formulae, MPa is used.
Geometric data For unit dependent formulae, mm is used.
Relative humidity %
Stresses and material strengths For unit dependent formulae, MPa is used.
Temperature °C, K
Time Days unless otherwise stated

3.10 Sign conventions

(1) In general, forces, stresses and strains which result in an elongation of material have a positive and
those which result in shortening have a negative sign. When compressive or tensile forces are indicated
in a figure by a vector they have a positive s ign when they are acting in the di rection described by the
vector.
(2) All tensile and compressive material strengths are used with a positive sign.
(3) Shortening due to shrinkage is considered positive.

4 Basis of design
4.1 General rules
4.1.1 Basic requirements

(1) The basis of design for concrete structures shall be in accordance with the general rules given in
EN 1990, supplemented by the provisions for basis of design for concrete structures given in this
document.
(2) The basic requirements of EN 1990:2023, Clause 4 should be deemed to be satisfied for concrete
structures when the following are applied together:
limit state design in conjunction with the partial factor method in accordance with EN 1990;

actions in accordance with EN 1991 (all parts) and EN 1997 (all parts);

combination of actions in accordance with EN 1990; and

resistances, robustness, durability and serviceability in accordance with all relevant parts of
EN 1992.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
61
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

4.1.2 Structural reliability and quality ma nagement

(1) The rules for structural reliability and quality management given in EN 1990 shall be followed.

4.1.3 Design service life

(1) The design service life of structures or members of structures shall be specified.
NOTE For values of design service life, see EN 1990:2023, Annex A.

(2) Structures or members of structures shall be designed consistently with respect to all time-
dependent effects including durability, serviceability and fatigue.

4.2 Basic variables

4.2.1 Actions and time-dependent effects

4.2.1.1 General

(1) Actions to be used in design shall be obtained from the relevant parts of EN 1991 (all parts) or
EN 1997 (all parts). Where relevant, other actions not covered by EN 1991 (all parts) or EN 1997 (all
parts) shall be in accordance with EN 1990 and as specified by the relevant authority or agreed for a
specific project by the relevant parties.
NOTE Actions specific to this Eurocode (such as prestress, creep and shrinkage) are given in the relevant
clauses.

4.2.1.2 Time-dependent effects

(1) Time dependent effects, including relaxation of the prestressing steel, shrinkage and creep of the
concrete, should be accounted for in design, where relevant.
(2) Where creep is taken into account its design effects should be evaluated under the quasi-
permanent combination of actions, and applied in all relevant combinations of actions.

4.2.1.3 Effects resulting from restrained, imposed deformations

(1) Effects resulting from restrained, imposed deformations should be quantified and considered when
verifying serviceability limit states and fatigue.
NOTE Effects resulting from restrained, imposed deformations can be reduced, when necessary, using various
methods such as varying the composition of the concrete mix (guidance is given in 0.3) and adjusting the stiffness
of integral structural restraints. The use of bearings and joints can also reduce these effects.

(2) The effects of restrained, imposed deformations may be neglected at ultimate limit states where it
can be demonstrated or has been shown by experience with similar structures that:
a) there is sufficient deformation capacity to allow the respective movements to occur and fulfil the
ultimate limit state; and
b) the struct ures behaviour is not sensitive to second order effects caused by large displacements.
(3) In all other cases, the effects of restrained imposed deformations should be considered.
NOTE For a detailed analysis, see Annex 0.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
62
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

4.2.1.4 Gro und-structure inter action

(1) Where ground-structure interaction has significant influence on the action effects in the structure,
the properties of the ground and the effects of the interaction shall be taken into account in accordance
with EN 1997-1.
(2) Where differential settlements/movements of the structure due to ground subsidence are taken
into account, predicted values should be estimated in accordance with EN 1997-1 and limiting values for
foundation movement set in accordance with EN 1990.

4.2.1.5 Prestress

(1) The design prestress action shall be determined.

NOTE 1 The prestress considered in this Eurocode is applied by tendons made of high-strength steel (wires,
strands or bars).

NOTE 2 Tendons can be external to the structure with points of contact at possible deviators, at anchorages, or
with continuous contact on curved surfaces.

(2) When considered in accordance with 7.6.1(1) b), the design pres tress action at ultimate limit states
should be taken as the mean value of the prestressing stress (as calculated in 7.6.2, 7.6.3 and 7.6.4)
multiplied by the partial factor for prestress.
(3) For serviceability and fatigue verifications, allowance shall be made for possible variations in
prestress. Upper and lower characteristic values of the prestressing stress at the serviceability limit state
and in fatigue design shall be estimated from the mean value <1pm(x,t) according to Formulae (4.1) and
(4.2).

<1pk,sup(x,t) = rsup · <1pm(x,t) (4.1)

<1pk,inf(X,t) = rinf · <1pm (x,t) (4.2)

NOTE The values ofrsupand nnr given in Table 4.1 (NOP) app ly unless the National Annex gives different va lues.

Table 4 .1 (NDP) - Factors for calculating the upper and lower characteristic values of the
prestress action

Type of prestress f sup f tnr

Pre-tensioning 1,05 0,95

Post-tensioning with unbonded tendons 1,05 0,95
Post-tensioning with bonded tendons 1,10 0,90

4.2.1.6 Effect of water or gas pressure

(1) In structures exposed to high fluid or gas pressure the effect of potential pressure build up in pores
and cracks shall be accounted for in the design where it increases the action effects or reduces the
resistance by more than 10 %.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
63
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

4.2.2 Geometric data

(1) Geometric tolerances shall comply with EN 13670, Tolerance Class 1, or where other tolerances are
permitted they shall be specified in the execution specification and suitable allowances shall be made in
the design.
NOTE Examples of such members include cast-in-place bored piles where the steel casing is pulled, or concrete
piles driven through rock. This standard offers no guidance on what allowance is adequate, but engineering practice
in the various countries could. Allowance can be made either by a reduced cross-section, an assumed deformation
or a reduced resistance.

4.3 Verification by the partial factor method

4.3.1 Partial factor for shrinkage action

(1) Where consideration of shrinkage actions is required for ultimate limit state a partial factor, rsu,
shall be used.
NOTE The value ys11 = 1,0 applies unless the National Annex gives a different value.

4.3.2 Partial factors for prestress action

(1) The partial factors rv.rav or r v.unrav shall be applied to the prestress for ultimate limit state
verifications when considered in accordance with 7.6.1(1) b).
NOTE The values of yr,f.w or yr.unrav given in Table 4.2 (NOP) apply unless the National Annex gives different
values.

Table 4 .2 (NOP) - Partial factors for prestress action for ultimate limit states

Factor for
Value Applied to ULS verification type
pres tress
Verifications where an increase in prestress
Yv.rav 1,00 Prestress force for would be favourable
bondedandunbonded
tendons Verifications where an increase in prestress
YP.unfav 1,20
would be unfavourable
Verifications where increase in stress would be
YaP,sup 0,80
favourable
Verifications where increase in stress would be
YaP,inf 1,20 Change in stress in
unfavourable
unbonded tendons
Verifications where linear analysis with
YaP,sup
1,0 uncracked sections, i.e. assuming a lower limit
Ya P,inf
of deformations, is applied

(2) Partial factors YaP.sup or YtiP.inr shall be applied to the change in stress in unbonded prestressing
tendons associated with the deformation of the member for ultimate limit state verifications (see
7.6.5(4)).
NOTE The values of yar,sup and ytir,;nr given in Table 4.2 (NDP) apply unless the National Annex gives different
values.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
64
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

4.3.3 Pa rtial factors for m a teria ls

(1) Partial factors for materials ys, ye, YCE and yv shall be used.
NOTE 1 The values of ys. ye, ycE and yv in Table 4.3 (NOP) apply unless the National Annex gives different values.

NOTE 2 For fire design the partial factors are obtained from pr EN 1992-1-2. For seismic design the partial factors
are obtained from EN 1998 (all parts).

Table 4 .3 (NOP) - Partial factors for materials

Yv for s hea r a nd punching

Design situations - Ys for reinforcing and Ye and YcE for
resistance without shear
Limit states prestre ssing steel concrete
r e inforce ment
Persistent and transient
1,15 1,5oa 1,40
design situation
Fatigue design situation 1,15 1,50 1,40
Accidental design situation 1,00 1,15 1,15
Serviceability limit state 1,00 1,00 -

NOTE The partial factors for materials correspond to geometrical deviations of Tolerance Class 1 and
Execution Class 2 in EN 13670.
a The value for ycE applies when the indicative value for the elastic modulus according 5.1.4(2) is used. A value
ycr, = 1,3 applies when the elastic modu lus is determined according to 5.1.4(1).

(2) Lower values of partial factor rsand Yv for the verificat ion of the ULS in case of persistent, transient
and accidental des ign s ituations may be used according to A.3 if a des ign value of the effective depth dd is
considered.
(3) Lower values of Ys. ye, YCE and yv may be used if justified by measu res reducing the uncertainty in
the calculated resistance, as specified in Annex A.
(4) To allow for increased uncertainty and variability of concrete s trength in cast-in-place concrete
members, cast in the ground at significant depth without permanent casing, the partial factor Ye should
be multiplied by a factor k c;p.
NOTE The value of kcip = 1,1 applies in general and the value kcip = l,O for cast· in-place concrete members built
in accordance with EN 1536, EN 1538 or EN 14199 un less the National Annex gives different values.

4.4 Requirements for connection of elements to concrete members

(1) Reinforcement which is either cast-in or drilled-in and grouted into hardened concrete extending out
of a member and/or connecting a member to an adjacent member, shall be properly anchored into the
concrete member.
(2) The design of fastenings used to connect structural elements or non-structu ral elements to concrete
members and anchor/ transmit the actions into the concrete (local effects) shall be done in accordance
with EN 1992-4. The transmiss ion of these actions from the fastenings within the concrete member to its
supports (global effects) shall be done in accordance with this standard.
NOTE For connections using post-installed reinforcing steel systems, see 11.4.8.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
65
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

5 Materials
5.1 Concrete
5.1.1 General

(1) 5.1 gives provisions for normal weight and heavy weight concrete.
NOTE 1 Specific rules for steel fib re reinforced concrete are given in Informative Annex L.

NOTE 2 Specific rules for lightweight aggregate concrete are given in Informative Annex M.

NOTE 3 Specific ru les for concrete using recycled aggregates are given in Informative Annex N.

(2) Concrete used for structures designed in accordance with this Eurocode shall comply with EN 206.

5.1.2 Properties and related conditions

(1) Specified properties and related conditions of concrete that are required for design according to
this Eurocode should include at least:
concrete strength class according to 5.1.3(3) and the strength development class according to B.3 (1 );

aggregate sizes (Duppcr and D1owcr) in acco rdance with EN 2 06;

exposure class related to environmental conditions and exposure resistance classes, respectively
according to Clause 6;

chloride class in accordance with EN 206;

execution class in acco rdance with EN 13670.

(2) The following properties may either be derived in accordance with the provisions of 5.1 and
Annex B, or may be determined by testing, or may be specified fo r special cases:
tensile st rength {fctm,/c•kO.os,/ctk0.95);

modulus of elasticity (Ecm);

Poisson's ratio;

coefficient of thermal expansion ( a c,t1>);

creep coefficient (q>);

shrinkage value (£cs);

density of concrete.

(3) The design properties of concrete may be used for service temperatures in the range from - 40 °C
to +100 °C.
(4) Experimental verification should be used in cases where a member o r a structure is sensitive to
any of these properties and there is no previous experience or established practice showing that such
verifications are not necessary.
NOTE For guidance to experimental determination of creep and shrinkage values, see Annex B.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
66
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

5.1.3 Stre ngth

(1) The compressive strength of concrete shall be denoted by concrete strength classes which relate t o
the characteristic (5 %) cyli nder strength fck of the concrete in accordance w ith EN 206, determined at an
age t,.r.
(2) The value for t ref
a) should be taken as 28 days in gener al; or
b) may be taken between 28 and 91 days when specified for a project.
(3) The compressive and tensile strength characteristics necessary for design should be taken from
Table 5.1.

Table 5.1 - Compressive and t e ns ile stren gth of concr et e [MPa]

Strength classes for concrete [EN 206)

Governing
I C12/ C16/ C20/ C25/ C30/ C35/ C40/ C45/ CSO/ CSS/ C60/ C70/ CBO/ C90/ C100/ formulae
15 20 2S 30 37 4S 50 SS 60 67 75 85 9S l OS 115

/ck 12 16 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 70 80 90 100 -
/cm 20 24 28 33 38 43 48 53 58 63 68 78 88 98 108 fem = /ck+ 8 MPa
fctm = 0,3/ck2/3
(fck s; SO MPa)
/con 1,6 1,9 2,2 2,6 2,9 3,2 3,5 3,8 4,1 4,2 4,3 4,5 4,7 4,9 5,1
/ctn1 = l,lfc1< 1/3
Uck >so MPa)
= 0,7f«m
/ctk;0,05 1,1 l,3 1,5 1,8 2,0 2,2 2,5 2,7 2,9 2,9 3,0 3,2 3,3 3,5 3,6 [ctJ<;o.os
(5 %-fractile)
c<J<;0,95 = 1,3/crm
/ctk;0,95 2,0 2,5 2,9 3,3 3,8 4,2 4,6 4,9 5,3 5,4 5,6 5,9 6,2 6,4 6,6 /(95 %-fractile)

NOTE 1 All strength classes apply un less the Nationa l Annex excludes specific classes.

NOTE 2 Intermediate strength classes can be used, if included in the National Annex.

NOTE 3 The relationship between cube strength and cylinder strength is covered in EN 206.

NOTE 4 For restrictions on the scope of application of Table 5.1 to lightweight concrete or recycled aggregate
concrete, refer to Annex M and Annex N, respectively.

NOTE 5 The design clauses of SLS and for minimum reinforcement make allowance for an over-strength of
tens ile strength in a class between /ctk:o,05 and /ctk;0.95·

(4) If required, the concrete compressive strength /ck(t), should be specified for times t that can be
before or after t ref for a number of stages (e.g. demoulding, removal of propping, transfer of prestress).
(5) Where concrete tensile strength is tested and documented at the same frequency as for
compressive strength, a statistical analysis of test results may be used as a basis for the evaluation of the
tensile strength/c1k,o,os./ctk,0.95 andj~'"" as an alternative to Table 5.1.
(6) Unless verified by testing, the development of concrete strength with time, temperature, curing
conditions and binder composition should be estimated according to Annex B.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
67
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

5.1.4 Elastic deformation

(1) The values of the elastic modulus of concrete should be specified and/or determined by testing if
the structure is likely to be sensitive to deviations from the approximate indicative values given in (2).
NOTE The elastic deformations of concrete largely depend on its composition (especially the aggregates).

(2) Approximate indicative values for the modulus of elasticity Ecm may be taken as:

Ecm = kE · /cm 1/ 3 (5.1)

For concrete with quartzite aggregates kE = 9 500 may be assumed. For other types of aggregates kE can
vary between 5 000 and 13 000.
NOTE 1 The National Annex can specify values kEto be used in the country.

NOTE 2 Ecm corresponds to the secant modulus between q, = 0 and q, = 0,4.fc:m.

(3) Poisson's ratio may be taken equal to 0,2 for uncracked concrete and 0 for concrete cracked in
t ension.

5.1.5 Creep and shrinkage

(1) The creep deformation of concrete ccc(t,to) at time t for a constant compressive stress <Jc applied at
the concrete age to, shall be given by:

£cc(t,to) = <p(t,to) · (ac/Ec,20) (5.2)

where
Ee.is is the tangent modulus of elast icity, which may be taken as l,05Ecm, or calculated more accurately
from Formula (B.21) or determined by testing.
NOTE Creep and shrinkage of the concrete depend on the ambient humidity, the dimensions of the element,
the composition of the concrete and curing conditions. Creep is also influenced by the maturity of the concrete when
the load is first applied and depends on the duration and magnitude of the loading.

(2) If the compressive stress of concrete at an age to does not exceed 0,40fcm(to) under the quasi-
permanent combination of actions and where great accuracy is not required, the values given in Table 5.2
may be considered as the creep coefficient <p(50y,to) for plain concrete. Where more accurate predictions
of creep are needed or where the design service life of a structure is greater than 50 years, Annex B should
be used.
NOTE Annex B provides further information and guidance, including the development of the modulus of
elasticity with time and the development of creep with time.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
68
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

Table 5.2 - Creep coefficient <p(50y,to) of plain concrete after 50 years ofloading

Age at loading Dry atmospheric conditions Humid atmospheric conditions

to (RH= 50 %) (RH= 80 %)

[days] hnb hnb

for strength
development classes of [mm] [mm]
concrete•
cs CN CR 100 200 500 1000 100 200 500 1000
3 1 1 4,2 3,8 3,4 3,1 3,0 2,8 2,6 2,5
10 7 3 3,1 2,8 2,5 2,3 2,2 2,1 2,0 1,9
32 28 23 2,4 2,2 1,9 1,8 1,7 1,6 1,6 1,5
91 91 91 1,9 1,7 1,5 1,4 1,4 1,3 1,2 1,2
365 365 365 1,4 1,3 1,1 1.0 1.0 0,9 0,9 0,8
Correction exponent A 0,82 0,79 0,75 0,72 0,71 0,68 0,66 0,64
For geometries outside the given range of notional size, Annex B should be used.
The values of the creep coefficient apply to /c1<,zs = 35 MPa. For other strength in the range of
12 MPa $./ck.28 $. 100 MPa, the values s hould be multiplied by the factor (35//ck )A where A is the
correction exponent in the table, considering the effect of the concrete strength class.
NOTE The creep coefficients are mean values with a coefficient of variation of about 30 %.
• Classes CS, CN and CR stand for slow, normal and rapid strength development of concrete, resp ectively, see
B.3(1).
b hn= 2A,/u is the notional size, where A, is the concrete cross-sectional area and u is the perimeter of that
part which is exposed to drying.

(3) When the compressive stress at age to exceeds the value 0,40fcm(to) un der the quasi-permanent
combination of actions then creep non-linearity should be considered. In such cases the non-linear
notional creep coefficient should be obtained according to Annex B.
(4) Values for total shrinkage after 50 years are given in Table 5.3 (NOP) for plain concrete. Where a
more accurate shrinkage prediction is required, Annex B should be used.
NOTE The values in Table 5.3 (NDP) apply unless the National Annex gives different values.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
69
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:20 23 (E)

Table 5.3 ( NOP) - Nominal total sh ri nkage va lues Ecs,soy (% 0) for concre te after a d uration of
d rying of 5 0 years

Dry atmos phe ric conditions Humid atmospheric cond itio ns

(RH= 5 0 %) (RH= 8 0 %)
Stre ngth
developme nt / ck,28 hn hn
of concre te• [mm] [mm]
100 20 0 5 00 1 0 00 100 200 5 00 1 00 0
20 0,57 0,56 0,48 0,36 0,33 0,32 0,28 0,21
Class CS 35 0,53 0,51 0,45 0,35 0,31 0,31 0,27 0,22
50 0,49 0,48 0,43 0,35 0,30 0,29 0,27 0,23
20 0,67 0,65 0,56 0,41 0,38 0,37 0,32 0,24
35 0,60 0,59 0,51 0,39 0,34 0,34 0,30 0,24
Class CN
50 0,55 0,54 0,48 0,37 0,31 0,31 0,28 0,23
80 0,48 0,48 0,43 0,36 0,30 0,30 0,28 0,25
35 0,76 0,74 0,65 0,48 0,42 0,41 0,36 0,28
Class CR 50 0,67 0,66 0,58 0,44 0,36 0,35 0,32 0,26
80 0,55 0,54 0,49 0,39 0,31 0,30 0,28 0,25
NOTE 1 The values are mean values with a coefficient of variation of about 30 %.
NOTE 2 The notional size hu is defined in the notes to Table 5.2.
• Classes CS, CN and CR stand for slow, normal and rapid strength development of concrete, respectively,
see 8.3(1).

5.1.6 Design assumptions

(1) The value of the design compressive strength shall be taken as:

fck
fed = T/cc · k tc Ye (5.3)

where
Y/cc is a factor to account for the difference between the undisturbed compressive strength of a
cylinder and the effective compressive strength that can be developed in the structural
member. It shall be taken as:
1

T/cc
= (fck,ref)3
. <
- l 'O (5.4)
1ck
k,c is a factor considering the effect of high sustained loads and of time of loadi ng on concrete
compressive strength.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
70
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

NOTE The following values apply unless the National Annex gives different values:

fck,rcf = 40 MPa;

k,c = 1,00 for c,..r s 28 days for concretes with classes CR and CN and t,er s 56 days for concretes with class CS
where the design loading is not expected for at least 3 months after casting;

ktc = 0,85 for other cases including when/ck is replaced by /ck(t) in acco rdance with 5.1.3(4).

(2) The value of the design tensile strengthfctd shall be taken as:

t.ctd -_ k tt
fctJc,0,05
Ye (5.5)

where
ktt is a factor considering t he effect of high sustained loads and of time of loading on concrete
tensile strength.
NOTE The value is kn = 0,80 for trer::; 28 days for concretes with classes CR and CN and t,.er ::; 56 days for
concretes with class CS, and kn= 0,70 for other cases includingwhen/~k(t) is determined in accordance with 5.1.3(4)
unless the National Annex gives different values.

(3) The relation between compressive stress ac and strain fc shown in Figure 5.1 and described by the
Formula (5.6) may be used to model the response of concrete to short term uniaxial compression.

Uc kTJ - T/2
-=----- (5.6)
fem 1 + (k - 2)TJ
k = 1,05 Ec111 · f c1/fc111 (5.7)
(5.8)
fct [%0] = 0,7fcm 113 :5 2,8 %0 (5.9)

fc < fcuJ [%0) = 2,8 + 14 · (1 - fcm/108) 4 :5 3,5 %0 (5.10)

NOTE Simpli fied stress distributions in cross-sections used to determine the resistance to axial and flexural
effects at the ultimate limit state are provided in 8.1.2.

(4) Other idealised stress-strain relations may be applied, if they adequately represent the behaviour
of the concrete considered.
(5) Unless more precise values are available, the mean u nit weight of normal weight reinforced
concrete for the purposes of design may be taken as 25 kN/m 3 , and for plain normal weight concrete as
24 kN/m 3 .
(6) Unless more accurate information is available, the linear coefficient of thermal expansion may be
taken as ac.th = 10 · 10-6 °c-1.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
71
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

<Jc

/ cm

0,4/cm

Figure 5.1 - Stress-strain relation for concrete in compression

5.2 Reinforcing steel

5.2.1 General

(1) 5.2 gives provisions for the following types of carbon reinforcing steels suitable for design of
concrete structures in accordance with this Eurocode:
weldable ribbed and indented reinforcing steel, in the form of bars including de-coiled bars;

weldable ribbed and indented reinforcing steel in the form of welded fabric and lattice girders.
NOTE 1 Annex I gives informa tion for assessment of existing s tructures with plain (smooth) bars.

NOTE 2 For additional or modified ru les for stainless reinforcing steel, see Annex Q.

(2) The rules in this Eurocode may be used for:

ribbed reinforcement with</> ~ 50 mm;
indented reinforcement with</>~ 14 mm.

(3) The requirements for the properties of the reinforcing steel apply for the material as placed in the
finished structure. If workshop processing or site operations can affect the properties of the reinforcing
steel, then those properties shall be verified after such operations.
(4) The requirements for the properties of the reinforcing steel apply for service temperatures in the
range of -40 °C to +100 °C unless otherwise specified by the relevant authority, or where not specified, as
agreed for a specific project by the relevant parties.
(5) Reinforcing steels used for structures in accordance with this Eurocode shall comply with the
relevant standards for reinforcing steel.
NOTE 1 The National Annex can s pecify relevan t standards for reinforcing steel.

NOTE 2 The harmonized product standard EN 10080 for reinforcing steel is currently under development .

5.2.2 Properties

(1) Specified properties of reinforcing steel that are required for design to this Eurocode shall include
at least:
strength class in accordance with Table 5.4;

ductility class in accordance with Table 5.5;

diameter or size.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
72
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(2) The following properties of reinforcing steel may be derived in accordance with the provisions of
5.2.2:
yield strength/yk or fo,2k;

stress ratio (fr//y)k;

elongation at maximum load Euk;

S-N curves for fatigue, see Annex E.

(3) Reinforcing steel suitable for design of concrete structures in accordance with this Eurocode shall
satisfy the requirements of C.4.

Table 5.4 - Strength classe s of r einforcing s teel

Properties for stress-strain-diagram Reinforcing steel strength class

(Fig. 5.2) 8400 8450 8500 8550 8600 8700
Characteristic value /yk (M Pa] 400 450 500 550 600 700
NOTE All strength classes apply unless the National Annex excludes specific classes. Intermediate strength
classes can be used, if included in the National Annex.

Table 5.5 - Ductility classes of reinforcing steel

Properties for s tress-stra in-diagram Reinforcing steel ductility class

(Fig. 5.2) A 8 c
Characteristic value of k = (fr//y)k 1,05 1,08 1,15 to 1,35
Characteristic strain at maximu m force Euk 2,5% 5,0% 7,5%

5.2.3 Welding of reinforcing bars

(1) Welding of reinforcing bars shall be designed and detailed, and welds shall be specified in the
execution specification.
(2) When the loading is predominantly static, the welding should be carried out in accordance with
EN ISO 17660.

5.2.4 Design assumptions

(1) Design shall be based on the nominal cross-section area of the reinforcing steel and the design
values derived from the characteristic values given in 5.2.2 with:

f yrt =hk/Ys and /yd =/o.zk/ys. respectively (5.11)

(2) For design either of the following assumptions may be made (see Figure 5.2):
a) an inclined post-elastic branch with a strain limit of Eud :s; &k/r.;and a maximum stress of k · /yk/Ys at
Euk. where k = (/r/fy)k;

b) a horizontal post-elastic branch without strain limit.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
73
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

1 2
C1s

kfyk
---
t---T----t-T-----,,=-.

! yk tJ:~2:::C::[_J__.
!yd

Key
1 nominal diagram for reference
2 design diagrams

Figure 5.2 - Stress-strain diagrams for carbon reinforcing steel (for tension and compression)

(3) The design value of the modulus of elasticity Es may be assumed to be 200 000 MPa for weldable
reinforcing steel unless more precise values are known.
(4) The mean unit weight of reinforcing steel for the purposes of design may be taken as 78,5 kN/ml.
(5) The coefficient of thermal expansion may be taken as a s,•h = 10 · 10-6 °c- 1 for weldable reinforcing
steel unless more precise values are known.

5.2.5 Reinforcement bar couplers

(1) Couplers for splicing of reinforcing bars shall be capable of developing strength and ductility of the
reinforcing bar as defined at C.6.

5.2.6 Headed bars for reinforcement

(1) Headed bars shall meet the performance requirements of C.7.

5.3 Prestressing steel

5.3.1 General

(1) 5.3 gives provisions for prestressing steel in the form of wires, strands and bars suitable for design
of concrete structures in accordance with this Eurocode.
(2) The requirements for the properties of the prestressing steel apply for the material as placed in the
finished structure. Design properties given in 5.3 may be used for service temperatures in the range of -
40 °C to +100 °C except for relaxation as noted in B.9(6) and unless otherwise specified by the relevant
authority, or where not specified, as agreed for a specific project by the relevant parties.
(3) Prestressing steels used for structures designed in accordance with this Eurocode shall comply
with the relevant standards for prestressing steel.
NOTE 1 The National Annex can specify relevant standards for prestressing steel.

NOTE 2 The harmonized product standard EN 10138 for prestressing steels is currently under development

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
74
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1 :20 23 (E)

5.3.2 Prop e r ties

(1) Specified properties of prest ressing steel that are required for design t o this Eurocode shall include
at least:
strength class in accordance with Table 5.6 unless different values are given in t he relevant standard
for p restressing steel;

product type wire, strand or bar;

d iameter or size.

(2) The following propert ies of prestressing steel may be derived in accordance with the provisions of
5.3, Annex B.9 and An nex E:
0,1 % proof stress/ro.1ki

tensile strength /pk;

stress rati o lfp//po,1)k;

elongation at maximum load Euki

relaxation properties according to B.9;

S-N curves for fatigue according to Annex E.

Table 5.6 - Stren gth classes of prest ressing st eel

Prope r tie s in s tress -stra in-diagra m (Fig. 5.3) (a ) Wires•

(ch a r a ct eris tic valu e s) Y1570 Y1670 Y177 0 Y1860
proof stress /po.1k (MP a] 1380 1470 1 550 1650
tensile strength/pk [MPa] 1 570 1670 1 770 1860
(b) Stran d s•
Y1770 Y1860 Y1960 Y2060
proof stress /po,1k [MPa] 1 560 1640 1 740 1830
t ensile strength/pk [MPa] 1 770 1860 1960 2 060
(c) Bars•
Y1030 Y1050 Y1100 Y1230
proof stress /po.1k [MPa] 835 950 900 1 080
t ensile strength/pk [MPa] 1 030 1050 1100 1230
NOTE 1 All strength classes apply un less the National Annex excludes specific classes. Intermediate strength
classes can be used, if included in the National Annex.
NOTE2 For requirements to classify steel products, see C.S.
a In all strength classes, stress ratio of k = (fp/fpo.1)k;;::: 1,1 and characteristic strain at maximum force
Euk = 3,5 % apply.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
75
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(3) Prestressing steel suitable for design of concrete structures in accordance with this Eurocode shall
satisfy the requirements of C.5.
(4) More accurate information based on production data of the prestressing steel may be used in
des ign such as e.g. stress-strain diagrams, modulus of elasticity and isothermal stress relaxation.

5.3.3 Design assumptions

(1) Design shall be based on the nominal cross-section area of the prestressing steel and the design
values derived from the characteristic values given in 5.3.2 with:

/r<1 =/ro.1k/Ys (5.12)

(2) For design, either of the following assumptions may be made (see Figure 5.3):
a) an inclined post-elastic branch, with a strain limit £ud ~ c"k/;;s and a maximum stress of.fpk/Ys at £uk;

b) or a horizontal post-elastic branch without strain limit.

1 2
f pk !----+---++--~~
f pO,lk
/pd

Key
1 nominal diagram for reference
2 design diagrams

Figure 5.3 - Stress-strain diagrams for prestressing steel (only tension)

(3) The design value for the modulus of elasticity Er may be assumed to be 200 000 MPa. If more
accurate values are required, values based on testing should be used.
NOTE The actual value of the E-modulus for wires is 205 000 MPa. For strands it can range from 190 000 MPa
to 200 000 MPa, depending on the manufacturing process and the geometrical configuration of the prestressing
steel. For bars, the modulus is 205 000 MPa however, the secant modulus between 0 and 0,7/pk. can be as low as
170 000 MPa depending on the manufacturing process.

(4) The mean unit weight of prestressing steel for the purposes of design may be taken as 78,5 kN/m 3 .
(5) The coefficient of thermal expansion may be taken as « s.th =10 · 10-6 °c- 1 for prestressing steel
unless more precise values are known.
(6) The relaxation loss may be obtained either from Table 8.4, from the relevant standard for
prestressing steel or may be based on testing and adapted for the effects of initial stress and time in
accordance with Annex 8.9 where requ ired.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
76
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

5.4 Prestressing systems

5.4.1 General

(1) Prestressing systems including tendon anchorage assemblies and tendon coupler assemblies used for
design of concrete structures in accordance with this Eurocode shall comply with the relevant standards
for prestressing systems.
NOTE 1 The National Annex can specify relevant standards for prestressing systems.

NOTE 2 EAD 160004 is available for the assessment and determination of properties of prestressing systems
required for design to this Eurocode.

(2) As a minimum the following information shall be provided in the technical documentation of the
post-tensioning systems as basis for the design of concrete structures in accordance with this Eurocode:
product type and properties of prestressing steel;

types of applications of tendons;

types and dimensions of ducts, anchorages and tendon couplers;

arrangement a nd detailing of tendon supports;

minimum spacing and edge distances of anchorages and tendon couplers with corresponding local
anchorage zone reinforcement as a function of concrete strength;

minimum rad ii of tendon curvature;

friction coefficients;

anchorage seating;

details for corrosion protection as a function of the tendon protection level.

(3) Prestressing tendons shall be adequately and permanently protected against corrosion along the
tendon length and at anchorages.
(4) Internal bonded post-tensioning tendons may be provided with different levels of corrosion
protection:
Protection Level 1: Tendon grouted within a metal duct;

Protection Level 2: Tendon fully encapsulated within a grouted polymer d uct and anchorage caps;

Protection Level 3: Tendon fully encapsulated within a grouted polymer duct and anchorage caps
and encapsulation monito rable with electrical resistance meas urement or equivalent methods.

NOTE Guidance for the assessment of tendon protection levels and polymer ducts can be found in
fib Bulletin 75.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
77
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

5.4.2 Anchorage zones

(1) The strength of the anchorage and coupling devices and anchorage zones shall be sufficient for the
transfer of the design tendon force at ULS to the concrete. The formation of cracks in the anchorage zones
shall not impair the function of the anchorage and coupling device. These requirements may be assumed
to be complied with if:
detailing of the local anchorage zones is in accordance with the technical documentation of a post-
tensioning system which complies with 5.4.1(1);

design and detailing of the general anchorage zones is in accordance wit h 11.6.4.

6 Durability and concrete cover

6.1 General
(1) A durable structure shall meet the requirements of serviceability, strength and stability throughout
its design service life, without significant loss of utility, with anticipated maintenance but without major
repair being necessary, in line with the general requirements of EN 1990.
(2) The required protection against deterioration of t he structure shall be established by considering
environmental conditions, intended use, design service life, maintenance programme and actions.
(3) Concrete structures complying with the provisions of this standard, EN 206 and EN 13670 are
assumed to be sufficiently durable. Requirements for durability should be considered in addition to SLS
and ULS.
NOTE 1 For the purpose of assess ing durability, end of design service life is considered to have been reached
when there is corrosion attack in the reinforcement and/or loss of concrete thickness or strength of the structural
element, to an extent that impairs its performance.

NOTE 2 Corrosion attack can be judged by loss of bar diameter in the case of carbonation attack and pitting depth
in the reinforcement in the case of chloride attack.

(4) The possible significance of direct and indirect actions (like temperature, shrinkage and creep),
environmental conditions and consequential effects shall be considered.
(5) Corrosion protection of steel reinforcement should be provided by controlling quality of concrete,
thickness and extent of cracking of the concrete in the cover zone.
(6) Where metal fastenings are not fully embedded in concrete with sufficient cover, they should be of
corrosion res istant material. Where it is possible to inspect and replace or repai r them, fastenings with
protective coating may be used in exposed conditions.
(7) Further requirements to those given in this clause should be considered for special situations (e.g.
for structures of temporary or monumental nature, structures subjected to extreme or unusual actions
or extraordinary exposure conditions, etc.).

6.2 Requirements for durability

(1) In order to achieve the required design service life of the structure, adequate measures shall be
taken to protect each concrete member against the relevant environmental actions.
(2) The requ irements for durability shall be considered at all stages, including:
structural conception;

material selection;

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
78
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

construction details;

execution;

quality management;

life-time maintenance.

(3) Special measures may be considered (e.g. coatings of concrete surface, cathodic protection,
corrosion inhibitors or reinforcing steel with metallic or non-metallic coatings). For s uch situations, the
effects on all relevant material properties and design parameters should be considered, including bond.
For stainless steel, the provisions in Annex Q shall be used.

6.3 Environmental exposure conditions

(1) The environmental exposure conditions are those chemical, physical and biological conditions to
which the structure is exposed (additional to the mechanical actions). The exposure conditions can be
different on the various surfaces or elevations ofa concrete member, and consequently while the concrete
shall meet the relevant requirements, the requirements for cover to the reinforcement and the limitation
of cracking may be different.
(2) All relevant forms of attack on the structure s hall be taken into account. The forms of attack include:
alkali-aggregate reaction (AAR);

biological attacks arising from e.g.:

algae;

vegetation;

chemical attacks arising from e.g. from soil, ground water or the use of the structure (storage of
liquids, etc.):

acid solutions;

soft water;

sulfates;

other chemicals;

delayed ettringite formation (DEF);

physical attack, arising from e.g.:

abrasion;

temperature change (including freeze/thaw);

water penetration;

reinforcement corrosion due to carbonation or chlorides ingress;

reinforcement corrosion that can be due to chlorides present in concrete before exposure;

stress corrosion cracking.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
79
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(3) Table 6.1 defines exposure classes X for the most common environmental exposure conditions.
NOTE 1 Guidance for the selection of the exposure classes (e.g. the duration of the exposure, limits for RH in the
XC classes or limits for the chloride contents in the XD and XS classes as well as classification of the freeze/thaw
climate in the XF classes and any additional categories) can be found in the place of use of the concrete, based on
local geographical an d climatic condi tions, the operational practices an d levels of protection at nationa l level.

NOTE 2 Table 6.1 provides examples where exposure classes occur unless the National Annex provides other
examples or requirements for the selection of exposure classes.

Table 6.1 - Exposure classes related to environmental conditions

Informative examples where exposure classes
Class Description of the environment
can occur (NOP)
1 . No risk of corrosion or attack
For concrete without reinforcement or embedded metal:
All exposures except where there is freeze/thaw, Plain concrete members without any
XO
abrasion or chemical attack. reinforcement.
2. Corrosion of embedded metal induced by carbonation
Where concrete containing steel reinforcement or other embedded metal is exposed to air and moisture, the
exposure should be classified as follows:
Concrete inside buildings with low air humid ity,
XCl Dry.
where the corrosion rate will be insignificant.
Concrete surfaces subject to long-term water
contact or permanently subme rged in water or
permanently exposed to high humidi ty;
XC2 Wet or permanent high humidity, rarely dry. many foundations; water containments (not
external).
NOTE 1 Leachi ng could also cause corrosion (see (5). and
(6), XA classes).
Concrete inside buildings with moderate humidity
XC3 Moderate humid ity. and not permanent high hum idity;
External concrete sheltered from rain.
Concrete surfaces subject to cyclic water contact
XC4 Cyclic wet and dry. (e.g. external concrete not sheltered from rain as
walls and facades).
3. Corrosion of embedded metal induced by chlorides, excluding sea water
Where concrete containing steel reinforcement or other embedded metal is subject to contact with water
containing chlorides, including de-icing salts, from sources other than from sea water, the exposure should be
classified as follows:
XD l Moderate humidity Concrete surfaces exposed to airborne chlorides.
Swimming pools;
Concrete components exposed to ind ustria l waters
XD2 Wet, rarely dry. containing chlorides.
NOTE 2 If the chl oride content of the water is sufficiently
low then XDl applies.
Parts of bridges exposed to water containing
chlorides;
XD3 Cyclic wet and dry.
Concrete roads, pavements and car park slabs in
areas where de-icing agents are frequently used.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
80
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Inform ative examples where exposure classes

Class Description of th e e nvir on me nt
ca n occur (NOP)
4. Corrosion of embedded metal induced by chlorides from sea water
Where concrete containing steel reinforcement or other embedded metal is subject to contact with chlorides
from sea water or air carrying salt originating from sea water, the exposure should be classified as follows:
Exposed to airborne salt but not in direct contact
XS1 Structures near to or on the coast.
w ith sea water.
Parts of marine structures and structures in
XS2 Permanently submerged.
seawater.
Parts of marine structures and structures
XS3 Tidal, splash and spray zones. temporarily or permanently directly over sea
water.
5. Freeze/ Thaw Attack
Where concrete is exposed to significant attack by freeze/thaw cycles whilst wet, the exposure should be
classified as follows. A XF-classification is not necessa1y in cases where freeze/thaw cycles are rare.
Vertical concrete surfaces exposed to rain and
XF1 Moderate water saturation, without de-icing agent.
freezing.
Vertica l concrete surfaces of road structures
XF2 Moderate water saturation, with de -icing agent.
exposed to freezing and airborne de-icing agents.
Horizontal concrete surfaces exposed to rain and
XF3 High water saturation, without de-icing agents.
freezing.
Road and bridge decks exposed to de-icing agents
and freezing;
High water saturation with de-icing agents or sea concrete surfaces exposed to direct spray
XF4
water. containing de-icing agents and freezing;
splash zone of marine structures exposed to
freezing.
6. Chemical attack
Where concrete is exposed to chemical attack from natura l soils and ground water, the exposure should be
classified as follows :
Natural soils and ground water according to
XA1 Slightly aggressive chemical environment.
Table 6.2.
Natural soils and ground water according to
XA2 Moderately aggressive chemical environment.
Table 6.2.
Natural soils and ground water according to
XA3 Highly aggressive chemical environment.
Table 6.2.
7. Mechanical at tack of concrete by a brasion
Where concrete is exposed to mechanical abrasion, the exposure should be classified as follows:
Members of industrial sites frequented by vehicles
XM1 Moderate abrasion.
with pneumatic tyres.
Members of industrial sites frequented by fork lifts
XM2 Heavy abrasion.
with pneumatic or solid rubber tyres.
Members of industrial sites frequented by fork lifts
XM3 Extreme abrasion.
with elastomer or steel tyres or track vehicles.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
81
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(4) In addition to the exposure conditions in Table 6.1, the other particular forms of aggressive or
indirect action according to (2) and (6) shall be considered.
(5) Classification of the exposure with respect to natural chemical attack from the soil and ground
water should refer to Table 6.2, the validity of which is ens ured in the case of natural soil and ground
water at water/soil temperatures between 5 °C and 25 °C and a water velocity sufficiently slow to
approximate to static conditions. The most onerous value for any s ingle chemical characteristic
determines the class. Where two or more aggressive characteristics lead to the same class, the
environment should be classified into the next higher class unless a special study for this specific case
proves that it is not necessary.
NOTE 1 Guidance on the selection of exposure classes for chemical attack from natural soil and ground water
and any add itional categories can be found in the place of use of the concrete based on local ground conditions and
levels of protection at national level.
NOTE 2 The exposure classes of Table 6.2 apply unless the National Annex specifies additional exposure classes
and limiting values for chemical attack.
(6) In the case of chemical attack, a s pecial study may be needed to establish the relevant exposure
conditions and appropriate protective measures, where there is :
values outside the limiting values of Table 6.2;
leaching, e.g. due to long-term contact to (soft) water or other liquids (see also XC2);
other aggressive chemicals;
chemically polluted gro und or water;
high water velocity in combination with the chemicals in Table 6.2.

Table 6 .2 - Limiting values for exposure classes for chemical attack from natural s oil and
ground water

Chemical Reference test

XAl XA2 XA3
characteristic method
Groundwa t e r

so42- (mg/I] EN 196-2

~ 200 and > 600 and > 3 000 and
:::; 600 :::; 3 000 :::; 6 000
pH ISO 4316 :::; 6,5 and~ 5,5 < 5,5 and ~ 4,5 < 4,5 and ~ 4,0
EN 13577 ~ 15 and:::; 40
> 40 and > 100 up t o
C02 [mg/I]
:::; 100 saturation
NH4+ [mg/I] ISO 7150-1 ~ 15 and:::; 30 > 30 and :::; 60 > 60 and:::; 100
Mgz+ [mg/I] EN ISO 7980
~ 300 and > 1 000 and > 3 000 up to
:::; 1 000 :::; 3 000 saturation
Soil
~ 2 000 and > 3 OOOc and > 12 000 and
S042- (mg/kg]• total EN 196-2b
:::; 3 000< :::; 12 000 :::; 24 000
Acidity according to
EN 16502 > 200 Not encountered in practice
Baumann Gully [ml/kg]
• Clay soils with a permeability below 10- s m/s may be moved into a lower class.
b The test method prescribes the extraction of $042- by hydroch loric acid; alternatively, water extraction may

be used, if experience is ava ilable in the place of use of the concrete.

c The 3 000 mg/kg limit should be reduced to 2 000 mg/kg, where there is a risk of accumulation of sulfate
ions in the concrete due to drying and wetting cycles or capillary suction.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
82
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

6.4 Exposure resistance classes

(1) Exposure resistance classes ERC should be used to classify concrete with respect to resistance
against corrosion induced by carbonation (class XRC) or by chlorides (class XRDS) and damage caused
by freeze/thaw attack (XRF). Selection of concrete to resist deterioration and protect against corrosion
for all t hose exposure classes (EC) that are relevant, should be based on the exposure resistance classes
given in EN 206.
NOTE 1 As specified in EN 206, complemented by the provisions valid in the place of use, the ERC can be satisfied
by compliance with relevant limiting values and/or, for some ERCs, by proving the performance in meeting
specification of relevant physical characteristics determ ined using standardized test methods. In the event EN 206
does not refer to ERC, the National Annex or National Application Document to EN 206 can provide the necessary
advice on how to implement ERC rules in a country.

NOTE 2 An informative Annex P provides an alternative ap proach to design cover for durability without use of
Exposure Resistance Classes (ERC) based on EN 1992-1-1:2004. The use of ERC according to 6.4 applies unless the
National Annex specifies use of Annex P..

(2) The structural design should be based on a realistic concrete strength class consistent with the
required exposure resistance class ERC.
NOTE The compos ition of the concrete, e.g. the type of binder and the water-binder ratio, affects
simultaneously the durability, physical and mechanical properties of the concrete. A choice based on the protection
of reinforcement can lead to higher strength classes than required for the structural design and hence, can require
higher minimum reinforcement and other measures.

(3) Adequate durability may be assumed against corrosion caused by carbonation or chloride ingress
where cover to reinforcement is selected appropriate to the exposure class, exposure resistance class and
the design service life and not less than the minimum cover for durability Cmin,d ur given in Table 6.3 (NOP)
and Table 6.4 (NOP).
(4) Concrete shall be specified with a maximum permitted chloride content in accordance with the
chloride content classes (Cl) in EN 206.
(5) Concrete to resist freeze-thaw attack shall be specified using XRF classes according to EN 206.
(6) Adequate durability against chemical attack may be assumed when concrete with a composition
documented to be resistant agains t the potential deterioration mechanisms for the intended design
service life is used. Otherwise additional protective measures should be taken, such as linings or
durable/replaceable coating.
NOTE Rules on concrete composition to resist the chemical attacks detailed in Table 6.2 are given in EN 206 or
in its national application document.

(7) Adequate durability against mechanical attack may be assumed when concrete with a composition
documented to be resistant against the potential abrasion for the intended design s ervice life is used.
Otherwise additional protective measures should be taken, such as sacrificial layers acco rding to
6.5.2.2(6).
NOTE Rules on concrete composition to resist the mechanical attacks detailed in Table 6.1 can be given in
EN 206 or in its national application document.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
83
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

6.5 Concrete cover

6.5.1 Nominal cover

(1) The nominal cover shall be specified in the execution specification. It is defined as a minimum
cover, Cmin (see 6.5.2), plus an allowance in des ign for deviation, /J.cdev (see 6.5.3):

Cnom = Cmin + !J.Cdev (6.1)

(2) Sufficient concrete cover shall be provided in order to ensure:

the safe transmission of bond forces;

the protection of the steel against corrosion (durability);

an adequate fire resistance (see EN 1992-1-2, where axis distance is used).

(3) For bored piles and for diaphragm walls the nominal cover values for durability and bond of this
Eurocode apply. The cover values according to EN 1536 and EN 1538 considering the type and deviations
of execution should be checked additionally. The largest value according to this Eurocode and EN 1536
or EN 1538 applies.

6.5.2 Minimum cover

6.5.2.1 General

(1) The value for Cm1n s hall satisfy the requirements for both bond and durability:

Cmin =max {Cmin,dur + I/J.c; Cmin,b; 10 mm} (6.2)

where

Cmin.dur minimum cover required for environmental conditions, see 6.5.2.2;

I!J.c sum of the following applicable reductions and additions:

/J.cmin.30 reduction of minimum cover for structures with design life of 30 years or less, see
6.5.2.2(2);
/J.cm1n.exc reduction of minimum cover for superior compact ion or improved curing, see
6.5.2.2(3);
/J.cm1n.r additional minimum cover for prestressing tendons, see 6.5.2.2(4);

!J.Cdur,rcdl and !J.Cdur. red2

reduction of minimum cover for use of additional concrete protection or use of
special measures for protection of reinforcing s teel, see 6.5.2.2(5) and 6.5.2.2(9);

!J.Cd ur,abr additional minimum cover for abrasion, see 6.5.2.2(6);

Cm1n.b minimum cover for bond requ irement, see 6.5.2.3.

(2) For concrete cast directly against soil surface, the minimum cover should be increased by /J.cm1n
considering the increased uncertainty and variability of concrete and the reduced compaction against
soil.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
84
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

NOTE The increase of the cover is t.cm1n = +S mm for casting against a vertical soil surface and t.cm1n = 0 mm
for a horizontal soil ground surface unless the National Annex gives other values.
(3) Minimum cover to post-installed reinforcing bars with respect to the transfer of bond forces and
durability is given in 6.5.2 and w ith respect to drilling and installation in 11.4.8(2).

6.5.2 .2 Min imum cover for du rab ility

(1) The minimum concrete covers Cm1n,<1ur dependent on design service life, exposure class and exposure
resistance class (ERC) are given in Table 6.3 (NOP) and Table 6.4 (NOP).
NOTE 1 The recommended minimum covers apply unless the National Annex gives other values.

NOTE 2 Additional and intermediate or a selection of exposure res istance classes can be applied according to the
National Annex with correspondingly adjusted minimum cover for durability, provided they are based on the same
methodology and give protection against deterioration consistent with that inherent in Table 6.3 (NOP) and
Table 6.4 (NOP).

Table 6.3 (NDP) - Minimum concrete cover Cm1n,dur for carbon reinforcing steel - Carbonation

Exposure class (carbonation)

XCl XC2 XC3 XC4
ERC
Design service life (years)
50 100 50 100 50 100 50 100
XRC0,5 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
XRC 1 10 10 10 10 10 15 10 15
XRC2 10 15 10 15 15 25 15 25
XRC3 10 15 15 20 20 30 20 30
XRC4 10 20 15 25 25 35 25 40
XRC5 15 25 20 30 25 45 30 45
XRC6 15 25 25 35 35 55 40 55
XRC7 15 30 25 40 40 60 45 60
NOTE 1 XRC classes for resistance against corrosion induced by carbonation are derived from the carbonation
depth [mm] (characteristic value 90 % fractile) assumed to be obtained after 50 years under reference
conditions (400 ppm C02 in a constant 65 % -RH environment and at 20 °C). The designation value of XRC has
the dimension of a carbonation rate [mm/ /""(years)].
NOTE 2 The recommended minimum concrete cover values Cmin.dur assume execution and curing according to
EN 13670 with at least execution class 2 and curing class 2.
NOTE 3 The minimum covers can be increased by an additional safety element flCdur.y considering special
requirements (e.g. more extreme environmental conditions).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
85
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:20 23 (E)

Ta ble 6.4 (NDP) - Mini m um concrete cover Cm1n,dur for carb on r e inforcing s teel - Chlorides

Expos u re class (chlorides )

XSl XS2 XS3 XDl XD2 XD3
ERC
Design service life (year s) Design service life (year s )
50 1 00 50 10 0 50 10 0 50 100 50 1 00 50 1 00
XRDS 0,5 20 20 20 30 30 40 20 20 20 30 30 40
XRDS l 20 25 25 35 35 45 20 25 25 35 35 45
XRDS 1 ,5 25 30 30 40 40 50 25 30 30 40 40 50
XRDS2 25 30 35 45 45 55 25 30 35 45 45 55
XRDS3 30 35 40 50 55 65 30 35 40 50 55 65
XRDS4 30 40 50 60 60 80 30 40 50 60 60 80
XRDS5 35 45 60 70 70 - 35 45 60 70 70 -

XRDS6 40 50 65 80 - - 40 50 65 80 - -
XRDS8 45 55 75 - - - 45 55 75 - - -
XRDS lO so 65 80 - - - 50 65 80 - - -

NOTE 1 XRDS classes for resistance against corrosion induced by chloride ingress are derived from the depth
of chlorides penetration [mm) (characteristic value 90 % fractile), corresponding to a reference chlorides
concentration (0,6 % by mass of binder (cement+ type II additions)), assumed to be obtained after SO years on
a concrete exposed to one-sided penetration of reference seawater (30 g/I NaC l) at 20 °C. The designa tion va lue
of XRDS has the dimens ion of a diffus ion coefficient (10-13 m2 /s].
NOTE 2 The recommended minimum concrete cover values Cmin.dur assume execution and curing according to
EN 13670 with at least execution class 2 and curing class 2.
NOTE 3 The min imum covers can be increased by an additiona l safety element Llcdur.v considering special
requirements (e.g. more extreme environmental conditions).

(2) For temporary structur es or for structures with a design service life of 30 years or less, Cmin,dur for a
design service life of 50 years according t o Table 6.3 (NOP) and Table 6.4 (NOP) may be reduced by
- ~Cmin,30·

NOTE The reduction of the cover is -LICmin.Jo $ 5 mm unless the National Annex gives a different value.

(3) The values of Cmin.dur given in Table 6.3 (NO P) and Table 6.4 (NO P) may be reduced -~Cmin,exc under
the following execut ion conditions:
a) enhanced compaction of concrete can be ensured by geometrical characteristics, placement and
curing (e.g. members with slab geometry with positions of reinforcement not affected by
construction process);
b) or curing complies with at least curing Class 3 of EN 13670.
NOTE The reduction of the cover is -Llcmin,exc $ 5 mm unl ess the National Ann ex gives a differen t valu e.

(4) For pres tressing tendons, pre- or post-tensioned, the cover values in Table 6.3 (NOP) and Table 6.4
(NOP) should be increased by Llcmin,p, except where the internal bonded post-tensioning systems are
provided with protection level 2 or 3 according t o 5.4 .l, and internal unbonded prestressing t endons are
encased in corrosion resistant sheaths.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
86
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

NOTE The addition to the cover is llcm;n,p = + 10 mm unless the National Annex gives a different value.

(5) Where the concrete is pr ovided w ith an additional protection (e.g. s urface coating) the m inimum
cover values in Table 6.3 (NDP) and Table 6.4 (NDP) may be reduced by llcdur,redl · The value to be used
shall be established based on experience or testing in line with provisions valid in the project.
NOTE The reduction of the cover is llCdur.red1 :5 10 mm unless the National Annex gives a di fferent value.

(6) For concrete abrasion accord ing to XM classes according to Table 6.1, s pecial attention should be
given on the requirements t o concrete mixes in EN 206. Optionally concrete abrasion may be allowed for
by inc reasing the concrete cover (sacrificial layer) with llcdur.abr·
NOTE The following values of llCdur.abr for sacrificial layer apply unless the National Annex gives different
values:
for XMl: llcduc.abr = + 5 mm;
for XM2: llcdur.abr = + 10 mm;
forXM3: llcduo-,abr = +15 mm.
(7) For concrete surfaces subjected to abrasion from moving objects like vehicles and wheels and not
protected by asphalt, or other protective layers, the selection of XM class and opt ional increase of
concrete cover for abrasion should be considered based on an assessment taking account of factors such
as annual daily traffic load, type of traffic, use of studded tyres as well as the concrete composition.
(8) Where insitu concrete is placed against other concrete elements (precast or insitu) the minimum
concrete cover of the reinforcement for durability is not required provided that:
th e concrete strength is at least/ck~ 25 MPa;
the interface is rough see 8.2.6(6).

(9) Where special measures according t o 6.2 (3) other than coating of the concrete surface are taken,
the minimum cover may be reduced by llCdur.redZ· The value to be used shall be established based on
experience or testing in line with provisions valid in the project.
NOTE The reduction of the cover llCdur,red2 = 0 unl ess a National Annex gives a different value.

6.5.2.3 Minimum cover for bond

(1) In order to transmit bond forces safely and to ensure adequate compaction of the concrete, the
minimum cover should not be less than C011n,b given in Tables 6.5 and 6.6.
NOTE 1 The minimum concrete cover values Cm;n.b assume execution and curing according to EN 13670 with at
least execution class 2 and curing class 2.
NOTE 2 For minimum concrete cover values Cm;n.bof pre-tensioning tendons see 13.5.1(2), Table 13.1.
NOTE 3 For minimum concrete cover values Cmin.bof bonded post-installed reinforcing steel see 11.4.8, Table
11.2.

Ta ble 6.5 - Minimum cover Cm1n,b for reinforcing steel

Steel type Cmln,ba

Separated bars Diameter of bar

Bundled bars Equivalent diameter ¢b (see 11.4.3)
a Where the specified maximum aggregate size Dupper is> 32 mm, th e minimum cover Cmh1,b should be
increased by 5 mm.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
87
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Table 6.6 - Minimum cover Cm1n,b for post-ten s ioning ducts

Cmin,b
Duct type
with transverse reinforcement> with o ut transverse reinforcement>
Circular duct 0,5¢duct::; 80 mm 1,0¢duct::; 80 mm
Rectangular duct ;:::: max{ a; b/3}b::; 80 mm ;:::: max{ a; b/2}b::; 80 mm
• The transverse reinforcement should comply with the minimum secondary reinforcement in Table 12.2 and
should be placed in the cover outside of the ducts.
b Where a :::; b for a duct with cross-sectional dimensions a and b.

6.5.3 Allowance in des ign for deviation in cover

(1) To calculate the nominal cover Cnom, an addition to the minimum cover Cm1n according to Formula
(6.2) shall be made in des ign to allow for the deviation /'J.cdev wh ich shall be taken as the absolute value of
the accepted negative deviation specified in the execution specification, e.g. given on the construction
draw ings (see EN 13670). Values for /'J.cdev are given in Table 6.7 (NOP).
NOTE Cases and values of Table 6.7 (NDP) apply unless the National Annex gives different cases and values.

Table 6 .7 (NOP) - Allowance for dev iation .1cdev

Case '1Cdev

1 In general: for execution in tolerance class 1 according to EN 13670 lOmm

2 For execution in tolerance class 2 according to EN 13670 5 mm
Where fabrication is subjected to a quality assurance system, in
3 which the systematic monitoring includes measurements of the Smm
cover
Where it can be ass ured that an accurate measurement device is
4 used for systematic monitoring and non conforming members are Omm
rejected (e.g. precast elements)
For concrete members in exposure class XCl, where the risk of
5 5 mm
corrosion is insignificant
For concrete cast against surfaces with exposed aggregate
6 Smm
(e.g. interfaces)
For concrete cast against unevenness due to formwork or 10 mm + dimension of
7
excavation sheeting (e.g. ribbed finishes or architectural textures) unevenness
Concrete cast against prepared ground (including uneven blinding
8 40mm•
layer)•
9 Concrete cast directly against unprepared soil• 75 mm•
5 mm or according to
10 Post-installed reinforcing bars
project specification
• These allowances for deviation t.Cdev also apply for bored piles and for diaphragm walls designed accord ing to this
Eurocode, unless the National Annex gives other special values.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
88
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

7 Structural analysis
7.1 General
(1) The purpose of structural analysis is to establish the distribution of either internal forces, or
stresses, strains and displacements, over the whole or part of a structure.
(2) Analyses shall be carried out using idealisations of both the structure and its geometry (see 7.2)
and the behaviour of the structure (see 7.3). The idealisations selected shall be appropriate to the
problem being considered.
(3) The effect of the geometry and properties of the structure on its behaviour at each stage of
construction shall be considered in the design.
(4) Common idealisations in behaviour of the structure used for analysis are:
linear elastic behaviour (see 7.3.1);

linear elastic behaviour with redistribution (see 7.3.2);

plastic behaviour (see 7.3.3), including strut-and-tie models and stress field models (see 7.3.3.3);

non-linear behaviour (see 7.3.4).

(5) Imperfections and second order effects shall be considered where they are significant (see 7.4).
(6) Structural analysis shall be performed consistently with the design. A specific stiffness (e.g.
torsional) or restraint at supports (e.g. moment) may be reduced or neglected in the analysis for both
ultimate and serviceability limit states if the member is designed consistently with these assumptions
and the minimum reinforcement provisions for crack control and robustness are fulfilled.
(7) Local analyses may be necessary where the assumption that plane sections remain plane Qinear
strain distribution) is not vali d.
NOTE Examples of such cases are:
in the vicinity of supports;

in the vicinity of concentrated loads;

in beam-column intersections;

in anchorage zones;

at changes in cross-section.

7.2 Structural modelling for analysis

7.2.1 Geometric imperfections

7.2.1.1 General

(1) The unfavourable effects of possible deviations in the geometry of the structure and the position of
loads shall be considered in the analysis of members and structures.
(2) Deviations in cross-section dimensions which comply with tolerance class 1 of EN 13670 are
considered in the partial factors for materials and generally may be neglected in structural analysis.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
89
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(3) Maximum deviations from theoretical geometry may be specified by the relevant authority or
agreed for a specific project by the relevant parties. Where project specific execution specifications define
stricter maximum deviations (e.g. when carrying out the assessment of an existing structure) as
described in 7.2.1.2(1), the effect of imperfections should be based on these maximum deviations
multiplied by 1,2.
(4) For members with an axial force, other than internal prestressing, imperfections and their effects
shall be considered in ultimate limit states to determine the first order effects where relevant.
(5) Imperfections may be neglected for serviceability limit states.

7.2.1.2 Re presenta tion of impe rfe ctions

(1) The following provisions apply for members and structures with an axial force and execution
deviations according to EN 13670. If project-specific execution specifications for maximum deviations
apply, these provisions should be modified in accordance wit h 7.2.1.1(3).
(2) Imperfections may be represented by an inclination ei (see Figure 7.1), given by Formula (7.1):
1
e, = ah . am . 200 (7.1)

where
ah is the reduction coefficient for length or height:

2
0,4 :::; ah = .JI :::; 1,0; (7.2)

am is the reduction coefficient for the number of members:

(7.3)

is the length or height [m], see (3);

m is the number of load bearing members in one section that bear a significant part of the vertical
load and that, due to their inclination, contribute to the effect considered.

(3) In Formulae (7.2) and (7.3), the values of I and m should be taken as follows, depending on the
effect considered:
effect on individual member (see Figure 7.1 a)): I= actual length of member, m =1;

effect on bracing system (see Figure 7.1 b)): I= height of the structure, m =number of vertical
members between two adjacent levels contributing to the horizontal force on the bracing system;

effect on intermediate or end diaphragms d istributing the horizontal loads (see Figure 7.1 c)):
I = storey height, m = number of vertical braced elements between two adjacent levels cont ributing
to the total horizontal force on the section.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
90
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(4) Alternatively (e.g. arches), the imperfection of the struct ural geometry may be determined from
the governing buckling mode. Each mode shape may be idealized by a sinusoidal profile. The amplitude
should be taken as

a;= 8; . law/2 (7.4)

where

law is half of the wavelength of the buckling mode with the lowest buckling load.

(5) For individual members, the effect of imperfections may be taken into account in two alternative
ways:
a) For members in statically determinate structures, as an eccentricity e; given by:

(7.5)

where lo is the effective length;

For walls and individual columns in braced systems, e; = io/400 may always be used as a simplification,
corresponding to ah= 1,0.

b) For members in bot h statically determinate and indeterminate structures as a fictitious transverse
force FH.i in the position that gives maximum moment:

1) for unbraced members (see Figure 7.1 al)):

(7.6)

2) for braced members (see Figure 7.1 a2)):

(7.7)

where Fv is the vertical load.

For walls and individual columns in braced systems 8; = 1/200 may always be used as a simplification,
corresponding to ah = 1.

The force F H,i may be substituted by some other equivalent transverse action. Since t he force F H,i is
fictitious, it should not be added to the forces transmitted by the individual member to other members of
the structure.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
91
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Fv f v,;

al) unbraced a2) braced

a) Individual members with eccentric axial force or lateral force

b) Bracing system
(m = 3 i.e. 2 columns plus 1 cl) Intermediate d iaphragm c2) Top d iaphragm
bracing wall; I = height of
st ructure)
Key
length of a member (length of structure in b))

Figure 7.1 - Examples of the effe ct of geometric impe rfections

(6) For structures not part of a bridge, the effect of the inclination e; may be represented by the
fictitious transverse forces, indicated in Formulae (7.8), (7.9) and (7.10), to be included in the analysis
together with other actions. If the foundation is considered as a full diaphragm, equal and opposite forces
should be applied at the level of foundations so that no reactions are transmitted to the foundations due
to these fictitious forces.
Effect on bracing system (see Figure 7.1 b)):

(7.8)

The overall effect of geometrical imperfections may be addressed by designing the structure to take
account of equivalent horizontal loads acting at the centroid of the individual intermediate diaphragms.
In this case, the load is determined according to Formula (7.8) by replacing (Nb - N.) with the total
vertical load acting on the actual intermediate diaphragm.
Effect on intermediate diaphragm (see Figure 7.1 cl)):

(7.9)

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
92
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Effect on top diaphragm (see Figure 7.1 c2)):

FH,i = 8; ·Na (7.10)

where Na and Nb are axial forces contributing to FH,i·

In the determination of the first order internal forces due to the combination of actions in the persistent
and transient or the accidental design situation the horizontal forces FH,i should be considered in the same
load case as the corresponding axial force N.

7.2.2 Idealisation of the structure

(1) The structure should be idealized with suitable models considering static and geometrical
boundary conditions as well as the t ransfer of support reactions.
(2) Significant asymmetry in geometry or loading should be considered either by a 30 -model or by
adjusted planar models.
(3) Interaction of soil and structure should be considered appropriately and consistently with 4.2.1.4.
Non-linear behaviour in the soil-st ructure interaction should be considered.
(4) Ribbed or waffle or void enclosing slabs may be treated as solid members for the purposes of
analysis, provided that the flange or structural topping and transverse ribs have sufficient torsional
stiffness. This may be assumed provided that:
the rib spacing does not exceed 1 500 mm;

the depth of the rib below the flange does not exceed 4 times its width, or the space between voids;

transverse ribs are provided at a clear spacing not exceeding 10 times the overall depth of the slab.
This applies also to the biggest horizontal void dimension; and

the flange thickness is at least 1/10 of the clear distance between ribs, the smallest horizontal void
dimension or 50 mm, whichever is the greater. The minimum flange thickness of 50 mm may be
reduced to 40 mm where permanent blocks are incorporated between the ribs.

7.2.3 Geometric data

(1) The effect of non-u niform stress distribution across wide flanges in T-beams should be cons idered
at ULS where brittle behaviour may be expected and at SLS where relevant (st ress limitations,
deflections).
(2) In the absence of a more detailed analysis, the effective width of the flange may be calculated based
on the distance lob between points of zero moment. The length lob may be obtained from Figure 7.2 if all
of the following conditions are fulfilled :
loading is predomi nantly unifo rm;

the cross section is constant;

the length of the cantilever, h, is less than half the adjacent span; and

the ratio ofadjacentspans lies between 2/3 and 1,5.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
93
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Figure 7.2 - Definition of lob for calculation of effective flange width

(3) In the absence of a more detailed analysis, the effective flange width b eff for a T beam or L beam
may be derived as:

(7.11)

where
berf,i = min{0,2bi + 0,110 b; 0,21 0 b; b1} (7.12)
(for the notations see Figures 7.2 and 7.3)

Figure 7.3 - Effective flange width parameters

(4) For structural analysis, where a great accuracy is not required, a constant width of the effective
flange may be assumed over the whole span. In this case, the value applicable to the span section should
be adopted.
(5) The span of a beam or slab should be the distance between centrelines of supporting members or
bearings, in general. Reductions of this length may be permitted accounting for the support dimensions
if the resulting eccentricities are accounted for in the design of supporting elements. Generally, the
support reaction may be assumed to be distributed in a length equal to the minimum of the support width
or the beam or slab height. For elastomeric bearings the stress should be assumed to be evenly
distributed over the whole area of the support.
(6) Continuous beams and one-way slabs may be analysed assuming that the supports provide no
rotational restraint.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
94
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(7) Where a supporting member is modelled as line or point support, the peak bending moment at the
line or point support may be reduced based on the assumed distribution of the s upport reaction. For a
uniformly distributed support reaction, the peak moment, may be reduced by an amount t:.MEd as follows:

t:.M _ fEd,sup . t
Ed - 8 (7.13)

where
f Ed,sup is the design support reaction due to the loads applied on the beam or the slab;
t is the length according to (5) over which the reaction is distributed

7.3 Methods of analysis

7.3.1 Linear elastic analysis

(1) Linear analysis of structures and members based on the theory of elasticity may be used for the
calculation of internal forces in both serviceability and ultimate limit states.
(2) Except when specified otherwise as e.g. in (3), ( 4) and (5), and for structures designed for
earthquake resistance, linear elastic analysis may be carried out for the determination of the action
effects assuming:
a) uncracked cross-sections;
b) linear stress-strain relationships;
c) a mean value of the modulus of elasticity.
(3) A reduced stiffness may be considered in the analysis in mem ber regions where cracking is
expected under the relevant load combination. The assumed reduction of stiffness should be consistent
with the amount of reinforcement provided in these regions. In case of continuous structures with
prestressed and non-prestressed sections, the difference in stiffness between the prestressed and the
non-prestressed areas should be considered in SLS.
(4) For the determination of the effect of imposed deformations at the serviceability limit state (SLS),
cracking should be considered.
(5) When the effect of imposed deformations has to be considered at the ultimate limit state (ULS) (see
4.2.1.3(2)), a reduced stiffness due to cracking and creep and non-linear material behaviour may be
assumed.
(6) Forces or stresses due to long-term differential settlements or shrinkage obtained by linear elastic
analysis may be reduced to Et, to account for creep relaxation:

E - Et=O (7.14)
t - 1 + xrp(t,to)

where
Et is the internal force or stress at time t;

Ec=o is the internal force or stress at the end of cons tructio n with no consideration for creep;
x is the aging coefficient which may be taken equal to 0,8 for long term calculations;
t is the age of concrete when stresses are being evaluated;
to is the age of concrete when the settlement occurred or when curing ended, as appropriate.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
95
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(7) Creep redistribution of internal forces or stresses due to a change in the support conditions (i.e.
due to construction procedure) may be accounted for by Formula (7.15):

(7.15)

where
E, and E,=0 see (6);
Ewe is the internal force or stress assuming the structure was built with the final support
conditions;
to is the age of concrete when the loads producing the force or stress considered are applied;
tc is the age of concrete when support conditions change.

7.3.2 Linear elastic analysis with redistribution

(1) Limited redistribution is allowed for braced slender structures. When redistribution of moments
is applied its effects shall be considered on all aspects of design. The resulting distribution of internal
forces and the reaction after redistribution shall remain in equilibrium with the applied loads.
(2) The amount of redistribution may be verified in two ways, without an explicit verification of the
rotation capacity according (3) or with an explicit verification according (5).
(3) For members in which second order effects are negligible, linear analysis with limited
redistribution without explicit check on the rotation capacity may be applied to the analysis of structural
members for the verification of ULS provided that the following conditions are fulfilled:
all members are predominantly subjected to flexure (second order effects are negligible);

in case of continuous beams or slabs, the ratio of lengths of adjacent spans is in the range of 0,5 to
2,0;

the ratio OM of the moment after redistribution to the elastic bending moment complies with the value
given by Formula (7.16):

1 Xu
OM~ +- (7.16)
1 + 0,7Ecu · E5 /fyd d

~ 0,7 where Class B or Class C reinforcing steel or prestressing steel is used (see Table 5.5);
~ 0,8 where Class A reinforcing steel is used (see Table 5.5).
In case of prestressed members,J;.d in Formula (7.16) should be replaced by:

f = (fpd - O'pm, oo)Ap + fyctAs (7.17)

Ap + A5

where

O'pm.oo is the long-term stress level in prestressing tendons at the state of zero (elastic) strain of the
concrete at the same level.
All values refer to the section of the redistributed moment.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
96
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(4) The arrangement of reinforcement in flat slabs should reflect the behaviour under service
conditions, normally leading to a concentration of reinforcement over the columns. The requirements for
maximum spacing of flexural reinforcement for solid slabs in 12.4.1 apply.
(5) Linear analysis with redistribution with an explicit check on the rotation capacity may be applied
for the verification of ULS provided that the rotation demand eEd for the section with the plastic moment
resistance is smaller than or equal to the rotation capacity eRd of the section cons idered.
The design value of rotation demand follows from the integral of the curvatures after start of yielding in
the section where cracking of concrete should be considered and the tensile strength and tension
stiffening may be considered.
The rotation capacity may be derived from Formula (7.18).

8Rd
1,3d ((1)
= -- -r - TSMYd-Eyd
-) (7.18)
ye u.m - x

where

(-r1) u,m
= T SMu · mm
. { Cud Ecu,d,pw}
(d - Xu)' Xu
·-~~ (7.19)

1,35
ccu,d,pw = 0,002 + d + 3pw :::; 0,015 (7.20)

TSMu 1 · ( 1- -
= 1 -- cyd
-) when a;::: 1 (7.21)
2a cud,ef

TSMu = -a + -cyd- ( 1 - a
- - - 1) · ( 2 - -1 -
+ (fs.ef a )) when a <1 (7.22)
2 cud,ef 2 fyd a

TSMy =1- [Mer]

0,6 My ;::: 0,4 (7.23)

Cts.ef - fyd) <P

a = ·-- (7.24)
O ,3 2 s r,m,cal
1 6 Jcm

where

/s,cr is the tensile stress in the reinforcement when MRd is reached, assuming an inclined post-
elastic stress-strain-relation, see Figure 5.2;
.s;,d,er is the strain in the reinforcement with a stress equal to fs.cr;
My is the internal moment when the strain in the tension reinforcement equals Syd;
&yd =/yd/ Es
/'\) is a partial factor for model uncertainty.

NOTE The value of ~ = 3,0 applies unless the National Annex gives a different value.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
97
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

7.3.3 Plastic analysis

7.3.3.1 General

(1) Methods based on plastic analysis may be used for the check at ULS only, except for analyses with
stress fields and strut-and-tie models (see 7.3.3.3) which may also be used in SLS in certain conditions
(see 9.2.3(8)).
(2) Plastic analysis should in general be based on the lower bound theorem of limit analysis. Plastic
methods based on the upper bound theorem of limit analysis may be used, if it is known by experience
that the type of assumed mechanisms can develop.
(3) The plastic deformation capacity of the critical sections shall be sufficient for the envisaged
mechanism to be formed.
(4) The effects of previous applications of loading may be ignored, and a monotonic increase of the
intensity of actions may be assumed.
(5) Plastic analysis shall only be used for regions in which, within the plastic hinge, reinforcing steel is
of Class B or C. Prestressing steel may be considered as Class B steel.
(6) For plastic analysis, the horizontal branch of the stress-strain diagram for the reinforcement (see
Figures 5.2 and 5.3) shall be used when determining the sectional capacity of the cross-sections.

7 .3.3.2 Analysis for beams, frames and slabs without verification of rotation capacity

(1) Plastic analysis without any direct check of rotation capacity may be used for the ultimate limit
state if all the following conditions are fulfilled:
a) the area of tensile reinforcement is limited such that, at any section where plastic hinges are expected
to occur Xu/d::;; 0,25;

b) the ratio of the moments at intermediate supports to the moments in the span is between 0,5 and
2,0.

7.3.3.3 Analysis with stress fields and strut-and-tie models

(1) Stress fields and strut-and-tie models may be used to determine the action effects in structures and
members. This includes deep beams, walls and zones of discontinuities.
(2) Internal forces in struts and ties may be calculated based on linear elastic analysis, non-linear
analysis or plastic analysis.

7.3.4 Non-linear analysis

(1) Where non-linear methods of analysis are used for verification of ULS or SLS, equilibrium and
compatibility shall be satisfied and realistic non-linear behaviour of materials should be considered.
(2) The general rules for non-linear analysis procedures given in EN 1990 shall be respected.
If non-linear methods of analysis are used for verification of ULS by numerical simulations, the results
shall be confirmed by means of a comparison with simplified analytical methods. In case of significant
differences with analysis according to Clause 8, the discrepancies should be justified.
NOTE For the verification of the ultimate limit states the specific provisions given in Annex F can be followed.

(3) The constitutive material models for concrete, reinforcement and their interaction should capture
all relevant features of material behaviour for the specific problem to be considered. Time-dependent
material properties of concrete (such as shrinkage and creep), should be considered if necessary.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
98
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

(4) Non-linear material models and numerical procedures should be validated for each field of
application by tests, analytical solutions and/or benchmark test results, including basic tests on
materials, structural reference tests and mesh sensitivity studies.
(5) If material characteristics, such as tensile strength or fracture energy of concrete, have an
important influence on the results, a sensitivity analysis of the structural behaviour with respect to such
characteristics should be performed.
(6) When analysis and verification are combined, the resistance against bending and axial forces, as
well as the resistance of planar elements against membrane forces and/or bending and twisting
moments, shall not depend on the tensile strength of concrete.
(7) A proper description of multi-axial states of stress in concrete should be considered, particularly
when tension and compression are combined in the same finite element response.
(8) Modelling of cracking should consider the direction of the reinforcement able to control the crack
opening.

7.4 Second order structural analys is of members and systems with axial force
7.4.1 General

(1) The provisions of7.4 should be applied to members or structures (e.g. those with a fl exible bracing
system) in which the structural behaviour is significantly influenced by second order effects.
NOTE Annex 0 provides complementary guidance to simplified methods for second order structural analysis
of members and structures.

(2) Where second order effects are considered, equilibrium and resistance shall be verified in the
deformed state. Deformations shall be calculated considering the relevant effects of cracking, non-linear
material properties and creep.
(3) Second order effects may be ignored if they are not more than 10 % of t he corresponding first order
effects.
For global second order effects this condition may be considered satisfied if Formula (7.25) is satisfied:
F
~>10 (7.25)
FvEd -

where
FvEd is the total design ve rtical load on the bracing structure and the members braced by it;
Fvs is the buckling load of the bracing structure determined from a set of forces proportional to
Fv£d.
NOTE Fvu can be determined accord ing to Formula (0.1). For local second order effects (isolated members),
simplified criteria are given in 0.4.

(4) The design moment for ultimate limit state verification shall be the larger of the first order moment
and the total design moment including second order effects.
(5) Where relevant, analysis shall include the effect of flexibility of adjacent members and foundations
(soil-structure interaction).
(6) The structural behaviour shall be considered in the direction in which deformations can occur, and
biaxial bending shall be considered when necessary.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
99
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

7.4.2 Creep

(1) The effect of creep should be considered in second order analysis, with due regard to both the
general conditions for creep (see 5.1.5 and 8.5) and the duration of different loads in the load combination
considered.
(2) The d uration of loads may be considered in a simplified way by means of an effective creep
coefficient, which, used together with the design load, gives a creep deformation corresponding to the
quasi-permanent load. For global second order effects, </>efT.s may be taken from Formula (7.26). For
isolated m embers and local second order effects, </>efT.b may be taken from Formula (7.27).

ooEqp
(/Jeff,s = rp(toL• to)-,,- (7.26)
UEd

(7.27)

where

rp( to14to) is the creep coefficient at design service life according t o Table 5.2 or 8.5, where relevant
the average of the creep coefficients of the members considered may be used;
OoEqp is the maximum short-term horizontal deflection due to the quasi permanent load
combination determined assuming u ncracked cross-sections;
OEd is the maximum short-term horizontal deflection due to the relevant load combinati ons
from a first order analys is determined assuming uncracked cross -sections. At least two
combinations should be considered: the one corresponding to the combination with
dominant horizontal load and the one corresponding to the combination with dominant
vert ical imposed load, the largest resulting value of (/Jeff,b should be used;
MoEqp is the maximum firs t order moment due to the quas i- permanent load combination including
the effect of t he imperfections as described in 7.2.l;
Mo&1 is the maximum first order moment due to the relevant load combination.
(3) As an approximation the ratio between the moments (MoE<tv/MoEd) in Formula (7.27) may be
replaced by the ratio of vertical loads in the quas i permanent and design s ituations.
(4) Where global and local analysis are combined, (/Jerrshould be taken as the maximum of (/Jerr,s and (/Jeff.b
unless it is demonstrated that local second order effects are not governing, in which case </>eft' = </>eff.s·

7.4.3 Methods of analysis

7.4.3.1 General

(1) Either one of the following three methods of analysis may be used:
a simplified method based on nominal curvature, which only accounts for local second order effects
(see 7.4.3.2);

a second order linear elastic analysis method based either on a reduced stiffness value (see 7.4.3.2),
or on a moment magnification factor; and

a general, fully non-linear analysis method (see 7.4.3.3).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
100
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

NOTE An example of a method based on:

nominal curvature is given in 0.7;

a reduced stiffness value is g iven in 0.8.1;

a moment magnification factor is given in 0.8.2.

7.4.3.2 Simplified methods based on nominal curvature and second order linear analysis

(1) The methods based on the nominal curvature and on second order linear elastic analysis should
use an effective stiffness. This stiffness may conservatively be taken as the stiffness corresponding to the
situation where yielding occurs (see Figure 7.4 a)). For global effects, when yielding of the reinforcement
occurs successively at different locations, the stiffness corresponding to the situation for which the last
plastic hinge develops may be conservatively used (see Figure 7.4 b)). Other less conservative estimates
may also be used where justified.

M F

/fr

a) local effects b) global effects

Figure 7.4 - Possible equivalent stiffness

7.4.3.3 General non-linear analysis method

(1) For the general method based on full non-linear analysis, including geometric non-linearity i.e.
second order effects, the general rules for non-linear analysis given in 7.3.4 shall apply.
(2) Stress-strain curves for concrete and reinforcement suitable fo r overall analysis shall be used. The
effect of creep shall be considered.
(3) Stress-strain relationships given in 5.1.6, (Formula (5.6)) for concrete and in 5.2.4 (Figure 5.2) for
reinforcing steel and in 5.3.3 (Figure 5.3) for prestressing steel may be used. With stress-strain diagrams
based on design values, a design value of the ultimate load is obtained directly from analysis.
When Formula (5.6) is used to determine the stress-strain relationships for concrete, /cm shall be
substituted by the design compressive strength /cd (except in Formula (5.9) for Ec1) and Ecut shall be
substituted by 0,0035 and Ecmshall be substituted by Ec<1 given in Formula (7.28):
Ecm
Ecd =- (7.28)
YcE
NOTE Where alternative stress-strain relationships for concrete are used, the nature of the analysis to be used
and the phenomenon included need to be considered.

(4) In the absence of more refined models, creep may be taken into account by multiplying all strain
values in the concrete stress-strain diagram according to 7.4.3.3(3) with a factor (1 + </>err), where </>err is
the effective creep ratio according to 7.4.2( 4).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
101
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(5) The favourable effect of tension stiffening may be considered in the determinat ion of the stiffness
p rovided that 7.3.4(6) is fulfilled .
(6) Normally, conditions of equilibrium and strain compatibility should be satisfied in a number of
cross-sections. As a s implification, this condition may be imposed only at the critical cross-section(s),
assuming a relevant variation of the curvature in between, e.g. similar to the first order moment or
s implified in anothe r appropriate way.

7.4.4 Compression member with biaxial bending

(1) The general method in 7.4.3.3 may be used for biaxial bending. If simplified methods are used,
provisions (3) and (4) apply.
(2) The cross-section of the member with t he critical combination of moments should be used for
verifications.
(3) Separate design in each principal direction taking int o account second order effects, disregarding
biaxial bending interaction, may be used as a first step. Imperfections should be considered only in the
direct ion where they will have the most unfavourable effect.
(4) Further checks may be omitted if the slenderness ratio satisfies the following condition:
A
0,5::;; /::;; 2 (7.29)
z

and if the ratio of the dimensionless eccentricities e'y and e' 2 (see Figure 7.5) satisfy one of the following
conditions:
e' y e' y
- .- ::;; 0,2 or - .- ;::: 5 (7.30)
ez ez
where

e'z = MEdy/INEd · bl is the dimensionless eccentricity along the z-axis;

e'y = MEdz/INEd ·hi is the dimensionless eccentricity along the y -axis.
For non-rectangular sections, band h shall be replaced by beq = iyfil and heq = i 2 fil.
(5) Unless all of the conditions of Formulae (7.29) and (7.30) are fulfilled, biaxial bending as described
in 8.1.1(8) should be taken into accou nt including second order effects in each direction.

i z ._
_ .._I

iz
h

a) rectangular b) general cross-section

Figure 7.5 - Definition of eccentricities ey and e,

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
102
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

7.5 Lateral instability of slender beams

(1) Lateral instability of slender beams shall be conside red where necessary, e.g. for precast beams
during transport and erection, for beams without sufficient lateral bracing in the finished structure, etc.
Geometric imperfections shall be considered in the calculation of effects due to lateral instability.
(2) In absence of project-specific execution specifications which define maximum deviations, a lateral
deflection of 1/300 should be assumed as a geometric imperfection in the verification of beams in
unbraced conditions, with I= total length of beam. In finished structures, bracing from connected
members may be considered.
(3) Second order effects in connection with lateral instability may be ignored if the following
conditions are fulfilled:
persistent design situations:
lot 50
- < ---,- (7.31)
b - (h/b)l/3

t ransient design situations:

lot 70
- < ---,- (7.32)
b - (h/b)l/3

where

lot is the distance between torsional restraints;

h is the total depth of the beam in central part of lo,;
b is the width of the compression flange.
(4) Torsion associated with lateral instability should be considered in t he design of members
supporting slender beams.

7.6 Prestressed members and structures

7.6.1 General

(1) The effects of prestressing may be considered by one of the following equivalent approaches:
a) self-equilibrated state of stresses in the concrete and the tendons (approach also known as
prestressing considered on the side of resistance). In th is case, the internal forces due prestressing
are due only to external restraints (statically indeterminate component of prestressing);

NOTE In this case the effect of prestressing can be modelled by imposing on the sections of the structure an
axial strain equal to the prest ressing force divided by the axial stiffness of the section and a curvature equal to
the prestressing force times the eccentricity of prestress ing with respect to the centroid divided by the flexural
stiffness of the section.

b) set of self-equilibrated system of forces (anchorage, deviation and friction forces) exerted by the
tendons on the concrete member (approach also known as prestressing considered as external
act ion). In this case, the internal forces include both t he statically determined and the statically
indeterminate components ofprestressing.

(2) Since the internal forces resulting from the two approaches are different, the resistance of sections
and members shall be verified consistently, according to 7.6.5(1).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
103
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:20 23 (E)

7.6.2 Prestressing force

(1) At a given time t and distance x (or arc length) from the active end of the tendon the mean pres tress
stress up.m(x,t) should be taken equal to the maxi mu m stress Up.max imposed at the active end, minus the
immediate losses (see 7.6.3) and the time dependent losses (see 7.6.4), using absolute values for all losses.
(2) Short-term prestressing stresses should be limited to the values given in Table 7.1 or agreed fo r a
specific project by the relevant parties.

Table 7.1 - Limits to short -term prestressing s tresses

Stres s being limite d Stress limit

$ 0,8/pk
Maximum stressing stress up.max
$ 0,9/pO,tk
Overstressinga (e.g. fo r the occurre nce of unexpectedly high friction) $ 0,95/pO,lk
$ 0,75/pk
Maximum stress after prest ress transfer /anchoringb Up.m(x,O)
$ 0,85fi,o.tk
a Overstressing is permitted only if the force in the jack can be measured to an accuracy of ±5 % of the final
value of the prestress ing force.
b The stress after transfer/anchoring is determined by subtracting the immediate losses (see 7.6.3) from the
stress imposed at the active end.

(3) The mean value of the pres tress stress up,m(x,t) at the time t > to should be determined taking into
account the prestressing method. In addition to t he immediate losses t.up,i given in 7.6.3 time-dependent
losses of prestress t.up,c+s+r(x) given in 7.6.4 as a result of creep and shrinkage of the concrete and long-
term relaxation of t he prestressing steel should be considered:

Up,m(X,t) = Up,m(X,to) - t.up,c+s+r(X,t) (7.33)

7.6.3 Immediate losses ofpres tress

7.6.3.1 General

(1) When determining the immediate losses t.up,;(x) the following influences should be considered for
pre-tensioning and post-tensioning where relevant:
during the stressing process: losses due to friction between the prestressing steel and duct or
deviation devices t.up.~,(x), s ee 7.6.3.2;

during the stressing process: losses due to anchorage seating (e.g. wedge draw-in), see 7.6.3.3;

at the transfer of prestress to concrete: losses due to instantaneous deformation of concrete, see
7.6.3.4;

losses due to short-term relaxation of the pretensioning tendons during the period which elapses
between the tensioning of the tendons and prest ressing of the concrete t.opr (where relevant), see
8.9. In case of heat curing, losses d ue to shrinkage and relaxation are modified and should be assessed
accordingly; direct thermal effect should also be considered (see 13.4.2).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
104
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

7.6.3.2 Losses due to friction

(1) The losses due to friction ilap,µ (x) in prestressing tendons should be estimated from:

Llap,µ(x) = ap,max [ 1 - exp(- µ( aµ+ kµx))] (7.34)

where
aµ is the sum of the absolute values of angular deviations in radians over a distance x;
µ is the coefficient of friction between the tendon and its duct or deviation device;
k" is an unintentional angular deviation for internal post-tensioning tendons in grouted ducts and
greased strands in radian per unit length- (curvature); and
x is the distance along the tendon from the point where the prestressing stress is equal to ap,max
(the force at the active end during tensioning).
NOTE 1 The valuesµ and kµ can be found in the technical documentation of post-tensioning system.

NOTE 2 The valueµ depends on the surface characteristics of the tendons and the duct or deviation device, on
the presence of rust, on the elongation of the tendon and on the tendon profile.

NOTE 3 The value kµ for unintentional angular deviation depends on the quality of workmanship, on the distance
between tendon supports, on the type of duct or sheath employed, and on the degree of vibration used in placing
the concrete.

(2) In the absence of more precise data, the values for µ given in Table 7.2 may be used, in
Formula (7.34).
(3) In the absence of more precise data, values for unintentional angular deviation for internal post-
tensioning tendons will generally be in the range 0,005 < kµ < 0,01 per metre. For pre-tensioning
tendons and external tendons, the losses of prestress due to unintentional angular displacement may be
ignored.

Table 7.2 - Coefficients of frictionµ of internal post-tensioning tendons and external tendons to
be used in the absence of more precise data

Greased and External

Type of Internal tendons
sheathed strand tendons
prest ressing s teel
metal duct polymer duct PE duct PE duct
Cold drawn wire 0,17 0,12 - 0,10
Strand 0,19 0,14 0,05 0,12
Deformed bar 0,65 - - -
Smooth round bar 0,33 - - -

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
105
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

7.6.3.3 Losses due to an chorage seating

(1) Account should be taken of the losses due to anchorage seating, during the operation of anchoring
the prestressing steel after tensioning.
NOTE Values for anchorage seating are given in the technical documentation of post-tensioning system.

7.6.3.4 Losses due to the ins tantaneous deformation of concrete

(1) Where relevant, account should be taken of the loss in tendon stress corresponding to the
deformation of concrete, considering the tensioning programme in which the tendons are stressed.

7.6.4 Time dependent losses ofprestress

(1) The time dependent losses should be calculated by considering the following two reductions of
stress:
a) That due to the reduction of strain, caused by the deformation of concrete due to creep and shrinkage,
under the quasi-permanent loads; and

b) that due to the reduction of stress in the steel due to the relaxation under tension (see B.9).

The interaction between the relaxation of prestressing steel and the concrete deformation due to creep
and shrinkage may generally and approximately be considered by applying a reduction factor of 0,8 on
the stress relaxation. More refined methods may be used for the calculation of relaxation losses, taking
into account the variation of the tendon elongation due to creep and shrinkage of concrete.
(2) Time dependent losses of stress in the tendons due to creep, shrinkage and relaxation at location x,
at time t under the quasi-permanent combination of actions may be evaluated by Formula (7.35).
Ep
EcsEp + 0,8~0"pr + E rp(t,to)O"cp,QP
~a _ cm (7.35)
p,c+s+r - E A A
1 + EP
cm
/
c
(i +-fzlp)
c
[1 + 0,8rp(t,t0 )]

where
~O"pr is the absolute value of the variation of stress in the tendons at location x, at time t, due to
the relaxation of the prestressing steel. It should be determined for the initial stress in the
tendons due to initial prestress and quasi-permanent combination of actions
O"pr = O"pr{G + Pino+ t/J2Q);
O"cp,QP is the stress in the concrete adjacent to the tendons, due to self-weight and initial prestress
and other quasi-permanent actions where relevant. The value of O"cp,QPCan be the effect of
part of self-weight and initial pres tress or the effect of a full quasi-permanent combination
of actions [acp · (G +Pino+ t/J2Q)], depending on the stage of construction considered (see
B.4);
Zcp is the distance between the centroid of the concrete section and the tendons.
NOTE 1 It is conservative to adopt a value of 1,0 for the denominator of Formula (7.35).

NOTE 2 Unless specified for the project, it is not necessary to consider time dependent losses beyond the design
service life of the structure.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
106
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(3) Formula (7.35) applies to bonded tendons when local values of stresses are used and to unbonded
tendons when mean values of s tresses are used. The mean values should be calculated between straight
sections limited by the deviation points for external tendons or along the entire length in case of internal
tendons.

7.6.5 Effects of prest ressing at ultimate limit state

(1) The statically determinated component of prestressing may be considered either as an external
action or as a resistance when verifying the ultimate limit state for flexural resistance (see 7.6.1 (1)). In
the first case, when determining the flexural capacity of the section, the resistance of the tendon shall be
limited to fi,ct - a pd· In the second case it shall be limited to fpct·
(2) In general, the design value of the prestressing stress as external action may be determined as
Upct(x,t) = YPUp.m(x, t).
(3) For prestressed members with unbonded tendons, the deformation of the whole member should
generally be taken into account, when calculating the increase of the stress in the pres tressing steel. If no
detailed calculation is made and if the distance between fixed points does not exceed one span, it may be
ass umed that the increase of the stress at ultimate limit state due to the defo rmation of the member
before reaching failure is L\ap,ULS = 100 MPa.
(4) If the stress increase in unbonded tendons is calculated fo r prestressed members using the
deformation state of the whole member the mean values of the material properties should be used. The
design value of the stress increase L\apct = L\ap · Y11Pshould be determined by applying partial safety factors
Y11P.s up or Y11P.inf, according to 4.3.2.

(5) For external prestressing tendons, the strain in the prestressing steel between two subsequent
fixed points may be assumed to be constant. The strain in the prestressing steel should then be taken as
equal to the initial s train, determined just after completion of the prestressing operation of each tendon,
increased by the strain resulting from the structural deformation between the contact points considered,
considering ti me-dependent losses. A deviator in an external tendon may be considered as a fixed point
if the difference of tendon force between the two ends of the deviation point is smaller than the friction
loss of the tendon in the deviation point.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
107
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

8 Ultimate Limit States (ULS)

8.1 Be nding with or without axial force

8.1.1 General

(1) 8.1 applies to undisturbed regions of beams, slabs and similar types of members for which plane
sections remain approximately plane before and after loading. The discontinuity regions of beams and
other members in which plane sections do not remain plane may be designed and detailed according to
the general approach provided in 8.5.
(2) When determining the ultimate moment resistance of reinforced or prestressed concrete cross-
sections, the following assumptions shall be made:
plane sections remain plane;

the change in strain in bonded reinforcing steel or bonded prestressing tendons, whether in tension
or in compression, is the same as the change in strain in the surrounding concrete;

the tensile strength of concrete is ignored;

the stresses in the concrete in compression are derived from the design stress distributions given in
8.1.2;

the stresses in the reinforcing or prestressing steel are derived from the design stress-strain
relationships in 5.2 (Figure 5.2) and 5.3 (Figure 5.3);

the strain difference between prestressing steel and surrounding concrete is considered when
assessing the stresses in the tendons with due regard to time-dependent losses at the time
considered.

(3) The compressive strain in the concrete shall be limited to £ cu, see 8.1.2(1) unless the concrete is
confined, see 8.1.4.
(4) The strains in the reinforcing steel and the prestressing steel shall be limited to £ u<1 (where
applicable); see 5.2.4(2) and 5.3.3(2) respectively.
(5) Cross-sections loaded by an axial compression force N Ed unless second order effects and the effects
of geometric imperfections and of imposed deformations have been accounted for, should be designed
for a minimum moment of at least
(8.1)
where
e d.min = max{h/30; 20 mm}
(6) Limiting strain distributions in a cross-section should be at least those shown in Figure 8.1.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
108
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Key
1 tensile strain limit of reinforcing steel
2 compressive strain limit of concrete

Figure 8.1 - Possible strain distributions in the ultimate limit state

(7) For prestressed members with permanently unbonded tendons, 7.6.5 applies.
(8) In the absence of an accurate cross-section design for biaxial bending, the following simplified
criterion may be used:

IMEctzl)aN + (IMEdyl)aN ::; 1.0 (8.2)

( MRdz.N MRdy,N
where

M E<1z/y is the design moment about the respective axis, including a z nct order moment;
M ndzty,N is the moment resistance in the respective direction for the given axial compression force;
aN is the exponent whose value is determined as follows:
for circular and elli ptical cross-sections: DN = 2;
for rectangular cross-sections:
INedi/ NRd.o 0,1 0,7 1,0
Q l'I 1,0 1,5 2,0
with linear interpolation for intermediate values;
NRd.o is the design value of axial resistance under compression without accompanying moments:
Nnct,o = Ac/cct + Asf.;ct (8.3)
where in case of members with confinement reinforcement, fed should be
replaced by /cct.c according to Formula (8.15).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
109
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

8.1.2 Stress distribution in the compression zones

(1) For the design of cross-sections, the following stress distribution may be used, see Figure 8.2c)
(compressive strain shown positive):
2
for 0 :S £c :S Ec2
O'cd ={fed [ 1 - ( 1 - :c:) ]
(8.4)
fed
where

Ec2 = 0,002;
£cu = 0,0035.

Ecu Eel fed f ed

II I
~~-~-~'
~

U -v·--,.·
..., - ·- -·- · .
. c·

.
:· t
~
1.:
~_,__....._

~
_I
__,

a) b) c) d)
a) cross-section
b) assumed strain distribution
c) parabola-rectangle stress d istribution
d) rectangular stress distribution

Figure 8.2 - Stress distributions within the compression zone

(2) Alternatively, a rectangular stress block distribution as given in Figure 8.2d) may be assumed.

8.1.3 Bending in slabs

(1) Orthogonally reinforced solid slab elements with bending and torsional moments
where lmEdxyl ~ 0,07d2fcd may be designed using the following formulae:

(8.5)

(8.6)

mRdx / ;::: - m Edx + lm Edxy l (8.7)

mRdy / ;::: - mEdy + lmEdxyl (8.8)

where x andy are local axes parallel to the reinforcement Alternatively, G.4(5) may be used.
(2) In cases where lmedxyl > 0,07d2fcd, G.4(1)-(2) may be used.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
110
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

8.1.4 Confined concrete

(1) The concrete compressive design strength /cd may be enhanced by the favourable effect of
confinement reinforcement or of triaxial compressive stresses.
(2) The compressive strength increase of a concrete with ddg ~ 32 mm due t o a transverse compressive
stress Oczd may be calculated according to:

fj,fcd = 4 · Oczd for Oczd ::; 0,6fcd (8.9)

AF -
'-'J ed -
3, 5 . O"c2d
3/4. Fl/4
led for Oc2d > 0,6fcd (8.10)

In case of concret e with ddg < 32 mm, the strength increase fj,fcd according to Formulae (8.9) and (8.10)
shall be reduced by factor dctg/3 2 mm.
where

dctg is defined in 8.2.1(4);

Oczd is t o the absolut e value of the minimum principal transverse compressive st ress.
NOTE Provided thatthe stre ngth increase 6.fcd is reduced by factor ddg/32 mm, Formulae (8.9) and (8.10) apply
a lso for concrete and mortar with ddg < 24 mm.

(3) The confinement stress Oc2d resulting from confinement re inforcement in columns, compression
zones due to bending and struts may be calculated as:

for circular and square members in (8.11)

2As,conf · fyd
O'c2d = bcs . s compression with single confinement
reinforcement (Figure 8.3 a) and b))

2As,conf · fyd for rectangular members in compression (8.12)

Oc zd = max{bc5 x; bcsy}· s with single confinement reinforcement (bcsx
and bcsy according to Figure 8.3 c))

for members in compression with multiple (8.13)

_ . {..!:As,confx . ..!:As,co nfy} fyd
O"c zd - mm b ' b .- confinement reinforcement (Figure 8.3 c)
csy CSX s and d))

_ . {LAs,co nfx . As,confy} fyd (8.14)

O"c zd - mm b , .- for compression zones (Figure 8.3 e))
csy Xcs S

where

As.conf is the cross-sectional area of one leg of confinement reinforcement;

bes is the width of the confinement core (to the centrelines of t he confinement reinforcement,
see Figure 8.3);
s is the spacing of confinement reinforcement
For confining reinforcements not in the x, or y -axes, the corresponding components shou ld be considered
(in the instance of Figure 8.3 d)), the area of the inner confinement reinforcement may be multiplied
by ../2).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
111
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

b b bx

b csx
1 1 1
I

• 1-1 J 4

..,,E ..,,
N
~ I

• .I 4

b1 b1 b, b,
a) b) c) d) e)

a) Square b) Circular section c) Rectangular section d) Square section e) Section

section with multiple with axial
confinement force and
reinforcement flexure
Key
1 confined area Ac,conr
2 neutral axis

Figure 8.3 - Definition of dimensions of confinement reinforcement

(4) The concrete strength increase in the confined areas defined by the centrelines of the confinement
reinforcement as shown in Figure 8.3 (where rounded corners may be neglected) may be smeared over
the compression zone by considering the following average strength:

f~d,c = f~d + kconf,b · kconf,s · !:ifcd (8.15)

where the effectiveness factors k conr,b and kconr,s are defined in Table 8.1.

Table 8.1 - Effectiveness factors k conf,b and k conr,s for confinement reinforcement

Shape of compression zone and

k conf,b kconts
confinement r einforceme nt
Square members in compression 2
a) with single confinement
reinforcement (Figure 8.3 a))
kcon f,b
1 b
= 3( ;) kconr.s = (1-2 tc./
where
Circular member in compression b 2 s
b) with circular confinement 1- - >0
kconf,b =( : ) 2bcs -
reinforcement (Figure 8.3 b))

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
112
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Shap e of compression zone and

k conf,b kconf.~
confinement reinforcement
1 2
bcsx · bcsy - 6 Eb1
- Square and rectangular kconf.b = bx· by kconf,s
members in compression with
multiple confinement bi are the distances between bends of -- (1 - s-)(1-
2bcsx
s )
2bcsy
reinforcement (Figures 8.3 c) straight segments (defined by the
and d)); and where
c) intersections of centrelines) or
anchorages of the confinement
s
- rectangular sections with 1- - - > Oand
single confinement reinforcement 2bcsx -
s
reinforcement(Figures 8.3 c)). (Ebt = 4bf + 2b~ in the example of 1 - - - >0
2hcsy -
Figure 8.3c); Ehl = 0 in the examples of
Figures 8.3 b) and e))

Ac.conf - 61 Eb2i kconf.s = (1- 4~cJ ( 1-z~5J

kconf,b = Ace where xcs should not be taken
Compression zones due to is the confined area within the
d) bending and axial force
Ac.con( > hcsx/2,
centrelines of the confinement s
(Figure 8.3 e)) reinforcement and the neutra l axis 1---> Oand
4Xcs -
and s
Ace is the compressive area 1- - ->0
2hcsy -

(5) The effect of confinement on the strain limits in concrete may be determined in accordance with
Formula (8.16) and Formula (8.17). However, if these enhancements to the strains are included in design,
then the concrete area between the free surface and the axis of the confinement reinforcement should
not be included in any strength verifications.

{).fed)
Se2.e = sc2 ( 1 + 5 fed (8.16)

O"czd
Seu,c = Seu + 0,2 ~ (8.17)
Jed

8.2 Shear

8.2.1 General verification procedu re

(1) The shear resistance of linear members and the out-of-plane shear resistance of planar members
shall be verified according to the following procedure at all critical control sections:
a) detailed verification of the shear resistance may be omitted, provided that:
TEd :5: TRdc,ml n according to 8.2.1(4)
b) no calculated shear reinforcement is required in regions of the members where:
TEd :5: TRd.c according to 8.2.2 and 8.4.3;
c) otherwise, shear reinforcement shall be designed according to 8.2.3 and 8.4.4:

(2) When, on the basis of the design shear calculation, no shear reinforcement is required, minimum
shear reinfo rcement may neve rtheless be necessary for linear members, according to Clause 12.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
113
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

For linear members in statically determinate structures with d > 500 mm, minimum shear reinforcement
shall be provided. In exceptions where this were not possible, the verification methods according to
1.8.3.1(3) shall be used.
(3) In regions of members without geometric discontinuities, the average shear stress over the cross-
section T Ed is defined as:

(8.18)

or

(8.19)

where
VEd is the design shear force at the control section in linear members;

VEd is the design shear force per unit width in planar members;

bw is the width of the cross-section of linear members. The width bw for cross-sections with
variable width and for circular cross-sections is defined in 8.2.3 (9);

z is the lever arm for t he shear stress calculation defined as z = 0,9d; where d refers to the
centroid of tensile reinforcement.

NOTE Ford the nomina l effective depth d nom or the design value dd can be used (see A.3). The National Annex
can give advice for using dd.

(4) The minimum shear st ress resistance may be calculated as:

11 fck. ddg
TRdc.min = Yv · (8.20)
fyd d

where
JV is the partial factor for shear design according to Table 4.3 (NOP) or Tables A.1 (NOP) and A.2
(NOP);
f;t1 is the design value of the yield strength which has been used to design the flexural
reinforcement;
d is the effective depth of the flexural reinforcement. For prest ressed members see 8.2.2(6);
NOTE 1 Ford refer to NOTE in (3).

d<1g is a size parameter describing the failure zone roughness, which depends on the concrete type
and its aggregate properties. ddg (mm) may be taken as:
16 mm + D 1ower:::; 40 mm for concrete with/ck:::; 60 MPa;
16 mm+ D 1owcr (60//ck)2:::; 40 mm for concrete with/c1< > 60 MPa.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
114
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

NOTE 2 D1owor is the smallest value of the upper sieve size Din an aggregate for the coarsest fraction of aggregates
in the concrete permitted by the specification of concrete according to EN 206. In case Dmax is known, D1ower can be
replaced by Dmax. The appropriate choice of aggregate size (D) depends on spacing and density of reinforcement.
The definition of D1ower via Din EN 12620 can lead to a range of aggregate gradings. Similarly EN 206 does not specify
a minimum coarse aggregate content. The model is calibrated against tests carried out with typical gradings. The
use of non-typical aggregate gradings where the percentage of larger aggregate sizes in relation to D1ower is small
can result in different behaviour. This can be avoided by specifying grading parameters in addition to D1ower.

In case of prestressed members without ordinary reinforcement,/yd in Formula {8.20) may be replaced
by fpd - IJpm.= where IJpm.= is the prestress in the tendons after losses.
(5) In planar members (such as solid slabs and shells) with out-of-plane shear forces VEd,x and VEd.y
acting on the cross-sections perpendicular to the x andy directions, the design shear force per unit width
(VEd) should be calculated as:

(8.21)

The effective depth d may be taken as a function of the ratio of the shear forces VEd,y/VEd.x:

d=dx for VEd.y/VEd,x::;; 0,5; {8.22)

d = 0,5 (dx + dy) for 0,5 < VEd.y/VEd.x < 2; (8.23)

d =dy for VEd.y/VEd.x;::: 2. {8.24)

Alternatively, the effective depth d may be taken as:

d = dx · cos2a, + dy · sin2a, {8.25)

where the angle av between the principal shear force and x-axis may be taken as

av= arctan( VEd.y/VEd,x) {8.26)

(6) When the shear force in planar members is not constant along the control section, it may be
averaged over a width not larger than 2d on both sides from the peak of the shear force, provided that
the moment equilibrium after redistribution is fulfilled. If other internal forces are required for
calculation of the shear resistance, they may be also averaged over the same width.
(7) In members with inclined chords, the design shear force in the web should account for the influence
of inclined forces according to Figure 8.4, replacing VEd by VEd - Vied - Vbcd·
The favourable effect of Vied and Vbcd should only be considered for members with shear reinforcement
according to 8.2.3.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
115
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

<::!.
.s
!VEd "'x
_ \ HEd ~
Q..
NEd

a) internal forces at cross-section b) compression field, chord and prest ressing

forces
Key
1 design shear force in web according to (7) or (8) replacing VEd, NEd or MEd

Figure 8.4 - Shear components for members with inclined chords and/ or pres tressing

(8) In members where the statically determinate part of prestressing is considered as an internal
action (i.e. considered as resistance and that prestressing effect is not included in the load combination
used to determine VEd):
the design shear force in the web should account for the transversal component of the prestres sing
force according to Figure 8.4, replacing VEd by VEd - P d · sinpp;

and where the shear resistance depends on the acting axial force and the bending moment, NEd and
M Ed should be replaced by NEd - P d · cospp and MEd - P d · ep · cospp, respectively.

For bonded tendons, the increase of tendon s tress due to shear cracking may be considered if
compatibility conditions are fulfilled.
(9) When a load is applied through the depth of the member (i.e. at the intersection of primary and
secondary beams) or applied in tension to the face of the member (i.e. hanging loads), sufficient
reinforcement, in addition to that required for shear, shall be provided to carry the load to the face
opposite to the direction of load (i.e. the top face in the case of gravity loads).
(10) In linear members, regions with geometric d iscontinuities should be designed according to 8.5. In
planar members:
regions with variation of cross-sections should be reinforced according to 12.4.1(4) or designed
according to 8.5;

regions with inserts should be verified according to 8.2.2(11) or designed according to 8.5.

(11) Regions where significant concentrated loads are applied at a distance aq less than d from a support
(Figure 8.5) should be designed as discontinuity regions, by using strut-and-tie models or stress fields as
in 8.5 or by accounting for a reduced value of 'l'E<1 using the method in 8.2.2(9). In planar members on line
supports without shear re inforcement, the shear verification between the load and the support (aq < d)
may be omitted, provided that:

and

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
116
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

the flexural reinforcement is fully anchored at the support and at the load introduction.

t
Figure 8.5 - Examples of loads near supports

8.2.2 Detailed verification for members without shear reinforcement

(1) Except where concentrated loads are applied at a distance less than d from the support the detailed
verification of the shear resistance may be omitted for control sections that are closer than d from the
face of the support or from a significant concentrated load (see Figure 8.6). When significant
concentrated loads are applied between d and 2d from the face of the support, a control section located
at a distanced from the face of the support should be verified according to 8.2.2(9).

1 2

3 1 ....._.,!+rl---....1-c,.....:;.....:,
3

a) cases of predominantly distributed loads b) cases of predominantly concentrated loads

near supports according to 8.2.2(9)
Key
1 regions where shear strength verification may be omitted
2 concentrated load
3 support

Figure 8.6 - Regions where shear strength verification may be omitted

(2) The design value of the shear stress resistance should be taken as:
1

TRd,c = 0,66 (
Yv ·
ddg)3 2".
lOOp1 · fck · d rRdc,min
(8.27)

where
As1
P1 = b d (8.28)
w
A,1 is the effective area of tensile reinforcement at the distance d beyond the section considered
(see Figure 8. 7);

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
117
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

bw is the widt h of t he cross-section of linear members. The width bw for cross-sections with
variable width and for circular cross-sections is defined in 8.2.3 (9);
ddg is defined in 8.2.1(4);
d is the effective depth dnom· The valued may be refined according to (3) and (4) for non-slender
members and members with axial force.

A B c

d d
- -t --i
A B c 0 E
Key
Control sections A-A and C-C: Cases where anchored and curtailed reinforcement may be fully accounted for
Control section B-B: Case where curtailed reinforcement may not be accounted for
Control sections 0-0 and E-E: Cases where curtailed or spliced reinforcement may be partially accounted for

Figure 8.7 - Definition of A s1 in Formula (8.28)

(3) The value of din Formula (8.27) may be replaced by the mechanical shear span av, for members
with an effective shear span Gcs shorter than 4 d:

(8.29)

Where Gcs is the effective shear span with respect to the control section. For re inforced concrete members
it may be calculated as a function of the internal forces at control section:

(8.30)

where

M E<1 and VEd include the effects of prestressing according to 8.2.1(8).

(4) In presence of axial forces NEd, acting at the control section, the value of din Formula (8.27) or av in
Formula (8.29) should be multiplied by coefficient kvp according to Formula (8.31):

d
kvp = 1 + -NEd
., - .- -
3
:2: 0,1 (8.31)
1• Ed 1 a,s
(5) Alternatively to Formula (8.27) in combination with Formula (8.31), the approach considering
the effect of compressive normal forces according Formula (8.32) may be used:

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
118
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

TRdc,m i n ::;; TRd,c = TRdc,o - ki · '1cp ::;; TRdc,max (8.32)

where TRdc,o is the design value of the shear stress resistance defined as follows:
1

TRdc,o =
0,66 (
Yv ·
ddg)3
100P1 · fck · d
(8.33)

Ac is t he area of concrete cross-section.

NOTE The factor kl can be calculated according to Formula (8.34) unless the National Annex gives another
value.

0,5 ( d) Ac Ac
k1 = --
acs,o
eP +- ·--::;; 0,18 · - -
3 bw · Z bw · Z
(8.34)

where

ep is the eccentricity of the prestressing force or of the external load that produces the compressive
axial fo rce with respect to the centre of gravity of the cross-section considered as positive
towards the tensile side. For statically indeterminate members, the effect of hyperstatic
moments due to prestressing should be considered by modifying the tendons eccentricity
accordingly;

Dcs.o is determi ned according to Formula (8.30) withou t considering in M Ed und V Ed the effect of
prestressing or external load that produces the compressive axial force.
For the given factor k1 according to Formula (8.34), the effective depth d in Formula (8.33) may be
replaced by Dv,o where Dv.o is determined according to Formulae (8.29) and (8.30), without considering in
MEd u nd VEd the effect of prestressing or external load that produces the compressive axial force.

The value of TRdc.max may be determined as follows :

1
acs.o) /6 (8.35)
TRdc,max = 2,15. TRdc.O ( d ::;; 2,7. TRdc,O
(6) Prestressing effects according to 8 .2.1(8) should be considered in the values of M Ed, Ved and N Ed to
be used in Formula (8.31). For prestressed members with bonded tendons, the effective depth d and the
reinforcement ratio p1may be calculated as follows:

d~ · As + d~ · AP
d =----~~ (8.36)
ds · As + dp · Ap
(8.37)

The area of prestressed reinforcement Ar may be omitted in the calculation of d and p1 if including Ap
reduces the shear resistance due to the reduced effective depth, provided that the longitudinal tension
reinforcement As is sufficient to carry M Ed and N Ed taking into account the effect of prestressing.
NOTE The effect ofunbonded and externa l tendons is considered on action side.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
119
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(7) In planar members with different reinforcement ratios in both directions, p1 should be calculated
as a function of the ratio of the shear fo rces VEd,y/VEd,x:

p1= P~x for VEd,y/VEd,x::;; 0,5; (8.38)

P1= P1.x · cos 4 av + P1.y · sin 4 av for 0,5 < VEd,y/VEd,x < 2; (8.39)

p1=p1,y (8.40)

where av is defined in 8.2.1(5).

(8) In case of dist ributed loads (except high water- or gas pressure as defined in 4.2.1.6) pushing
against the member on the tension side (e.g. distributed gravity loads on the top face of continuous
members near intermediate supports, see Figure 8.8, or on cantilevers), the design shear force at any
control section may be reduced by{),, VEd calculated as the sum of the distributed loads acting closer than
d from the cont rol section, but not larger than 14 of the total contribution of t he distributed load to the
design shear force at the control section.

j' 1 1111 =r ~I;~:

d d

11111111

Key
1 control section

Figure 8.8 - Distributed loads pushing on the tension side of the member that may be
subtracted from the des ign shear force VF.d

(9) In case of concentrated forces pushing against each other within a clear distanced::;; aq ::;; 2 d (e.g.
loads and support forces, see Figure 8.5 for the definition on aq), the contribution of these forces to the
design shear force between them may be multiplied by 0,5aq/ d. Alternatively to 8.2.1(11), this may be
used for 0,5d s: aq < d, provided that the longitudinal reinforcement is designed and fully anchored for the
tensile force due to the concentrated load. For aq < 0,5d a value of Gq = 0,5d may be assumed. The shear
stress calculated using the full contribution of these forces should be less than 0,6vfcd·
(10) For the design of longitudinal reinforcement, the MEd-line should be shifted by a distanced in the
unfavourable direction as shown in Figure 12.l. Alternatively, the bending moment may be increased by
d . IVEdl·
(11) Concreted-in pipes, pipe bundles or slab inserts in the plane of the member and not aligned with
the principal shear force direction:
may be neglected ifthe width and height are less than d/6;

should be taken into account if their width or height is la rger than d/6. In that case, the effective
shear-resisting depth d should be reduced by the highest value of width and depth.

Pipe bundles with clear distance smaller than 0,25d should be considered as a single opening.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
120
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

8.2.3 Members with s hear reinforcement

(1) The design of members with shear reinforcement should be based on a compression field
(Figure 8.9). Limiting values fo r the angle e of the inclined compression field in the web are given in (4).
Provisions for inclined shear reinforcement are given in (13).
s

Key
1 axis of compression chord
2 shear reinforcement
3 axis of tension chord
4 struts (compression field)

Figure 8.9 - Model and notation for shear reinforced members

(2) Cont rol sections should be considered at all critical locations including the face of the s upport, at a
geometrical discontinuity or at a change in shear reinforcement ratio.
In regions where there is no discontinuity of VEd (e.g. for uniformly distributed loading pushing against
the member), the shear reinforcement in any length increment I= z ·cote may be calculated using the
smallest value of VEd in the increment (except in members under high water- or gas pressure).
(3) The lever arm z for the shear calculation (Figure 8.9) may be assumed as in 8.2.1(3).
Prestressed tendons away from the tension chord may be neglected in calculating the centroid of tensile
reinforcement, provided that the reinforcement in the tension chord is sufficient to carry the tensile force
Ftd according to (8).

(4) The inclination of the compression field in the web carrying shear may be selected within t he
following range:

1 $ cote $ cot8min (8.41)

where the cotangent of the minimal inclination of the compression field 8m;n should be for shear
reinforcement of ductility class B or C:
cot8m;n = 2,5 for ordinary reinforced members without axial force;

cot8min = 3,0 for members subjected to significant axial compressive force (average axial
compressive stress ;:::: 13 MPal) and provided that the depth of the compression chord x determined
from a sectional analysis according to 8.1.1 and 8.1.2 is less than 0,25d. Interpolated values between
2,5 and 3,0 may be adopted for intermediate cases. For very high compressive forces (x > 0,25d),
(11) can apply;

cot8m;n = 2,5 - 0,1 ·Ned/ IVEdl ;:::: 1,0 for members subjected to axial tension.

For shear reinforcement of ductility class A, cot8min shall be reduced by 20 %.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
121
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(5) The shear stress resistance perpendicular t o the longitudinal member axis in case of yielding of the
shear rei nforcement shall be calculated acco rd ing to:

TRd,sy = Pw · fywd ·cote (8.42)

where t he shear reinforcement ratio Pw is defined as:

Asw
Pw = bw · S
(8.43)

The stress in the compression field in all cross-sections shall be verified according t o:

<Ted = TEd(cote + tane) ::; v ·fed (8.44)

NOTE For the case with simultaneous yielding of the shear reinforcement and failure of the compression field,
the shear stress resistance results from the solution of Formulae (8.42) and (8.44) as:

V · fed
rRd = Pw · fywd · cote ::; - 2
-

where cote is taken from:

cotemin :;::: cote = v·fcd - 1::::1

Pw · fywd

For the case with simultaneous yielding of the tension chord and failure of the compression field, the shea r stress
resistance results from the solution of Formulae (8.44) and (8.51) with ftd = Ast · / yd.
(6) A value v = 0,5 may be adopted when using the angles of the compression field given in (4).
(7) Angles of the compression field inclination to the member axis lower than emin given in ( 4) or values
of facto r v higher than acco rding to (6) may be adopted provided that the ductility class of the
reinforcement is B or C and that the value of factor vis calculated on the basis of the state of strains of the
member according to:
1
v = ::; 1,0 (8.45)
1,0 + 110 · (Ex + (Ex + 0,001) · cot2 e)
where Ex is the average strain of the bottom a nd top chords calculated at a cross-section not closer than
0,5 · z · cote from the face of the support or a concentrated load:
Ext+ Exe
Ex=
2
::::o (8.46)

where the following may be assumed unless more refined methods are used:

Ftd
Ext = - - (8.47)
AstEs
- Fed
Exe=AE ifthe flexural compression chord is in compression; or (8.48)
cc c

if t he flexural compression chord is in tension. (8.49)

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
122
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

where

F,d and Fed are the chord forces according to Figure 8.9 and Formulae (8.51) to (8.52) (positive
values of Fed refer to compression in the compression chord);
Asr and Ase are the areas of the longitudinal reinforcement in the flexu ral tension chord and
flexural compression chord, respectively;
is the area of the flexural compression chord.
In prestressed members with bonded tendons, the areas of the longitudinal reinforcementA 5, and A se may
be increased by Ap(l/2+ ep/z) and Ap(l/2- ep/z), respectively, where the eccentricity of the tendon ep is
positive on the side of the tension chord.
NOTE For high va lues of cote, the cracking state of the web under serviceability conditions can be governing
(see 9.2.3(7)).

(8) The additional tensile axial force, Nvd, due to shear VEd may be calculated from:

Nvd = IVEdl · cotB (8.50)

This force may be added to both chords so that the chord forces F,d and Fed (Figure 8.9) are:
MEd Nvct + NEd
Ftct =~+ 2 (8.51)

MEd Nvct + NEd

Fed=~ - 2 (8.52)

In case of direct intermediate support or in the region of concentrated loads, F1d may be limited to:

MEd,max + NEd (8.53)

z 2
where MEd,max is the maximum moment along the member and the internal forces (NEd, VEd and MEd) are
applied in the centre of the web with a depth z as shown in Figure 8.9. In these cases, the tension chord
may alternatively be designed by shifting the MEd-line according to 12.3.2. The simplification suggested
by 8.2.3(3) for the inner lever arm z in shear design should not be applied for the verification of the chord
forces in case of high compression zones (i.e. when the inner lever a rm z is s ignificantly less than 0,9d).
For Nvt1+NEd > 0, the forces Nv<1 and NEd may also be carried totally or partially by a longitudinal web
reinforcement. In th is case, the sum Nvd+NEd in Formulae (8.51) and (8.52) may be red uced accordingly.
(9) For sections with variable width:
bw may conservatively be taken as the smallest width of the cross-section between the tension chord
and the neut ral axis (Figures 8.10 a) and b));

the area Asw to be used in Formula (8.43) shall be multiplied by coso (refer to Figure 8.10 a)).

For circular cross-sections:

the area Asw should be multiplied by the ratio bw/Dh (refer to Figure 8.10 c)), where Dh is the hoop
diameter;

z is based on a section fitted into the circular section as given in Figure 8.10 c) whe re the circular
segment with depth Xsb is the area of the compression chord and the tension bars within bw define
the tension chord. The width bw can be chosen freely fulfilling equilibrium and resistance conditions,
however not larger t han Dh.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
123
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

a) b) c)
Figure 8.10 - Definition of bw for sections with variable width

(10) Where the web contains ducts of diameters such that "i.0duct > bw/8, the stress in the compression
field according to Formula (8.44) and the shear stress resistance <Rd according to Formulae in
8.2.3 (5), NOTE shall be calculated on the basis of a nominal web width given by:

(8.54)

where </>duct is the outer d iameter of the duct and "i.</>duct is determined for the most unfavourable level. The
value of coefficient kduct should be evaluated depending on the material and filling of the duct as:
kduct = 0,5 for grouted steel ducts;

kduct = 0,8 for grouted plastic ducts with a wall thickness s; max{0,035</>duci; 2 mm};

kduct = 1,2 for non-grouted ducts, for grouted plastic ducts with a wall thickness
> max{0,035</>duct; 2 mm} or for ducts injected with soft filling material.
In the case of variable cross-section w idths, calculations at different heights can be necessary to
determine the decisive nominal value of the web width.
The effect of ducts does not need to be considered when checking shear resistance without shear
reinforcement unless ducts are not grouted or are injected with soft filling materials.
(11) For members subjected to design axial compression forces NEd. a portion of the axial force denoted
as NEdw can be resisted by the shear zone (web). If -NEdw s; IVE<1 • cote I, and cote fulfils the recommended
values in (4), the shear zone should be calculated as specified in (5) to (8). Otherwise, the des ign method
specified in Annex G should be used for the shear zone.
For members subjected to high design axial forces, NEdw should be chosen so that the depth of the
compression chords (i.e. x) carrying NEd + Nv<1 and M Et1 is not higher than 0,25d.
(12) In cases where concentrated loads are applied at a distance av= z · cotfi;ncl less than z · cote from a
support (Figure 8.11), the shear stress resistance may be enhanced according to:

'1°Rd = v . Jcrd cote1 +- cot

cotfiincl
2e
+ pw . f,ywd . cotPinc
a. I < v . Jrd
-
cote
---
c 1 + cot 2 e
(8.55)

NOTE 1 The maximum shear resistance can be calculated by optimization varying cote. For the case of a constant
value v according to (6), the optimum is obtained with

for the case of a variable v according to (7), a reasonable approximation is obtained assuming

cote= 1,3 · a/z,

but should not be larger than cote according to 8.2.3(5), NOTE.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
124
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Compression field inclinations with cote< 1 are allowed if the yield st rengthJ;.wd in Formulae (8.55) and
(8.57) is replaced by the stress aswd in the shear reinforcement according to:

aswd = E5 [cot2 8·(Ex + 0,001) - 0,001) $ fywd (8.56)

where the longitudinal strain Ex may be calculated according to (7) for a cross-section located midway
between the support and the load.
In addition to the axial tensile force, Nvd. due to shear Ved according to Formula (8.50), also the following
moment t::.MEd should be added to ME<l to be used in Formulae (8.51) to (8.52):

t::.MEd = (rEd - Pw. fywd. cote). z. bw. (i- x) (8.57)

where
a is the distance between the axis of the support and the concentrated force (see Figure 8.lla);
x is t he distance between the support and the investigated cross-section.
NOTE 2 The increase of chord forces F,d and Foo due to shear according to Formulae (8.50), (8.52) and (8.57) is
based on the assumption of a constant compression field inclination e in the support region. Other solutions
respecting equilibrium conditions can be designed according to 8.5 (see Figure 8.26 b)).

In case of two or more concentrated forces in the distance z · cote, all potential critical inclinations /J;nc1
according to Figure 8.11 a) shall be verified.

Z · cot/3;nc1,1
t z.
'->----
cot /3 incl.2 b)
a)

a) in pres ence of concentrated loads near the b) truss model and notation for members with
supports inclined shear reinforcement
Key
1 axis of compression chord
2 inclined shear reinforcement
3 struts (compression field)
4 axis of tension chord

Figure 8.11 - Definition of inclinations P 1nc1 ?::.(}for concentrated loads near the supports and
case with inclined shear reinforcement

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
125
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

In case of a distributed load q<1, the term p..., · f;w<1 in Formulae (8.55) and (8.57) may be replaced by
(p... -Jywd+ qd/ bw).
(13) For members with inclined shear reinforcement (45° :s; aw< 90°) where a w is measured positive
as shown in Figure 8.11 b), Formulae (8.41), (8.42), {8.44) and (8.50) should be replaced respectively by:
aw
tan 2 :S: cotB :S: cotBmin (8.58)

'Rd,sy = Pw · f'f\vd · (cotB + cotaw) · s inaw (8.59)

1 + cot 2 B
<l d
c
= TEd cotB + cotaw <- V · JcF d (8.60)

(8.61)
Angles aw > 90° should be avoided. For spiral reinforcement, «w may be assumed as the average angle of
both legs, provided that the difference of each leg inclination and the 90 degrees is not greater than 12
degrees.
Formula (8.55) should be replaced by:
cotB - cot.B1nc1 .
'Rd = V · fed 1 + cot 28
+ Pw · f.ywd · (cot.Bincl + cotaw)smaw
cote+ cotaw (8.62)
<v·f.d
- c
-1- +-
cot-
2B
-

Compression field inclinations with cotB< tan(aw/2) are allowed if the yield strength /;wd in
Formula (8.62) is replaced by the stress OSwd in the shear reinforcement according to:

(cotB + cotaw) 2
<lswd = £5 [(ex + 0,001) ·
1 +cot 2 aw
0,001] :S: fywd (8.63)

8.2.4 In-plane shear and transverse bending

(1) The interaction between shear stress • Ed and transverse bending ffi Ed (see Figure 8.12) may be
disregarded if TE<1/TR<1 < 0,2 or ffi E<1/ffi R<1 < 0,1
where
T Rd is the shear resistance according to Formula in 8.2.3(5), NOTE;
ffi Rd is the bending resistance without interaction with shear.
(2) The shear stress resistance TRdm reduced by the influence of transverse bending, in case of shear
reinforcement perpendicular to the longitudinal axis of the member and symmetric to the web middle
plane, may be assumed as:

(8.64)

Alternatively, Annex G may be used.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
126
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

f ywd/2

V . f cd

a)

a) web with shear stress ltd and transverse bending moment m Ed

b) eccentric compression field carrying shear and transverse bending

Figure 8.12 - Interaction between shear and transverse bending

8.2.5 Shear between web and flanges

(1) The longitudinal shear st ress, TEd at the junction between one side of a flange and the web may be
determined by the change of the axial (longitudinal) force in the part of the flange considered, according
to:

(8.65)

where
hr is the thickness of the flange at the junctions;
fix is the length under consideration, see Figure 8.13;
fifd is the change of the axial force in the flange over t he length fix.
The maxim um value that may be assumed for fix is half the distance between the section where the
moment is 0 and the section where it is maximum. Where point loads are applied, the length fix should
not exceed the d istance between point loads.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
127
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

Key
1 cross section
2 longitudinal bar anchored beyond this projected point (see 8.2.5(7))
3 struts

Figure 8.13 - Notations for the connection between flange and web

(2) In case the following condition is satisfied, further verification of the shear between web and
flanges may be omitted and no extra reinforcement above that for transverse bending is required:
A .
rEd $ st,mhm. fyd (8.66)
Sr ' f

where As1.m1n is the minimum transverse reinforcement acco rding to Table 12.1 (NOP).
(3) In cases not complying with Formula (8.66), the shear strength of the flange may be calculated by
considering the flange as a system of compression fields combined with ties in the form of tensile
r einforcement (see Figure 8.13). The inclination of the compression field in the flanges with respect to
the longitudinal axis may be selected within the following range:

1 $ cot8r $ 3,0 in compression flanges; (8.67)

1 $ cot8r $ 1,25 in tension flanges. (8.68)

(4) The transverse reinforcement in the flange A sr may be determined as follows:

Asr
rEd $ - - · f, d · cotBr (8.69)
Sr · hr Y

To prevent crushing of the compression field in the flange, the following condition should be satisfied:

O'cd = rEd(cotBr + tanBr) $ v · fed (8.70)

where the following strength reduction facto r may be used:

v = 0,5 (8.71)

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
128
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

(5) Lower angles of the inclined compression field in the tensile flange than those given in (3) may be
adopted provided the value of factor v is calculated on the basis of the state of strains of the member
according to Formula (8.45) where ex is the longitudinal strain in the tensile flange and may be estimated
as:
Ftd
~ - --> 0 (8.72)
"x - AE -
st s
where Ast and F,d are the area of the longitudinal reinforcement and the force in the tension chord,
respectively (refer to 8.2.3 (7) and (8)).
(6) The influence of transverse bending may be addressed according to 8.2.4 or Annex G. Alternatively,
the reinforcement in the flange may be designed as follows :
if reinforcement is placed only in the tension zone due to transverse bending, the area of the steel
should be the greater of that required for bending and that required for shear;

if transverse reinforcement is placed at top face as well as at bottom face of the flange (i.e. stirrups
with two legs) the area of each leg should be the greater of that required for bending and that
required for shear.

(7) Longitudinal tension reinforcement in the flange should be anchored beyond the strut required to
transmit the force back to the web at the section where this reinforcement is required (see section cut 1-
1 of Figure 8.13).

8.2.6 Shear at interfaces

(1) This clause shall be applied where the static equilibrium depends on shear transfer across a given
interface, such as an interface between two concretes cast at different times (see Figure 8.14) or an
interface between concrete and a similar material (e.g. concrete cast on rock surfaces).
(2) For very rough interfaces with sufficiently anchored minimum reinforcement according to 12.2
crossing the interface at an angle according to Figure 8.15b), the verification may be omitted. The
roughness of the interfaces is defined in (6).
(3) The shear stress at the interface should satisfy the following condition:
(8.73)
where
TRdi is the design shear resistance at the interface. If no reinforcement across the interface is
required or if the required reinforcement across the interface is sufficiently anchored, T Rc1;
should be calculated by Formula (8.76). In other cases according to (7), Formula (8.77) should
be used.
(4) The design value of the shear stress in an interface should be taken as:

(8.74)

where
Vid; is the shear force acting parallel to the interface;
A; is the area of the interface according to Figure 8.14. For keyed interfaces, A; should be based on
either the key area Al, A2 or A3 according to Figure 8.14 whichever is governing taking into
account the corresponding concrete strength.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
129
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

The longitudinal shear stress between concrete interfaces due to composite action may be taken as:

/Jnew · VEd
't"Edi = -z.-b;
-- (8.75)

where

/Jnew is the ratio of the longitudinal force in the new concrete area and the total longitudinal force
either in t he compression or tension zone, both calculated for the section considered;
VEd is the shear force acting perpendicular to the interface;
z is the lever arm of composite section;
b; is the width of the interface.

A;. b;

{VEd)1 '
T f di ~~ I
I

Figure 8.14 - Examples of interfaces

(5) The design shear stress resistance at the interface for situations without reinforcement across the
interface or if the required re inforcement across the interface is anchored for Osd = /yd may be taken as:

l"Rdi = JTck
Cv1
Ye
+ µv On+ p;/yd (µv sina + cosa) $ 0,30 /ct1 + p;/yd cosa (8.76)

where
/ck is t he lowest compressive strength of the concretes at the interface;
On is the compressive stress over the interface area A; caused by the minimum external axial
force across the interface that acts simultaneously with the shear force. Permanent
stresses caused by confinement of surrounding structural parts may be taken into
account. When On is a compressive stress On shall not be taken larger than 0,60/cd;
When On is a tensile stress µv · On shall be taken as O;
p; = As1/A1;
A,; is the cross-sectional area of bonded reinforcement crossing the interface and anchored
for OSd = /yt1, including ordinary shear reinforcement (if any), with adequate anchorage
according to 11.4 at both sides of the interface. Tensile forces across interfaces shall be
carried by reinforcement placed additional to the interface reinforcement A,;;
a is defined in Figure 8.15b), and is limited to 35° $a$ 135°; except for very smooth
surfaces, where 35° $ a$ 90°;
Cv1 and µv are factors which depend on the roughness of the interface (see Table 8.2 and (6)). The
formula assumes the contact s urface to be clean and free of laitance, dust or other
adhesion-reducing particles.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
130
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Table 8.2 - Coefficients depending on t he rough ness of t he s urface

Formula (8.76)
Formula (8.76) Formula (8.77)
and (8.77)
Surface roughness Cv1 µ. Cv2 kv k dowel

very smooth 0,01• 0,5 0 0 1.5

smooth 0,08• 0,6 0 0,5 1.1
rough 0,15• 0,7 0,08• 0,5 0,9
very rough 0,19• 0,9 0,15• 0,5 0,9
keyedb 0,37 0,9 - - -
• When the interface is subjected to tensile stresses caused by external axial force in perpendicular direction:
Cvl=0 and Cv2 = 0.
b The factors for keyed interfaces shall be applied for the area of each key considering its concrete strength.

(6) The roughness of the concrete interfaces may be classified as follows:

very smooth: a surface cast against steel, plastic or specially prepared wooden moulds;

smooth: a surface with less than 3 mm roughness (from peak to valley), e.g. a free surface left
without further treatment after compacting;

rough: a surface with at least 3 mm roughness (from peak-to-valley, maximum 40 mm

spacing), achieved by raking, exposing of aggregate or other methods according to
Figure 8.15a);

very rough: a surface with at least 6 mm roughness (from peak-to-valley, maximum 40 mm

spacing), achieved by raking, exposing of aggregate or other methods according to
Figure 8.15a);

keyed: a surface with shear keys complying with Figure 8.15c).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
131
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Dimensions in millimetres

Shear reinforcement: 45° $ aw$ 90°

Interface reinforcement: 35° :s; a :s; 135°
a) Rough/very rough in terfaces b) Shear/interface reinforcement
U"1
Al

}111111111! 11111 1. I .1 111111111111!

1 1
r. . I I \ I

I i,eff 6 ~9·

c) Keyed interfaces d) Shear diagram representing a distributed

stepped interface reinforcement

Key

1 roughness by raking 7 first concrete pouring section

2 roughness by exposed aggregates 8 second concrete pouring section
3 anchorage 9 interface shear resistance without interface reinforcement
4 shear reinforcement 45°::; aw::; 90° 10 interface
5 interface reinforcement 35° ::; er. ::; 135° 11 minimum shear reinforcementAsw,min (if necessary)
(except for very smooth surfaces, where
35° ~ a.$ 90°)
6 keys with 0,5 ::; h1/h2 ::; 2,0; Area of key:
A;= bi,eff • /;,err

Figure 8.15 - Classification of interfaces and definition of interface reinforcement

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
132
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(7) If yielding of t he required reinforcement crossing the interface is not ensured, due to insufficient
anchorage (e.g. structural toppings) the shear stress resistance may be taken as:

TRdi
rr:
= Cv2 Y..:.::. + µv <Jn+ kv p;/yd µv + kt1owel p; J~~
{yd · fed$ 0,25/cd (8.77)
Ye

where
Cv2, kv, kt1owe1 are factors which depend on the roughness of the interface (see Table 8.2 and (6));
µv, <Jn as defined in (5).
If the distance of an intersecting reinforcing bar to an edge in t he direction of the acting shear force is less
than 10¢, the coefficient for dowel action of reinforcement (last term in Formula (8. 77)) should be taken
as kdowe1 = 0. The interface reinforcement should be anchored for a stress of at least O,Sf~d with a minimum
length of embedment of 8¢ if no other methods of anchorage than by straight bars are applied. For
interface reinforcement with a=90° and an embedment length of at least 8¢, but anchored for a stress
lower than 0,5/yd, Formula (8.77) may be used with Cv2=µ,=kv=O .
In the case of horizontal shear transfer in slab members with cast-in-place structural toppings and rough
or very rough interfaces, the coefficient c,2 may be increased by a factor of 1,2 for determining the design
value TRdi of the interface shear resistance.
(8) The longitudinal shear resistance of grouted joints between (precast) slab or wall elements may be
calculated from Formula (8.76). However, in cases where the joint can be significantly cracked, for very
smooth, smooth and rough interfaces, Cv1 should be taken as zero, for very rough interfaces Cv1 = 0,19 and
for keyed joints c,, = 0,37 according to Table 8.2 (see also 10.7 in case of fatigue).
(9) If interface reinforcement in composite slabs is required, the spacing between the reinforcing bars
crossing the interface should not exceed the following:
shear transfer direction: 2,Sh ::; 300 mm, where h is the depth of the slab;

perpendicular to shear transfer direction: Sh::; 750 mm($ 375 mm to the edge).

Along edges of composite slabs where delamination of the topping cannot be prevented by permanent
loads (e.g. from walls), the minimum interface re inforcement per unit length along the edge should be
calculated by:

Gs.mi n = trn1n/ctm//yk (8.78)

where
t min smaller value of the thickness of new and old concrete layer;
fctm mean tensile strength of respective concrete layer.
(10) When reinforcement is required across the interface to satisfy Formulae (8.76) or (8.77), a
simplified "step approach" may be used, by which each step has a maximum length of 2d for linear and
3d for planar members, and for which the integral of the design effect is covered by the reinfo rcement
within the step, see Figure (8.15 d)). The spacing of the bars should be designed to ensure that T Rdi > TEdi
calculated in the central point of each step, complying with the spacing requirements defined above.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
133
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

8.3 Torsion and combined actions

8.3.1 General cons iderations for torsion

(1) Where a specific stiffness has been considered in the analysis according to 7.1(6), the
corresponding internal forces shall be considered in design. If a specific stiffness was neglected in the
analysis, e.g. torsional stiffness, then normally the corresponding internal forces, e.g. torque, may be
neglected at the ultimate limit state. In such cases, a minimum re inforcement, given in 12.2, 12.3 and 12.6,
in the form of stirrups and longitudinal bars should be provided in order to prevent excessive cracking.
(2) Solid sections may be modelled as equivalent thin-walled sections. Where warping tors ion may be
ignored, cross-sections with complex shapes, such as T-sections, may be divided into a series of sub-
sections, each one of which is modelled as an equivalent thin-walled section. Each thin-walled section
may be designed separately according to 8.3.2.
(3) For the purpose of reinforcement design, the distribution of the acting torsional moments over the
sub-sections may be in proportion to their uncracked torsional stiffnesses or, alternatively, in proportion
to their maximum possible torsional capacity according to Formula (8.84) assuming the same strut
inclination for all sub-sections. The reinforcement may then be designed assuming different compression
field inclinations.

8.3.2 Int erna l forces due to t ors ion in compact o r closed sections

(1) For closed thin-walled sections and solid sections, warping torsion may normally be ignored.
(2) The shear stress in a wall element of a section subject to a torsional moment T Ert may be calculated
from:

<t,i = - -TEd- - (8.79)

2Ak · teff,i

where

Ak is the area enclosed by the centre-lines of the connecting walls, including inner hollow areas;
r.,; is the torsional shear stress in wall i;
letr,; is the effective wall thickness. It may be taken as A/u, but should not be taken as less than twice
the distance between the outer concrete surface and the centre of the longitudinal
reinforcement. For hollow sections the actual th ickness is an upper limit;
A is the total area of the cross-section, including inner hollow areas;
u is the outer perimeter of the cross-section.
See Figure 8.16.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
134
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

3 4
2

Key
1 centre line
2 outer edge of effective cross-section, circumference u
3 cover
4 torsional web reinforcementAsw

Figure 8.16 - Notations and definitions used in 8.3

(3) The shear force VEd.i in a wall element i due to torsion may be taken as:

(8.80)

8.3.3 Internal forces due to torsion in open sections

(1) In open thin walled members it may be necessary to consider warping torsion. In this case the
different parts of the section should be designed according to the rules for bending and longitudinal axial
force in 8.1 and shear in 8.2.

8.3.4 Torsional resistance of compact or closed sections

(1) For a single cell, thin-walled section or a sub-section with constant effective wall thickness terr, the
design torsional capacity may be calculated as:

<t,Rd = min{<t,Rd,sw; <t,Rd,sl; <t,Rd,max} (8.81)

where

Tt.Rd.sw, Tt.Rd.sl and Tt,Jld.max are torsional stress resistances given by Formulae (8.82) to (8.84) and
determined on the basis of Annex G.
The torsional capacity according to Formula (8.81) should be used when combination of internal forces
are verified according to 8.3.6.
(2) The torsional capacity when governed by yielding of the shear reinforcement, Tt,Rd.sw, or the
longitudinal reinforcement, Tt,Rd,,1, may be calculated as:

Asw
<t,Rd,sw = cot9 - -fywd
terr· s
(8.82)

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
135
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

and

(8.83)

where
is the perimeter of the area Ak;
is the design yield stress of the longitudinal reinforcementA.1;
is the yield force of the longitudi nal reinforcement, that may be included in the calculation
of the torsional capacity. The amount of longit udinal reinforcement considered in
Formula (8.83) should have a resultant tensile force that acts at the centroid of the
equivalent thin-walled closed cross-section. The reinforcement should generally be
distributed according to 12.3.3(9);
is the design yield stress of the shear reinforcement;
Asw is the cross-sectional area of the shear reinforcement within the effective wall thickness in
Figure 8.16;
s is the spacing (in the longitudinal direction) between the shear reinforcement Asw;
e is the angle of compression field with respect to the longitudinal axis.
(3) The torsional strength, when governed by crushing of the compression field in concrete, may be
calculated from:

V ·fed
'I' - ---- (8.84)
t. Rd.max - cote + tane
where v may be determined by the formulae in Annex G. A value ofv = 0,60 may be used when cote= 1,0.
(4) The inclination of the compression field to be used in Formulae (8.82) to (8.84) should for usual
cases be chosen within the following ra nge:
1
e ~ cote ~ cotemin
cot mi n
(8.85)

where cotemin is defined in 8.2.3(4).

(5) When at the same time bmax/bm;n < 1,5 and c > 0,07bmin calculations of the torsional capacity should
be based on a reduced cross-section with reduced cover equal to 0,07bmin·
where
c is the concrete cover to stirrups;
bm;n; bmax are the minimum and maximum side lengths of the section (sub-section), i.e. the width
and the height in case of a rectangular cross-section.
NOTE This reduction accounts for a r isk for partial spa lling of the cover.

8.3.5 Des ign procedure for combination of actions

(1) Design for combined action of torsion, bending. shear and axial forces may follow:
the procedure of designing individual wall elements according to (2) or, alternatively;

a simplified procedure based on interaction formula as presented in 8.3.6.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
136
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(2) The design procedure for combination of actions may be based on a thin-walled closed section
complying with 8.3.2, in which the sectional forces and moments are replaced by a statically equivalent
set of normal- and shear stress distributions. The distribution of normal and shear stresses may be
determined by conventional elastic or plastic methods. Calculation of the reinforcement and check of
compression in the concrete struts in each individual wall may use the formulae of Annex G, or 8.2.3.
(3) For solid sections, if beneficial, a portion of the axial force and the shear force may also be
distributed to the solid core inside the thin-walled section.

8.3.6 Interaction formula

(1) A simplified and conservative verification of the resistance of cross-sections s ubjected to

combination of internal forces may be performed based on t he following linear criterion:

(8.86)

where
is the internal force considered;
are the individual design action and, respectively, the corresponding individual design
resistance of the cross-section (e.g. design torsional moment and pure design torsional
resistance (refer to 8.3.4), des ign bending moment and pure design bending moment
resistance and design shear stress and shear stress resistance).

(2) The SEd/SRd-ratios for shear actions and for the corresponding bending moments need not be
inserted simultaneously in Formula (8.86) provided that the bending moment capacity is based on the
area of reinforcement that does not include the part reserved for resisting Nvd according to 8.2.3(8). Jn
this case, two separate verifications may be carried out considering the following combinations:
a) bending, torsion and axial force; and
b) shear, torsion and axial force.
(3) Alternatively, other safe approximations of the interaction diagram established on the basis of
8.3.5(2) may be used.

8.4 Punching

8.4.1 General

(1) The rules in 8.4 complement those given in 8.2 and cover punching shear in s olid slabs and waffle
slabs with solid areas over supporting areas (columns, capitals, shearheads, wall ends and wall corners).
The rules presented hereafter for supporting areas apply by analogy to loaded areas of planar members
and foundations (column bases).
(2) The punching s hear res istance shall be verified according to the following procedure:
a) detailed verification of the punching shear resistance may be omitted, provided that the following
condition at the control perimeter bo.s is satisfied:

T fd s; TRdc.min according to 8.2.1(4); (8.87)

b) punching s hear reinforcement may be omitted when the following condition at the control perimeter
bo.s is satisfied :
according to 8.4.3; (8.88)

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
137
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

c) where T Ed > T Rd,c , punching shear reinforcement should be provided in an area in accordance with
(e) and designed in accordance with (d). In addition, the maximum punching shear resistance at the
control perimeter bo,s should not be exceeded:

T Ed :::; TRd.max according to 8.4.4(5) and (6); (8.89)

d) where required, the punching shear reinforcement should be provided to satisfy the following
condition at the control perimeter bo.s:

according to 8.4.4(1) to (4) and complying with the detailing rules

T Ed :::; TRd,cs (8.90)
of12.5.1;
e) if shear reinforcement is required, a further control perimeter bo.s,out where shear reinforcement is
no longer required shall be checked according to 8.4.4(7) or (8).

8.4.2 Shear -resisting effective depth, control perimeter and s hear s tress

(1) The shear-resisti ng effective depth of the slab dv should be taken as the distance from the
supporting area to the average level of the reinforcement layers, see Figure 8.17.
dvx + dvy
dv = - - -"'- (8.91)
2
where dvx and dvy are the nominal values.

NOTE 1 dvx and dvy a pp ly unless the Na tional Annex permits a lte rnative use of d dx and ddy.

When the column penetrates into the slab by more than d/ 20, dv should be determined according to
Figure 8.l 7c).
NOTE 2 The tole rance of the column penetration into th e s la b during construction ca n be given in the project
specification (for ins tance on th e drawings).

a) direct support b) hanging support with c) penetration by direct support

penetration
Key
1 control perimeter

Figure 8.17 - Shear-resisting effective depth of the slab dv considering effective level of
supporting area

(2) The control perimeter bo,s should be taken at a distance 0,Sdv from the face of the supporting area
except near to re-entrant corners of the s upporting area (see Figure 8.18 c)) where the distance between
the control perimeter and the face of the column should be increased so that the length of the control
perimeter is minimised. For edge and corner columns with overhangs, the extension is limited to half of
the overhang (see Figures 8.18 d) and e)). For edge and corner columns with large overhangs, the control
perimeter around the column as in internal columns can be governing.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
138
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

>
"1::J
"'·
__ -~b;bo
0 5
,_
• ••
., 1
O,Sdv
I
• . I
" I

1/ I "
2 2 2 1 2 1 2
a) b) c) d) e)
Key
1 slab edge
2 supporting area

Figure 8.18 - Typical control perimeters bo,s and perimeters bo around supporting areas (same
perimeter shapes)

(3) The effect of concentration of the shear forces at the corners oflarge supporting areas may be taken
into account by reducing the control perimeter assuming that the length of its straight segments does not
exceed 3dv for each edge (refer to the reduced control perimeter length shown in Figure 8.19 a)). In large
columns, without a detailed analysis, only the reduced control perimeter according to Figure 8.19 a)
should be accounted for. In wall ends and wall corners, the load carried by the supporting areas defined
in Figures 8.19 b) and c) should be verified for punching resistance whereas the load carried outside the
supporting areas should be verified for shear according to 8.2.1 and 8.2.2. Columns where the width is
larger than 6dv may be considered as wall ends or wall corners. For edge and corner columns with
overhangs, the length of the straight segments shown in Figures 8.18 d) and e) is also limited to 3dv.

..; > O,Sdv > >

--~ "1::J "1::J "1::J
Vl
"'·
0
- , ) "'·
0 1 o· "'·
0
..
. II
j

1 ( (
. . 11 bo l ·- I . I ,
bo I .. ,I
l __:_ __ .J J bv'
o. E1,Sd, l l
b s~I-J
~
:!;1.s·d. __ ~sd. 2
1

a) around large supporting b) around wall end c) around wall d) near opening e) with inserts
areas corner
Key
1 supporting area
2 inserts

Figure 8.19 - Length of control perimeter bo.s and support perimeter bo around supporting
areas

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
139
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(4) The effect of openings or inserts may be neglected if the distance between the nearest face of the
opening and the control perimeter exceeds 5dv. Otherwise, the part of the control perimeter contained
between the two tangents drawn to the outline of the opening from the centre of the supporting area
should be considered to be ineffective (refer to Figures 8.19 d) and e)).
(5) In the case of slabs with variable depth, in addition to the control perimeter near to the supporting
area, also other control perimeters with their corresponding shear-resisting effective depth dv according
to Figure 8.20 should be verified.

2 1
O,Sdv1
N
>
~

O,Sd.2
O,Sd.1

a) flat slabs b) ground slabs

Key
1 control perimeter 1
2 control perimeter 2

Figure 8.20 - Control perimeter and shear-resisting effe ctive depth of members with variable
depth

(6) The design shear stress T Ed may be calculated as:

VEd
TEd =Pe b0,5 . dv (8.92)

where

VEd is the design shear force at the control perimeter bo.s (all favourable loads acting on the tensile
side of the planar member, soil reactions on fo undations and ground slabs and the deviation
forces in post-t ensioned slabs inside the control perimeter may be deducted from the shear
force at centre of supporting area to calculate the design shear force at control perimeter, VEd).
In the case of foundations or ground slabs without shear reinforcement, the soil react ion may
be ded ucted up to a d istance of0,67dv from the face of the column;
{3. is a coefficient accounting for concentrations of the shear forces, which may be adopted from
Table 8.3. The approximated values for internal, edge and corner columns may be used only if
all following conditions are fulfilled:
the lateral stability does not depend on frame action of slabs and columns;
the adjacent spans do not differ in length more than 25 %;
the slab is only u nder unifor mly d istributed loads;
the moment transferred to the edge and corner columns is not larger than
Mid.max= 0,25be · d2 ·fed where width be is defined in Figure 8.21 c).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
140
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Otherwise, the refined values should be adopted. The refined values may also be applied in
cases complying with the conditions above for a more refined calculation;
bo.s is t he length of the control perimeter.

Table 8 .3 - Coefficients /3eaccounting for concentrations of the shear forces

Support Approximated Refined•

internal columns 13. = 1,15 where eb = jeG.x + eG.y

eb
edge columns {J. = 1,4 f3e = 1 + 1,1 bb where eb = 0.5 leb,xl + leb,yl
;::; 1,05
where
corner columns /3c= 1,5
eb = 0,27(1eb,xl + leb,yl)
ends of walls /3e = 1,4
corners of walls {J. = 1,2
• eb.x. eb,y are the eccentricities of the line of action of the support forces with respect to the centroid
of the control perimeter. The line of actio n of the support forces should be determined
accounting for the axial force and the moments in the two directions transferred by the
slab to the s upport (including the internal forces in a column above the slab if present).
The control perimeter for calculating its centroid may be simplified replacing parts of
circles by corners (see Figure 8.21 a)) and where the straight segments are not limited to
3d, according to (3);
bb is the geometric mean of the minimum and maximum overall widths of the control
perimeter (see Figure 8.21 b). Where the length of straight segments of the control
perimeter are limited to 3dv according to (3), the overall width of the control perimeter
should not be reduced) :

bb = .Jbb,min · bb,max

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
141
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

__ 1:_
.. . .. ·
ITT
4 ·.· .. 11I .se
I
~ <···· I~

a) b) c)
a) definition of eccentricities ei,, and eby
b) definition of overall widths of bb.mln and bbmax for control perimeter b o,s
c) definition of width be for an edge column
Key
VEd resu ltant of support force
1 simplification of the control perimeter with corners instead of parts of circles for calculating its centroid
2 centroid of full control perimeter
3 slab edge
4 column
5 control perimeter

Figure 8.21 - Eccentricity and control perimeter at edge columns for Table 8.3

(7) The design shear stress <Ed may also be calculated d irectly from a detailed analysis of the shear
stress distribution along the control perimeter using a method accounting for equilibrium and
compatibility conditions of the slab (for instance, linear elastic analysis) as:
V£d
f Ect = - (8.93)
dv
where the shear force per unit width VEd may be averaged according to 8.2.1 (6) and 2d should be replaced
by 2dv.
(8) In cases where s ignificant concentrated loads (;::: 0,2VEd) are applied at a d istance from the control
perimeter less than 3dv, the design shear stress < Ed should be calculated according to (7). In case
s ignificant concentrated loads are applied between the supporting area and the control perimeter, the
verification should be conducted by using strut-and-tie models or stress fields according to 8.5.

8.4.3 Punching shear resistance of slabs without shear reinforcement

(1) The des ign punching shear stress resistance should be calculated as follows:
1
0,6
rRd,C = -y . kb
p
( 100 PI . f. •· . -ddg)3 $ -0,5 . f.1
C" d y C<
ffu (8.94)
v v v

where

Pt = .jPI.x · P1,y (8.95)

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
142
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

p~.,, p1,y are reinforcement ratios of bonded flexural reinforcement in the x- and y-directions
respectively. The values of p 1,x and p1,y should be calculated as mean values over the width bs
defined in Figure 8.22. Reinforcement that does not extend at least 2.Sd,+20</> beyond the
control perimeter bo,s or 20</> beyond the line of contraflexure should not be considered;
d dg is defined in 8.2.1 (4 );
kpb is the punching shear gradient enhancement coefficient that may be calculated as:

(8.96)

bo is the length of the perimeter at the face of the supporting area (see Figure 8.18). Near to
re-entrant corners of the supporting area and close to slab edges, the perimeter bo should
be placed parallel to bo.s (see Figures 8.18c)-(e)). For large supporting areas, wall ends,
wall corners, slabs with openings and with inserts, the rules of 8.4.2(3) apply (see Figure
8.19);
d, is calculated according to 8.4.2(1).

b.
3dv 3dv ~3dv 3dv ~3dv ~3dv

>

~ t ..
:•
""<:>
,....,

• >
""<:>
,....,
..
""'
45

45•
'
I/

7. t
""'

a) internal columns b) edge columns c) corner columns

Figure 8.22 - Definition of width bs

(2) For distances between the centre of the support area and the point of contraflexure in the
considered load combination ap smaller than 8d., the value of dv in Formula (8.94) may be replaced by:

(8.97)

where

(8.98)

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
143
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Up,., up,y are the maximum distances from the cent roid of the control perimeter (which may be
simplified according to Figure 8.21a) to the two points (on the x- and on the y-axis,
respectively) where the bending moments mEd,., respectively med,y, are zero. The distances
Gpx and Gpy may be calculated according to (3) or using a linear elastic (uncracked) model.
The local coordinate system (x,y) has its origin at the centre of the supporting area and
coincides with the reinforcement d irections (principal directions in case oflayers which are
not orthogonal). In large columns, wall ends and wall corners, the origin of the local
coordinate system may be placed inside the supporting area at a distance 1,5dv from the
relevant column or wall face if it is more favourable.
(3) For regular flat slabs where the lateral stability does not depend on frame action between the slabs
and t he columns and that respect the condition 0,5:::;; Lx/Ly :::;; 2, the value of up may be approximated as
Gpx ;::, 0,22Lx and Gpy;::, 0,22Ly for the x- and y directions, respectively. For different span lengths in
continuous slabs, the largest span length of the bays adjacent to the considered column should be
accounted for. For edge columns, in the direction perpendicular to the edge, Gp may be approximated as
Gp= 0,22L where L is the span perpendicular to the slab edge. For corner columns, Gp may be
approximated as Up = 0,22L where L is t he largest span length of the adjacent bays in either the x- or y -
direction.
(4) For slabs with axial forces and for prestressed slabs, the value of kpb of Formula (8.96) may be
multiplied by the coefficient kpp:
for compressive axial forces (e.g. prestressing); (8.99)

for tensile axial forces; (8.100)

0,47 luctl
1+ ·-- (8.101)
1 - bo/bo,5 &
where O'd is the average normal stress over the width bs defined in Figure 8.22.
In case different axial stresses act in two directions, an average geometric value:

kpp = j kpp,x · kpp,y (8.102)

may be adopted, where kpp.x and kpp.y are the coefficients accounting for the presence of axial stresses in
the x- andy-directions.
For prestressed slabs with eccentric tendons, the beneficial effect of the tendon's eccentricity on the
tensile side of the planar member may be considered with:

0,47
1 + 1 - b /b
luctl ( ep)
. r;- 1 + 6 d (8.103)
o o.s "tck
where ep is the eccentricity of the tendons at axis of the supporting area with respect to the centre of
gravity of the cross-section to be considered as positive for tendons on the tensile side. For statically
indeterminate slabs, the effect of hyperstatic moments due to prestressing should be considered by
reducing the tendons eccentricity accordingly.
For prestressed slabs with bonded tendons, the effective depth dv and the flexural reinforcement ratio p1
to be used in Formula (8.94) should be calculated according to 8.2.2(6) in both directions and averaged
us ing Formulae (8.91) and (8.95).
The negative influence of tensile forces in the slab, except those related to constraints due to shrinkage
and thermal effects, should be accounted for using kpp with a value of less than 1,0.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
144
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

8.4.4 Punching shear resistance of slabs with shear reinforcement

(1) Where shear reinforcement is required, it should be calculated in accordance to:

'Rd,cs = 1Jc · 'Rd,c + IJs · Pw · fywd ~ Pw · fywd (8.104)

where
LRdc
1Jc =- -' (8.105)
TEd

TRd.c is the punching shear stress resistance of slabs without shear reinforcement
according to Formula (8.94).

;g)11 · . )3/
2 2

IJs = 150d ¢ + ( 15 d ( 1
k $ 0,8 (8.106)
w v IJc pb

where ddg is defined in 8.2.1(4).

_ Asw is the vertical shear reinforcement ratio at the investigated control

(8.107)
Pw - Sr . st perimeter;

Asw is the area of one leg of shear reinforcement;

Sr is the radial spacing of s hear reinforcement: Sr= max(so+si/2; s1) where so and S1 are defined
in Figure 8.23 a) and should comply with 12.5.1.
s, is the average tangential spacing of perimeters of shear reinforcement measu red at the
investigated control perimeter (length of the investigated control perimeter divided by the
number of shear reinforcement bars arranged on it or nea r to it).
For shear reinforcement arranged orthogonally over the whole shear reinforced area fulfilling the
requ irements of12.5.1, Pw may be calculated directly on the basis of the spacings in both directions.
(2) Where inclined shear reinforcement is used:
the shear reinforcement ratio according to Formula (8.107) should be replaced by
p.v=Asw.(sinaw + cosaw)/(s,·st) for distributed shear reinforcement and by p.v=Asw.sinaw/(dv·St) for
single bent up bars;

coefficient l)s calculated according to Formula (8.106) may be multiplied by the factor
(sinaw+ cosaw) . sinaw (but respecting that 1]s $ 0,8).

(3) In outer perimeters of shear reinforcement, without an explicit verification, at least the same
amount of reinforcement as in the first perimeter should be provided in each perimeter.
(4) Alternatively, the required area of shear reinforcement at the outer perimeters may be calculated
according to 8.4.4(1) and (2), where:
the shear resisting effective depth of the outer shear reinforcement dv.out should be considered
instead of d, for the calculation of TEd according to Formula (8.92);

the control perimeter bo,s.s placed at t he location of the shear reinforcement perimeter (see
Figure 8.24) should be considered instead of bo.s for the calculation of TEd according to
Formula (8.92);

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
145
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

the flexural reinforcement ratio to be considered according Formula (8. 9 5) for calculating TRd,c should
be anchored with respect to the control perimeter bo.s.s instead of bo.s and calculated using the full
effective depth for bending din each direction;

the value of the shear gradient enhancement coefficient k pb for the calculation of TRd,c should be
calculated according to Formula (8.96) replacing bo.s by bo,s.s and bo by bo.s , where the perimeter bo,s
is located at a distance dv.our/2 from the control perimeter bo.s.s towards the supporting area (see
Figure 8.24). In addition, the coefficient k pb may be multiplied by (dv/dv,ou1)Ll 2 provided t hat the
product respects the limits of Formula (8.96);

the values dv in Formula (8.94), apd in Formula (8.97) and krp in 8.4.3(4) remain unchanged;

the shear reinforcement ratio should be calculated assuming s,=s1;

the coefficient f3e accounting for the concentration of shear forces along the control perimeter may
be adapted according to the refined method of Table 8.3 by considering the overall dimensions of the
control perimeter bo,s,s;

for wall ends, wall corners, large and elongated columns, the perimeters bo.s and bo.s.s may be
increased according to Figure 8.24 c), provided that the shear reinforcement is arranged accordingly.

The value of dv,out is given by:

dx + dy
dv,out = 2
- Cv (8.108)

NOTE Cv is defined in Figure 8.23 unless the Nationa l Annex gives a different value.

3 4 5 3

So 2
a) b) c) d) e)
a) definition of radial spacings of punching reinforcement
b) - e) definition of parameter Cv for different anchorage types
Key
1 supporting area (column, wall end or wall corner) 3 level of axis of reinforcement inside the bend
2 limit of bend 4 bottom of stud head

Figure 8.23 - Definition of parameter Cv (for detailing rules, see 12.5.1)

(5) The punching shear resistance shall be limited to a maximum of:

t'Rd,max = T/sys · t'Rd.c (8.109)

NOTE Unless the National Annex gives d ifferent values, the values of coefficient l"fsys for shear reinforcement
complying with 12.5.1 are:

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
146
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

I/sys = 0, 70 + 0,63 ( d: )1/4 ;: : 1,0 for studs

b
(8.110)

I/sys = 0,50 + 0,63 ( d: )1/4 ;: : 1,0 for links and stirrups

b
(8.111)

(6) The maximum punching shear resistance •Rd.max at internal columns may be multiplied by 17pm
considering compressive membrane action provided that:
no significant openings, inserts or slab edges are present at a distance less than 5dv from the control
perimeter bo,s; and

coefficient T}pm is not already considered in ~d.c according to 1.8.5.1(1).

NOTE The factor is 1Jpm =1,0 for new structures and 7]pm according to 1.8.5.1(1) for existing structures unless
the National Annex gives different values.

(7) The outer control perimeter at which shear reinforcement is not required (bo,s,oui:, see Figure 8.24)
may be calculated as:
2
b - b · _ d v_ , _1) (8.112)
0,5,out - 0,5 ( d T}
v,out c

where

bo.5 is the control perimeter located at a distance dv/2 from the face of the supporting area
according to 8.4.2 (2);
dv,out is the shear-resisting effective depth of the outer shear reinforcement according to
Formula (8.108);
'le as defined in Formula (8.105).
The outermost perimeter of shear re inforcement should be placed at a distance not greater than 0,5dv,out
from the outer control perimeter bo.s.ou• according to Figure 8.24. Where the spacing of the shear
reinforcement exceeds 3dv,out. the part of bo,s,out greater than 1.5dv,out from a shear reinforcement
assembly, measured parallel to the outer reinforcement perimeter, should be ignored, see Figure 8.24 b ).
The flexural reinforcement considered according Formula (8.95) for calculating •Rd,c should be anchored
with respect to the control perimeter bo,5,ou• instead of bo,s;
(8) Alternatively, the outer control perimeter bo,s,ou1 at which shear reinforcement is not required may
be calculated by finding the control perimeter where the punching shear resistance is sufficient without
shear reinforcement according to 8.4.3, using the method defined in (4). The value of bo,s.s where shear
reinforcement is not required is derived iteratively and becomes bo.5,ou•·

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
147
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

0,Sd v.oul

a)

a) control perimeters for radial arrangements (bo.s.s and bo.s refer to the instance of the 3•d perimeter of
shear reinforcement)
b) control perimeters for cruciform arrangements
c) control perimeters for wall ends, wall corners, large and elongated columns (instance of wall end with
radial arrangement of shear reinforcement)
Key
1 supporting area

Figure 8.24 - Definition of control perimeters for punching reinforcement

8.5 Design with strut-and-tie models and stress fields

8.5.1 General

(1) Strut-and-tie models or stress fields should be used for design and verification of discontinuity
regions (i.e. regions where t he strain state distribution is not linear such as near concent rated loads or
geometric discontinuities) in absence of specific provisions elsewhere in this code or of alternative
refined analyses.
NOTE All provisions of 8.2.3 to 8.2.5 and 8.3 and Annex G are consistent with the rules given in 8.5. Linear
members with shea r reinforcement and without discontinuities can thus also be designed for bendi ng, shear and
torsion with the provisions of8.S. Unless stated otherwise, the provisions in 8.5 app ly to cases that can be modelled
under plane stress conditions. Alternative and more refined verification methods for struts, ties and nodes can be
adopted for special cases (e.g. where triaxia l stress conditions apply).

(2) The provisions in 8.5 are applicable without a verification of t he deformation capacity provided
that the following conditions are fulfilled:
the member contains a minimum reinforcement according to Clause 12 or the development of
uncontrolled cracks is avoided by other means;

the reinforcement complies with the details according to Clauses 11and12;

the reinforcing steel is either ductility Class B or C.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
148
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(3) Strut-and-tie models and stress fields aim at a representation of the stress state in a cracked
concrete structure. They shall be in equilibrium with the external actions and shall satisfy strength
conditions. They consist of:
struts in strut-and-tie models which are idealisations of the compression fields in the stress fields
(refer to 8.5.2);

ties representing the reinforcement (refer to 8.5.3);

nodal regions where the forces are t ransferred between the struts or between compression fields
and/or the ties (refer to 8.5.4).

NOTE Strut-and-tie models and stress fields are consistent in terms of hypotheses and complementary in terms
of use. Strut-and-tie models are idealizations of stress fields aiming at a representation of the force resultants of the
compression fields (struts) and ties in the tension fields (see Figure 8.25 b) and d)).

(4) Compression fields and ties in stress fields can be distributed (Figure 8.25 a)) or concentrated
(Figure 8.25 c)). Both cases may be designed with the provisions of 8.5. Alternatively, for an element fully
occupied by a distributed and uniform compression field and with distributed reinforcement (refer for
instance to Figure 8.25 a), the formulae of Annex G may be used for its design. In this latter case, the forces
in any chord at the boundaries of the membrane element shall be designed accordingly.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
149
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

8 6

t
a) distributed stress field b) corresponding strut-and-tie model to a)

c) concentrated stress field d) corresponding strut-and-tie model to c)

Key
1 distributed compression field 5 concentrated compression field
2 distributed tie field 6 tie
3 concentrated tie 7 node
4 triangu lar nodal region 8 strut

Figure 8.25 - Examples of stress fields and strut-and-tie models

8.5.2 Struts and compression fields

(1) The width of the struts and of the compression fields shall be verified to respect the strength
condition of (3). For the conditions at the ends of struts, 8.5.4 applies.
(2) The stresses in the concrete struts and in the compression fields may generally be assumed as
uniformly distributed over its cross-section, so that its value may be calculated as:

(8.113)

where
Fed is the compressive force of the strut;
t is the thickness of the strut which can be limited by the thickness of the member;
be is the width of the strut at the considered location.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
150
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(3) The compressive stress acd in a strut or in a compression field developing within the concrete shall
fulfil the following condition:

acd $ v ·fed (8.114)

where v is the strength reduction factor defined in (4) and (5).
(4) Unless a more refined approach is used, the value of factor v may be determined as a function of
the smallest angle 8cs between the strut representing the res ultant of the compression field and any of
the ties that cross with the strut as defined in Figure 8.26.
a) for compression fields and struts crossed or deviated by a tie at an angle:

20°$ ecs < 30° v= 0,4 (8.115)

30°$ 8cs < 40° v= 0,55 (8.116)
40°$ ecs < 60° v= 0,7 (8.117)
60°$ 8cs < 90° v= 0,85 (8.118)
Alternatively, the value of factor v may be determined as:
1
v= -----~- (8.119)
1,11 + 0,22 · cot 2 8cs
b) for compression fields and struts in a region without transverse cracking (e.g. when transverse
compressive stresses are present)

v= 1,0 (8.120)

tttt tt

-- _
--
-- -

--
--:HF:J.-~"F---
-!.-<F'-lr-'4'-1.4---
__......,_.....,......,...,__
--:HF:J.-ttt>~
~-

-- -~~'l'-!.4=-------1...
-- -~~¥4+--

HH H
a) constant width b) variable width
(example of end support of beams)
Key
1 bearing

Figure 8.26 - Definition of angle ec.s for compression fields

(5) More refined values for factor v may also be used for compression fields in cracked zones. They
may be deter mined from the principal tensile strain in the concrete, based on a cracked analysis of the
member neglecting the tensile strength of the concrete. In this case, factor v may be evaluated as:
1
V - < 10 (8.121)
- 1,0 + 110E1 - '
where Et is the value of the maximum principal tensile strain.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
151
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(6) In zones with confinement reinforcement, the compressive strength may be increased according to
8.1.4. The confinement stress aczd to be used in 8.1.4(2) is the minimum of the two principal compressive
stresses perpendicular to the strut (in planar members without confinement reinforcement
perpendicular to the plane, aczd is thus null). The stresses in the confined struts shall be limited to
O"cd S vfcd + l:!.fct1.
(7) The contribution of compression reinforcement to the strength of a strut may be taken into account
up to its yield strength, provided that:
it is in the same direction as the strut;

the strength of member according to 8.1 is respected;

buckling of the reinforcement is prevented according to the rules in 12.6; and

detailing is performed according to the rules of Clauses 11and12.

(8) Where compression fields of width be cross ducts of diameters such that </>duct > bc/8, the resistance
should be calculated on the basis of a nominal width based on 8.2.3(10).

8.5.3 Ties

(1) The resistance of a tie FRd shall fulfil the following condition:

Ftd :5 FRd = As · fyct + Ap · fpct (8.122)

where As and Ar are the cross-sectional areas of the reinforcements of the tie. If prestressed reinforcement
is considered as an external action, thenfpd should be replaced by fpd - O"pd according to 7.6.5(1).
(2) Formula (8.122) may be used only when ties are suitably anchored at the nodes according to the
rules given in 8.5.4. Otherwise, the force in the ties should be limited to the force that can be effectively
anchored.

8.5.4 Nodes

8.5.4.1 Definitions

(1) Nodes shall ensure the transfer of forces amongst the different struts and ties (see Figure 8.25).
(2) For nodes with three concurrent struts and ties, four cases can be distinguished:
CCC nodes, when only struts reach the node (refer to 8.5.4.2);

CCT nodes, when only one tie is present in the node (refer to 8.5.4.3);

CTT nodes, when only one strut is equilibrating the reinforcement forces (refer to 8.5.4.4);

TTT nodes, where only ties reach the node. TTT nodes may be used only if consistent values of the
strength reduction factor v in the node are adopted accounting for anchorage, detailing and strains
according to 8.5.2(5).

(3) Nodes with four or more concurrent struts and ties may be treated as a combination of two or more
nodes, each of them with three intersecting strut and ties according to (2).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
152
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

8.5.4 .2 CCC nodes

(1) In a CCC node, verification of the stress state within the nodal region may be omitted as long as the
adjoining struts all comply with their stress limits.
(2) The value of coefficient v at the ends of the converging struts may be taken as 1,0 (see
Figure 8.27 a)) or increased according to 8.1.4 or 8.6. The widths of the struts be may be adapted
accordingly. If the converging struts have different stresses, the geometry of the node may be adapted
according to Figure 8.27 b).

a) identical stresses b) different stresses

Figure 8.27 - CCC node with three struts

8.5.4.3 CCT nodes

(1) The tension force F2d shown in Figure 8.28 a) shall be anchored:
outside of the nodal region according to Figure 8.28 b); or

partly or completely inside of the nodal region according to Figures 8.28 c), d) and e).

(2) The following methods may be used for anchoring the tie force:
straight bars according to 11.4.2 where the design anchorage length /bd should not be less than the
width of the nodal region (/bdn in Figure 8.28 c);

bends, hooks (11.4.4) and loops (11.4.6) should not start their bend before the centre of the node nor
should the curved segment of bends, hooks and loops be located completely within the node.

The heads of headed bars (11.4.7) should be placed beyond the nodal region. An additional length
according to Figures 8.28 d) toe) should be provided to allow spreading the anchored force over the
width bs and the thickness t (where b5 · t ~ F 2 d.b/ fed• F2d.b being the reinforcement force to be
anchored at the backside of the node).

(3) If necessary, the reinforcement carrying the tie force may be distributed or a distributed
reinforcement may be added according to Figure 8.28e). In case of distributed stirrups carrying the tie
force, 12.3.3 applies.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
153
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

a) b) c)

d) e)

a) st rut-and-tie model
b) with anchorage outside the nodal region
c) anchorage partly inside the nodal region
d) example of anchorage using headed bars outside the nodal region
e) example of anchorage us ing loops outside the nodal region
Key
1 cross-section where the rei nforcement force is fully transferred to concrete in compression

Figure 8.28 - CCT nodes and stress fields

(4) The strength reduction factor v of concrete in CCT nodes may be ass umed as:
according to 8.5.2( 4) in case the tie is fully anchored inside the nodal region as shown in Figure 8.28c)
(case with /bdn = /bd);

v = 1,0 in case the tie is fully anchored outside of the nodal region as shown in Figures 8.28b ), d) and
e);

a linear interpolation between the previous values depending on the ratio between the required
anchorage length outside of the nodal region and the total required anchorage length.

8.5.4.4 CTT nodes

(1) CTT nodes (Figure 8.29) should be designed according to one of following alternatives:
with bent bars as shown in Figure 8.29b );

with anchorages outside of the nodal region as shown in Figure 8.29c) or partly inside of the nodal
region in a similar manner as in Figure 8.28c). In case the force is anchored with bends, hooks, loops
or headed bars, 8.5.4.3(2) applies;

with straight bars inside the nodal region as shown in Figure 8.29d).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
154
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

a) strut-and-tie model and equilibrium of forces b) strut-and-tie model and stress field for the
deviation force of a bent bar

c) strut-and-tie model and stress field for d) strut-and-tie model and stress field for
anchorages outside the node anchorages inside the node with deviations
occurring due to bond
Key
1 cross-section where the reinforcement force is fully transferred to concrete in compression

Figure 8.29 - CTT node and corresponding stress field

(2) The strength reduction factor v of concrete at the end of the strut may be assumed as:
according to 8.5.2(4) in the case of bent bars shown in Figure 8.29b), provided that the requ irements
of the mandrel diameter of 11.3 are fulfilled, or in the case that the ties are anchored inside of the
nodal region as shown in Figure 8.29d);

v = 1,0 in case the tie is fully anchored outside of the nodal region as shown in Figure 8.29c).

8.5.5 Transfer of concentrated forces into a member

(1) Unless a detailed analysis is performed on the serviceability and ultimate limit state conditions
(according for instance to 7.3.4), the transverse reinforcement for concentrated forces applied in a plane
stress state and spreading into a member shall satisfy the rules provided in 8.5.5.
(2) The reinforcement for carrying spreading forces may be dimensioned and arranged according to
the stress fields or the strut-and-tie model shown in Figure 8.30:
Fd
Ftd =2 tan8cf (8.123)

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
155
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

where the spreading angle 8,r may be assumed as:

1- a/b
tanecf = (8.124)
2
where a and bare defined in Figure 8.30a). For the case shown in Figures 8.30c) and d) (b > a + H/2),
Formula (8.124) should be replaced by tan8cr = 0,5.
Alternative approaches for design of the reinforcement may be used, provided that the spreading angles
and corresponding reinforcement layout are derived from a stress field fulfilling the requirements of
8.5.2 to 8.5.4.

i Fd

a+H/2

a
Fd12 J Vd/2

e~
IF \
I I
I I :i::
I I
I I
t----1
\ I
\ I

a) b) c) tf d d)
Fd12 f f Fd/2

a) narrow element; b) strut-and-tie model c) wide element; stress d) strut-and-tie model

s tress fields fields

Figure 8.30 - Spreading of concentrated forces, stress fields and strut-and-tie models

(3) In case of concentrated forces acting close to an edge, transve rse reinforcement should be placed,
to take the force according to the concentrated stress field in Figure 8.31:
(8.125)
where tan8,r;::: 1/4 may be assumed. The nodal region, in this case may be considered as a CCT node.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
156
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

a) stress field

b) corresponding strut-and-tie model

Figure 8.31 - Concentrated forces near an edge

8.6 Partially loaded areas

(1) For partially loaded areas without horizontal force components, the design res istance according to
(2) and transverse tension forces according to (3) and 8.5 shall be considered. The formulae given in (2)
below are valid where there is no risk of punching failure. Possible punching failure shall be checked
independently according to 8.4.
(2) The design res istance may be verified as follows:

(8.126)

where
Vpart is a confinement factor:
Vpart = 3,0 unless larger resistance can be justified based on refined analysis including tensile
stresses due to load or restraint, where relevant;
For a concentrically loaded area Aco (see Figure 8.32),
Aco = ao · bo (8.127)
is t he loaded area with ao taken as the lengt h of the loaded area in the direction perpendicular
to the closest edge of the load introduction block.
- For eccentric loading Aco should be taken as A co.red (see Figure 8.33 a)):
Aco.red = Do.red · bo.red (8.128)
where
Go.red = Go - 2e, and b o.red = bo - 2eb,
e. is the eccentricity of the applied load to the center Aco parallel to ao,
eb is the eccentricity of the applied load to the center Aco parallel to bo.
Ac1 =a,· b1 (8.129)
is the contributing concrete area (see Figure 8.32 for a single loaded area and
Figure 8.33 b) for two loaded areas of different size),

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
157
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

where
a1 = a taken as the length of the load introduction block parallel to ao.
b1 = min{bo + (a1 - ao); b}
The minimum height of the load introduction block should be h 2': a1.

c1 c1

1- r-e c11
... i- 1
<>
II

A,, 0
-Cl
ao

bo~ -Cl A,o = A,11

F F
ao
... i- 1
1- I-

a,

a) 3-dimensional load distribution b) 2-dimensional load distribution

Key
1 load introduction block
a, b dimensions of load introduction block area
ao, bo dimensions of loaded area Aco
a1, b1 dimensions of contributing area A,1

Figure 8.32 - Dimensions of loaded area and contributing concrete area

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
158
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

ao
1- -....
aored
·- ----· -- --1
A,, I
A,o I
I
3+ ~
2 I

E
0
c
:f I
I
I
I
~

~
-Cl
0

-Cl
F I "'
-Cl

Ao. r•d I
I
I
I
I
e. I
I

a nom

a)
a, Fl <11 F2

1
\
~
I I

I
t--·- ~- ------ ---- -
I A ,0 F1 I j

~ u: I . I A co,n I
-Cl
-Cl
0
-Cl
I
I \ I -t !
~+---"~-+~ ~------ -\-----j
I
I ~-J Fi
F1

b}

Key
_ + ao.F1 - ao.F2
av, - s 2
ao,Fz - ao.P,
avz = s + 2

1 load introduction block

2 centre of introduction block
3 centre of Ac0

Figu re 8.33 - Cases of eccentrically applied loads a) and two loa ds b)

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
159
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(3) Unless justified by more refined analysis, transverse reinforcement should be placed according to
8.5.5 to accou nt for spreading of the applied load.
(4) In lieu of Formula (8.126), the design resistance Ohdu may be determined by considering the
beneficial effect of confinement reinforcement according to 8.1.4. If the area of the confinement core Acs,
delimited by the confinement reinforcement, is more than twice as large as the loaded area, the
confinement stress obtained from 8.1.4 shall be reduced by the factor .J2Aco/Acs ::;; 1. The confinement
reinforcement should be placed in the load introduction block immediately below the loaded area.
(5) When horizontal force components are present, the design resistance O"Rdu may be determined with a
reduced contributing area A c1.red located at a depth of h ;::: ai with its centre being on t he line of action of
the applied load. If the resistance based on the red uced contributing area A ct.red is not sufficient,
additional reinforcement should be provided for the entire horizontal force components.
(6) More refined methods, such as three-dimensional stress fields accounting for the beneficial effect
of confinement by geometry and by reinforcement may be used for the design of partially loaded areas.
NOTE Additional rules for design in footings and pile caps without shear reinforcement accounting for a
concentrated compression zone and the resulting reduced level arm are given in 12.8(3).

9 Serviceability Limit States (SLS)

9.1 General

(1) Clause 9 covers the common serviceability limit states. These are:
stress limitation and crack control (see 9.2);

deflection control (see 9.3);

vibration control (see 9.4).

(2) In the calculation of stresses and deflections, cross sections may be assumed to be uncracked
provided that the tensile stress under the characteristic combination of act ions does not exceed fct•ff· If
the section is assumed to be uncracked a calculation of crack widths is not required.
(3) For the purpose of calculating crack widths and tension stiffeningfc,,err should be taken equal to ft•m·
For the calculation of deflections under predominantly flexural stresses, the value of/ ct.elf may be taken as
f~•m or fc•m,n (see Formula (9.30)), provided that the calculation of minimum reinforcement areas for crack
control is also based on the same value.
NOTE Cracking can be observed for lower values of tensile stresses. This is attributed to non-uniform self-
equilibrating stresses due to shrinkage strains, early thermal stresses. sustained loading and to the effective tension
area (see Figure 9.3). Further information is given in Annex D.

(4) For the calculation of stresses and deflections, an effective modulus of elasticity, Ec,eff, may be used
for concrete to estimate long term effects due to quasi-permanent actions, according to Formula (9.1):

1,05 · Ecm
(9.1)
Ec,eff = 1 + q;(t, to)
If compressive stresses due to quasi-permanent combination of actions exceed 0,40.fcm, the value of
q>(t,to)should account for nonlinear creep according to B.5(6).
(5) As a simplified approach for the calculati on of stresses, valid for crack width calculati ons only, a
modular ratio E,/ Ee.err equal to 15 may be used for both permanent and variable loads.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
160
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

9.2 Stress limitations and crack control

9.2.1 General considerations

(1) Cracking shall be limited to an extent that will not impair the proper functioning or durability of
the s tructure or cause its appearance to be unacceptable.
NOTE 1 Cracking is normal in reinforced concrete structures resulting from either direct loading or restrained
imposed deformations.

NOTE 2 Cracks can also arise from other causes such as plastic shrinkage or expansive chemical reactions w ithin
the harde ned concrete. Such cracks can be unacceptably large but their avoida nce and control lie outside the scope
of9.2.

(2) Cracks may be permitted to form without any attempt to control their width, provided they do not
impair the functi oning of the structure. In cases where crack width is not critical and crack width limits
for durability are not r elevant, verification acco rding to 9.2.2 and 9.2.3 may be omitted and crack control
may be assumed to be covered by the provision of minimum reinfor cement according t o 12.2.
NOTE The re are particular risks of large cracks (wk> 0,4 mm) occurring in member locations whe re there a re
s udden changes of stress, e.g.
at changes of section;

near concentrated loads;

positions where bars are curtailed;

areas of high bond stress, particularly at the end of laps.

(3) If crack w idth control is required, minimum reinforcement according to 9.2.2 should be provided
and the secti on should be checked for cracking according to 9.2.3.
NOTE 1 Simplified provisions for reinforcement stress limitation and crack control are given in Informative
Annex$.

NOTE 2 To control a crack to a specified width a greater a rea of reinforcement than that required by 9.2.2 can be
required.

(4) When lapping large diameter bars(</>> 32 mm), large surface cracks can occur. Surface crack width
at the most tensioned fibre may be verified according to 9.2.3.
NOTE Simplified provisions for large bars are given in Informative Annex S.

(5) The measur es for limiting th e crack widths should be adapted to the causes of cracking, for instance
by:
choosing an appropriate structural concept;

prestressing;

limiting the reinforcement stresses and the concrete stresses;

appropriate detailing;

appropriate selection of concrete properties;

curing of concrete.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
161
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(6) A limiting value w11m,ca1 for the calculated crack width W1<,ca1 should be established taking into account
the proposed function, the nature of the structure, the costs of limiting cracking a nd the location where
the crack width is considered.
NOTE 1 Unless the National Annex gives different values or a different location, the limits on stresses, crack
widths Wl im,cal are given in:
Table 9.1 (NOP) for requirements related to appearance;

Table 9.2 (NOP) for requirements related to durability.

NOTE 2 See Annex H for additional conditions related to water-tightness.

Table 9.1 (NOP) - Verifications, stress and crack width limits for appearance

Calculation of Verification of
minimum Verification of crack width reinforcement
Verification
reinforcement according to 9 .2.3 stresse s to avoid
according to 9.2.2 yielding at SLS
Combination of Characteristic
Cracking forces Quasi-permanent
actions for calculating combination of
according to 9.2.2 combination of actions
a. act ions
Limiting value of
crack width Wlim,c;il or as $/yk
Wiim,cal = 0,4 mm a5 $ 0,8/yk

stress as as $/yk Clp $ 0,8/pk

NOTE Crack widths are verified at the member surface unless the National Annex gives a different location.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
162
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Table 9 .2 (NOP) - Verificatio n s, s tress a nd crack width limits for durability

Reinforced members and

prestressed members
Prestressed members with bonded tendons
without bonded tendons and
with Protection Level 1 according to 5.4.1(4)
with bonded tendons with
a nd p retens ioned members.
Protection Levels 2 or 3
Expos ure Class
according to 5.4.1(4)
combina tion of a ctions combina tion of actions
quasi- quasi-
characteristic frequent characteristic
permane nt permanent
WHm,cal=
XO, XCl - -
0,2 mm . k surf
- -
XC2, XC3, XC4
Decom- WJim,cal =
pression b 0,2 mm . k surf
WHm,cal =
XDl, XD2, XD3 0,3 mm . k surf
XS1,XS2, XS3
CJc :::; 0,6fck a.c - Decompressionb CJc :::; 0,6fck a,c
XF1, XF3
XF2, XF4
-
NOTE 1 Crack widths are verified at the member surface unless the National Annex gives a different location ..
NOTE 2 The factor k surf considers the difference between an increased crack width at the member surface and
the required mean crack width accord ing to durability performance of the minimum cover: 1,0 :S
k surf =Cact/(10 mm + Cmin,dur) :S 1,5.
Cact is a specified actual cover ~ Cnom due to detailing or execution reasons.

• This limitation in serviceability conditions is not necessary for stresses under bearings, partially loaded areas
and plates of headed bars.
b The decompression limit requ ires that all parts of the bonded tendons or duct lie at least 25 mm within
concrete in compression. The decompression check is only relevant in the direction of the prestressed
reinforcement.
c The compressive stress ac may be increased to 0,66/ck if the cover is increased by 10 mm or confinement by
transverse reinforcement is provided.

(7) Reinforcement should be considered as effective in controlling crack width only w ithin a given area
of concrete around the reinforcement bars. This area, Ac.eff, is referred to as the effective tension area.

9.2.2 Minimum reinforcement a reas to a void yielding

(1) The required minimum area of reinforcement to avoid yielding shall be calculated by applying the
principle that the reinforcement, working at the characteristic yield stress, should balance the moment
that cracks the section acting together with the relevant axial force N Ed·
(2) Unless a more refined calculation shows lesser areas to be adequate, the required minimum areas
of reinforcement may be calculated as follows. In profiled cross sections like T-beams and box girders,
minimum reinforcement should be determined for the individual parts of the section (webs, flanges). The
reinforcement necessary in the part of the cross section under consideration may be determined by
Formulae (9.2), (9.3) or (9.4), as appropriate.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
163
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(i) For pure bending:

0,2khfct,effAc
As,min,w l ;::: f, (9.2)
yk

(ii) For pure tension:

O,Skhfct.effAc
As.min.w t = As,min,w2 ;::: _ _{,_ __ (9.3)
yk

(iii) For a combination of bending and axial force:

0,3NEd + 0,2khfct,effAc
> ---------
- f yk

As.min.w t ;::: 0
(9.4)
< O,Skhfct.eftAc
- fyk
A . _ NEct _ A . {::;; As.min.w t
s.mrn.w2 - fy k s.mrn.w l ;::: O

where
is the full area of the part of the section (web or flange) under consideration;
A s.min,wl is the area of minimum reinforcing steel to be placed at the most tensioned face of the
part of the section under consideration to control cracking;
As.min.w2 is the area of minimum reinforcing steel to be placed at the least tensioned face of the
part of the section under consideration to control cracking;
is the design axial force at the serviceability limit state acting on the part of the section
under consideration (tensile force positive). N Ed should be determined considering the
characteristic values of prestress and axial forces under the relevant combination of
act ions;
is a coefficient which allows for the effect of non-u niform self -equilibrating stresses,
which lead to a reduction of the apparent tensile strength which may be taken as:
::;; 0,8
kh = 0,8 - 0,6(min{b; h}- 0,3) {;::: . (9.5)
05
where hand b [m] are the dimensions of the part of the section under consideration.
fct,eff is the mean value of the tensile strength of the concrete effective at the time when the
cracks may first be expected to occur: f ct.eff =/ctm fort;::: tref or f._1.eff =/ctm(t), if cracking is
expected at t < t ref
NOTE For more informa tion on fct.eff , see Ann ex D.

(3) Bonded tendons in the tension zone may be assumed to contribute to crack control within a
distance::;; 150 mm from the centre of the tendon. This may be taken into account by deducting the term
(1Ap/j,<Jp//yk from the area of minimum re inforcement corresponding to the tensioned face where the
prestressing is placed.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
164
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

where
Ap is the area of pre-tensioning or bonded post-tensioning tendons within the tensile zone;
(t is the adjusted ratio of bond strength taking into account the different diameters of
prestressing and reinforcing steel, according to Formula (9.6):

(1 = J( :p (9.6)

( ratio of bond strength of prestressing and reinforcing steel, according to

Table 10.1 in 10.3(2);
<P is the diameter of the reinforcing steel bar;
<f>p diameter of tendon according to 10.3(2). If only prestressing steel is used to
control cracking, (t = (;
l:i.ap stress variation in pres tressing tendons from the state of zero strain of the
concrete at the same level.
(4) Beams with a downstand depth of more than 600 mm, where the main tension reinforcement is
concentrated at the most tensioned fi bre, should be provided with additional longitudinal reinforcement
given by Formula (9.7), at a spacing not exceeding 300 mm, to control cracking on the side faces of the
beam. This reinforcement should be evenly distributed between the level of the reinforcement layer
closest to the most tensioned fibre and the neutral axis.

fct,eff
As.web= 0,2----;-bw(d - x - a1) (9.7)
Jyk

where
A s.web is the longitudinal reinforcement to be provided distributed on the two surfaces of the web
in a height limited by the neutral axis and (d - Gt) at a spacing not exceeding 300 mm to
control cracking;
Gt equal to 150 mm.
(5) In prestressed members, no minimum reinforcement for crack control is requi red in sections
where, under the characteristic combination of actions and the characteristic value of prestress, the
tensile stress in the concrete is below f ct,ef1.

9.2.3 Refined control of cracking

(1) The calculated crack width Wk.cal given in 9.2.3 should only be considered as a nominal value for the
crack width at the member surface, to be compared with w um.cah and not as values actually measured on
site.
NOTE Formulae (9.8) to (9.20) provide an estimate of the crack width at the member surface at the most
extreme fibre. For other locations "c" can be replaced by the distance from the bar considered and kt/r can be
adjusted accordingly.

(2) The calculated surface crack width Wk.cal may be determined from Formula (9.8) :
(9.8)

where
kw is a factor converting the mean crack width into a calculated crack width;

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
165
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

NOTE 1 The value of kw is 1,7 unless the National Annex gives a different value.

k i 1r is a coefficient to acco un t for the increase of crack width due to curvature. For the
most tensioned fibre this may be defined in accordance with Figure 9.1 as:
h- x
ki/r =h - a y,1. - x (9.9)

When considering the least tensio ned fib re of a member with both faces
in tension, the effect of the curvature is favourable and therefore may be
defined as:
(9.10)
k _ lxl
t/r - -a-y.-s -+-Ix-I

Sr,m,cal is the calculated mean crack spacing when all cracks have formed or where not all
cracks have formed, the length along which there is slip between the concrete and the
reinforcement adjacent to a crack;
Esm is the mea n strain in the reinforcement closest to the most tensioned concrete surface
under the relevant combination of actions, including the effect of imposed
defor mations and taking into account the effects of tension stiffening. Only the
additional tensile strain beyond the state of zero strain of the concrete at the same
level is considered;
£cm is the mean st rain in the concrete at the same section and level of Esm·

0
y

'<

• • • •

• • • •

Figure 9.1 - Notation for definition of k i1r in Formulae (9.9) and (9.10):
section and strain plane

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
166
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

2
a) Element restrained at an edge (e.g. jointless wall) - only first crack is represented
2 1 2

~ I ·~
b) Element restrained at the ends (typical tie) - only first crack is represented
L

c) Element restrained at edge and ends (e.g. wall grid) - only first crack is represented
Key
1 area where forces are affected by crack development
2 restrai nt (at edges or ends)
3 if z > L/2, Formula (9.11) for end restraint applies and if z $ L/2, Formula (9.13) for edge restraint
applies
Figure 9.2- Types of restraint
NOTE 2 Members subjected to imposed strains can be restrained along the edges (see Figu re 9.2 a)) or at the
ends (see Figure 9.2 b)). In a member wh ich is restrained along the edges cracking only changes forces locally and
crack widths depend on the applied strain. In a member which is restrained at the ends, cracking changes fo rces
globally and crack widths de pend on the tensile strength of concrete, but not on the applied strain. This affects the
way <sm - <c.n is determined (see (3) and (4)).

(3) For members subjected to direct loads (stabilized cracking) or subjected to imposed strains (crack
formation phase) where end restraint dominates (see NOTE 2 in (2) and Figure 9.2 b)), £sm - fem may be
calculated from Formula (9.11) :

as - k t fct,eff (
~ 1 + lXePp,eff
)
a
- - p,eff > (1 - k ) _..! (9.1 1)
12sm 12cm - Es - t Es

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
167
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

where

as is the stress in the tension reinforcement closest to the tensioned concrete surface
assuming a cracked section. For a member subjected to imposed strains, restrained at
the ends, the tension in the reinforcement may be derived from the sectional cracking
forces. For members with bonded tendons, a 5 may be replaced by !:!.av, i.e., the st ress
variation in prestressing tendons from the state of zero strain of the concrete at the
same level;
ere is the ratio Es/Ecm;
As + (iAp
Pp.ell= A (9.12)
c,eff
are the non-prestressed and prestressed reinforcement area, respectively, located
within the effective area
Ac.err is as defined in Figure 9.3;
k, is a coefficient dependent on the duration and nature of the load:
k, = 0,6: a) for short term loading or;
b) instantaneous loading or;
c) long term and crack formation stage or;
d) repeated loading and crack formation stage;
k, = 0,4: e) long term and stabilised cracking stage or;
f) repeated loading and stabilised cracking stage.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
168
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

- - - -- --- ------+----

a) Group of bars (bending) b) Isolated bars (bending) c) Circular cross-section

(bending)
b

d) Group of bars, distributed e) Group of bars (both faces in t) Isolated bars (both faces in
along perimeter (both faces in tension) tension)
tension)
Key
Fig. a) to b): bending (with or without normal force)

For a single layer of bars: he.err= min {ay+S<f>; lO<f>; 3,Say; h- x ; ~}

h
For n layers of bars spaced Sy: hc,eff = min{min{ay+S<f>; lO<f>; 3,Say} + (n - l)sy; h - x; 2}
Fig. c): circular cross section: he.err= min{a + 5¢; 10¢; 3,Sa}
Fig. d) tot): tension (with or without bending)
h c,etr= min{ay + 5¢; 10¢; 3,Say; O,Sh}

bc,err = min{ a x + 5¢; 10¢; 3,Sax; 0,5b}

Figure 9.3 - Effective tension area

(4) For members subjected to restrained imposed strains and restrained at the edges (see NOTE in (2)
and Figure 9.2 a)), (csm - ccm) may be calculated from Formula (9.13):

fct,eff
Esm - Ecm = RaxEfree - kt -E ~ 0 (9.13)
cm

where

Rax is the restraint factor:

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
169
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

R
ax
= 1 _ Erestr (9.14)
Eimp

For the common case of the base of a wall a simplified value of Rax= 0,5 may be assumed;
ErestT the strain which develops in the restrained element;
E;mp the value of the imposed strain (i.e. free shrinkage, free temperature strain). The ratio Erestr /Eimr
may be estimated according to linear elastic analysis, and may acco unt for staged construction,
if relevant;
Efree is the imposed strain which develops after the construction stage when restraint is applied (e.g.
precast elements).
(5) If a member is res trained both at the ends and at the edges the criterion defined in Figure 9.2c) may
be applied.
(6) The mean final crack spacing Sr.m.cal may be calculated as:
kn· kb ¢ 1,3
Sr,m,ca l = 1,5 . c + 7 2 . - - ::;, k (h - x) (9.15)
, Pp.eff w

where

For a rectangular cross section subjected to pure bending:

h- h c,e ff
kn = h (9.16)

In general:

k
fl
= -12 ( 1 + (h-xh g--hXgc,e1·r·)) (9.17)

Xg is depth of the neutral axis of the uncracked section;

k = {1,2 for poor bond conditions
(9.18)
b 0,9 for good bond conditions
¢ is the bar diameter. For bundled bars, an equivalent diameter according to Formula (11.6)
may be used. For a section with ni bars of diameter ¢ 1 and ni bars of diameter ¢ 2, an
equivalent bar diameter ¢ cq according to Formula (9.19) should be used instead of¢:
ni¢f + nz¢~ (9.19)
¢eq = Tit ¢ 1 + n2¢2
c is the clear cover of the bar. For corner bars, the maximum value of the cover applies.
For pure tension:
kn= 1,00 (9.20)
(7) If, in members reinforced in two orthogonal directions, the angle 8 between the axes of principal
compressive strain and the direction of the reinforcement in the x-direction is larger than 15° the crack
width should be calculated according to G.5.
(8) When using strut-and-tie models or stress field models with the struts or compression fields
oriented according to the compressive stress trajectories in the elastic state (cracked or uncracked),
Formula (9.8) may be used to evaluate the crack widths by considering the tension reinforcement as a tie
with the corresponding effective area around it. The cover to be considered in Formula (9.15) s hould be
taken as the distance from the concrete surface to the edge of the nearest bar, even if the bar is not part
of the strut-and-tie or stress field model (e.g. skin reinforcement).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
170
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

9.3 Deflection control

9.3.1 General consideration

(1) The deformation of a member or structure should be such that it does not adversely affect its
proper functioning or appearance. Appropriate limiting values of deflection taking into account the
nature of the structure, of the finishes, partitions and fixings and the function of the structure should be
established.
(2) For structures within the scope of EN 1990:2023, Annex A.1 limits for vertical deflections according
to Annex A.1.8, Figure A.1.1 should be specified for each project and agreed with the client. Suggested
maximum values are given in EN 1990:2023, Annex A. For bridges, the provisions of EN 1990:2023,
Annex A.2 apply.
(3) Deflections may be controlled:
in buildings by indirectly limiting the span-to-depth ratio, see 9.3.2;

in buildings by simplified explicit verification of deflections, see 9.3.3;

in any type of structures by explicit verification, see 9.3.4.

NOTE The actual deformations can differ from the estimated values (either according to 9.3.3 or 9.3.4),
particularly if the values of applied moments are close to the cracking moment The differences will depend on the
scatter of the material properties, on the environmental conditions, on the load history, on the restraints at the
supports, ground conditions, etc.

9.3.2 Simplified deflection control by span/ depth-ratio for buildings

(1) Provided that reinforced concrete beams or slabs in buildings, subjected to predominantly
uniformly distributed loads, are dimensioned in compliance with the limits of span to effective depth ratio
given in Table 9.3, their deflections may be considered as not exceeding a total deflection ofl/250. In such
cases explicit verification of the deflections may be omitted.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
171
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:20 23 (E)

Ta ble 9.3 - Lim itin g s p a n /effective dept h ratios l/d for build ings

Re quired m ech a nical reinforcement r a tio•

Wr = 0 ,3 Wr = 0,2 Wr = 0,1
Structura l syst em LL/TLb LL/TLb LL/TLb
60 45 30 60 30 60 45
45% 30%
% % % % % % %
Simply supported beam,
1 one-way spanning 15 14 12 17 15 13 22 19 17
simply supported slab
End span of continuous
2 beam or one-way 20 18 16 22 20 17 29 25 22
spanning slab
In terior span of
3 continuous beam or 23 21 18 26 23 20 33 29 26
one-way spanning slab
4 Cantilever 7 7 6 8 7 6 10 9 8
NOTE This table assumes the quasi-permanent value of the live load with l/J2= 0,3 and that th e
deflection limit for long-term deflection is i/250, where I is the span of the beam or slab.
• is the requ ired mechanical tension reinforcement ratio to resist the moment due
W r=As.req/(bw·dJlydlfcd
to th e design loads, at mid span for continuous or simply supported elements and at the support for
cantilevers. Intermediate values may be interpolated. The limits are conservative for flanged
sections.
b Characteristic values of: LL = characteristic value of live load (imposed or variable);
TL= characteristic value of total load. Intermediate values may be interpolated.

(2) For a different maximum total deflection of I/a, the lid-values of Table 9 .3 should be multiplied by
(250/a), where a is the deflection ratio factor different from 250.
(3) The limiting span/effective depth ratios of Table 9.3 may be extrapolated to other support
conditions by multiplying them by the cubic root of the ratio of the maximum value of the linear elastic
deflection of a simply supported beam of the same span and the maximum value of the linear elastic
deflection of the actual structure.
(4) For r ectangular 2-way flat slabs supported on columns, with slenderness ratio lmax/d, the limit ing
span/effective depth ratios of Table 9.3 may be multiplied by the following factor:
1/ 4

+ (~)'
(9.21)
( )
1

wh ere

/min is the minimum span of the slab;

lmax is the maximum span of the slab.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
172
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(5) For rectangular 2-way flat slabs, simply supported on walls or supported on stiff beams on all four
sides, with slenderness ratio lmin/d, the limiting span/effective depth ratios ofTable 9.3 may be multiplied
by the following factor:

(9.22)

9.3.3 Simplified calculation of deflections for reinforced concrete building structures

(1) For rectangular sections, long-term deflections may be determined from linear elastic analysis
using gross concrete sections and assuming long-term properties (i.e. Ee.err) according to Formula (9.23).

(9.23)

where
01oads is the linear elastic deflection, which should be calculated using Ee.err, determined for uncracked
conditions, due to the quasi-permanent combination of actions;
Om is the linear elastic deflection, determined for uncracked conditions, due to differential
shrinkage determined by applying, on the linear elastic model, the curvature given by
Formula (9.24)

( r1)Ecs = Ec,eff
Es Ss
Ecs lg
(9.24)

where
Ss is the first moment of area of the actual tension and compression reinforcements with
respect to the centroid of the gross concrete cross-section;
18 is the second moment of a rea of the gross concrete cross-section;
is a coefficient accounting for cracking and creep defined as follows:

k, f
= S:: + (1 - 0 if the section cracks (9.25)
l 1,00 ifthe section does not crack
with
lg 1 (9.26)
l cr = 2.7(a e,efPJ,,o,6(£!)3
h

where
p is the provided tension reinforcement ratio related to (b · d) at mid span for
continuous or simply supported elements and at the support for cantilevers;
ll'e,er =Es/ E c,eff is the effective modular ratio;
<; is the zeta factor defined in Formula (9.29) which for beams may be determined on
t he basis of the ratio between the cracking moment (Mer) and the bending moment
under the characteristic combination of actions (Mk). assuming a long-term
analysis:

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
173
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

\ =1 - Mcr)
0.5 (Mk
2

ks is a coefficient to account for the effect of cracking on the shrinkage deflection. ks may be
estimated from Formula (9.27):
l,00 if the section does not crack
{ (9.27)
ks= 455pf - 35p1 +1,6 ifthe section cracks

9.3.4 General method for deflection calculations

(1) For a detailed deflection control the deformations should be calculated under load conditions
which are appropriate to the purpose of the check, see EN 1990.
(2) Me mbers which a re not expected to be stressed above the level which would cause the tensile
strength of the concrete to be exceeded anywhere within the member may be considered to be uncracked.
The assessment should allow for tensile stresses induced by restraint of early age the rmal and long-term
shrinkage strains.
(3) Members which are expected to crack, but may not be fully cracked, should be taken to behave in a
manner intermediate between the uncracked and fully cracked conditions according to Formula (9.28):
(9.28)
where
a5 is the deformation parameter considered which may be, fo r example, a strain, a curvature,
or a rotation (as a simplification a 6 may also be taken as a deflection, see (7));
a1, au are the values of the deformation parameter calculated for the uncracked and fully cracked
conditions respectively;
is a distribution coefficient (allowing for tension stiffening at a section) which may be taken
from Formula (9.29):

\ = 1 _ Pt c::: r~o
( = 0 for uncracked sections;
(9.29)

p, is a coefficient taking into account the influence of the d uration of loading or of repeated
loading on the average strain; it may be taken equal to:
p, = 1,0 for a single short-term loading,
p, = 0,5 for sustained loads or many cycles of repeated loading;
as is the highest stress having occurred up to the moment being analysed in the tension
reinforcement calculated on the basis of a cracked section;
a sr is the stress in the tension reinforcement calculated on the basis of a cracked section under
the loading conditions causing first cracking.
NOTE CJsr/crs may be replaced by Mcr/M for flexure or Ncr/N for pure tension, where Mer is the cracking moment
and Ncr is the cracking force.

(4) For the calculation of deflections under predominantly flexural stresses, the value offe1,erf may be
taken asfe1m,n (see Formula (9.30) with h [mm]) provided that the calculation of minimum reinforcement
for crack control is based on the same value.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
174
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

fctm,fl = max {( 1,6 - lOhoo)fctm; fctm} (9.30)

(5) For loads with a duration causing creep, the total deformation including creep may be calculated
by using an effective modulus of elasticity for concrete according to Formula (9.1).
(6) Shrinkage curvatures may be assessed using Formula (9.24). In this case, S and I should be
calculated for the uncracked condition and the fully cracked condition, the final curvature being assessed
by use of Formula (9.28) and the deflection due to shrinkage determined by double integration of the
curvature.
(7) For a rigorous calculation of deflections using the method given in (3) the curvatures should be
computed at frequent sections along the member and then, the deflection calculated by numerical
integration. In most cases the deflection may be computed once, assuming the whole member to be
uncracked and secondly assuming a fully cracked condition, and then interpolate using Formula (9.28).

9.4 Vibrations

(1) Measures should be taken to prevent vibrations that cause discomfort to people or limit the
functional effectiveness of the structure.
(2) Verification of vibrations of concrete structures should be considered following indications in
EN 1990:2023 (A.1.8.3, A.2.9.2, A.2.9.3, A.2.9.4) and for wind actions in EN 1991-1-4, as relevant.
(3) For the calculation of vibrations the dynamic modulus of elasticity may be taken as 1,1 Ecm·
(4) For the verification of vibrations of concrete structures, in the absence of more refined methods,
the effective damping ratio i;v may be taken as the sum of the effective structural damping, i;v,st, plus the
effective damping provided by non-structural components.
(5) Table 9.4 provides values for the effective structural damping, .;v.st·
NOTE Values of effective structural damping and of non-structural components in bridges are provided in
Annex K.9(5).

Table 9.4 - Suggested values for effective damping components

Structural Damping ((v,st) in general
1 Reinforced concrete 2%
2 Prestressed concrete 1%

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
175
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

10 Fatigue
10.1 General

(1) Structures and structural components subjected to significant numbers of repeated load or
deformation induced significant stress cycles shall be verified to endure the expected cyclic actions
during the required design life.
NOTE A fatigue verification can generally be omitted for the following structures and members:

a) common buildings subjected to a total number of significant load cycles s 2 · 104;

b) prestressing and reinforcing steel, in sections where, under the frequent combination of actions and
Pk. only compressive stresses occur at the extreme concrete fibres;

c) external and unbonded tendons, lying within the depth of the concrete section.

(2) The verification shall be performed separately for reinforcement and concrete by:
simplified methods given in 10.4 to 10.7; or

refined methods using damage equivalent stresses in E.4 and K.10 where applicable; or

explicit method using Palm9ren-Miner Rule in E.5 where applicable;

EN 1993-1-9 for welds.

10.2 Combination of actions

(1) The fatigue-inducing cyclic action should in general be combined with other actions according to
EN 1990:

L =L
Fd
i
Gk,i + L
j
1/J2,; Qk,; +(Pk)+ Frat,d (10.1)

NOTE Qk.i are non-cyclic, non-permanent actions, these should include temperature Q1<.1cmp to determine
whether cracked or uncracked sections should be considered. Frat,d is the design value of fatigue action (e.g. traffic
load as defined in EN 1991 or other cyclic load) as defined in EN 1991.

(2) For the verification according to 10.4 to 10.7, Frat should be taken as the cyclic component of the
frequent load as defined in EN 1991. For road bridges, Fra, should be taken as the frequent load of load
model 1 according to EN 1991-2. For railway bridges, Frat should be taken as the frequent load of load
model 71 according to EN 1991-2.

10.3 Internal forces and stresses for fatigue verification

(1) When determining forces and stresses of the reinforcement, the tensile strength of concrete shall
be ignored and a linear stress-strain relationship for concrete under compression shall be used, satisfying
compatibility of strains of the two materials.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
176
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(2) The effect of different bond behaviour of prest ressing and reinforcing steel shall be taken into
account. This may be done by calculating the steel stress range with an equivalent area of re inforcement
for the prestressing tendons considering the ratio of bond stress(:

(10.2)

where
A. is the equivalent area of reinforcement;
Ap is the area of prestressing tendon or tendons;
</> is t he largest diameter of reinforcing steel;
<f>p is the diameter or equivalent diameter <f>p.eq of prestressing steel:
<l>r.•q= 1,60~ for bundles of wires or strands,
<f>p.eq = 1,75</>wire for single 7 wire strands,
where </>wire is the wire diameter,
<f>p.eq = 1,20</>wire fo r s ingle 3 wire strands;
is the ratio of bond strength between bonded tendons and ribbed or indented reinforcing steel
in concrete. Unless more precise data is available the values given in Table 10.1 may be used.

Table 10.1 - Ratio of bond strength (between tendons and reinforcing steel

Ratio of bond strength (

prestressing steel bonded, post-tensioned
pre-tensioned
/ckS 50 MPa /ck :.?: 70 MPa
Smooth bars and wires not applicable 0,30 0,15
Strands 0,60 0,50 0,25
Indented wires 0,70 0,60 0,30
Ribbed bars 0,80 0,70 0,35
NOTE 1 Intermediate values may be interpolated between 50 MPa </ck< 70 MPa.
NOTE 2 Values I; are valid for tendons directly cast into concrete or contained within corrugated metal ducts.

(3) The redistribution of stresses in concrete in the compression zone may be accounted for by
verifying the compression stress at a distance of 100 mm (but not more than 1/3 of the cross-section
depth) from the outermost compressed fibre. The stress should not be taken less than 2/3 of the
maximum compressive stress for concrete compressive strength up to fck = 55 MPa and not less than 0, 9
for fck =100 MPa, respectively, intermediate values may be linearly interpolated.
(4) In the verification for fatigue resistance the inclination of the compressive struts era, should be
calculated using the compression field inclination eat ULS from 8.2.3 in Formula (10.3) :

coterat = .Jcote ;::: 1,0 (10.3)

For a more refined calculation, 8rat may be taken as ein G.5, fo r the maximum s hear in the cycle.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
177
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(5) In prestressing and reinforcing steel exposed to fatigue loads, the maximum stresses under the
relevant fatigue load combination shall not exceed the design yield strength.

10.4 Simplified verification of reinforcing or prestressing steel

(1) Adequate fatigue resistance may be assumed under tension, if the stress range under the fatigue
load combination according to 10.2 with the frequent cyclic load with a maximum of 10s load cycles
complies with:
a) reinforcing steel bars (for bent bars footnote al of Table E.1 (NOP) should be applied):

6asd S 90 MPa unwelded reinforcing bars cf> S 12 mm;

6asd s 73 MPa unwelded reinforcing bars cf>> 12 mm;

6asd s 40 MPa butt and tack welded re inforcing bars cf> s 12 mm;

6asd s 30 MPa butt and tack welded reinforcing bars cf>> 12 mm;

6<Jsd ~ 19 MPa couplers.

b) prestressing steel for pre-tensioning:

6apd S 95 MPa.

c) prestressing steel for post-tensioning:

6apd S 95 MPa s ingle strands in plastic ducts;

6apt1 S 80 MPa st raight tendons and curved tendons in plastic ducts;

6apd S 55 MPa curved tendons in steel ducts.

NOTE These limits for the design stress ranges (including partial factor YH according to EN 1990) in the
reinforcement are based on the S-N curves in Tables E.1 (NOP) and E.2 (NOP) assuming 108 Joad cycles and ys = 1,15.
Modification of values in Tables E.1 (NOP) and E.2 (NOP) will result in changes of the limits given above.

10.5 Simplified verification of concrete under compress ion

(1) Adequate fatigue resistance of concrete under compression may be assumed to be met, if the
following condition is satisfied:

lacd,max l < O 5 + O45 lacd,minl < O90 (10.4)

fed.fat - ' ' fed.fat - '

where
a , <1,max is the maximum compressive stress at a fibre under the fatigue load combination according
to 10.2;
CTcd,min is the minimum compressive stress at the same fibre where U c<1,max occurs;
/cd.r.t is the design fatigue strength of concrete according to Formula (10.5):
/ck
f ed.fat = f3cc(to) · Ye · 1Jcc,fat (10.5)

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
178
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

where
f3cc(to) is a coefficient for concrete strength at first load application to (see B.4(1));
IJcc.rat = min{0,8517cc; 0,8};
NOTE Formula (10.4) is based on 107 assumed load cycles.

10.6 Simplified verification of concrete under shear

(1) For members requ iring des ign shear re inforcement at the ultimate limit state, Formula (10.4) may
be applied to t he struts of members subjected to shear. In this case the design fatigue reference strength
of concrete fed.rat should be reduced by the strength reduction factor v. A value of v = 0,5 may be used.
(2) For members not requiring design shear reinforcement at the ultimate limit state it may be
ass umed that the concrete resists fatigue d ue to shear effects where the following formulae are complied
with:
for TEd,min/TEd,max ;::: 0:

lrEd,max l ;::; 0, 5 + 0, 45 lrEd,minl ;::; 0, 90 (10.6)

LRd,c LRd,c

for TEd,min/TEd.max < 0:

lrEd,max l ;::; 0, _ lrEd,minl (10.7)

5
TRd,c TRd,c

where

<Ed.max is the design shear stress d ue to the maximum applied shear force under the fatigue load
combination according to 10.2;
<Ed.min is the design shear stress due to the min imum a pplied shear force under the fatigue load
combination according to 10.2 in the cross-section where TEd,max occurs;
TRd,c is the design value for shear resistance stress without shear reinforcement accord ing to
Formulae (8.27) or (8.94).

10. 7 Simplified verification of shear at interfaces

(1) Interfaces subjected to fatigu e actions should be rough, very rough or keyed.
(2) In verification with Formula (10.8) w ithout reinforcement crossing the interface, the values for
Cv1,fat and µ v.rat in Table 10.2 should be applied.

' Ed i ;::; rRdi &Ye- +

= Cv 1'fat - µv fat · IO"n I ;::; 0,3 ·fed + P, fyd cosa
'
(10.8)

(3) The fatigue verification of re inforcement crossing the interface may be omitted in members with
shear reinforcement crossing the interface and fulfilling the minimum requirements according to 12.2, if:
the interface is very rough or keyed as defined in 8.2.6(6); and

the interface reinforcement is sufficiently anchored and crosses the interface at an angle according
to Figure 8.15 b).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
179
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(4) If reinforcement crossing the interface is required according to 8.2.6, it should be anchored and the
shear strength verified according to Formula (10.9) with µ v,far from Table 10.2:

t.aRsk ( . )
t.rEdi ~ t.rRdi = µv,fat · lanl + P 0,4 5
. Ys µv,fat · sina + cosa (10.9)

where t he stress range t.TE<1; is defined by upper and lower load level of Formula (10.1).
The value of t.oRsk should be taken from Table E.l (NOP) or based on testing appropriate to the design
situation under consideration.

Table 10.2 - Coefficients Cv1,ra1 and µ v,ra1 for different interface roughness

with interface
without interface
reinforcement
Surface roughness reinforcement Formula (10.8)
Formula (10.9)
Cv1, fat µ v,fat µv,fa t

Rough 0,075 0,7 0,7

Very rough 0,095 0,9 0,9
Keyed 0,185 0,9 0,9

11 Detailing of reinforcement and post-tensioning tendons

11.1 General

(1) The r ules given in Clause 11 apply to ribbed and indented reinforcement, mesh and pos t-tensioning
tendons.

11.2 Spacing of bars

(1) The clear distance between parallel bars and their arrangement s hould be sufficient to allow access
for vibrators if needed for good compaction of the concrete. Where bars are positioned in separated
horizontal layers, there should be sufficient space between the resulting columns of bars to allow access
for vibrators and good compaction of concrete.
(2) The clear distance Cs (horizontal and vertical) between individual parallel bars should be not less
than max{¢; D upper + 5 mm; 20 mm}.
(3) Bars may be arranged in bundles with a maximum of 3 contacting parallel bars. For bundles of
vertical bars in compression and for bars in a lapped joint, a maximum of 4 contacting parallel bars may
be used. Bars in bundles of 3 and 4 should be arranged so that every bar is in contact with at least two
other bars. Clear distance between bundles of bars should be not less than the equivalent diameter <Pb
defined in 11.4.3(1).
(4) The clear distance between the face of already poured concrete and a bar parallel to it should be at
least 5 mm if the s urface of the already poured concrete is at least rough according to 8.2.6(6), else the
distance should equal the minimum required for bond according to 6.5.2.3(1).
(5) The minimum clear spacing between post-installed reinforcing steel bars or between post-installed
reinforcing steel bars and cast-in reinforcing steel bars is given in 11.4.8.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
180
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

11.3 Permissible mandrel diameters for bent bars

(1) The minimum d iameter to which a bar may be bent shall be such as to avo id:
damaging the reinforcement, see (2); and
failure of the concrete inside the bend of t he bar (crushing, splitt ing or spalling of reinforcement
cover), see (3), (4) a nd (5).

(2) The mandrel diameter of bars without welds or of bars and welded fabrics with welds at least 3cf>
away from th e bend should be at least:
c/>mand,m in = 4cf> for cf> :s; 16 mm;

c/>mand,m in = 7 cf> for cf> > 16 mm.

(3) Provi ded that /yd :s; 25/cd and re :s; 1,5, verification of the concrete inside the bend may be omitted
for:
stirrups and links in compliance with 12.3.3;

standard h ook and bend anchorages complying with Figure 11.6 where:
the anchorage of the bar does not require a length more than 5cf> past the end of the bend;
there is a clear distance Cx <!'. 1.5c/> from an edge parallel to the bend;
there is a clear distance between bars Cs <!'. 3cf> acco rding to Figure 11.3 c); and
pr ovided thatfyk::: 500 MPa andfck<!'. 25 MPa, all bends with an a ngle abend ::; 45° at a clear distance
Cx <!'. 2,5cf> from an edge parallel to the bend, a clear distance between bars Cs <!'. 5cf> and the length
of the straight segments between multiple bends is not shorter than 4cf>.
(4) In cases not complying with (3), the design value of the steel stress <1sd should be verified to avoid
concrete failures inside the bend. This may be done according to Formula (11.1):

+ ~) (k bend + O•7 . c/>mand)

113 (11.1)
< O f c/>mand + ff;;,. (ddg) (Cd
<1sd - •65 J cd cf> yc cf> cf> 2 cf>

where

Cd is t he minimum of the clear distance Cxfrom an edge parallel t o the bend and half t he clear
s pace between bars Cs according to Figure 1 l.3c);
kbend is a parameter considering the bend angle abend, which is defined in Figure 11.6;
kbend = 32 · (45° /abend)
In case of multiple bends, the length of the st raight sections between bends shall not be shorter than 4cf>.
NOTE Practical bending ca n require longer straight sections.

(5) If transverse bars ar e placed within the bend, th e limit to the st eel stress O"sd in Formula (11.1) may
be increased by the follow ing factor:
ktrans = 1 + 4 ntrans ( ¢/ ¢.nand)( rA••ns/ ¢)2(45° I aJ:>end) (11.2)
where

ntrans is the number of transverse bars within the bend; and

rArans is the d iameter of transverse bars but not larger than 1,35¢.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
181
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

11.4 Anchorage of reinforcing steel in tens ion and compression

11.4.1 Gen eral

(1) Reinforcing steel bars which are either cast-in or post-installed into hardened concrete extending
out of a member and/or connecting a member to an adjacent member, and wires or welded fabrics shall
be anchored so that their longitudinal forces are safely transmitted to concrete or are transferred to
another reinforcement according to 11.5.
(2) Potential cracking parallel to the anchored reinforcement should be controlled by appropriate
transverse or confinement reinforcement. Generally, minimum transverse or shear reinforcement
according to Clause 12 will suffice for bars r/J ~ 32 mm. Otherwise, minimum amount of confinement
reinforcement according to 11.4.2(7) should be provided.
(3) In linear members, stirrups enclosing the bars as shown in Figures 11.1 a) and b) should be
provided to control longitudinal cracking as well as delamination cracking parallel to the anchored
reinforcement.
(4) In planar members, transverse bars parallel to the concrete surface placed above or below the
anchored reinforcement as shown in Figures 11.1 c) and d) should be provided to control longitudinal
cracks. Shear reinforcement, bends in the anchored reinforcement as shown in Figure 11.1 c) or edge
reinforcement according to Figure 12.4 should be provided to control delamination cracks.
NOTE Longitudinal cracking in the plane of the anchored reinforcement can considerably reduce the anchorage
performance.

I
}

L___J L___J
1 1 2 1 1 2
a) b) c) d)
Ke y
1 potential delamination crack
2 potential longitudinal crack

Figure 11.1 - Examples of reinforcement controlling delamination and longitudinal cracks

(5) Methods of anchorage as shown in Figure 11.2 may be used for reinforcing steel in tension and in
compression, except method d) which should be used in tension only. However, for methods b) and c)
used in compression, only the first straight segment may be considered as a nchorage, except as given in
11.4.4(3).
(6) The start of anchorage as shown in Figure 11.2 refers to the cross section where the reinforcement
force is fully transferred to the concrete in compression (examples are shown in Figures 8.28 and 8.29).
For force transfer to other reinforcements, see 11.5.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
182
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

mp2 ~ <1> 2
~------ ' bd ---~
-4-"'•d
W=.JlT"'•d
--- 1 ~1
a) Anchorage of straight bars 11.4.2 d) Anchorage of headed bars 11.4. 7

-----,·-
I

!
k--11·-
... _ _ -Tf</>- 2 0' s d
4
-.-.-.-i
~---- 1 bd -+·--~
--- 1
b) Anchorage of bends and hooks 11.4.4 e) Anchorage of wel ded reinforcement bars 11.4.S
I rr<f> 2 I
r:;;Iiiii_iiiiiiii_iiili=::;..~1 ~4~ "'•d
•niiiiJ- ( Tf</>4 2 O' s d
--
l....:~!!!!!!!!~=::!..
Tf</> 2
~J ..:..:74- O' sd --~-'
---...,-
1 -~~
. ' bd i1
c) U-bar loops 11.4.6 f) Anchorage of bonded post-installled reinforcing
steel 11.4.8
Key
ibd design anchorage length
1 start of anchorage

Figure 11.2 - Methods of anchorage (shown for tensile forces)

11.4.2 Anchorage of straight bars

(1) A design anchorage length lbct (Figure 11.3) shall at least be provided to safely transfer the forces
from a bar to the surrounding concrete without spalling or bond failures.

Cx
1 2

.~
( ( ( ( (((f-= -))
I rr<f> 2
- 4- O' sd
- ~
)?» 1~=
bd " - 4- O' sd ...,""
+--....__-+---++---+-----'
I bd

Cs Cs

a) tension b) compression c) conditions for Cct

Key
1 corner bar
2 edge bar
nomina l cover Cd= min{O,Sc,; ex; Cy; 3,7S<f>}

Figure 11.3 - Definition of design anchorage length for straight bars and Cd

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
183
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(2) For ribbed bars with cf>:::; 32 mm and indented bars with cf>:::; 14 mm where Cd?. 1,5¢, O'sd = 435 MPa
and with good bond conditions according to (4) the design anchorage length /bd divided by diameter in
tension and compression in persistent and t ransient design situations may be taken from Table 11.1
(NOP). For bars in poor bond conditions according to (4) the values in Table 11.1 (NOP) should be
multiplied by 1,2.
NOTE The values in Table 11.1 (NOP) apply unless the National Annex gives different values.

Ta ble 11.1 (NDP) - Anchorage length of s tra ight bars divided by dia mete r lbd/</J

<P Anchorage length lbd/<P

[mm] /ck
20 25 30 35 40 45 50 60
:::; 12 47 42 38 36 33 31 30 27
14 so 44 41 38 35 33 31 29
16 52 46 42 39 37 35 33 30
20 56 50 46 42 40 37 35 32
25 60 54 49 46 43 40 38 35
28 63 56 51 47 44 42 40 36
32 65 58 53 49 46 44 41 38
NOTE The values of Table 11.1 (NOP) are derived from Formula (11.3).

(3) In cases not complying with the limitations of (2), or for a more detailed calculation, the design
anchorage length /bd should be calculated as:
1 1 1

lbd = k1b. k
~
. cf>. (-O'sd )n" . (25)2
435 hk- . (cf>
-
20
)3 . (1,5¢)2
-
~
> 10¢
-
(11.3)

where
Ratios in Formula (11.3) shall be limited to (c/>/20 mm);::: 0,6 and (25//ck) ?. 0,3:

Cd Cct=min(0,5c5 ;cx;cy;3,75 ¢}, seeFigurell.3.

kcr coefficient accounting for casting effects on bond condit ions:

kcp = 1,0 for bars with good bond conditions according to (4 );
kcv = 1,2 for poor bond conditions and for all bars used in slipform construction unless
it is shown that the vertical bars cannot move during casting;
kcr = 1,4 for all bars executed under bentonite or similar slurries unless data is
available for the specific slurry to be used;
NOTE For anchorages, the following values for kib and n,, apply un less the National Annex gives different values:
ktb = SO for persistent and transient design situations with n .,= 3 /2; and
ktb = 35 for accidental design situations with na= 3/2.

(4) Good bond conditions are defined as:

a) bars with an inclination of 45° to 90° to the horizontal during concreting; and

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
184
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

b) bars with an inclination less than 45° to the horizontal which are up to 300 mm from the bottom of
the formwork or at least 300 mm from the free s urface d uring concreting.

Otherwise, poor bond conditions should be assumed (see Figure 11.4).

1 2

Key
1 top surface during concreting
2 zone with poor bond conditions for bars with an inclination less than 45° to the horizontal
3 zone with good bond conditions

Figure 11.4 - Description of bond conditions as a function of member depth

(5) In presence of confinement reinforcement crossing the potential splitting surface shown in
Figure 11.5 a) and placed at a net distance ::; 5<1> from the bar to be anchored, or of transverse
reinforcement arranged between the bar to be anchored and the free surface (Figure 11.5 b)) or/and of
external pressure (Figure 11.5 c)), the design anchorage length may be reduced by replacing parameter
Cd in Formula (11.3), by:

(11.4)

where

6Cd = (70pconf + 120"ccd/jTc;,.)¢;

and:
Pconr is the ratio of the confinement re inforcement referred to the diameter of the bar to be
anchored or spliced:
n c · rr · </>l
(11.5)
Pconf = 4 . nb . ¢ . Sc
is the diameter of the bar to be anchored or spliced;
</>c is the diameter of the confinement reinforcement;
nc is the number of legs of the confinement reinforcement crossing the potential splitting
failure surface (see Figure 11.5 a));
nb is the number of anchored bars or pairs of lapped bars in the potential splitting failure
surface;
s, is the spacing of the confinement reinforcement along the bar to be anchored;
<P, is the diameter of the transverse reinforcement between the bar to be anchored and the free
surface (see Figure 11.5 b));
s, is the spacing of the transverse reinforcement along the bar to be anchored;
a ced is the design value of the mean compression stress perpendicular to the potential splitting
failure (see Figure 11.5 c)).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
185
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

1 (s
1

\ ..
</>,
1 </>,

,A---- / ___• __ J___-:[_

·, ,·

11 ccd fjfjfjftjfjfjftftfjfjl!j
a) b) c)
a) confinement reinforcement b) transverse reinforcement at c) external design confinement
at spacing Sc; n,=l, nb=2 spacings, pressure <Teed
Key
1 potential splitting surface

Figure 11.5 - Definition of cases where the design anchorage length may be reduced due to
confinement or transverse reinforcement

(6) For anchorages of straight bars in compression where the distance measured parallel to the bar
axis from the end of the bar to a free surface is not less than 5¢, the design anchorage length /bd calculated
acco rding to (2) to (5) may be reduced by 15¢, but shall not be shorter than 10¢.
(7) Transverse and confinement reinforcement, additional to that for shear, should be provided in the
anchorage zones of bars r/J> 32 mm where transverse compression is not present. For straight anchorage
lengths the additional reinforcement both transverse and confinement should not be less than:
transverse reinforcement: Ast;:: 0,20 fn1; and
confinement reinforcement: Ase;:: 0,20 <ftlnz
where
n1 is the number of layers with bars anchored at the same point in the member;
nz is the number of bars anchored in each layer.
The additional transverse and confinement reinforcement should be uniformly distributed in the
anchorage zone and the spacing of bars should not exceed 5¢.

11.4.3 Anchorage of bundles

(1) All provisions for anchorage of straight bars may be used also for bundles of bars anchored in one
cross section according to 11.4.2(3) with parameter¢ replaced by an equivalent diameter of the bundle
defined as:

(11.6)

where As is the total area of all bars contained in the bundle.

(2) When anchoring one bar in a bundle, the design anchorage length should be based on its own
diameter and covers. When anchoring more than one bar of a bundle, the design anchorage length of
those bars should be based on their equivalent diameter and covers. Values k 1b are according to
Formula (11.3).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
186
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

11.4.4Anchorage of bars with bends and hooks

(1) The design anchorage length according to 11.4.2(2) or (3) may be reduced by 15</> for standard
hook and bend anchorages in tension complying with Figure 11.6 (but with /bd ~ 10</>).
Parameter Cd to be used in 11.4.2 is defined in Figure ll.6c).

a) standard hook b) standard 90° be nd a nchorages c) definition of nominal cover

Cd= min {cs/2; Cx; Cy; Cyb}
(definition of Cs and Cx, see
Figure 11.3 c))

Figure 11.6 - Anchorage with standard hook and bend in tension

(2) For any bend and hook anchorages in tension, the total design anchorage length / bd,tot measured
along the centre-line of the bar as defined in Figure 11.7 a) may be calculated using 11.4.2.
Parameter Cd to be used in 11.4.2 is defined in Figure 11.6 c).
(3) For bend and hook anchorages in compression, only the projected first straight segment (/bd in
Figure 11.7 b)) may generally be taken to contribute to anchorage, except when all free surfaces
perpendicular to the bar are at a distance ~ 3,5</>, when the design anchorage length /bd may be reduced
by 15</>, but shall not be shorter than 10¢.

(
b) standard and general bend or hook in
a) general bend or hook in tension
compression

Figure 11.7 - Definition of design anchorage length / bd or l hd,tot for bars with general hooks and
bends in tension and for bars with bend or hook in compression

11.4.5 Anchorage of bars with welded transverse reinforcement

(1) The design anchorage length in 11.4.2(2) or (3) of bars with welded t ransverse reinforcement in
tension and compression may be reduced by 15</>, (but with /bd ~ 5</>) under the condition that:
when <j> , ~ 0,6</> at least one transverse bar is located within the anchorage length (Figure 1 l.8a)) at
least 50 mm back from a face of the support, where applicable;

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
187
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

when <f>, ::;; 0,6¢ a minimum of two transverse bars are located within the anchorage length with
50 mm::;; s::;; 100 mm and for</>::;; 16 mm (Figure ll.8b)), the second transverse bar from the end at
least 50 mm back from a face of the support, where applicable.

NOTE For minimum weld strength, see C.4.1(3).

s
</> t
• </> t </> t

I. '

I
'
a) one transverse bar within the anchorage b) two transverse bars within the anchorage
length length

Figure 11.8 - Methods of anchorage with welded transverse reinforcement

11.4.6 Anchor age of U-bar loops

(1) For U-bar loops subject to pure tension, anchorage may be considered to be provided if the loop
details comply with 11.3.
(2) Alternatively, the design anchorage length in 11.4.2(2) or (3) with U-bar loops in tension with the
minimu m mandrel diameter may be red uced by 20¢ (but with /bd ~ 10¢).

11.4.7 Anchorage of headed ba rs in tension

(1) A tensile stress in the reinforcing steel bar a sd = 435 MPa may be considered to be developed
without additional anchorage length for heads </>h ~ 3¢ withf~k ~ 25 MPa, </> ::;; 25 mm; d dg ~ 32 mm and:
Dy ~ 3¢ for headed bars in uncracked concrete or Dy ~ 4¢ for headed bars in cracked concrete;

where

</>h is the diameter of a circular head s: 4th (where this the head thickness) or the diameter
of a circle with the same area as that of the actual head

(11.7)

where Ah is the total area of the head defined in Figure 11.9;

Dy is the distance between the bar axis and the nearest edge as defined in Figure 11.9b);
Dx is the minimum distance between the bar axis and a corner as defined in Figure 11.9 b).
For rectangular heads elongated in the d irection of the considered edge, Dx should be
considered according to Figure 11.9 c). In case Dx becomes smaller than Dy, the
d imensions Dx and Dy s hould be inverted in the verification;
s, is the bar spacing of a group of bars along the considered edge as defined in Figure 11.9
b);

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
188
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

ah and hh are the widths of square and rectangular heads which shall not be taken larger than 4
times the thickness of the head plate.

Ah = a~ Ah = ah x bh Ah = rr x ¢ ~ /4
.,,.c:
-- - -ah
,__ bh
,__ bh
---'-
•.c:
"'
l '
~ .; - ·- H. -; - ·
,
', ~I
.~
. f-

· ~·
~

~
' '
t
O,Sah
a, s. s.
a,

b) definition of head dimensions (a11, bh, </>h, Ah), c) definition of distance a. for
a) definition of design anchorage distance to the considered edge (ay). distance to the rectangular heads near to
length for headed bars in tension corner (ax) and bar spacing (sx) for square, corners
rectangular and circular heads

Figure 11.9 - Definition of design anchorage length, head sizes an d bar distances for headed
bars

(2) In cases not complying with the requirements of (1) or for a mor e detailed calculation, the
maximum tensile stress in the reinforcing steel developed by the head should be calculated as:
5 1
, + v part Jr:
- ad (<f>h)6· (ddg)3
<J = k
sd h,A
· f cd Y- · -</> · -</>
C
-</> <k
- h,A
·V
part
·
f cd (11.8)

where

kh,A is the ratio between the net area of the head and the cross-sectional area of the
reinforcement:

2
kh A= Ah - As= (0h) - 1 (11.9)
' A5 0
vpart = 11,0 for uncracked concrete in the region of the head
= 8,0 for concrete cracked in the region of the head
ad is the nominal value of the distance between the bar and a free surface which
may be assumed as:
single bar near to an edge, bar near to a corner at a distance
ax ;:: 2ay+ 1,2cph and group of bars along an edge at spacing Sx;:: 4ay, with ax
;:: 2ay: ad= ay ;
single bar near to a corner at a distance a x < 2ay+ l,2cph:
ad = 0,S·ay + 0,25·a, - 0,3·4>h;
group of bars along the edge at spacing Sx < 4ay:

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
189
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

a =a Sx -0h + O23 (a _ 0h) 4ay - Sx (l __l_ )

(11.10)
d Y 4ay-0h ' Y 2 4ay-0h (0h/0) 2

a'sd is defined in Figure 11.9a.

(3) For tensile forces larger than the anchorage capacity of the head, both forces in the head and in the
anchorage length of the bar may be accounted for. The design length in the reinforcing bar /bd to develop
the remaining stress <1sd - a'sd may be calculated according to Formula (11.11) as:

(11.11)

(4) When used for shear or confinement reinforcement, anchorage should rely on the head only.
(5) Where it can be shown that external compressive forces (e.g. from supports) or forces due to
opposed active headed bars (e.g. corner joint) acting in the zone of the head are sufficient to balance the
tensile blow-out stresses in their direction, the resistance O';d may be enhanced according to a more
refined model.

11.4.8 Anchorage of bonded post-installed reinforcing steel

(1) This Eurocode applies to post-installed re inforcing steel bars comprising a (de-coiled) straight
reinforcing steel bar with properties according to C.4 and an anchoring mortar with established
suitability and properties according to C.8 for the intended application, exposure condition and
t emperature, see C.8(3).
NOTE The design of post-installed reinforcing bars according to this Eurocode assumes that the installation is
performed according to the manufacturer's installation instructions by qualified personnel and inspection of the
installation is carried out by appropriately qua lified personnel.

(2) Unless differently specified in a European Technical Product Specification, the minimum concrete
cover Cm1n.b for bond of post-installed reinforcing bars in all d irections should be detai led in accordance
with Table 11.2, as a function of the intended drilling method and of the execution procedure.

Table 11.2 - Minimum concrete cover Cm1n,b for post-installed reinforcing steel bars

Cmin,b
Drilling method Bar diameter
without drilling aid with drilling aid
Rotary percussion cf> < 25 mm 30 mm + 0,06/bd,pi ;::: 2¢ 30 mm + 0,02/b<1,p1;::: 2¢
drilling/ hammer
drilling and diamond cf>;::: 25 mm 40 mm + 0,06 /bd.pl ;::: 2¢ 40 mm + 0,02/bd,pl ;::: 2¢
coring/ drilling

Compressed air ¢<25 mm 50 mm + 0,08/bd.pi 50 mm + 0,02/bd,pi

drilling ¢;:::25 mm 60 mm + 0,08/bd,pi ;::: 2¢ 60 mm + 0,02/b<1,p1;::: 2¢

(3) Unless specified differently in a European Technical Product Specification, the minimum clear
spacing between individual post-installed parallel bars should be Cs,pir = max{4¢; 40 mm} and the
minim um clear spacing Cs between post-installed reinforcing and cast-in reinforcing bars should not be
less than c, 2:: max{2¢; 20 mm}.
NOTE The above given limits for concrete cover and spacings have been confirmed for maximum aggregate size
up to 25 mm. The above given limits for spacings have been confirmed for boreholes drilled with rotary percussion
drilling/ hammer drilling and diamond coring/drilling.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
190
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(4) The anchorage of post-installed reinforcing steel bars shall be designed considering the
requ irements of 11.4.1 and 11.4.2. The design anchorage length /bd,pi of post-installed reinforcing steel
bars in tension should be calculated as:

(11.12)

where
lbd calculated according to 11.4.2, where the concrete strength considered in Formulae (11.3) and
(11.4) shall be limited to /ck ~ SO MPa or the value stated in the European Technical Product
Specification (whichever is larger), and the design stress in t he reinforcing bar be limited to
Osd ~ 435 MPa unless tested to highe r val ues;

i<b,pi bond efficiency factor, see C.8;

a1b factor accounting for cracks along the bar which may be taken as a 1b = 1.5 in general or as given
in the European Technical Product Specification.
(5) The design anchorage length /bd.pi of post-installed reinforcing steel bars in compression shall be
determined according to Formula (11.12) but should not be reduced according to 11.4.2(6) unless
confirmed by testing in accordance with C.8.
(6) Post-installed reinforcing steel bars may be lapped using l sd.pi wit h straight cast-in deformed bars
according to 11.5.2 and 11.5.3 where the design anchorage length /bd is replaced by / bd,p;, calculated
according to Formula (11.12) (see also Table 11.3). The lap length l sd.pi should be designed for the
minimum concrete cover of either cast-in or post-installed reinforcing steel bars and the bond conditions
of the cast-in reinforcing steel bars.
(7) For shear forces across interfaces with post-installed reinforcing steel bars, see 8.2.6.

11.5 Laps of reinforcing steel in tension and compression and mechanical couplers
11.5.1 General

(1) Tension and compression forces may be transmitted from one bar to another by:
lapping of bars anchored with a method described in Table 11.3(see11.5.2);

mechanical couplers ensuring load transfer in tension and compression or compression only (see
11.5.6);

full penet ration butt welds or fillet welds (see 11.5.7).

(2) Welds shall be designed for the minimum design yield strength of the reinforcing s teel at both sides
of the connection. In this case, they may take place at the same section, wit hout staggering.

11.5.2 All types of laps

(1) The detailing oflaps between bars shall be such that:

the transfer of forces from one bar to the next is ensured;

spalling of the concrete in the vicinity of the lap does not occur;

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
191
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

large cracks parallel to the lapped bars which affect the performance of the structure do not develop.
Generally, minimum transverse or shear reinforcement according to Clause 12 will suffice if the
required diameter of lapped bars is ¢ < 20 mm or the percentage of lapped bars in any section is
< 25 %. Otherwise, minimum amount of transverse or confinement reinforcement should be
provided according to 11.5.2 (10).

(2) A design lap length lsd between two bars in tension or in compression should be provided, at least
equal to the anchorage lengths /bd given in 11.4 multiplied with k1,, where the clear distance c, = Cs t + c,2
to calculate cover cd should be taken according to Figure 11.10.
NOTE The value k1s = 1,2 applies unless the National Annex gives a different value.

1 1

0 0

a) adjacent laps b) staggered laps

Key
1 pair of lapped bars

Figure 11.10 - Definition of clear distance c, in lap splices

(3) All bars in compression may be lapped in one section and the lap length designed for CTsd·
(4) Away from plastic hinge locations, tension laps may be detailed with up to 100 % of bars lapped at
any section and the lap length may be designed for CTsd·
(5) Where tension laps are located across plastic hinge locations, tension lap length may be designed
for CTsd if:
a confinement reinforcement is arranged according to 11.5.2(8); or

if the laps are staggered so that the area of lapped bars is $ 35 % of the total cross section area of the
reinforcement in linear members (beams and columns) or::; 50 % in planar members (slabs, walls
and shells). If staggering of laps is chosen as an option, the distance between adjacent laps should be
at least 0,3/sd (see Figure 11.llb)).

Otherwise, tension lap lengths should be designed for 1,2a,c1.

NOTE For laps in links, see 12.3.3(6).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
192
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

~0,3/ , d
•1
I
' 'd
1··- ----1---· - ··- ¢··- ··- ··- --1. ___ _ J. _ __ _ __ _J_ ___
1··- i
- ··
i
·---1
1- I !
I I I ¢ !
2- ! I
I
'
I

L_____ _ ;____ ___ _________ ____j

! .! Ij !I
!
.
!
L.·-··- j·-··-··-··+ ··-··-··j
b) 50 %-lap with clear distances between
a) 100 %-lap with clear distances between
adjacent laps and lapped bars consistent with
adjacent laps and lapped bars
planar members
Key
1 clear d istance between adjacent laps: Cs.laps<: max{2¢; 20 mm)

2 clear distance between lapping bars: Cs.bars~ min{4¢; SO mm}, see (7)

Figure 11.11- Examples oflap arrangements

(6) In cases of different methods of anchorage according to Table 11.3, the larger value of the design
lap length lsrt calculated for both methods shall be used.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
193
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Table 11.3 - Types of laps and design lap lengths lsd

Design lap length isd

Type oflap splice Compression
Tension laps
laps

!!1i 11 sd = k 1s · ibd ~ 15¢

-1. .1-
isd
4 straight bars where /bd is calculated according to 11.4.2,
' •d
see also 11.5.3
bends and

-~-
!!1i 11 sd hooks
fsd = k1s · /bd ~ 15¢
4
(tension where /bc1 is calculated -
' •d only) according to 11.4.4

---
""
~
e
~ isd is calculated
!!1i 11 sd

- -
4
loops according to 11.5.4,
. ' !!1i 11 sd
(tension with the limit -
- 4 only)
isd ~ </>mand + 4¢
l ,d

-a- !!1i 11
4
SC

headed bars isd is calculated according to 11.5.5

-1. ,,-
. .. .. !!1i 11 SC
intermeshed
0 0 0 4
fabric isd = k 1s · / bd ~ max{l5¢; 250 mm}
I sd
where /bd is calculated according to 11.4.5
.. .. .. !!1i 11
- 1. .1- layered
S(
4
fabric
'•d

- - '•d
!!£_ 11 SC
4
bonded post-
installed
reinforceme
nt
isd,pi = k 1s · /bd,pi ~ 15¢ · alb
where /bd,pi is calculated according to
11.4.8

(7) The distance between lapped bars should be as small as possible, generally touch one another. In
case the clear distance exceeds the smaller of 50 mm or 4¢, the design lap length shall be increased by
the centre to centre distance of the lapped bars and adequate transverse reinforcement provided to resist
the associated transverse forces developed.
(8) Where confinement or transverse reinforcement in the lap zone is used to reduce the design lap
length according to 11.4.2(5) and/or 11.5.2(5), at least 5 bars fulfilling the requirement of Figure 11.12 a)
or 11.12 c) should be distributed over the lap length, or alternatively, 3 bars over a length of0,3/sd at both
ends of the lap according to Figure ll.12b) and ll.12d).
The minimum amount of confinement according to 11.4.2(5) should be dimensioned so that C<i,conf
according to Formula (11.4) is not less than 3¢.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
194
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(9) For compression laps, at least one transverse or confinement bar should be placed at each end of
the lap within a maximum of 50 mm or 2¢ of the ends of the lap where cf> is the diameter of the smaller
lapped bar. These bars or links may be one of the 5 or 3 bars under (8) above or additional, see
Figure ll.12b) or ll.12d).

0,31 sd

c) 0,31 sd

a) transverse reinforcement, tension laps b) transverse reinforcement, compression laps

c) confinement reinforcement, tension laps d) confinement reinforcement, compression laps
Key
1 transverse reinforcement
2 confine ment reinforceme nt
3 clear distance to lap e nd: 5; max{2¢; 50 mm}

Figure 11.12 - Transverse and confinement r einforcement for laps

(10) When required by 11.5.2(1), transverse reinforcement should be provided and have a total area,
:EAst (sum of all legs parallel to the layer of the lapped reinforcement) of not less than the area As of one
lapped bar (:EAs, ;::: 1,0 As)· The transverse bars should be placed perpendicular to the direction of the
lapped reinforcement.
If more than 50% of the reinfo rcement is lapped at one point and the distance between adjacent laps at a
section is ~ 10¢(see Figure 11.11) :EAs, should be provided as confinement reinforcement formed by links
or U bars and anchored into the body of the section.
The transverse and confinement reinforcement :EAst should be positioned at the outer sections of the lap
as shown in Figure 11.12.

11.5.3 Laps of bundles

(1) In bundles consisting of two bars, laps may be used without staggering of individual bar
interruptions as shown in Figure 11.13a). Design lap lengths may be calculated on the basis of 11.4.2 and
11.5.2(2) and with the equivalent bar diameter c/Jbaccording to 11.4.3(1).
For bundles which consist of three bars, laps without staggering of individual bar interruptions shall not
be used.
(2) Design lap length /sdof bundles with 2 or 3 bars may be calculated on the basis of the individual bar
diameter¢ if laps are staggered with a gap between individual laps 2:: 0,3/sd according to Figure 11.13 b)
or with an additional bar as shown in Figure 11.13 c).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
195
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

a)

b) ------~------
c)

a) without staggering
b) with staggering
c) with an additional bar

Figure 11.13 - Laps of bundles

(3) Bundles which consist of 4 bars shall not be lapped.

11.5.4 Laps using U-bar loops

(1) Transfer of tension between reinforcing steel bars may be achieved by overlapping U-bar loops
(Figure 11.14). Overlapping U-bars may be single (Figure 11.14 b)) or multiple (Figure 11.14 c)) and both
legs of each U-bar should be anchored outside the connection for the larger of the two design tension
forces T1 and Tz (also when T1 or Tz = 0).
NOTE Design tension forces T1 = T2 when the lap transfers pure tension. T1 wi ll according to a sectional
analysis diffe r from 7'2 when the lap transfers combinations of normal forces and bending moments.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
196
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

A,,
r, r,

a) ~
c
Ac
~
e
~
T2 T2

I sd

b) / / ~

"
-

c)

a) elevation view
b) plan view of single lap
c) plan view of multiple laps

Figure 11.14 - Laps using U-bar loops

(2) The resistance of a single lap splice shown in Figure 11.14 b) should be checked using as criterion
the crushing strength of the concrete between the two loops. For Cs :5 0,5 /sd crushing of the concrete is
prevented when the larger of the two design tension forces r, and T2 (see Figure 11.14 a)) is smaller than
TRd.c. which may be calculated as:

ddg 3
1
TRd,c = 0,2/cd . Ac . ( lsd) .
( c
kst + (-l
5)
2
Cs)
- -l (11.13)
sd sd

where
Ac is the total effective concrete area within the curved parts of the overlapping U-bars
(Figure ll.14a)):
Ac= (</>mand + </>) · [/sd - 0,21(</>mand + </>)] (11.14)
lsd is the lap length (Figure 11.14);
d dg is a coefficient that takes into account the concrete type and its aggregate properties according
to 8.2.1(4);
Cs is the clear spacing ofU-bars;

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
197
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

is the resistance factor of the confinement reinforcement, which may be taken equal to ks, = 1
when w;::; 0,5 and to kst = 4w(l - w) for lower values of
Ast · fyd
w= ---~1 -'-----

(11.15)
ddg)3
0,85 ( Zsd . Ac . fed

Ast is the total area of the fully anchored confinement re inforcement positioned within Ac.

(3) In case of multiple U-bars as shown in Figure 11.14 c), the resistance of Formula (11.13) may be
calculated using an average net spacing Cs= 0,5(cs1 + Cs2) (see Figure 11.14 c)) and multiplied by (ns - 1)
where ns is the total number of U-bars (ns = 5 in t he example of Figure 11.14 c)). Multiple overlaps may
also be treated as an assembly of single overlaps where Cs is taken as the smaller of Cs1 and Cs2-
(4) To avoid brittle behaviour, a minimum amount of confinement reinforcement should be placed in
a double symmetric configuration with in Ac (see e.g. Figure 11.14 a)):

It: Ac
Ast 2:: 0,5..; Jck · -f, (11.16)
yk

11.5.5 Laps using headed bar s

(1) Transfer of tension between reinforcing steel bars may be achieved by overlapping headed bars
(Figure 11.15). Overlapping headed bars may be single (Figure 11.15 b)) or mult iple (Figure 11.15 c))
and should be anchored for the design force outside the connection.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
198
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

a)

b)
-
• •
-- ~
~
-<:>
T

T
-- • -- ';;;
T

'-'

c)
~
-• •
... •• 2
T

T
• • T
•
a) elevation view
b) plan view of single lap
c) plan view of multiple laps
Key
1 transverse reinforcement A,.
2 tie down reinforcement A std symmetrically placed between heads

Figure 11.15 - Laps using headed bars

(2) The geometry of the heads of the headed bars should comply with 11.4.7(1).
(3) The maximum tensile force developed in each bar should be limited by 11.4.7(2).
(4) The resistance of a single headed bar lap shown in Figure 11.15 b) should be checked using as
criterion the crushing strength Tnct,c of the concrete between the two heads. For 0 :5 Cs :5 0,5/sd, Tnd,c may
be calculated as:

k + Cs 2 Cs ) (11.17)
st ( lsd - 2</>) - lsd - 2</>

where
Ac is the effective concrete area within the heads of the overlapping bars (Figure 11.15 a)) :
Ac= (/sd - 2</>) · bh1 (11.18)

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
199
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

bh1 is effective width of the head perpendicular to the plane of the lap (for circular head with
diameter c/>h:
bh1 = 0,5¢h · -Iii. (11.19)
Cs is the clear spacing of headed bars;
is the resistance factor of the transverse reinforcement, which may be taken equal to ks, = 1
when w;::: 0,5 and to k st = 4w(l - w) for lower values of
Ast · fyct
w= ------'-1
~---

(11.20)
ddg )3
1,3 ( Zsd - 2cf> . Ac . fed

Ast is the total a rea of the fully anchored transverse re inforcement positioned within Ac.
(5) In case of multiple headed bars as shown in Figure ll.15c), the resistance of Formula (11.17) may
be calculated using an average net spacing Cs= 0,5(Cs1 + Cs2) (see Figure ll.15c)) and multiplied by
(ns - 1) where ns is the total number of headed bars (ns = 5 in t he example of Figure 1 l.15c)). Multiple
overlaps may also be treated as an assembly of single overlaps where Cs is taken as the smaller of Cs1 and
Cs2·
(6) To avoid brittle behaviour, a minimum amount of transverse re inforcement should be placed:

Ast 2:: max { 0,75 · Ac·

.[Tc;,. TI 2}
fy k ; Sc/> (11.21)

where cf> is the maximum diameter of the lapped headed bars.

(7) To enhance ductility of laps designed for reinforcement yield, tie down reinforcement with total
area A std per s ingle lap should be provided perpendicular to the plane of the headed bars within Ac
(Figure 11.1 5 a)). The tie down reinforcement should be fully anchored outside Ac and placed
symmetrically between the headed bars. The tie down reinfo rcement may be provided in the for m of
either double headed shear studs or links. For lsd :::; 200 mm, A s td may be provided by a single double
headed shear stud (Figure 11.15 c)). The minimum area of tie down reinforcement equals:

Astd 2:: 0,12¢ 2 (11.22)

11.5.6 Mechanical couplers

(1) The clear distance (horizontal and vertical) between couplers and between couplers and adjacent
bars should be not less than D upper + 5 mm and the maximum diameter of the bars. Additional
requirements related to installation should be accounted for.
(2) For cover requirements, couplers should be treated as single bars with the cover defined as the
minimum clear distance between the outside surface of the coupler and the concrete surface.

11.5.7 Full penetration butt weld and fillet weld splices

(1) Splices with full penetration butt welds or fillet welds shall be detailed acco rding to EN ISO 17660.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
200
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

11.6 Post-tensioning tendons

11.6.1 General

(1) Additional provisions for external post-tensioning are given in K.12.3.

11.6.2 Minimum spacing of ducts

(1) The minimum s pacing for placing and compacting of concrete and for safe transfer of deviation
forces should be in accordance with Figure 11.16. Minimum vertical spacing may be reduced below ¢c1uc1
if adequate transverse reinforcement is provided to cope with the deviation forces from the tendon. Other
arrangements may be used provided that satisfactory behaviour in service and at ultimate limit states
may be demonstrated. Other requ irements for durability are given in Clause 6 and for fire design in
EN 1992-1-2.

,. ,.
E [ sx E
0 0
c c
" "
Key
1 Assumed plane of tendon curvature
2 direction of casting
Csx <: max{Dupper + 5 mm; ¢duct: 50 mm}
Csy <: max{Dupper; ¢duct; 40 mm}
NOTE Spacing shown for round ducts app lies a lso to rectangu lar ducts. Cover values of Cnom,b are given in 6.5.2
(with Cmtn,b in 6.5.2.3 and LICdev in 6.5.3).

Figure 11.16 - Minimum clear spacing for internal tendons for post-tensioning

(2) The minimum spacing between bundled tendons should bes;:::: 100 mm.
(3) Outside the anchorage zone, up to two tendon ducts and u p to four greased and sheathed strands
may be bundled transversely to the plane of the tendon curvature or in case of straight tendons. Tendons
with rectangular ducts shall not be bundled.
(4) The effect of possible deviation forces due to tendon curvature shall be considered according to
11.7.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
201
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

11.6.3 Minimum radius of curvature and straight length of tendons adjacent to a nchorages

(1) The minimum radius of curvature of tendons and the minimum straight length of tendons adjacent
to the a nchorage devices shall comply with the requireme nts in the tech nical documentation of the post-
tensioning system depending on the type of duct (metal duct, polymer duct, polymer pipe, steel pipe,
polymer sheathing). These values shall not be smaller than those given in (2) unless demonstrated by
testing to the relevant standard for prestressing systems.
(2) The minimum rad ius of curvature of tendons to prevent damage of the unconfined concrete on the
inside of t he tendon curvature during prestressing and to avoid a reduction of the axial tensile strength
of the tendon may be taken as:

(11.23)

where

<1pd is the tendon design stress at the time of tensioning, considering partial factors for prestress,
see Table 4.2 (NOP);
PRd is the maximum transverse bearing stress on the prestressing tendon.
NOTE P Rd is given in Table 11.4 (NOP) unless the National Annex gives other values.

Table 11.4 (NOP) - Maximum transverse bearing stress on the prestressing tendon and
additional requirements

maximum transverse
additional
Cas e bearing stress on the
requirements
prestressing tendon
Internal tendons with corrugated ducts PRd = 0,75/cd ::; 15 MPa -
Internal tendons inside a loop in U-shape with
duct or pipe without relative movement
between tendon and duct (i.e. the tendon fix PR<l = 70 MPa see (3)
point during stressing is located in the centre of
the U and is not subject to fatigue loading)
The bearing stress on the
External tendons with smooth pipe with
PR<1 = 30 MPa concrete inside t he pipe
relative movement between tendon and duct
shall be verified.
(3) For tendon loops in U-shape unless more restrictive rules are given in the technical documentation
of the post-tensioning system, the following detailing rules should be observed:
minimum cover transverse to the plane of the tendon loop ;::: l,O</>duc1;

reinforcement transverse to the plane of the tendon loop should be provided for the deviation forces
along the inside of the loop;

half of the deviation forces in the plane of the loop transferred by reinforcement to the concrete on
the outside of the loop. This reinforcement should be anchored at the centreline of the loop and may
be combined with t he bursting reinforcement in the form of U-shaped bars;

the bearing stress on the confined concrete inside the tendon curvature should be checked according
to 8.1.4.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
202
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

11.6.4Anchorages, couplers and devia tors of post-tensioning tendons

(1) Anchorage devices and couplers used for post-tensioning tendons as well as the zone immediately
around and in front of the tendon anchorage where the prestressing force is transmitted to the concrete
(local anchorage zone) shall be checked for minimum spacing, minimum edge distance and local
anchorage zone reinforcement to be in accordance with the relevant standards for prestressing systems.
(2) The zone where the prestressing force is dispersed over the full cross section of the member
(general anchorage zone) should be designed using a strut-and-tie model according to 8.5, or another
appropriate model.
(3) If post-tensioning tendons are anchored in a section away from the ends of a member (e.g. at a
construction joint, a blister or cast into the member section), stresses should generally be compressive
in the entire section in the direction of the anchored prestressing force under frequent load combination.
The effect of anchoring or coupling several tendons at or close to the minimum spacing between
anchorages or couplers in a single cross section on the strain distribution in the member should be
assessed.
NOTE The assumption of linear strain distribution generally does not apply locally where several tendons are
anchored or coupled at or close to the minimum spacing in a single cross section inside a member. It is considered
good practice that a percentage of the tendon force is transferred with reinforcement (parallel to the tendon) to the
member sections behind the anchorage or coupler. Compression forces acting in the member sections behind the
anchorage or coupler reduce the required amount of reinforcement.

11.7 Deviation forces due to curve d tensile and compressive chords

(1) In the case of curved and kinked tension or compression chords, the effects of the deviation forces
shall be accounted for. The same provisions apply fo r curved post-tensioning tendons near the concrete
surface.
(2) Deviation forces in equilibrium with transverse tensile forces as shown in Figure 11.17 should in
general be resisted by means of additional transverse reinforcement.
(3) If no specific transverse reinforcement is provided to carry deviation forces, it shall be verified that
the deviation forces due to the force in the longitudinal reinforcing steel or due to the force in longitudinal
curved post-tensioning tendons can be resisted by the concrete in tension:

ftd < 0,125 "

r . Cu - Ye v fck (11.24)

where
Cu = min{C5; 2./3(Cy + 0,S<f.>)}
c, and Cy are defined in Figure 11.3c).
For post-tensioning tendons, <f> shall be replaced by <f.>duc<·

Figure 11.17 - Deviation forces and transverse tensile forces in curved members

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
203
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(4) In case of laps of curved tensile bars in regions without transverse reinforcement, the interaction
between bond and transverse tensile stresses due to deviation forces should be accounted for by means
of:
Ye· 8 · Frd lsd
- - - - + - <1 (11.25)
r · Cu · n;;_ ls -

where
Is is the actual lap length.
Calculation of parameter Cu according to (3) should account for the presence of additional bars in the
splice region potentially reducing net spacing c, as indicated in Figure 11.10.

12 Detailing of members and particular rules

12.1 General

(1) The rules in Clause 12 are intended for detailing concrete structures and concrete members such
that the assumptions for the behaviour with respect to structural safety, serviceability, durability and
robustness inherent in the rules of this Eurocode are met.
(2) Detailing of members shall be consistent with the design models adopted.
(3) Concrete members shall be detailed with due consideration to the constructability and concreting
operations.
(4) Sufficient reinforcement shall be provided at all sections to resist the envelope of the acting internal
forces taking into account effects such as shear on longitudinal reinforcement. The area of reinforcement
in zones of tension shall not be taken less t han As.min·
(5) For cable supported members the relevant rules of Annex K may be used.
(6) Members having less longitudinal reinforcement than As.min given in Clause 12 shall be designed in
accordance with Clause 14.

12.2 Minimum reinforcement rules

(1) In members designed as parts of reinforced concrete structures, minimum reinforcement As.min
shall be provided to:
a) ensure distributed cracking and to handle forces from restrained deformations where not considered
explicitly in the design ((2) and (4 ));

b) ensure sufficient deformation capacity to contribute to structural robustness by allowing alternative

load paths ((2) and (4));

c) avoid failures due to unpredicted cracking (3);

d) ensure applicability of design models in Clauses 8 and 9 and Annex G;

e) ensure constructability.

NOTE 1 Additional provisions for crack control at SLS are given in 9.2.2.

NOTE 2 The area of minimum reinforcement As.min can include prestressed and ordinary reinforcement when
bonded to the concrete.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
204
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(2) The area of minimum reinforcement As.min shall provide nominal section strength which is at least
equal to the effect ca us ing cracking:
a) In members subjected to bending without or with axial force where the compressive axial force,
NE<t,min, is less than O.SAc ·fed. minim um re inforcement shall be provided so that:

MR.min (NEd,min) :2: Mcr(NEd.min) (12.1)

where

Mn,min(NEd,min) is the moment resistance of the section with As.min act ing at a stress offyk and in presence
of the axial force NEd.min;

N r,d,min is the axial force at ULS (persistent and transient design situation) providing the least
compression in the member (or maximum tension in the member if tensile axial forces
occur);
is the cracking moment of the sect ion in presence of Nil<tmin· The cracking moment may be
calculated assuming a linear distribution ofnormal stresses over the cross section, where
the maximum tension stress is taken as the concrete tensile strength fctm.The influence of
the reinforcement may be neglected.
For sections prestressed with internal permanently unbonded tendons or with external tendons the
contribution of the tendons to NEd, MR.min and Mer sho uld be calculated us ing a p,m1(x) (see Formula (7.33)).
b) In members with pure tension As.min may be calculated as:

As.min = Ac · fcnn//yk (12.2)

(3) Where MEd < Mcr(NEd), at ULS and the member is designed as statically det erminate without the
requ irement for distributed cracking, a sudden collapse afte r cracking may also be avoided w ith a
minimum reinforcement designed for following r esistance:

(12.3)
where

is the design moment resistance of the section in the presence of the axial force NEd;
is the axial force at ULS acting simultaneous with the bending moment MEd;
is t he cracking moment of t he section in presence of NEd; and
is a coefficient wh ich depends on the ductili ty class of the reinforcement:
k dc = 1,3 for duct ility class A;
kdc = 1,1 for ductility class B;
k dc = 1,0 for duct ility class C.

The calculated reinforcement area does not need to be greater than that given by Formula (12.1).
NOTE Use of Formula (12.3) can result in wide cracks in SLS.

(4) In beams and slabs requ iring shear or torsion reinfo rcement a minimum ratio of s uch
reinforcement Pw,min shall be placed. Pw,min should be calculated as:

. = Asw,m in > OOS Jfu. (12.4)

Pw,m 1n s . bw . sina - • f yk

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
205
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

where

P w,min is the minimum reinforcement ratio;

A sw,min is the area of minimum shear reinforcement within the spacings;
s is the spacing of the shear reinforcement measured along the longitudinal axis of the
member;
bw is the width of the web of the member;
a is the angle between shear reinforcement and the longitudinal axis.
The value of pw,min given by Formula (12.4) may be reduced:
by 10 % when ductility class B reinforcement;

by 20 % when ductility class C reinforcement;

Formula (12.4) ensures that the shear model in Clause 8 is valid and that behaviour is reasonably ductile.
Where alternative shear models are used, alternative values may be appropriate.
(5) For members where brittle failure due to tensile stresses is excluded such as members in
compression and members with no structural function, (2) to ( 4) may be disregarded.
(6) Minimum reinforcement should generally be anchored and lapped according to Clause 11 for a
design stress of O'sd = fyd A s.min/ A s. where A s is the actual reinforcement area provided. Reinforcement
provided only to satisfy minimum steel requirements may, at simple supports, have its anchorage length
reduced providing that it is;::: 10¢ past the inner edge of the support.

12.3 Beams
12.3.1 General

(1) Reinforcement in beams, longitudinal and transverse, should be detailed in accordance with the
requirements of Table 12.1 (NOP).
NOTE The values in Table 12.1 (NDP) apply unless the National Annex gives other values.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
206
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Table 12.1 (NOP) - Detailing requirements for reinforcement in beams

Description Symbol Requirement

Minim um longitudinal reinforcement, in those parts of the 12.2(2), see also
1 As, min
section where t ension may occur 12.2(3), 12.2(6)
Minimum shear and transverse torsional reinforcement,
when required. Minimum torsion reinforcement should be
2 Pw,min 12.2(4)
provided to the full perimeter including features not
counted part of the thin walled section
Minimum bottom reinforcement at inner supports taking
accou nt of unforeseen effects leading to positive mom ents
3 0,25 As,req span
at the support, e.g. unforeseen settlement, or load reversal
due to explosion
4 Minimum bottom reinforcement for end supports 0,25As,reqspan
Maximum longitudinal spacing of shear
5
assemblies/stirrups•
Sl,max 0,75d (1 + cota)
6 Maximum longitudinal spacing of bent-up bars• Shu.max 0,6d (1 + cota)
7 Maximum transverse spacing of shear legs• Str,max 0,75d S 600 mm
Minimum ratio of shear reinforcement in the for m of
stirrups with respect to the required reinforcement ratio
8 P w,stir ;::= O,Spw,req
(taking acco unt of u nforeseen effects e.g. compatibility
torsion)
Minimum ratio of torsion reinforcement in the form of
9 closed stirrups with respect to the required reinforcement Pw.stir ;::= 0,2pw,req
ratio
Maximum s pacing for to rs ion assemblies/stirrups
10 Sstir,max u/8 S min{b; h}
(u defined in 8.3.2(2))
Minimum area and spacing of longitudinal surface 9.2.2(4)
As.web
11 reinforcement in beams with downstand ;::: 600 mm to
avoid coarse cracks in SLS SJ,surf,max 300mm

Minimum transverse reinforcement in flanges (those part

12.2(2) see 8.2.5,
12 of flanges where tension in the transverse direction may A st, min
Figure 8.13
occur)
3
These spacings are consistent with the shear model in 8.2.3. Where alternative models are used alternative
spacings may be required.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
207
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

12.3.2 Longitudinal reinforcement

(1) For members with shear reinforcement, the additional tensile force due to shear, Nv<1, according to
8.2.3(8) should be considered at the ULS.
Alternatively, for members with constant depth, the moment curve should be shifted a distance ai
acco rding to:
a1 = z (cote - cota)/2 (12.5)
as indicated in Figure 12.l.
For members without shear reinforcement, it may be assumed:
a1 = d (12.6)
(2) The resistance of bars within their anchorage lengths may be taken into account, assuming a linear
variation of force, see Figure 12.1.
(3) The tensile reinforcement required in flanged cross-sections may be spread over the effective
width of the flange or part of it may be concentrated over the web. The tensile reinforcement located
outside the web should be extended by a length equal to its distance from the web times cater (see 8.2.5).
(4) The anchorage length of a bent-up bar which contributes to the resistance to shear should be not
less than 1,3/bd in the tension zone and 0,7/bd in the compression zone. It is measured from the point of
intersection of the axes of the bent-up bar and the longitudinal reinforcement.

Key
1 envelope of MEd/Z + O,SNEd
2 acting tensile force F,
3 resisting tensile force FRs

Figure 12.1- Illustration of the curtailment oflongitudinal reinforcement in members with

constant depth, taking into account the effect of shear and the resistance of reinforcement
within anchorage lengths

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
208
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(5) Bottom reinforcement at intermediate supports should, as a minimum, extend by 10</> into the
support if there is no tensile force in the reinforcement. In case there could be tension due to settlement
of the support, accidental actions or due to other considerations, the reinforcement should be detailed
for adequate capacity and continuity.
(6) Any compression longitudinal reinforcement which is included in the resistance calculation should
be confined by transverse reinforcement with spacing not greater than the limits given in Table 12.3
(NOP) and 12.6(3).

12.3.3 Shear and torsion reinforcement

(1) The s hear reinforcement may consist of a combination of:

stirrups/links enclosing the longitudinal tension reinforcement and the compression zone according
to Figure 12.2a) and b);

bent-up bars;

cages, ladders, shear reinforcement assemblies, etc. which are cast in without enclosing the
longit udinal reinforcement but are properly anchored in the compression and tension zones
according to Figure 12.2c) and d);

continuous stirrups (spirals);

headed bars as in Figure 12.2e).

(2) When, based on shear design, no shear reinforcement is required, minimum shear reinforcement
should nevertheless be provided according to 12.2(4 ). Mi nim um shear reinforcement may be omitted in
members of minor importance (e.g. lintels with span :::; 2,0 m) which do not contribute to the overall
resistance and stability of the structure.
(3) The shear reinforcement shall enclose the tension reinforcement or shall be effectively anchored
in the tension zone at one end and in the compression zone at the other. Links and s hear re inforcement
should normally be anchored by means of bends, hooks, heads or welded transverse reinforcement, see
Figure 12.2. A longitudinal bar of minimum diameter equal to not less than the diameter of the stirr up or
link should be provided at each corner of stirrup/link and inside end hooks.
(4) Closing of stirrups according to Figure 12.2f) g) and h) may be used in the tension and compression
zone of a section. The anchorage of single-leg shear links or of open stirrups according to Figure 12.2b)
to d) should be placed in the compression zone of the member. Welding should be carried out in
accordance with 5.2.3 and have a weld capacity in accordance with C.4.1(3).
(5) Headed bars according to Figure 12.2e) may be used in the tension and compression zone of a
section and should be designed according to 11.4.7 without requiring reinforcement bar length for
anchorage.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
209
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

?10</> </>t 0.1</> </>t ? 1,4 </> </> ~ -•3</>

A ~-+--.,,·1---f-~
?

I I (
'
i1

</>
( (

-- </>

a) with standard b) with c) with 2 welded d) with 1 welded e) with head

hook 90°-bend transverse bars transverse bar

~
_,...
oO
Al Al

f) stirrup with 135°-hooks g) stirrup with 90°- h) closed with 90°-bended U-stirrups
bends
Key
s;:: max{2¢: 20 mm} ands; SO mm
a;:: 10 mm
c ;:: max{3¢; SO mm}

Figure 12.2 - Anchorage of links a )- e) and closing of stirrups f) - h)

(6) Laps on legs of stirrups in shear reinforcement may be used provided they ensure yielding of the
stirrup (see Figure 12.3 d)). Laps may be designed according to 11.5 for a sd = 1.2f~d·
(7) When static equilibrium assumed in the analysis depends on the torsional resistance of elements
of a structure, the torsion reinforcement shall comply with the rules given in (8) and Figure 12.3 and shall
enclose the whole section. When torsion arises only from compatibility and the structure is not
dependent on torsional resistance for its equilibrium, minimum torsional reinforcement shall be
provided according to Table 12.1 (NOP).
(8) Torsion links shall be closed and anchored by means of laps or hooked ends (see Figure 12.3), and
should be at an angle that does not deviate more than 10° from the ideal angle of 90° to the axis of the
structural element. In case of different inclinations, torsion reinforcement s hould be designed us ing
appropriate stress fields.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
210
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

a) b) c) d)
a) closed stirrup with hooks bent;::: 135°
b) closed stirrup with 90°-bends
c) open U-stirrups closed by transversal reinforcement in the flange
d) U-stirrups closed by laps in the height offlanges with lsd to be designed for 1,2/yd

NOTE The alternative b2) has a full lap length isd along the shortest side.

Figure 12.3 - Examples of shapes for torsion links

(9) The longitudinal bars should be arranged so that there is at least one bar at each corner, the others
being distributed uniformly around the inner periphery of the links, with a spacing not greater than
permitted in Table 12.l(NDP).

12.3.4 Suspension reinforcement for indirect s upport

(1) Where applied loads are introduced in a manner that causes local tensile stresses in the supporting
member in accordance with 8.2.1(9), the additional suspension reinforcement should consist of stirrups
or links surrounding the principal reinforcement of the supporting/supported member, whichever is at
a lower level. The stirrups/links may be located inside the volume of concrete common to the two
members or distributed also outside that volume, provided a consistent strut-and-tie model is applied.
Stress field models which utilise distributed horizontal reinforcement across the whole depth of the
supporting/supported member may be adopted to reduce or substitute the suspension reinforcement

12.4 Slabs

12.4.1 General

(1) Reinforcement in slabs should be detailed in accordance with the requirements of Table 12.2
(NOP).
NOTE The values in Table 12.2 (NOP) apply unl ess the Nationa l Annex gives other values.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
211
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

Table 12.2 (NDP) - Detailing requirements for reinforcement in slabs

Description Symbol Requirement

Minimum longitudinal reinforcement in those parts of the 12.2(2)
1 cross-section where tension may occur As.min
see also 12.2(3), (6)
12.2(4)
2 Minimum shear r einforcement, when required Pw.min
12.4.2(3)
3 Minimum secondary reinforcement• 0,2As,req,spanc
Minimum longitudinal bottom reinforcement at inner
4 0,25As,req,spanc
supports, taking account of unforeseen effects at supports
Minimum longitudinal bottom reinforcement at end
5 0,25As.req.spanc
supports
Minimum top reinforcement at end supports in buildings,
0,2SAs.req,spanc
without bearings where unintentional restraint may occur.
6 (but~ As.min according
The reinforcement should extend 0,2 length of span from
to 12.2(2))
the end support.
7 Maximum spacing of bars for concrete in tension Sslab.max 3h ~ 400 mm
Maximum longitudinal spacing of shear
8
assemblies/stirrupsb
Sl,max 0,75d · (1 + cota)
9 Maximum longitudinal spacing of bent-up barsb Sbu,max d
10 Maximum transverse spacing of shear legsh Str,max 1,Sd
Along a free (unsupported) edge, a slab should normally contain longitudinal and transverse
11 reinforcement, generally arranged as shown in Figure 12.4 in order to accommodate torsional
moments near the edge.
• To ensure a minimum ability to locally redistribute sectional forces transverse to the span direction,
secondary reinforcement is to be placed in areas of slabs which can be considered to behave as one-way
slabs.
b These spacing are consistent with the shear model in 8.2.3. Where alternative models are used alternative
spacings may be required.
c As.1·eq spanis the required reinforcement for positive bending moments at the span.

I. 1
Key

Figure 12.4 - Edge reinforcement for a slab

(2) Any compression longitudinal reinforcement which is included in the resistance calculation should
be confined by transverse reinforcement in accordance with 12.6(3).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
212
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

(3) Where lifting of a slab-corner is restrained suitable reinforcement shall be provided.

(4) In case of slabs with depth discontinuities on the tension side, the flexural reinforcement should be
detailed as shown in Figure 12.5, or alternatively, by using 8.5.
/bd

Figure 12.5 - Example of reinforcement detailing in case of slabs with depth discontinuities on
the tension side and without shear reinforcement

12.4.2 Shear reinforcement

(1) Shear reinforcement according to 12.3.3(1) may be used.

(2) A slab in which shear reinforcement is provided should have a depth h not less than 200 mm with
stirrups, links or headed bars, or 160 mm with bent up bars.
(3) The minimum shear reinforcement according to 12.2(4) may be omitted in solid, ribbed or hollow
core slabs or slabs with voids where transverse redistribution of loads is possible.
(4) The shear reinforcement for a one-way slab should be detailed as for a beam, see 12.3.3.
For other slabs, the shear reinforcement may be detailed to enclose all except the outermost layers of
reinforcement as shown in Figure 12.6.
(5) In slabs, the shear reinforcement may consist entirely of bent up bars or of shear reinforcement
assemblies, where i°Ed ~ 0,08/cd for vertical and fEd ~ O,l6/ct1for45°-alignment (of bent up bars or shear
reinforcement assemblies). Intermediate values may be interpolated.
(6) The diameter of shear reinforcement assemblies </>wshall not exceed a maximum value according
to 12.5.1(3).

12.5 Slab-column connections and column bases

12.5.1 Punching shear reinforcement

(1) If punching shear reinforcement is required (see 8.4), the following types of shear reinforcement
may be placed to increase the punching shear capacity:
stirrups (Figure 12.6 a)) with anchorage according Figure 12.2 a) or b);

double-headed studs (Figure 12.6 b)) with anchorage according to Figure 12.2 e);

bent-up bars (Figure 12.6 c));

single-leg shear links (Figure 12.6 d) with anchorage according Figure 12.2 a) orb) .

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
213
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

a) b)

~t D LJ
d)

rn
a) stirrups
b) double-headed studs and headed bars
c) bent-up bars
d) single-leg shear links
Key
1 center line of support

Figure 12.6 - Examples of shear and punching shear reinforcement

(2) Where punching shear reinforcement is required it should be placed between the loaded
area/column and O,Sdv.out inside the control perimeter at which shear reinforcement is no longer required
(see Figure 8.24). Jf stirrups, links or double-headed studs are provided, the shear reinforcement should
be installed along at least two perimeters. For bent-up bars anchored as in Figure 12.7 one perimeter
may be considered sufficient. If only one perimeter of bent-up bars is provided, their slope may be
reduced to 30°. The spacing of the shear reinforcement in radial and tangential directions should satisfy
the provisions in Figure 12.7.
The tangential spacing ofshear reinforcement should be limited based on the distance to the column edge
(see Figure 12.7 c). For shear reinforcement located at a distance ~ 2dv from the column edge, the
tangential spacing should not exceed 1,Sdv and it should not exceed 0,75dv and O,Sdv for flat slabs and
column bases, respectively, in the first perimeter. The tangential spacing of shear reinforcement should
also meet the requirements of Figure 8.24.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
214
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

~0.15dv ~0 . 15dv ~o. 75dv

~O.Sdv
~0.75dv

/ bd ~0.25dv

a) Radial spacing rules for flat slabs

~o Sd. ~0.2Sd .
' - - -- t--il4-

~O.Sd v
ITIID
I
- ?0,2dv- - ~

>
~ o.3d .
""'
'--" -A.-- ___,._ J
~0,3d v ~O.Sdv

b) Radial spacing r ules for column bases

r-··- ··- ··- ··- ··;1
i 1 :
, · ~~sd
~ !
1
.- - -- .......• • 1
·
i • • \ ,/3 i
• - \ ~0.1Sd. .

.J-~o.sq . / '4 . 1

·--~- r..~ . J
2d.

c) Tangential spacing rules

Key
1 radia l layout
2 orthogonal layout
3 limit spacing on first reinforcement perimeter to s0,7Sdv for flat slabs, a nd to sO.Sdv for column bases and
ground slabs

Figure 12. 7 - Spacing of punching shear reinforcement

NOTE Figu re 12.7 a) and b) show the pos ition of vertical leg of punching shear reinforcement simplified
without anchorage elements.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
215
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(3) The maximum effective area of one leg of shear reinforcement should be limited to t hat of a bar of
diameter </>w,mru< of:

for single leg li nks and open stirrups; = 10.}d/200

¢ w,max (12.7)

for closed stirrups or bars with similar anchorage; ¢w,max = 11)d/200 (12.8)

for bent up bars and headed bars; ¢w,ma x = 16Jd/200 (12.9)

where d and ¢w,ma x are in mm.
(4) Bent-up bars passing through the loaded area or being at a distance not exceeding 0,25d from this
area may be used as pu nching shear reinforcement (see Figure 12.7 a)). For single bent-up bars, the
ho rizontal projection of the bars has to be used for the value of s, to calculate Pw·

12.5.2 Integrity reinforcement against progressive collapse of flat slabs

(1) For b uildings in CC2 (refer EN 1990) and higher, an integrity reinforcement of at least two bars in
each orthogonal direction should be provided at all columns without punching shear reinforcement or
with punching shear reinforcement not fulfilling the requirement of (2). Reinforcing bars provided for
other reasons may be accounted for as integrity reinforcement if it fulfils its requirements.
These bars should be:
of ductility class B or C;

ancho red in the column or pass through it and

placed on t he compression side of the slab wit hin the vertical column reinforcement.

For robustness reasons, they should be designed for a resistance:

(12.10)

where

VEd is the des ign value of the acting shear force for the accidental design situation;
A s,int is the sum of t he cross-sect ions of all reinforcement bars crossing a column edge (the same bar
may be counted twice if it passes through the column and is fully anchored on both sides
outside t he column edges);
/yd is the yield strength of the integrity reinforcement for the accidental design situation;
k;n, is a coefficient equal to:
0,37 for bars of ductility class B;
0,49 for bars of duct ility class C.
(2) Integrity reinforcement according to (1) should also be provided in slabs with shear reinforcement
if:

VRd,w,int = Pw · fywd · bo,s · dv < VEd (12.11)

where the ratio Pwis defined in 8.4.4(1) for vertical and in 8.4.4(2) for inclined shear reinforcement.
In t his case, the integrity reinforcement should be designed according t o Formula (12.11) where VEd may
be replaced by VEd - V1td,w,in1o

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
216
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(3) The hogging reinforcement on the tension side of the slab can contribute in preventing progressive
collapse. For slabs without shear reinforcement, the resistance of the integrity reinforcement V Rd,int may
be increased by the term:

VRd,hog
ffu ¢ · bef,hog
= nhog Yc (12.12)

where
n hog is number of bars crossing the control perimeter bo.s and fully anchored at a distance 4d from
the control perimeter and within the column if considered only once;
re is the partial factor for concrete for accidental design situation;
b ethog =min{s-¢; 6¢;4c}
¢ is the diameter of the hogging reinforcement considered;
s is the spacing of the hogging reinforcement; and
c is the cover of the hogging reinforcement.

12.6 Columns

(1) Longitudinal and hoop reinforcement of columns should be detailed in accordance with the
requirements of Table 12.3 (NOP).
NOTE The va lues in Table 12.3 (NDP) apply unless the Nationa l Annex gives other values.

(2) Every longitudinal bar or bundle of bars placed at a corner shall be restrained by transverse
reinforcement.
(3) No bar within a compression zone with a compressive strain exceeding 2 %0 should be further than
150 mm from a restrained bar. Where additional transverse reinforcement to that required by Table 12.3
(NOP) is required only to restrain a longitudinal bar the spacing may be twice the maximum spacing
according to Table 12.3 (NOP).
(4) Where longitudinal bars are bent by more than 5° (tan8"" 1/12), with respect to the axis of the
column, the transverse splitting forces produced should be resisted by transverse reinforcement in
accordance with a strut-and-tie model or stress field model.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
217
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Table 12.3 (NOP) - Detailing requirements for reinforcement in columns

Description Symbol Requirement

Minimum amount of longitudinal reinforcement for
robustness and to avoid risk of compressive yielding of
1 reinforcement due to creep and shrinkage in SLS max {0,1 NEd
fyd; 0,002Ac}
When all longitudinal reinforcement is prestressed the
O,lNE<1//y<1 limit may be ignored.
Minimum number of longitudinal bars•:
- polygonal cross-section 1 at each corner with a
spacing::; 400 mm
2
- circular cross-section 6 evenly distributed
with a spacing
::; 400 mm
Maximum longitudinal spacing of transverse reinforcement
(stirrups/hoops) for columns with dimensions hand b:
- intermediate region between the two end regionsb Smax.c.:ol 2 0</>1,max"
::; min{h; b; 300 mm}
- intermediate region between the two end regions, Smax.,col min{h; b; 400 mm}
when longitudinal bars are not accounted for column
3 resistance
- end regions, over a length equal to the larger dimension 0,6Smax,col
of the column. For concrete with/ck > 50 MPa the
transverse reinforcement shall provide a minimum
confinement of k · /cd in accordance with 8.1.4,
Formulae (8.11) to (8.14)d
- at lap area where </>1;::: 14 mm 0,6Smax,col
Minimum bar diameter for transverse reinforcement (bars
4
in st irrups, wires in welded mesh)
<:: 0, 2 5 </>1.max•
a For constructability, the diameter of longitudinal bars </>I.max should be at least 12 mm.
b Where all bars are prestressed a spacing of min{h; b; 300 mm} may be used.
c </Ji.max - maximum diameter of longitudinal bars.
d This requirement is to provide a minimum level of ductility to higher strength concrete columns. k = 0,02
unless the National Annex gives a different value.

12.7 Walls and deep beams

(1) For walls subjected predominantly to out-of-pla ne bending, the rules for slabs should be applied
(see 12.4).
(2) Vertical, horizontal and orthogonal-to-the -surface reinforcement in walls, should be detailed in
accordance with the r equirements of Table 12.4 (NOP).
NOTE The values in Table 12.4 {NOP) apply unless the National Annex gives other values.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
218
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Table 12.4 (NDP) - Detailing requirements for reinforcement in walls and deep beams

Description Symbol Requirement

Minimum amount of vertical reinforcement (each surface): A s,mln,v

- where the member carries in-plane normal and shear 0 25A · fctm
1 stresses and designed/verified by use of 8.5 or Annex G ' c f,yk

- where the member is only loaded by vertical in-plane O,OOlAc

compression and out of plane bending
Minimum amount of horizontal reinforcement (each face): As.min,h
- where the member carries in-plane normal and shear 0 25A · /~tm
2 stresses and designed/verified by use of 8.5 or Annex G ' c f,yk
- where the member is only loaded by vertical in-plane 0,25As,v
compression and out of plane bending
3 Maximum spacing of vertical reinforcement min{3h•; 400 mm}
4 Maximum spacing of horizontal reinforcement 400mm
Maximum spacing of orthogonal-to-the-surface see 12.7(3)
5 re inforcement whe re As.v exceeds 0,02Ac and is utilised in
compression (end region is taken as~ 4h•)
a h - thickness of wall

(3) Where the vertical reinforcement is utilized in compression at ULS and is placed outside the
horizontal reinforcement a minimum number of stirrups with 4 legs per mz of wall area, perpendicular
to the s urface, should be provided unless welded wire mesh or bars of diameter <P ~ 16 mm a re used with
concrete cover larger t han 2¢.

12.8 Foundations

(1) Foundations shall be detailed with due regard to possible deviations in geometry and position of
piles, supporting bedrock or soil.
(2) The main tensile reinforcement in pile caps may be designed using strut-and-tie models according
to 8.5 or it may also be designed for bending and shear by considering the foundation as a slab if the main
reinforcement near to piles is:
designed according to 8.2.1(11) or 8.2.3(8); and

placed within the width bs defined in Figure 12.8 a).

In the area confined by the pile reaction according to Figure 12.8 c), the anchorage length of main
reinforcement may be reduced according to 11.4.2(5).
The main reinforcement perpendicular to free edges outside the widths bs may also be activated if the
vertical component of the corresponding struts can be carried to the piles by the system accordi ng to
Figure 12.8 b).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
219
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:20 23 (E)

"''
0

~ . '
" '
"" l1
a( 2

""
" 1

8
a) Definition of width bs b) load carrying system with bent-up of main reinforcement
outside widths bs as suspension reinforcement

'
_.::,. ____ _
6
/ /

8
c) definition of ancho rage zones with and without confinement due to pile compression
Key
1 main reinforcement in the width bs and anchored behind the pile
2 main reinforcement outside the width bs
3 struts ca rrying shear
4 bent-up part of main reinforcement acting as suspension reinforcement
5 anchorage of the suspension reinforcement
6 anchorage zone of main reinforcement with confinement due to pile compression
7 anchorage zone without confinement due to pile compression
8 pile
9 arched compression strut
10 tie between piles

Figure 12.8 - Anchorage of main reinforcement in pile caps

(3) The main reinforcement in footings and pile caps without shear reinforcement should be designed
acco unting for the concentrated compression zone and the resulting reduced lever arm of the internal
forces under the column according to Figure 12.9a) and b). The increase of concrete strength in vertical
direction under the column due to confinement according to 8.6 may be acco unted for. Without detailed
verification, a concrete strength in horizontal direction under the column up to 1,25/cd may be assumed.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
220
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

a) compression field carrying shear b) concentration of compression zone under the

column and resulting reduced level arm z
Key
1 bottom reinforcement

Figure 12. 9 - Concentrated compression zones in pile caps and footings

(4) Top surface and sides of pile caps and footings may be designed without surface reinforcement if
there is no tension developing in these areas.

12.9 Tying systems for robustness of buildings

12.9.1 General

(1) Structures require an adequate level of robustness appropriate to the consequences of failure.
Structures with normal consequences of failure should have a suitable tying system, to prevent
progressive collapse by providing alternative load paths after local damage.
(2) In the absence of detailed analysis, the following ties should be provided as applicable:
a) peripheral ties;

b) internal ties;

c) horizontal column and wall ties;

d) vertical column and wall ties.

(3) Where a building is divided by expansion joints into structurally independent sections, each section
should have an independent tying system.
(4) In the design of the ties the reinforcement may be assumed to be acting at its characteristic yield
strength and should be capable of carrying tensile forces defined in the following subclauses.
Reinforcement of ductility classes B or C should be used. Bonded prestressing steel may also be
considered.
(5) Reinforcement provided for other purposes in columns, walls, beams and floors may be regarded
as providing part of or the whole of these ties.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
221
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

12.9.2 Dimens ioning of ties

12.9.2.1 Peripheral ties

(1) At each floor and rooflevel of a structure an effectively continuous peripheral tie within 1,2 m from
the edge should be provided according to Table 12.5 {NOP). The tie may include reinforcement used as
part of the internal tie.

12.9.2.2 Internal ties

(1) Internal ties should be at each floor and roof level in two directions approximately at right angles.
They should be effectively continuous throughout their length and should be anchored to the peripheral
ties at each end unless continuing as horizontal ties to columns or walls.
(2) The internal ties may, in whole or in part, be spread evenly in the slabs or may be grouped at or in
beams, walls or other appropriate positions. In walls they should be within 0,5 m from the top or bottom
of floor slabs.
(3) In each direction, internal ties should be capable of resisting a design value of tensile force
according to Table 12.5 (NOP).

12.9.2.3 Horizontal ties to columns a nd/or walls

(1) Columns and walls should be tied horizontally to the st ructure at each floor and roof level.
(2) The ties should be capable of resisting a tensile force trac per metre of the wall. For columns the
force need not exceed Tcol· Connections between columns and/or walls and the structure at each floor
and roof level shall - without beneficial effects of actions - be capable of transferring the specified tie
forces.
(3) Corner columns should be tied in two directions. Bonded and unbonded reinforcement provided
for the peripheral tie may be used as the horizontal tie in this case.

12.9.2.4 Vertical ties

(1) Each column and wall should be tied continuously from the foundations to the roof level. Where a
column or wall is supported at its lowest level by a member other than a foundation (e.g. by a beam or
flat slab) the consequence of accidental loss of this member should be considered.

12.9.3 Required resistances for ties

(1) Ties (see Figure 12.10) should be capable of resisting a tensile force given in Table 12.5 (NOP).
NOTE The values in Table 12.5 (NOP) apply unless the National Annex gives other values.

Table 12.5 (NDP) - Resistances for reinforcement in ties

Description Symbol Requirement

1 Peripheral ties Tr EN 1991-1-7
2 Internal ties T1 EN 1991-1-7
3 Horizontal ties to columns Tcol ~ 150 kN
4 Horizontal ties to walls trac ~ 20 kN/m
5 Vertical ties Tv EN 1991-1-7

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
222
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

·==·==·==:a======~::a:==·==·==·
I. 1 I.
I I
.. ~-----:a
·-·-·
---- -- .
___2___ EE----l2-::::a-
·-·-- -·
--- -
----- ..
·-·-·
------

i 4 i
3---=-=:a==:--=-::4-=-==
Key
1 peripheral tie
2 internal tie
3 horizontal ties to columns
4 horizontal ties to walls

Figure 12.10 - Ties for robustness

12.10 Supports, bearings and expansion joints

(1) Supports and bearings shall be designed and detailed for the relevant actions (loads, movements,
rotations) to ensure correct positioning of the bearing reaction in accordance with the design model,
taking into account construction deviations.
(2) For supports and bearings which permit movements, the shift of the bearing reaction should be
taken into account in the design of the adjacent members.
(3) For supports which do not permit movements or rotation without overcoming significant rest raint,
actions due to restrained movements of the adjacent members (elastic, creep, shrinkage, temperature)
and misalignment, lack of plumb, etc. should be taken into account in the design of t hese members.
(4) Positioning and sizing of supports and bearings as well as detailing of reinforcement in supporting
and supported members shall ensure effective transfer of forces compatible with the assumed action
effects in the members and in the respective nodes of st ress field or struts and ties, see Figure 8.28. Ties
in the form of bent bars should effectively enclose the node.
(5) The nominal length a1 of a simple support or bearing as shown in Figure 12.11 should be detailed
accounting for:
the net support or bearing length a1 with regard to bearing capacity as defined in (6);

anticipated movements where relevant;

edge distances of supported and supporting members that may be considered ineffective due to, for
example, the possibility of spalling or crumbling or due to incompatible stiffness;

the allowances for construction deviations /:iaz and /:ia3 in geometry and position of the supported
and supporting members.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
223
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Detailing of members and supports should respect the following conditions, see Figure 12.11:
d; = ch,i + Lia; with horizontal U-bar loops or otherwise anchored bars;

d; = Ch.i + Lia; + r; with vertically bent bars;

Cv,i ~ d; level of horizontal U-bar loops.

Where measures are taken to prevent spalling of concrete outside of the vertical bend, dimension d may
be reduced, but a1/2 + d; ;::: ch;+ Lia; + r ;.

( h3
14
I
r- ?0 1+6.03
3
II

5 Vi .__
5
J
1: :..
1 ~

.....
I
('\,
' ...
>

2 ..:

?a1+6.a 2 ch 2

I Id 3 al Id i
I I
a
I

a) cross section b) elevation

Key
a1 bearing length 1 bearing
bi effective bearing width 2 supporting member
ti.a; d eviations 3 supported member
Cv.i, Ch.i nomina l cover (vertica l and horizontal) 4 centre-line of support
n Mandrel radius of bend of longitudinal 5 anchored longitud inal reinforcement
rein forcement

Figure 12.11 - Example of bearing and le ngths definitions

(6) Supported and supporting members shall be verified for the effects of t he support or bearing
reactions in accordance with 8.6.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
224
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(7) In the absence of more detailed specifications, the following values may be used for the bearing
strength:
/ Rd= 0,4fct1 for dry connections (12.13)
/ Rd= /bed ::; 0,85.fcd for all other cases (12.14)
where
/ Rd is the design value of bearing strength; for partially loaded areas see 8.6;
/cd is the lower value of the design strengths of supported and supporting members;
/bed is the appropriate design resistance of the bedding material, consistent with the design model
and the limit state being checked.
(8) If a uniform distribution of the bearing pressure can be obtained, e.g. by mortar, neoprene or other
pads, the design bearing width may be taken as the actual bearing width. Otherwise b1according to Figure
12.11 should not be taken greater than 600 mm.
(9) The choice of the type of bearing and expansion joints should be compatible with the structural
system assumed in the design of the structure and suitable for the anticipated movements.
(10) The arrangement of bearings should be such that restraints of the adjacent mem bers are avoided
or minimised.
(11) Where the design service life of the bearing or expansion joint is less than the design service life of
the member, bearings and expansion joints should be designed to be replaceable.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
225
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

13 Additional rules for precast concrete elements and structures

13.1 General

(1) The rules in Clause 13 apply to structures made partly or entirely ofprecast concrete elements and
are supplementary to other rules in this Eurocode.
(2) Further development of the provisions for specific precast concrete products, related to design,
detailing, tolerances and production, given in EN 13369 and in the respective European product
standards should be considered. Provisions for assembly given in EN 13670 should be considered.

13.2 Specific requirements

(1) In design and detailing, the following shall be considered specifically:

bearings (temporary and permanent), joints and connections;

transient situations like demoulding, transfer of prestress, transports, storage, erection and
assembly.

(2) Where relevant, dynamic effects in transient situations should be taken into account. In the absence
of an accurate analysis, static effects may be multiplied by an appropriate factor (for precast products,
directions may be provided in specific product standards).

13 .3 Concrete
13.3.1 St rength for heat curing

(1) In the case of heat curing, the mean compressive strength of concrete at an age t less than trer./cm(t),
may be estimated from Formula (B.l), replacing the concrete age t with the temperature adjusted
concrete age obtained by Formula (B.18), where the coefficient /3cc(t) should be limited to 1,0.
For the effect of heat curing, Formula (13.1) may be used:

F (t) =F + fcmCtref) - fcmp I (t _ t + l) (13.1)

/cm /cmp lg(tref - tp + 1) g P

where

fcmp is the mean compressive strength after the heat curing (i.e. at tendon release), measured by
testing samples at the time tr Ctr< t,.r) subject to the same heat treatment as the precast
concrete product;
tref is defined in 5.1.3.

13.3.2 Creep and shrinkage

(1) In case of heat cured precast concrete elements, the values of creep deformations may be estimated
according to the maturity function of Formula (B.14) in Annex B, in which the age of concrete at loading
to (in days) in Formula (B.9) should be replaced by the adjusted concrete age obtained by Formulae (B.17)
and (B.18).
(2) In elements subjected to heat curing, drying shrinkage strain and basic shrinkage strain during heat
curing may be assumed negligible.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
226
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

13.4 Structural analysis

13.4.1 General

(1) The analysis shall account for:

the behaviour of the structural elements at all stages of construction, using the appropriate geometry
and properties for each stage, and their interaction with other elements (e.g. composite action with
insitu concrete or other precast units);

the influence of the behaviour of the connections, with particular regard to their actual deformability
and strength;

the uncertainties affecting restraints and force transmission between elements, arising from
deviations in geometry and in positioning of elements and bearings;

the influence of the flexibility of members supporting precast floor elements on the load distribution
between the precast floor elements.

(2) In bearings of beams and slabs, beneficial effects of horizontal restraint caused by friction due to
gravity loads may be taken into acco unt (using YG,1nr) and where
friction is not solely relied upon for overall stability of the structure;

bearing arrangements preclude the possibility of accumulation of sliding of the elements;

risk of significant impact loading is excluded.

(3) The effects of relative movements of elements on bearings should be considered in design with
respect to the res istance of the structure and the integrity of the connections.

13.4.2 Losses ofpr es tress during hea t curing

13.4.2.1 Relaxation losses

(1) For pre-tensioned members, the effect of heat treatment on the relaxation losses shall be
considered.
(2) This effect of heat treatment on the relaxation losses may be accounted for by the simplified method
given in Formula (13.2). In this case, an equivalent time teq should be added to the time after tensioning t
used in Annex B.

(13.2)

where

teq is the equivalent time (in hours);

r(.<H;) is the temperature during the time interval tit;;
Tmax is the maximum temperature during the heat treatment

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
227
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

13.4.2.2 Thermal losses

(1) A specific thermal loss 15.aainduced by heat treatment should be avoided or taken into account The
thermal loss may be estimated by Formula (13.3) :

15.aa = O,SEv · ac.th • (Tmax - To) (13.3)

where (Tmax - To) is the differe nce between maximum and initial concrete temperature nea r the tendons.

13.5 Design and detailing of pre-tensioning tendons

13.5.1 Arrangement of tendons

(1) The spacing and concrete cover of pre-tensioning tendons shall be such as to ensure that placing
and compacting concrete will be carried out satisfactorily and that s ufficient bond will be attained
between the concrete and the tendons.
(2) The minim um spacing and cover for bond and to avoid splitting should be in accordance with
Figure 13.l and Table 13.l. Depending on, for example, the production method, the level of pre-stressing
or the level of release strength, other values of spacing and cover may be used, provided that satisfactory
behaviour in service and at ultimate is demonstrated by testing or permitted by the specific European
product standard with factory production control.

Clear spaces with Csx;::: max{2¢p; Dupper+ 5 mm; 20 mm} and Csy ;::: max{2¢p; Dupper}
Key
1 direction of casting
NOTE For Cmin,dur, see 6.5.2.2.

Figure 1 3.1 - Minimum clear spacing and cover for bond for pre-tens ioning tendons

Table 13.1 - Minimum concrete cover Cmin,b for pre-tensioning tendons

Clear spacing Minimum cover

s Cmin.b

Strand Indented wire

s = 2ef>p 3,0ef>p 4,Sef>r
s;::: 2,Sef>v 2,5¢p 4,0ef>p

(3) Tendon ends shall be protected for durability. Methods of protection for durability may be given
by the specific European product standard with factory production control or applied otherwise provided
that satisfactory behaviour is demonstrated.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
228
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

13.5.2 Anchorage zones

(1) In anchorage zones of tendons, the following length parameters should be considered, see
Figure 13.2 and Figure 13.3:
transmission length /pi, over which the prestressing force Po is fully transmitted to the concrete, see
13.5.3(1);

dispersion length /disp, over which the concrete stresses gradually disperse to a linear distribution
ac ross the concrete section, see 13.5.3(3);

anchorage length /bpd, over which the tendon force Ppd, in the ultimate limit state is fully anchored in
the concrete, see 13.5.4(2).

/ / "I '\
/ I \
/ I \
/ I \ -<:::
// I \

Int

I dis•

Figure 13.2 - Transfer of prestress in pre-tensioned member; length parameters

I 11
x
I t

Key
X distance from end
1 at rel ease
2 at ULS

Figure 13.3 - Tendon stresses

13.5.3 Transfer ofprestress

(1) The basic value of the transmission length /p1 may be taken as:
Ye a1 · a2 · O"pmo
l =- · -</> (13.4)
pt .J
l, 5 T/1 · fck(t) P

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
229
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

where
ai = 1,0 for gradual release,
= 1,25 for sudden release;
az = 0,40 for indented wires,
= 0,26 for 3- and 7-wire strands;
cf>p is the nominal diameter of the tendon;
avmo is the tendon stress just after release;
1'/1 = 1,0 for tendons located in favourable positions during concreting (see 11.4.2(4)),
= 0, 7 otherwise unless a higher value can be justified with regard to special circumstances
in execution;
/ck(t) is the concrete compressive strength at time of release which may be taken as:
/ck(t) = [.Bcc(t))2/3 ·/ck (13.5)
where
f3,,(t) is the age factor according to B.4, Formula (B.2).
Other values of transmission length may be used, provided that satisfactory behaviour in service is
demonstrated by testing or permitted by the specific European product standard with factory production
control.
(2) Depending on the design situation, the design value of the transmission length should be taken as:
lpt1 = 0,8/pt for the verification of local stresses at release (13.6)
lpt2 = 1,2/pt for ultimate limit states (shear, anchorage, etc.) (13.7)
(3) Concrete stresses may be assumed to have a linear distribution in the member cross-section
outside the dispersion length, ldisp. see Figure 13.2:

2
ldisp = J1pt + d 2 (13.8)

(4) Alternative models for the transfer of prestressing force may be used, if adequately justified and if
the transmission length is modified accordingly.

13.5.4Anchorage of tensile force at ULS

(1) The anchorage of tendons shall be checked in sections where the concrete tensile stress exceeds
/c1k.o.os for the relevant characteristic load combination.
The tendon stress a pd shall be calculated for a cracked section, including the effect of shear according to
8.2.3(8).
(2) If concrete is uncracked all along the transmission length, the total anchorage length for anchoring
a tendon at ultimate limit state with stress Urd may be taken as:

Ye 2 · a 2 · a 3 · (apd - apmoo)
lbpd = lpt2 + -1 5 . ~ . c/>p (13.9)
' T/1 · v fck
where
/p12 is the upper design value of transmission length, see 13.5.3(2);

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
230
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

a2 is as defined in 13.5.3(1);
a3 = 1,5 in cases where fatigue verification is required;
= 1,0 in all other cases;
apmoo is the tendon stress after all losses;
171 is as defined in 13.5.3(1).
Tendon stresses in the anchorage zone are illustrated in Figure 13.3.

13.5.5 Shear resistance of precast members without shear reinforcement

(1) Except for the conditions described in (2), 8.2.2 applies.

(2) Provided that following conditions are fulfilled:
the member is prestressed;

the effective depth is not larger than 500 mm unless the size effect is considered by a refined analysis;

the investigated region is uncracked in bending (where the flexural tensile stress for the persistent
and transient design situation, including effects of imposed deformations is smaller than /cik.o.os/Yc).

The shear resistance may be checked by the verification of the principal stress:

a1Ed (y) :5 f ctk.o,os (13.10)

Ye
where

O'tEd (y) is the maximum value of the principal tensile stress in the concrete cross-section,

O'x.Ed(y) + ( O'x.Ed (y))Z+T2 (y) (13.11)

2 2 Ed

where

O'x,Ed(y) is the normal stress in the longitudinal direction of the structure determined in a fibre at
distance y from the centroidal axis, assuming linear stress distribution over the depth. For
cross-sections within the transmission length of pre-tensioning tendons / p12 according to
Formula (13. 7), the contribution of the related prestressing force to N Ed and M Ed should be
considered with a linear distribution according to Figure 13.3;
is the shear stress in a fibre at distance y from the centroidal axis:

-r (y) = V..., ·S(y)

Ii<! b(y)· f
(13.12)

I is the second moment of area of the concrete cross-section;

b(y) is the width of the concrete cross-section at a distancey from the centroidal axis;

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
231
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

S(y) is the first moment of area of the concrete cross-section above the fibre at distance y to
the centroidal axis taken about the centroidal axis;
y is the distance from the considered fibre to centroidal axis of the concrete cross-section,y
should be choosen so that the maximum value of <Ti.Ed is found.
Additional shear stresses, for example by support effects, and/or due to the dispersion of tendon
anchorage forces should be considered.
(3) The calculation of the shear resistance, using Formula (13.10), is not required for points above the
support and within a line, starting from the face of the support and extending upwards at an angle of 45°.

13.6 Floor systems for buildings

13.6.1 Distribution of loads

(1) Where transverse load distribution between adjacent elements has been taken into account,
appropriate shear connections shall be provided across the longitudinal joints.
(2) Transverse shear transfer across longitudinal joints between precast elements may be achieved as
shown by examples in Figure 13.4.

I 0 I
a) longitudinal key infilled with b) with welded or bolted c) with structural reinforced
mortar or concrete anchored plates concrete topping

Figure 13.4 - Connections for vertical shear transfer between parallel precast units

(3) Transverse distribution of vertical loads between adjacent elements should be based on analysis
or tests taking into account the likely load variation between precast elements and the strength of the
interface.
(4) For building floors with uniformly distributed load and in the absence of a more accurate analysis,
the shear force acting in joints to adjacent precast elements per unit length of longitudinal joint may be
taken as:
(13.13)
where
q Ed is the design value of variable load;
be is the width of the element.
(5) Precast concrete elements with a structural concrete topping at least 40 mm thick may be designed
as composite elements, if shear at the interface is verified according to 8.2.6.
(6) Transverse reinforcement for bending and other action effects may be placed within the structural
concrete topping. In the case of negative bending at a section above a joint (see Figure 13.4 c)) the
compression zone should be assumed to be in the structural concrete topping unless the joint between
the precast units contains adequately compacted insitu concrete. Concrete may be considered adequately
compacted if the width of the joint is greater than the largest of Durr•• and the height of the precast unit.
(7) Building floor slabs combining parallel beams with unreinforced blocks in between without
structural concrete topping may be analysed in shear and bending as solid slabs, if:

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
232
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(i) cast-insitu transverse ribs are provided with a continuous reinforcement through the longitudinal
ribs; and
(ii) t he spacing ST of such transverse ribs complies with the limits in Table 13.2.

Table 1 3.2 - Maximum spacing of transverse ribs ST

Type of actions SL S h/ 8 si.>h/ 8

residential, snow not required ST S 12h
ot her ST s lOh STS 8h
where
St s pacing of longitudinal r ibs;
h depth of the floor;
IL length (span) of longitudinal ribs.

(8) Webs or ribs in isolated slab elements should be provided with shear reinforcement as for beams.
(9) The effects of possible restraints of pre cast units shall be considered.

13.6.2 Diaphragm action

(1) Where precast concrete floors in buildings are assumed to act as horizontal diaphragms
transferring horizontal forces to vertical bracing units:
the diaphragm should form part of a realistic st ructural model, taking into account the deformation
compatibility with bracing units;
the effects of horizontal deformations should be taken into account for all parts of the structure
involved in the transfer of horizontal loads;
the diaphragm should be re inforced and connected fo r the tensile forces de rived from the analysis;
stress concentrations at openings and connections should be taken into account in the detailing of
the reinforcement.
(2) If tie bars with diameter </> are anchored in the concrete infilled in longitudinal joints between
parallel elements, the joint width at the height of the tie bars should be ;:::: 3¢.
(3) Transverse reinforcement provided across longitudinal joints as part of the tying system may be
concentrated along the elements' supports and shall be consistent with the structural model.
(4) In diaphragm action provided by untopped building floors made of precast slab elements with
concreted or grouted longitudinal joints, their shear resistance should be determined according to shear-
friction mechanisms, accounting for the transverse compressive force on the joint surface and for its
roughness or presence of keys. For shear at the interface, reference should be made to 8.2.6 or to design
assisted by testing.

13.6.3 Tying systems for buildings

(1) Pre cast structures should be provided with a tying system to secure robustness of the structure
according to the rules of 12.9. For building structures the following additional provisions apply.
(2) In planar elements loaded in their own plane, e.g. in multi-storey walls and floor diaphragms
composed of precast elements, the necessary interaction among elements for the overall resistance may
be obtained by tying them together with peripheral and/or internal ties.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
233
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

(3) The same ties may also be relied upon to provide overall robustness of the structure, according to
12.9.
(4) Horizontal ties may be provided wholly within the insitu structural concrete topping or at
connections of precast members. Where ties are not continuous in one plane, the bending effects resulting
from the eccentricities should be considered.
(5) Ties should not be lapped in narrow joints between precast elements. Mechanical anchorage shall
be used in these cases.
(6) If internal ties are grouped along lines, surrounding members should be designed to distribute their
load back to the internal tie.

13.7 Connections and supports

13.7.1 Connections

(1) Materials for connections shall be:

stable and durable for the design service life of the structure;

chemically and physically compatible.

(2) Connections shall be designed to resist all action effects consistent with design assumptions, to
accommodate the necessary deformations and ensure robust behaviour of the structure.
(3) The verification of resistance and stiffness of connections may be based on numerical analysis,
possibly assisted by testing.
(4) Except in exposure classes XO and XCl, fasteners for claddings shall be made of corrosion resistant
material unless adequately protected against environmental actions.
(5) Shear forces may be ignored in compression connections if they are less than 10 % of the
compressive force.
(6) At connections with bedding materials like mortar, concrete or polymeric pads, relative movement
between the connected surfaces shall be prevented during hardening of the material.
(7) Connections for compressive force without bedding material or mortar bed may only be used
where appropriate quality of workmanship can be achieved. The average stress between plane surfaces
should not exceed 0,4fcd·
(8) Transverse tensile stresses near the ends of adjacent precast concrete elements should be
considered. They may be due to concentrated compression according to Figure 13.5 a), or due to the
expansion of a soft padding according to Figure 13.5 b). Reinforcement in case a) may be designed and
located according to 8.5.5. Reinforcement in case b) should be placed close to the surfaces of the adjacent
elements.
(9) In absence of more accurate models, reinforcement in Figure 13.S b) may be calculated as:
t FEd
As = 0,25h · fyd (13.14)

(10) The maximum capacity of compression connections should be determined according to 8.6, or
should be based on design assisted by testing.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
234
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

a) concentrated bearing b) expansion of soft padding and splitting reinforcement As

(two layers every side)

Figure 13.5 - Transverse tensile s tresses at connections trans mitting compression

(11) In building wall elements installed over floor slabs, reinforcement should normally be provided for
possible eccentricities and concentrations of the vertical load at the end of the wall.
(12) Specific reinfo rcement in building walls over a connection may be omitted, if the wall is supported
in a mortar bed and the vertical load satisfies

frd;::; 0,5h · /cd (13.15)

where h is the wall thickness (see Figure 13.6).
(13) FEd in Formula (13.15) may be increased to
F Ed = 0,6h . /cd (13.16)
in presence of reinforcement as in Figure 13.6, having diameter¢ ~ 6 mm and spacings not greater than
the lesser of h and 200 mm. For higher loads, reinforcement should be designed according to
Formula (13.14). A separate check should be made for the lower wall.
h

a) transve rse view b) longitudinal view

Figure 13.6 - Example of reinforcement in a building wall over a connection between floor slabs
without mortar joint

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
235
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(14) Reinforcement for transferring bending moments or tensile forces shall be continuous across the
connection and anchored in the adjacent precast concrete elements.

13.7.2 Supports

(1) The provisions of 12.10 should be complied with.

(2) If the bearing of isolated elements allows longitudinal movements, the net bearing length shall be
increased to cover possible movements.
(3) If an isolated element is tied other than at the level of its bearing, the net bearing length a1 shall be
increased to cover the effect of possible rotation around the tie.

13.8 Pocket foundations for buildings

13.8.1 General

(1) Pocket foundations, embedding a precast column base within s ide walls infilled with insitu
concrete (see Figures 13.7 and 13.8, where only the main reinforcement is sketched) and transferring
member action effects by shear and bending, may be considered to provide full restraint of the column in
t he pocket.
NOTE Depending on soil properties, soil-structure interaction can however result in lower restraints than
available between column and pocket.

(2) Pockets should be large enough to enable a good concrete filling below and around the column.
(3) Pocket foundations may host members other t han a single column, e.g., twin columns, short walls,
etc.; in these cases, specific adequate provisions s hould be devised for ensuring the assumed restraint for
these elements.

13.8.2 Pocket foundations with keyed surface

(1) Pocket and hosted column, both provided with adequate keys (see 8.2.6) able to mobilise strut
mechanisms (Figure 13.7), may be considered monolithically connected with overlapped
reinforcements.
(2) The lap length between the reinforcement of the column and of the pocket according to 11.5.2
should be increased by at least the distance s between the lapped bars. Adequate confinement
reinforcement at the lap splice should be provided (see Figure 13. 7).

Fv

H
t- Fh
s

Figure 13.7 - Pocket foundations with keyed surfaces

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
236
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

13.8.3 Pocket foundations with smooth or rough surfaces

(1) In case of pocket and column with smooth or rough surfaces (non-keyed), the action effects from
the column may be assumed to be transferred through the concrete filling by the compressive fo rces F,,
F2, F3 and the corresponding friction forces µ,F,, µvF2, µ,F3, as shown in Figure 13.8.
(2) With the assumption of (1) above, the minimum embedded length I should be

I~ 1,2hcol for MEd/NEd :5 O,lShcol (13.17)

I~ 2,0hcol for MEd/NEd ~ 2,0hcol (13.18)

where h col is the largest side of the column's section.

I may be interpolated for O,lShcoJ < MEd/NEd < 2,0hcol·
(3) The coefficient of friction µv should be taken from Table 8.2, according to the relevant type of
surface.
(4) The transfer of forces to the base slab may be checked at ULS by assuming a strut-and-tie model in
accordance with 8.5.
(5) The position of F, should be chosen with a~ 0,1/.

Fv

~
~ Fh
N

..
l~
: ~ ~
. :::i. :::i. F,
F2 µ vi) "'
.
0 <; ••.•:. -:!;:
, '
/
/
' ''
//
/
/
F3 ' ' ',
Figure 1 3.8 - Pocket foundations with smooth or rough joint surface

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
237
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

14 Plain and lightly reinforced concrete structures

14.1 General

(1) Clause 14 provides additional rules for plain concrete structures or where the reinforcement
provided is less than the minimum requ ired for reinforced concrete according to Clause 12.
(2) It should be ensured that brittle failure of these members does not lead to collapse of the structure.
(3) Clause 14 applies to members mainly subjected to compression other than that due to prestressing
such as:
walls, columns, arches, vaults, and tunnels;

strip and pad footings for foundations;

gravity retaining walls;

piles w ith diameter;::: 600 mm and where INEd/Acl::; 0,30.fck·

Clause 14 does not apply to members affected by dynamic actions (other than seismic) such as those from
rotating machines and traffic loads.
(4) For members made of lightweight aggregate concrete with closed structure according to Annex M
or for precast concrete elements and structures covered by this Eurocode, the design rules should be
modified accordingly.
(5) Plain concrete members may include steel reinforcement to satisfy serviceability, or partial
reinforcement Such reinforcement may be taken into account for local verification of ultimate limit states
and for verificat ion of serviceability limit states.
(6) Members subject to imposed deformations except as noted in 14.4.2 should be designed as
reinforced members or constru cted with joints to avoid uncontrolled cracking.

14.2 Concrete

(1) For the verification of plain concrete members at ULS, the values for fcd.pl and fctd,pt shall be taken as:

/cd.pl = kc,pl . /ct1 (14.1)

f ctd,pl = kt.pl . /ctd (14.2)

NOTE The values of k c.pl = 0,8 and kt.pt = 0,8 apply unless the National Annex gives other values.

(2) When tensile stresses are considered for the des ign resistance of plain concrete members, the
st ress strain diagram (see 8.1.1) may be extended linearly up to the t ensile design strength/ct<1,p1.

14.3 Structural analys is

(1) Since plain concrete members have limited deformation capacity, analysis methods according to
Clause 7 such as stress fields, strut-and-tie or FE should be used which permit neglecting the tensile
strength of concrete, in general.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
238
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

14.4 Ultimate limit states

14.4.1 General

(1) Beams, slabs and other structural members without axial compression or axial restraint and with
predominantely bending moments should not be designed as plain concrete members taking into account
concrete tensile strength. In cases of axially loaded members and shear forces 14.4.3 may be used. Strip
and pad footings may be designed according to 14.6.3.

14.4.2 Design resistance to bending with axial force

(1) In the case of walls, subject to the provision of adequate construction details and curing, the
imposed deformations due to temperature or shrinkage may be ignored.
(2) The general provisions of 8.1 apply for determining the ultimate resistance of sections to bending
with axial force.
(3) The axial resistance NRd of a rectangular cross-section with a uniaxial eccentricity e in the direction
of h (see Figure 14.1), may be taken as:
N Rd = f ed.pl . b. h (1 - 2 e/h) (14.3)

Figure 14.1 - Notation for plain walls

14.4.3 Shear

(1) In members with axial compression, approaches based on compression fields without ties
according to 8.5 should be used to calculate shear resistance.
(2) In plain concrete members account may be taken of the concrete tensile strength in the ultimate
limit state for shear, provided that either by calculations or by experience, brittle failure is excluded and
adequate resistance is ensured.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
239
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(3) For a section subject to a shear force VE<1 and a normal compressive force INEt1i acting over a
compressive area Ace the absolute value of the components of design stress may be taken as:

Ucp = INEd I/Ace (14.4)

T ep = 1,5 · VEd/Ace (for rectangular sections) (14.5)

and the following should be satisfied:
T ep $ TRd.pl

where

if Ucp $ Uc,lim: !Rd.pl = fc~d,pl + Ucpfctd,pl (14.6)

or

( acp
- ac,hm)
. 2
if Ucp > Uc,lim: TRd,p l = 2
fctd,pl + Ucpfctd,p l - (14.7)
2

Uc,li m = fcd,pl - 2 f ctd,pl · Ctctd,pl + fcct,pI) (14.8)

where •Rd.pl is the pla in concrete design strength in shear.

(4) A concrete member may be considered to be uncracked at the ultimate limit state if either it
remains completely under compression or if the absolute value of the principal concrete tensile stress
does not exceed /c:•<l,pl·
(5) Shear forces in construction joints should be verified according to 8.2.6.

14.4.4 Torsion

(1) Cracked members should not be designed to resist t orsional moments unless it can be justified
otherwise.

14.4.5 Ultimate limit states induced by structural deformation (buckling)

14.4.5.1 Slenderness of columns and walls

(1) The effective length of a column or wall should be calculated as:

lo = /3Eul · /,,.. (14.9)

where
/3Eu1 Eu/er-coefficient which depends on the support conditions (Euler-cases). For walls supported
on 3 or more sides /3Eu1-values may be taken from Table 14.1.
(2) The /3Eu1-values should be increased appropriately ifthe transverse bearing capacity is affected by
chases or recesses.
(3) A transverse wall may be considered as a bracing wall if:
its total thickness is not less than 0,5h, where h is the overall thickness of the braced wall;

it has the same height iwas the braced wall under consideration;

its length is at least equal to iw/5, where iwdenotes the clear height of the braced wall;

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
240
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

within the length iw/5 the transverse wall has no openings.

(4) In the case of a wall connected along the top and bottom in a flexurally rigid manner by insitu
concrete and reinforcement, so that the end moments can be fully resisted, the values for /hu1given in
Table 14.1 may be factored by 0,85.
(5) The slenderness of walls in plain concrete cast insitu should generally not exceed J. = 86 (i.e.
lo/h = 25).
Table 14.1 - Values of P EuJ for different s upport conditions

Lateral
Elevation of wall Formula Factor /JEul
bearing
b/fw /3Eul

0,2 0,26
0,4 0,59
1 I
0,6 0,76
along three 3
1
21 -
>
flEul =
1
0,8 0,85
sides . ,. . -· "' 1 + (~'b)2 0,90
1.0
b
1.5 0,95
2,0 0,97
5,0 1,00
b/fw /JEul

0,2 0,10
if b ;;:=: fw: 0,4 0,20
·.:: .,.
1
1 fJE ul = 0,6 0,30
along four
sides
3
1
3 -
>
1 + (';)
2
0,8 0,40
if b < fw: 1,0 0,50
b b
flEul = 2l 1,5 0,69
w
2,0 0,80
5,0 0,96
1 - floor slab;
2 - free edge;
3 - transverse wall with thickness 2: O,Sh and with a length 2: lw/5
The information in Table 14.1 assumes that t he wall has no openings with a height exceeding 1/3 of the
wall height lwor with an area exceeding 1/10 of the wall area. In walls laterally restrained along 3 or 4
sides with openings exceeding these limits, the parts between the openings should be considered as
laterally restrained along 2 sides only and be designed accordingly.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
241
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

14.4.5.2 Simplified design method for walls and columns

(1) In the absence of a more rigorous approach according to 7.4.3.3, the design resistance in terms of
axial force for a braced wall or column in plain concrete with /ck < 55 MPa, may be calculated as follows:
NRd = b . h . /cd,pl . <P (14.10)
where
<P is the factor taking into account eccentricity, including second order effects and considering
YcE = 1,20

1 - (2,1 + 0,02 ~)eh't

<P = 2 0,6
1+ (lo) (o,9 + 6 etot) (0,8 + <pen) (fed.pl) (14.11)
h h 1000 20

where
e'°' = eo + e1 (14.12)
or derived from an equivalent first order end moment as described in 0.7.2;
eo is the first order eccentricity including, where relevant, the effects of floors (e.g. possible
clamping moments transmitted to the wall from a slab) and horizontal actions;
e, is the additional eccentricity covering the effects of geometrical imperfections, see 7.2.1.
NOTE '!Jeff is taken according to 7.4.2 un less the National Annex gives a different value.

In some cases, depending on slenderness, the end moment(s) (Moz) can be more critical for the structure
t han the equivalent first order end moment MoEd· In such cases Formula (14.3) should be used for the
verification of the ultimate limit state.

14.5 Serviceability limit states

(1) Stresses should be checked where structural restraint is expected to occur.

(2) The following meas ures to ensure adequate serviceability should be considered:
a) with regard to crack formation:

limitation of concrete tensile stresses according to Clause 9;

provision of supplementary structural reinforcement (surface reinforcement, tying system

where necessary);

provision of joints;

choice of concrete technology (e.g. appropriate concrete composition, curing);

choice of appropriate method of construction.

b) with regard to limitation of deformations:

a minimum section size (see 14.6);

limitation of slenderness in the case of compression members.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
242
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(3) Any reinforcement provided in plain concrete members, although not taken into account for load
bearing purposes, should comply with d urability requ irements according to Clause 6.

14.6 Detailing of members and particular rules

14.6.1 Structural members

(1) The overall thickness of a cast insitu plain concrete wall should not be less than 120 mm.
(2) Local reinforcement may need to be added at chases and recesses to control cracking.

14.6.2 Cons truction joints

(1) Construction joints should be designed according to 8.2.6.

(2) Where tensile stresses are expected to occur in concrete at constructions joints, re inforcement shall
be detailed to provide required strength and to control cracking.

14.6.3 Strip and pad footings

(1) In the absence of mo re detailed data, axially loaded strip and pad footings (see Figure 14.2) may be
designed and constructed as plain concrete member provided that:

0,85 · hF 3ugd
--- > (14.13)
aF - fctd,pl

As a simplification, the relation in Formula (14.14) may be used:

hF > 2 (14.14)
aF -

where
hF is the footing depth;
aF is the distance from the footing edge to the column or wall face (see Figure 14.2);
O"g<1 is the design value of ground pressure.

Figure 14.2 - Unreinforced pad footings; notations

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
243
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Annex A
(informative)

Adjustment of partial factors for materials

A.1 Use of this annex

(1) This informative Annex contains information on the basis of the recommended partial factors for
materials and provis ions for adjustment of partial factors for materials for different reliability levels
based on the national rules.
NOTE National choice on the application of this Informative Annex is given in the National Annex. If the
National Annex contains no information on the application of this Informative Annex, it can be used.

A.2 Scope and fields of application

(1) This informative Annex applies to all clauses and annexes of this standard. It may be used for the cases
listed in Tables A.1 and A.2.

A.3 General
(1) The partial factors for materials given in Table 4.3 (NOP) may be adjusted according to this Annex A
if at least one of the conditions defined in Tables A.1 (NOP) and A.2 (NOP) apply.
NOTE The values given in Tables A.1 (NOP) and A.2 (NOP) apply unless the National Annex gives different
values.

(2) If there is an evidence that the actual statistical data of at least one of following variables:
material strength;

dominant geometrical value; or

model uncertainty.

is more unfavourable than the values defined in Table A.3, the partial factors for materials given in
Table 4.3 (NOP) shall be adapted according to (3).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
244
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1 :20 23 (E)

Table A.1 (NDP) - Values of adjuste d ma ter ial factors - General

persistent and t ransient accide nta l design
Condition for a djuste d mat e ria l factors design s ituations s it uations
rs Ye Yv rs Ye Yv
1,08 1,48 1,33 0,97 1,15 1,11
in case also at least one of the conditions d), e ), f) or
a) if the execution ensures that geometrical h) is fulfilled, the partial factors may be calculated
deviations of Tolerance Class 2 according to according to (3) with the statistical values given in
EN 13670 are fulfilled (4) and in (7) ford) or in (8) fore); with the updated
values of the resistance model for (f) and with the
values given in Table A.4 for h)
1,04 1.48 1,29 0,95 1,15 1,08
b) if the calculation of design resistance is in case also at least one of t he conditions d), e), f) or
based on the value of the dominant h) is fulfilled, the partial factors may be calculated
geometrical data measured in the finished according to (3) with the statistical values given in
structure and the CoVofthe measurement is (5) and in (7) ford) or in (8) fore) ; with the updated
not larger than the values given in (5) values of t he resistance model for (f) and with the
values given in Table A.4 for h)
1,03 1,50 1,29 0,94 1,15 1,07
in case also at least one of the conditions d), e ), f) or
c) if the calculation of design resistance is h) is fulfilled, the partial factors may be calculated
based on the design value of the effective according to (3) with the statistical values given in
depth according to (6) (6) and in (7} ford) or in (8) fore); with the updated
values of the resistance model for (f) and with the
values given in Table A.4 for h)
d) if the insitu concrete strength in the finished
structure is assessed according to ye and rv according to (7)
EN 13791:2019, Clause 8
e) if the yield strength of the reinforcement is
assessed from tests on samples taken from rs according to (8)
the existing structure
f) if the verification of the structure or of the
member is conducted according to more
rs and re according to (3) where the statistical
values describing the model uncertainties in
refined methods ensuring reduced
Table A.3 are replaced by the actual ones
uncertainties of the resistance model
g) if the verification of the structure or of the
member is conducted using non-linear
1,20 1,46 1,31• 1,09 1,16 1,16•
analysis and the model uncertainty is
considered separately according to F.4(1)
h) if the target value for the reliability index /Jcgt
given in Table A.4 is modified in accordance
rsand Ye according to (3) with the statistical values
in Table A.5
with the relevant authority
a These values apply for failures modes s imilar to punching and shear fa ilures in members without

shear reinforcement.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
245
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Table A.2 (NOP) - Values of adjusted material factors - Additional provisions for precast
members

persistent and
transient accidental
Condition for adjusting material factors design design
for precast members situations situations

rs re rv n re rv
(i) In case (a) of Table A.1 (NOP) is fulfilled and System of AVCP 1,10 1,40 1,30 0,95 1,05 1,05
2+ is applied
U) In case System AVCP 2+ is applied and the calculation of
design resistance is based on critical dimensions, including
effective depth, which are either: 1,05 1,35 1,28 0,90 1,05 1,05
- the nominal values reduced by tolerances, or
- the values measured in the finished member

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
246
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Ta b le A.3 - Statis tica l d a ta assumed for the ca lculation of p a rtial factor defined in Ta ble 4 .3
(NOP)

Coefficient of variation Bias factora

Partial factor for reinforcemen t Ys
Yield strength fy Vry = 0,045 hm/hk= exp(l,645 Vry)
Effective depth d vd = o,o50b µd = 0,95b
Model uncertainty Vas = 0,045< µa. = 1,09<
Coefficient of variation and b ias factor of
resistance for reinforcement
VRs = 0,0811 µRS = 1,115i
Partia l factor for concrete Ye
Compressive strengthfc (control specimen) Vrc = 0,100 fcm/fck = exp(1,645Vrc)d
lnsitu factor 1'/is =fc.ais/fc • Vi1is = 0,120 µ~is= 0,95
Concrete area Ac VAc = 0,040 µAc = 1,00
Model uncertainty Vee = 0,070f µec = 1,02r
Coefficient of variation and b ias factor of
resistance for concrete
VRc = 0,176i µRC = l,142i

Pa rtial factor for s hear and punching Yv (s ee 8 .2.1, 8.2 .2, 8 .4, 1.8.3 .1, 1.8.5)
Compressive strengthfc (control specimen) Vrc = 0,100 fcm/fck = exp(1,645Vrc)d
lnsitu factor 1'/is =fc.ais/fc 0 Vi1is = 0,120 µ~is= 0,95
Effective depth d vd = o,050b µd = 0,95b
Model uncertainty Vav = 0,107s µav = l,lOs
Res idual uncertainties Vres.v = 0,046h -
Coefficient of variation and bias factor of
resistance for shear and punching (members VRv = 0,137 1 /LRV = 1,085 1
without shear reinforcement)
a The values in this column refer to ratio between mean value and values used in the design formulae
(characteristic or nominal).
b These values are valid for d= 200 mm. For other effective depths: Vd = 0,05(200/d)Z/3 and
µ d = 1 - 0,05(200/d)2/3,
c The partial factor rs is calibrated for the case of pure bending according to 5.2.4 and 8.1.
d This formula replaces relationship given in Table 5.1 for the purpose of Annex A.
e lnsitu factor 1'/is accounts for the difference between the actual insitu concrete strength in the structure fc,ais
and the strength of the control specimen fc. For strength fc,;, assessed on extracted 2:1 cores according to
EN 13791, see (7).
r The partial factor Ye is calibrated for the case of axial compression according to 5.1.6 and 8.1.
g The partial factor Yv is calibrated for the case of punching according to 8.4 and applies also for the case of
shear without shear reinforcement according to 8.2.2 (s imilar statistical values).
h The residual uncertainties refer to aggregate size, reinforcement area and spacing and column size.
i Based on the statistical values above and calculated using Formulae (A.2) to (A.7).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
247
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(3) The adjusted partial factors may be calculated as:

exp(aR · Ptgt · VRM)

YM = (A.1)
µRM
where
index M is S for reinforcement, C for concrete in compression and V for shear;
is the sensitivity factor for resistance according to Table A.4 (NOP);
is the target value for the SO-year reliability index according to Table A.4 (NOP);
is the coefficient of variation of the resistance which may be calculated from

(A.2)

(A.3)

VRv
fc)2 + (V";s)z
= (3V 3
z z z
+ Vd + Vav + Vres.v (A.4)

where the coefficients of variation of each uncertainty are defined in Table A.3 or
updated (for conditions, see Table A.1 (NOP) and Table A.2 (NOP));
µRM is t he bias factor of the resistance and may be calculated from:
fym
l'RS =( µd. µ95 (A.S)
Jyk

fem
µRC =r µ>]IS . µAc . µOC (A.6)
Jck

(A.7)

where the bias factors of each uncertainty are defined in Table (A.3) or updated (for
conditions, see Tables A.1 (NOP) and A.2 (NOP)).
NOTEl The va lues of p,8, in Table A.4 (NOP) a pply unless the National Annex gives different values

NOTE 2 According to EN 1990, the approximated Formula (A.1) can be used for VRM < 0,20. The exact Formula
to be used for higher coefficients of variation VRM can be found in EN 1990 (which provides 3 % higher values of YM
for VRM = 0,30).

Table A.4 (NDP) - Sensitivity factors for resistance « Rand target va lues for the 50-year
r e lia bility index P•g•

Sens itivity factors for target value for the 50-year

Design situations/ Limit states
resistance aR relia bility index (J,8,
Persistent or transient design situation 0,8 3,8
Fatigue design situation 0,8 3,8
Accidental design situation 0,8 2,0
NOTE These values refer to CC2. For others Consequence Classes, refer to EN 1990.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
248
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(4) If the execution is subjected to a quality control system, which ensures that geometrical deviations
of Tolerance Class 2 according to EN 13670 are fulfilled, the statistical data of the geometrical values in
Table A.3 may be replaced by:
effective depth d of the reinforcement:

vd = 0,025 ford~ 200 mm or vd = 0,025(200/d) 2/3 otherwise; µd = 0,975;

concrete area: V11c = 0,02 and µ 11c = 1,00.
(5) If the calculation of design resistance is based on the value of the dominant geometrical data (e.g.
the effective depth for bending or the concrete area for axial compressive force) measured in the finished
structure at the governing cross-section, the statistical data of the geometrical values in Table A.3 may be
replaced by:
effective depth d of the reinforcement: Vd = 0,015 and µc1 = 1,00;

concrete area: V11c = 0,015 and µ Ac = 1,00.

The measurements of the effective depth and of the concrete area should be conducted to allow for the
coefficients of variation defined above. If this is not possible, the statistical values should be adapted
accounting for the actual uncertainties of the measurements.
(6) The statistical data of the effective depth in Table A.3 may be replaced by Vd = 0,00 and µd = 1,00 if
the calculation of the design resistance is based on the design value of the effective depth dd:
(A.8)
where
ti.d is the deviation value of the effective depth:
ti.d= 15mm for reinforcing and prestressing steel;
ti.d= 5mm for pre-tensioning steel.
NOTE 1 The design value of the effective depth dd can be used unless the National Annex gives lim itations.

(7) If the compressive concrete strength is assessed according to EN 13791:2019, Clause 8, the partial
safety factors Ye and yv may be adjusted using Formula (A.1), where Formulae (A.3), (A.4), (A.6) and (A.7)
should be replaced by Formulae (A.9) to (A.12), respectively:

Vr~.is,corr + V]c + V~c (A.9)

~ 2
fc,is,corr) + vid + ~2av + v.res,v
2 (A.10)
( 3

and

µRC = µfc,is . µA c . µ9, (A.11)

- 1/3
µRV - µfc,is · µd · µ9v (A.12)

where
VAc, Vee, µ Ac and µec are taken from Table A.3 or updated considering the cases (b), (c), (f), (g) or (h)
defined in Tables A.1 (NOP) and A.2 (NOP);

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
249
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

V. , _ kd,n V. .
fC,1$,COr r - a ,p fC, IS (A13)
R tgt

µfc,is =exp( kn· Vrc,is) (A14)

kd,n is a parameter which depends on the number of samples according to Table AS;
Vrc,;s is the coefficient of variation of the core strength according to EN 13791, but not smaller than
0,08;
kn is the parameter which depends on the number of samples and has been used to calculate /ck.is
according to EN 13791:2019, Table 6 (see also Table AS).
(8) If the reinforcement yield strength is assessed from tests on samples taken from the existing structure,
t he partial safety factor rs may be adjusted using Formula (Al), where Formulae (A2) and (AS) should
be replaced by Formulae (A1S) and (A16), respectively:

(A1S)

and
µRS = µfy,corr · µd · µ95 (A16)
where
Vd, V05 , µd and µ 05 are taken from Table A.3 or updated considering the cases (b), (c), (e), (g) or (h)
defined in Tables Al (NOP) and A2 (NOP);

kdn
V,y,co rr = aR . p'
tgt
V,y (Al 7)

µfy,corr = exp(kn · Vry) (A18)

kct,n is a parameter which depends on the number of samples according to Table AS;
Vry is the coefficient of variation of reinforcement obtained from tests;
k0 is the parameter which depends on the number of samples and has been used to calculate Vfy
(see Table A.S).

Table A.5 - Values of kn and k d,n as function of the number of test results n used to evaluate the
insitu concrete compressive strength in the test region or to evaluate the yield strength of the
reinforcement

n 4 5 8 10 12 16 20 30 00

kn 2,63 2,33 2,00 1,92 1,87 1,81 1,76 1,73 1,64S

kd.n 11,40 7,8S
S,07 4,S1 4,19 3,85 3,64 3,44 3,04
(for aR · f3,s, = 3,04)

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
250
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

AnnexB
(normative)

Time dependent behaviour of materials: strength, creep, shrinkage

and elastic strain of concrete and relaxation of prestressing steel

B.1 Use of this annex

(1) This normative Annex contains more detailed provisions for t he time dependent behaviour of
materials, i.e. strength, creep, shrinkage and elastic strains and relaxation of prestressing steel.

B.2 Scope and field of application

(1) This Normative Annex applies to all types of members and structures. For members and structures
very sensitive to deformations, testing of the elastic modulus, creep and shrinkage should be carried out.
For more accurate prediction of relaxation losses, results of relaxation tests on the prestressing steel
should be considered.

B.3 General
NOTE 1 Both creep and shrinkage are subdivided into two components, basic creep and drying creep or basic
shrinkage and drying shrinkage, respectively, due to the pronounced effect of the ambient climate conditions on the
magnitude and the kinetics of the time-dependent deformations.

NOTE 2 The drying shrinkage strain develops slowly, since it is a function of the diffusion controlled migration
of the water through the hardened concrete, which is affected by the size and shape, and the temperature of the
member. The basic shrinkage strain develops during hardening of the concrete: the major part therefore develops
in the early days after casting. Basic shrinkage is a function of the water/cement ratio and thus of the concrete
strength. It is particularly relevant when new high strength concrete is cast against hardened concrete. For normal
strength concrete Ecbs is rather low. For bond between old and new/young concrete tota l differential shrinkage is
relevant (risk of cracking).

NOTE 3 The influence of the seasonal change of the ambient conditions during the year (relative humidity and
temperature) on the development of the drying shrinkage is not considered in the model. This influence of the
season on the development of the drying shrinkage after casting can be considered.

NOTE 4 The data base behind the creep and shrinkage models represents most of the creep and shrinkage
investigations conducted around the world within the years 1960 and 2000. New binder type concretes like for
instance concretes with a high amount (beyond the maximum values defined in EN 206 or national annexes) of fly
ash or ground granulated blast-furnace slag (GGBS) are not sufficiently represented by the models.

NOTE 5 The indices "cm" or "ck" ofvaluesfcm =.fcm,rer or /ck= /ck.rermean any specified value between 28 days and
91 days.

(1) The early strength development of concrete with time (slow, normal, rapid) is subdivided into the
Classes CS, CN and CR according to Table B.1 (NOP), which are subsequently defined from the
cement/binder characteristics and compositions (applied in Formulae (B.2) and (B.17) and Tables B.2,
B.3 and D.1):

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
251
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Table B.1 (NOP) - Strength development classe s of concrete

Comoosition and orooerties of the binder
Cement
Class Type of Composition of the binder
strength class •,
cement (cement and SCM h)
e.1?.
cs CEM III Portland cement cli nker and more than 65 M.·% of ground
CEM 11/B 32,5 N; 42,5 N granulated blast furnace slag (ggbs) or more than 35 M.·%
offly ash (fu)
CN CEM II Portland cement cli nker and more than 35 M.·% but Jess
CEM I 42,5 N; 32,5 R than 65 M.·% of ground granulated blast furnace slag (ggbs)
or more tha n 20 M.·% but less than 35 M.·% offly ash (fa)
CR CEM I 42,5 R; 52,5 N; -
52,5 R
3
According to EN 197·1.
b Secondary cementitious materia ls (SCM) considered as cement replacement for the water-
binder-ratio according to EN 206.

NOTE Strength development classes are defined in Table B.1 (NOP) unless the National Annex gives different
specifications.

(2) The relations for creep and sh rinkage given in Annex B predict the time-dependent mean cross-
section behaviour of an unre inforced member moist cured at normal temperature for not lo nger tha n 14
days. These values sh ould be used in conjunction with 7.3.1(6), 7.3.1(7), 7.4.2, 7.6.4, 9.1(4) and 9 .3.3(1).
(3) Un less special provisions are given, the relations are valid for structural concrete
(12 MPa 5' /ck 5' 100 MPa) subjected to a constant compressive stress <1c 5' 0,40/cm(to) under a quasi-
permanent combination at a n age at loading to (unless adjusted by Formula (B.17)) and exposed to a
mean relative humidity in the range of 20 % to 100 % at a mean temperature in the r ange of 5 °C to 30 °C.
The age at loading should be at least 1 day. The r elations consider shrinkage deformatio n begin ning fro m
a concrete age of 1 day. For variable stresses see B.8.
(4) The relations may be applied as well to concrete in tension.
(5) Both basic and drying shrinkage are isotropic strains. Creep is an anisotropic strain. For uncracked
co ncrete, Poisson's ratio may be taken as 0,2 for basic and for drying creep.

B.4 Development of concrete strength and stiffness with time

NOTE 1 The mechanical properties of concrete at an age t depend on the composition of the concrete, the
composition and properties of the binder, the tem perature history, the cu ring conditions and the drying conditions.

(1) For a mean temperature of 20 °C an d curing in accordance with EN 13670 the compressive strength
of concrete at va rious ages fcm(t) may be estimated from Formulae (B.l) a nd (B.2). For other
temperatures, temperature adjusted concrete age may be considered according to Formula (B.18).

f~m(t) = f3cc(t) · fem (B.1)

with

/3cc(t) = exp [sc (1- R ) ~] ; t :S: trer (B.2)

where

Sc is a coefficient which depends on early strength development of the concrete and the concrete
strength as defined in Table B.2.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
252
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

The values of sc in Table B.2 are valid for concrete covered by the data considered, see B.3, Note 4. In
other cases, e.g. where there is a high content of pozzolanic binder, experimental verification should be
carried out for structures which are sensitive to the development of the concrete strength, deformations
and stresses.

Table B.2 - Values of the coefficient Sc for different early strength development of concrete and
concrete strength

Values of the coefficient Sc

Concrete strength
Class CS• Class CN• Class CR•
/ck~ 35 MPa 0,6 0,5 0,3
35 MPa </ck< 60 MPa 0,5 0,4 0,2
/ck~ 60 MPa 0,4 0,3 0,1
a See B.3(1).
NOTE 2 The development of tensile strength with time is strongly influenced by the early strength cement class,
curing a nd drying conditions as well as by the dimensions of the structural members.

(2) It may be assumed that the tensile strengthfc,m(t) is equal to:

/cim(t) = /3cc0·6 (t} /ctm (B.3)

where /3cc(t) follows from Formula (B.2) and the values for /ctm are given in Table 5.1.
(3) Where the development of the tensile s trength with time is important, tests should be carried out
considering the exposure conditions and the dimensions of the structural member.
(4) The development of the modulus of elasticity with time may be estimated by:

fem( t) = /3cc1/3(t) Ecm (B.4)

where /3cc(t) follows from Formula (B.2) and Ecm from For mula (5.1).

B.5 Basic formulae for determining the creep coefficient

(1) The total mean creep coefficient <p(t,to) may be calculated from Formula (B.S). For characteristic
values of the creep coefficient, see (8).

(B.S)
where

(/Jbc (t,to) is the basic creep coefficient, Formula (B.6);

C{Jdc ( t,to) is the drying creep coefficient, Formula (B.9);
t is the age of concrete in days at the moment considered;
to is the age of concrete at loading in days adjusted according to Formulae (B.17).
(2) The basic creep coefficient (/Jbc(t,to) may be estimated from:

<Pbc ( t, to) = f3bc,fcm · f3bc,t -to (B.6)

where

f3bc,fcm is a function to describe the effect of concrete strength on basic creep, see Formula (B.7);

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
253
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

f3bc.t - to is a function to describe the time development of basic creep, see Formula (B.8)
1,8
f3bcJcm =( )0,7 (B.7)
fcm,28
2
f3bc,t- t 0 = In ( (t:,~dj + 0,035) (t- t0) + 1) (B.8)

where to,adi is the adjusted age at loading in days acco rd ing to For mula (B.17).
(3) The drying creep coefficient (/Jdc may be estimated from:

<fJdc ( t, to) = f3ctcJcm · f3dc,RH · f3ctc,t 0 • f3dc,t-t0 (B.9)

where

f3dc,fcm is a function to descri be the effect of concrete strength on drying creep, see Formula (B.10);
f3dc,RH is a function to describe the effect of relative humidity and notional size on drying creep, see
Formula (B.11);
f3dc,t
0
is a function to descri be the effect of the adjusted concrete age at loading on drying creep,
see Formula (B.12);
f3dc,t - to is a function to describe the time development of drying creep, see Formula (B.13);
412
f3dc,fcm = Jcm,28
/: 1.4 (B.10)

RH
1 - 100
f3dc,RH = ---;::==== (B.11)
3 hn
01
• 100
1
f3dc,t0 = O 1 + to,2 (B.12)
' O,adj
(t - to) ]y(to,ad;)
(B.13)
f3ctc.t - t 0 = [f3h + (t - to)

with
1
y( to,act;) = 35
(B.14)
2,3 + ,
.Jto,adj
/3h = 1.5hn + 250afcm ::; 1 500afcm (B.15)
and

ar. = ( - -
35 )o.s (B.16)
cm f cm,28

where
RH is the relative humidity [ %] of the ambient environment;
hn = 2Ac/u, is the notional size [mm] of the member, where Ac is the cross-section area and u
is the perimeter of the structural member in contact with the atmosphere;

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
254
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

to.adj is the adjusted age at loading in days adjusted according to Formula (B.17);
t - t0 Is the non-adjusted duration of loading [ d].
(4) The effect of early strength development of concrete on the creep coefficient of concrete may be
considered by modifying the age at loading to to to.adj according to Formula (B.17):
«sc
to.adj = to.T [2 +9t1.2 +1] ;::: 0,5 {B.17)
O,T

where

to•r is the age of concrete at loading in days adjusted according to the concrete temperature as
given in Formula {B.18). For T = 20 °C, to,T corresponds to to;
asc is a coefficient which depends on the strength development of concrete (see B.3(1)):
asc = - 1 for class CS;
asc = 0 for class CN;
asc = 1 for class CR.
(5) The effect of elevated or reduced concrete temperatures within the range of 0 °C ::; T::; +80 °C on
the maturity of concrete may be cons ide red by adjusting the concrete age according to Formula {B.18):
n

tT
~ Llti ·exp ( 13,65
=L 4000
- 273 + T(Llti)
) {B.18)
i=l

where
tT is the temperature-adjusted concrete age in days which replaces t in the corresponding
formulae;
Llt1 is the number of days where a temperature T prevails;
T(Llt1) is the mean concrete temperat ure in °C during the time period Llt;.
(6) For high stress levels in the range of0,4/cm (to)< ac ::; 0,6/cm (to) creep is no longer proportional to
the applied stress. This non-linearity of creep may be considered by adjusting the creep coefficient
according to Formula {B.19):

<pcr(t,to) = rp(t,to) · exp[l,S(kcr-0,4)] for 0,4 < kcr ::; 0,6 {B.19)
where

<Pa( t,to) is the non-linear notional creep coefficient;

ac
k ---- is the stress-st rength ratio.
<1 - fcmCto)
(7) Creep strains may be calculated by means of the Formula (B.20):

{B.20)

where

Ee = ac · Ecm,28 {B.21)

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
255
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

1
ac = F ;::: 1.0 (8.22)
08 + 02~
' ' 88
where Ee is the tangent and Eem is the secant modulus of elasticity.
(8) Lower and upper characteristic values of the creep coefficient (/Jk may be taken as:
(/Jk:o.10 = 0,6<p(t,to) and (/Jk:o.os = O,S<p(t,to);
(/Jk;0,90 = 1,4<p(t,to) and (/Jk;0.95 = 1,S<p(t,to).
Characteristics values of creep should be used in cases where displacements are specially designed and
accounted for, and they have significant influence, e.g. when displacement range of bearings, joints and
expansion devices are designed.

B.6 Basic formulae for determining the shrinkage strain

(1) The total mean shrinkage or swelling strain Ecs(t,ts) may be calculated from Formula (B.23). For
characteristic values of shrinkage or swelling strain, see ( 4).

(B.23)
where shrinkage is subdivided into the basic shrinkage Eebs(t) which occurs even if no moisture loss is
possible:

fcbs(t) = fcbs,fem . Pbs,t. aNDP,b (B.24)

and the drying shrinkage £eds(t,t,) giving the additional shrinkage if moisture loss occurs:

Eeds Ct - ts) = feds.fem. PRH ' Pds,t - ts. aNDP,d (B.25)

where

Ecbs.fem is the notional basic shrinkage coefficient, see Formula (B.26);

Eeds.fem is the notional drying shrinkage coefficient, see Formula (B.28);

is a function to describe the time development of basic shrinkage, see
Formula (B.27);
is a coefficient to consider the effect of relative humidity on drying shrinkage, see
Formulae (B.29) to (B.32);
is a function to describe the time development of drying shrinkage, see
Formula (B.33);
is the concrete age at the beginning of drying [d];
t - ts is the real (non-adjusted) duration of drying [d].
NOTE The va lues of aNoP,h and aNoP,d are 1,0 unless the National Annex gives different va lues.

(2) The basic shrinkage £cbs(t) according to Formula (B.24) may be estimated by applying
Formulae (B.26) and (8.27):

F
Jcm,28
)2,5 _6
(8.26)
Ecbs.fem = abs ( 60 F . 10
+ Jcm,26

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
256
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

f3bs,t =1 - exp( -0,2../t) (B.27)

where

abs is a coefficient which depends on the early strength development of concrete, see Table B.3.

Table B.3 - Coefficients a bs and a ds used in Formulae (B.26) and (B.28), respectively
Early strength development of concrete• abs ads
Low early strength: Class CS 800 3
Ordinary early strength: Class CN 700 4
High early strength: Class CR 600 6
a See B.3(1).

(3) For drying shrinkage l'cc1s(t-ts) according to Formula (B.25), Formulae (B.28) to (8.33) may be
applied:

l'cds,fcm = (220+ 1 lOads) . exp(-0,012fcm,28) . 10- 6 (8.28)

PRH = 1,55 . [1-(R~qr 1 for 20 % ~ RH~ RHeq {B.29)

PRH = 1,55 . [1-(R~qr 1 for RHeq < RH< 100 % {B.30)

PRH = 1,55 . [1-(R~qrJ - 0.25 for RH = 100 % {B.31)

35 )O.l
RHeq = 99 · ( -r - ~ 99 (B.32)
Jcm,28

(t- ts) ]o,s (B.33)

Pcts,t- ts = [0,035h~ + (t- ts)

where

«ds is a coefficient depending on the early strength development of concrete, see Table 8.3;
RHeq is the internal relative humidity of concrete [ %] at equilibrium. It considers self-desiccation
(relevant for h igh performance concrete).
NOTE RH =100% means that capillary suction becomes active, i.e. the member is submerged or sufficient free
water is available at the member's surface.

(4) Lower and upper charact eristic values of total shrinkage or swelling strain l'cs may be taken as:
l'cs;0,10 = 0,6£cs (t,ts) and l':cs;0.05 = 0,5£cs (t,ts);

l'cs;o,9o = 1,4£cs (t,ts) and l'cs;o,95 = 1,5ecs (t,ts).

Characteristic values of shrinkage should be used when the displacement range of bearings and
expansion devices are designed.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
257
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

B.7 Tests on elastic deformations, creep and shrinkage

(1) If a member or a structure is very sensitive to deformations (e.g. long span prestressed concrete
girder bridges) design assumptions for elastic modulus, creep and shrinkage behaviour should be verified
by testing before execution.
(2) Tests should also be carried out, for sensitive structures only, if:
the design with upper and lower bound values of the creep coefficient (see B.5(8)) and of the total
shrinkage or swelling strain (see B.6(4)) gives no satisfactory results with respect to the limit states;

if concrete is used for which the prediction models considered does not apply, see B.3, NOTE 4;

the environmental conditions at the structure are not covered by the prediction models given in B.5
and B.6.

(3) For the tests, the guidelines given below should be followed:
elastic deformation, modulus of elasticity: EN 12390-13;

creep: EN 12390-17;

shrinkage: EN 12390-16.

(4) For creep and shrinkage tests a minimum duration of loading and drying, respectively, of3 months
shall be kept.
(5) From the test results an adapted creep or shrinkage model may be obtained by means of the
subsequent procedure.
The creep coefficient should be derived as:

<p(t,to) = Sbcl · <fJbc(t,to) + Sctc1 · <fJdc(t,to) (B.34)

where the adapted time development functions (see B.5) may be obtained from:
2
30 ) Ct- t 0)
Pbc,t-to = In ((~0,035 ~ + 1) (B.35)
o.adJ ~bc2

(t _ to) ]y(to,adi)
(B.36)
fJdc,t- to = [fJhSdc2 + (t - to)

The shrinkage strain should be derived from:

Ecs(t,ts) = Sbs1 · Ecbs(t) + Sdsl · Ecds(t - ts) (B.37)

where the adapted time development functions (s ee B.6) result from :

fJbs.t =1 - exp( -0,2sbs2v't) (B.38)

Pds.t-t, = (B.39)

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
258
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Parameters (bc1. (bc2, ( dc1 and (dc2 for creep as well as parameters (bs 1, ( bs2. ( ds1 and (ds2 for shrinkage should
be determined such as to minimise the sum of the squares of the differences between the model
estimation and the experimental results. The strain readings from the experimental results to be used for
the calibration should be taken at constant intervals in the logarithmic time scale, i.e. in a geom etric
progression of reading times, in accordance with the test guidelines.
Once the parameters are obtained, the inputs of the model may be varied to meet the insitu cond itions as
long as these conditions remain within t he validity of the prediction models according to B.3.
NOTE Calibrating the models with experimental resu lts reduces the coefficient of variation from 30 % to 10 %
but does not make the variation disappear.

B.8 Detailed analysis for creep at variable loading

(1) A constant stress ac(to) applied at time to leads to the subsequent stress-dependent strain fco(t,to)
at t ime t, which corresponds to the sum of the elastic strain f ci(to) and the creep strain f cc(t,to) and may
be expressed as:

(B.40)

where

j(t,to) is the creep function or creep compliance, representing the total stress-dependent strain
per unit stress;
Ee( to) is the tangent modulus of elasticity at the time ofloading to;
Ec(28) is the tangent modulus of elasticity at t he concrete age of 28 days.
(2) Within the range of service stresses ac::; 0,40/cnu creep may be assumed to be linearly related to
stress. Superposition may be applied. The strain caused by the stress history ac(t) may be obtained by
decomposing the stress history to small increments l::.ac applied at times T;, and summing up the
corresponding strains (see Formula (B.41)):
n
fc 0 (t,ac) = Oc(t0) · j(t,t 0 ) + L
t=l
l::.ac(•1) · j(t,ri) (B.41)

If a c(t) is a continuous function the expression l::.a c(r;) may be replaced by i1~c~•) · di:.

With t as the age of concrete at the moment considered and th e timer as the integration variable ranging
from to::; r::; t, Formula (B.41) may then be expressed as follows :

(B.42)

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
259
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

B.9 Relaxation ofprestressing steel

(1) The design calculations for the loss of tendon stress due to relaxation of the prestressing steel
should be based on the value of P 1000, the relaxation loss at 1 000 hours after tensioning to an initial load
of e ither 70 % or 80 % of the actual strength of the prestressing steel and at a mean temperature of 20 °C
determined according to EN ISO 15630-3.
(2) The values for 0 000 should be taken from Table 8.4 unless there is more accurate data available
either from testing of the actual prestressing steel or from testing of the same type of prestressing steel
as part of continuous surveillance of the producer.

Ta ble B.4 - Relaxa tion of prestressing s teel

Maximum relaxation at 1 000 hours • P tooo

Wires a nd Bars Bars

Type of prestressing steel
Strands cps 15 mm <P> 15 mm
for initial stress O"p; of 50 % of actual tensile strength fp 0% 0% 0%
for initial stress a p1of70 % of actual tensile strength fp 2,5% 6,0 % 4,0%
for initial stress ap1of80 % of actual tensile strength fp 4,5% - -
NOTE 1 Values apply for all prestressing steel strength classes.
NOTE2 In the absence of more detailed information, the relaxation loss can be interpolated linearly between
the initial stress values.
NOTE 3 fp = /pk can be assumed if the actual strength ofprestressing steel is not known.
NOTE4 Relaxation losses are very sensitive to the temperature of the prestressing steel.

• Relaxation losses apply at a mean temperature of 20 °C.

(3) The evolution of relaxation loss over time may be assumed to follow Formula (8.43) :

LlO"pr (24·t)kp
--;;--: (8.43)
p1 = P1000 l OOO

where
ilapr is the absolute value of loss of stress in the prestressing steel;
O"p1 is the initial stress in the prestressing steel;
kp is a coefficient which describes the evolution of relaxation losses over time, in lieu if more
accurate data, a value of kp = 0,16 may be assumed;
P1000 is the relaxation loss [ %] after 1 000 hours at initial stress a p1·
(4) If relaxation loss is taken from testing in accordance with EN ISO 15630-3 up to a duration of at
least 1 000 ho urs, the evolution of relaxation loss LlO"pr over t ime at initial stress a p1may be assumed as
best fit curve of the actual test results according to Formula (B.44 ):
Ll<Tpr
--=b·t• (8.44)
<Tp;

where a and bare coefficients of the best fit curve of relaxation tests performed at initial stress O"pi·

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
260
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(5) The long term (final) value of the relaxation loss may be estimated for a time t equal to the design
service life of the structure or as specified for the project using Formulae (B.43) or (B.44).
(6) In cases where the mean temperature of prestressing steel is 30 °C or higher the relaxation loss
should be determined based on testing in accordance with EN ISO 15630-3 at initial stress api and
assumed actual mean temperature up to a duration of at least 1 000 hours and then extrapolated over
time in accordance with Formula (B.44).
NOTE Where prestressed concrete members are subjected to heat treatment (e.g. by steam). refer to Clause 13
for relaxation losses during heat treatment.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
261
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Annexe
(normative)

Requirements for materials

C.1 Use of this annex

(1) This normative Annex contains additional provisions for material properties with minimum or
maximum values or an interval of values for which the design provisions of this Eurocode apply. This
Normative Annex also applies to precast concrete products according to EN 13369 designed according to
this standard.

C.2 Scope and field of application

(1) This Normative Annex applies to materials and products in accordance with Clause Sand normative
Annex Q.

C.3 Concrete
C.3.1 Normal weight, heavy weight and Lightweight Aggregate Concrete (LWAC)

(1) In the design according to this Eurocode concrete strength classes according to EN 206 should be
specified. Intermediate classes may be specified if permitted in the National Annex, see 5.1.3(3). Unless
noted otherwise D1ower should be equal or greater than 8mm.

C.4 Reinforcing steel

C.4.1 Carbon reinforcing steel

(1) Unless the relevant standard for reinforcing steel gives different values, carbon reinforcing steel
products may be classified in strength classes B a nd in ductility classes and shall comply with the
requirements given in Tables C.1 and C.2.
(2) Reinforcing steel shall be clearly and permanently identifiable with respect to strength and ductility
class according to Tables C.l and C.2.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
262
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Ta ble C.1 - St rength pro per ties of ca rbon reinforcing steel

Reinforcing steel s trength class•

Pro per ty
8400 8450 8500 8550 8600 8700
Bars including de-coiled bars<
Tensile Yield strength R. or Rvo.2 [MPa) ~ 400 ~ 4 50 ~ 500 ~ 5 50 ~ 600 ~ 700
(5 % quantile)
160 for bars and de-coiled bars¢:::; 12 mm
140 for bars and de-coiled bars 12 mm<¢:::; 16 mm
Fat igue stress range 2aa [MPa) for 130 for bars and de-coiled bars 16 mm < ¢ :::; 20 mm
N ~ 2 x 106 cycles based on an upper
stress limit of0,6/yk (10 % quantile)b 130 for straight bars¢ > 20 mm
100 for welded fabric¢:::; 12 mm
80 for welded fabric¢> 12 mm
0,035 for¢ :::; 6 mm
Minimum relative rib area/R (5 %
0,040 for 6 mm<¢:::; 12 mm
quantile)
0,056 for¢> 12 mm
a All strength classes apply unless the National Annex excludes specific classes, see 5.2.2(1 ).
b Different fatigue properties can be set in the relevant standard by specifying higher values of the fatigue
stress range and/or increasing the number of cycles that is to be confirmed by testing. No specific fatigue
properties are required if the reinforcement is used only for predominantly static loading.
c De-coiled products are not part of EN 10080. To provide sufficient confidence in the reinforcement
properties aft:er de-coiling, National regulations can specify additional requirements.

Table C.2 - Ductility properties of carbon reinforcing steel

Ductility Class
Propertie s for weldable reinforcement
A 8 c
Stress ratio of Rm /Re ~ 1,15
~ 1,05 ~ 1,08
(10 % quantile) < 1,35
Tensile yield strength ratio of Re,act/ Rc,nom
- :::; 1.3 :::; 1,3
(10 % quantile)
Elongation at maximum force A8, [ %)(10 %
~ 2,5 ~ 5,0 ~ 7,5
quantile)
Pass bend and/or rebend t est according to the
relevant standard for reinforcing steel. For
Bendability
rebending of reinforcing steel on site see
requi rements in EN 13670.

NOTE EN 10080 specifies tensile yield strength Re as a characteristic value based on the long-term quality level
of production. In contrast/yk is the characteristic yield stress based on only that reinforcement used in a particular
structure. There is no direct relationship between /yk and the characteristic Re or Rpo.2. However, based on the
methods of evaluation and verification the yield strength Re given in EN 10080 can be taken as /yk.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
263
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(3) In welded fabric the declared shear force shall be not lower than the specified minimum value of
the shear force Fs of welded joints. The specified minimum value is:

Fs ;::: 0,25 · Re,nom ·An (C.1)

where Re.nom is the nom inal characteristic yield strength and An is the nominal cross sectional area of
either:
a) the larger wire at the join t in a s ingle wire welded fabric; or

b) one of the twin wires in a twin wire welded fabric (twin wires in one direction).

C.4.2 Stainl ess rein forcing steel

(1) Unless the relevant standard for stainless reinforcing steel gives different values, stainless
reinforcing steel products may be classified in strength classes 8 and in d uctility classes and shall comply
with the requirements given in Tables C.3 and C.4.
NOTE EN 10370 specifies a 0,2 % proof strength Rpo.21v as a characteristic, based on the long-term quality level
of production. In contrast /o.2k is the characteristic 0,2 % proof strength based on only that reinforcement used in a
particular structure. There is no direct relationship between/o,2k and the characteristic Rpo,2k. However the methods
of evaluation and verification of0,2 % proof strength given in EN 10370 provide a sufficient check for obtaining/o,2k.

(2) Stainless reinforcing steel shall be clearly and permanently identifiable with respect to strength and
ductility class according to Tables C.3 and C.4.

Table C.3 - Strength properties of stainless reinforcing steel

Reinforcing steel strength class •

Property
8 4 00 8450 8500 8 550 8600 8 70 0
Bars and de-coiled< products
;::: 400 ;::: 450 ;::: 500 ;::: 550 ;::: 600 ;::: 700
Yield strength Rpo.2k (MPa) (5 o/o quantile)
160 for¢ $ 12 mm
140for12 mm<¢$ 16 mm
Fatigue stress range 2aa (MPa) for N;::: 5 x 106
cycles based on a stress ratio O"min/O"max = 0,2 for 130for16 mm<¢$ 20 mm
strength class 8500 only for stainless steel 130 ¢ > 20 mm
(10 % quantile)b 100 for welded fabric¢$ 12 mm
80 for welded fabric ¢ > 12 mm
0,039 for¢ $ 6 mm
0,045 for 6,5 mm $ ¢ $ 8,5 mm
Minimum relative rib area/R (5 o/o quantile)
0,052 for 9 mm $ ¢ $ 10,5 mm
0,05 6 for 11 mm$¢$ 50 mm
a All strength classes apply unless the National Annex excludes specific classes, see Q.3(1).
b Different fatigue properties can be set in the relevant standard by specifying higher values of the fatigue
stress range and/or increasing the number of cycles that is to be confirmed by testing.
c De-coiled products are not part of EN 10370. To provide sufficient confidence in the reinforcement
properties after de-coiling, National regulations can specify additional requirements.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
264
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Table C.4 - Ductility properties of s tainless reinforcing steel

Ductility Class
Properties for weldable reinforcement
A B c
Stress ratio Rm /Rvo.2k, where Rm should be limited to ~ 1,15
~ 1,05 ~ 1,08
stress at 7 % elongation (10 % quantile) < 1,35
Tensile yield strength ratio of Re.actf Rpo.2,nom (10 %
- :::; 1,3 :::; 1,3
quantile)
Elongation at maximum load A8 , [ %]
~ 2,5 ~ 5,0 ~ 7,5
(10 % quantile)
Pass bend and/or rebend test according to the
relevant standard for stainless reinforcing
Bendability
steel. For rebending of reinforcing stainless
steel on site see requirements in EN 13670.

C.5 Prestressing st eel

(1) Unless the relevant standard for prestressing steel gives different values, prestressing steel
products may be classified in strength classes Y and shall comply with the requirements in Tables C.5 to
C.7.
NOTE EN 10138 (all parts) refers to the characteristic values of tens ile yield strength Rvo.1 and tensile strength
Rpm based on the long-term quality level of production. In contrastfpo.1k andfi>k are the characteristic tensile yield
strength and the tensile strength based on only that prestressing steel required for the structure. There is no direct
relationship between the two sets of values. However, based on the methods for evaluation and verification the
characteristic values for the tensile yield strength Rvo,1 and tensile strength Rm, given in EN 10138 (all parts) may
be taken as fpo.tkand /pk.

(2) Each consignment of prestressing steel shall be accompanied by a certificate containing all the
information necessary for its identification in accordance with 5.3.2(1).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
265
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Ta ble C.5 - Stre ngth, fatigue, ductility and relaxation pro perties ofpres tressing wires

Wires - strength class

Property
Y1570 Y1670 Y1770 Y1860
Tensile yield strength Rpo.1 [MPa), 5 %
2: 1380 2: 1470 2: 1550 2: 1650
quantile
Strength
Tensile strength Rm [MPa), 5 % quantile 2: 1570 2: 1670 2: 1770 2: 1860
Tensile strength Rm [MPa) 95 % quantile ~ 1800 ~ 1920 ~ 2030 ~ 2140
Fatigue stress range [MPa] for 200 for plain wire
Fatigue• N 2: 2 x 106 cycles with an upper limit of
0,7 /rk(10 % quantile) 180 for indented wire

Characteristic value of stress ratio

2: 1, 10
(Rm/Rpo.1)k(10 % quantile)
Elongation at maximum load, A8 , [ %]
2: 3,5
Ductility (10 % quantile)
Pass minimum number ofreverse bends
Bendability according to the relevant standard for
prestressing steel
Relaxation at 1 000 hours for initial
stress of 70 % of actual tensile strength, ~ 2,5%
P 1000
Relaxationb
Relaxation at 1 000 hours for initial
stress of 80 % of actual tensile strength, ~4, 5%
P1000

Stress-cor rosion resistance should be

Stress-
Stress-corrosion resistance at 80% of tested in accordance with the relevant
corrosion
actual tensile strength product standard and comply with
resistance
corresponding specified values
NOTE All strength classes apply unless the National Annex excludes specific classes, see 5.3.2(1).
a Different fatigue properties can be set in the relevant standard by specifying higher values of the fatigue
stress range and/or increasing the number of cycles, that is to be confirmed by testing.
b Relaxation losses app ly at a mean temperature of 20 °C. Relaxation losses are very sensitive to the
temperature of the prestressing steel. see B.9.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
266
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Ta ble C.6 - Stre ngth, fatigue, ductility and r e laxa tio n pro perties of pres tressing strands

Strands - strength class

Pr operty
Y1770 Y1860 Y1960 Y2060
Tensile yield strength Rpo.1 (MPa], 5 %
;:::; 1560 ;:::; 1640 ;:::; 1740 ;:::; 1830
quantile
Strength
Tensile strength Rm(MPa], 5 % quantile ;:::; 1770 ;:::; 1860 ;:::; 1960 ;:::; 2060
Tensile strength Rm (MPa], 95 % quantile ~ 2030 ~ 2140 ~ 2250 ~ 2370
Fatigue stress range [MPa] for 190 for plain strand
Fatigue• N;:::; 2 x 106 cycles with an upper limit of
0,7 /pk (10 % quantile) 170 for indented strand

Characteristic value of stress ratio

;:::; 1,10
(Rm/Rpo.1)k(lO % quantile)
Elongation at maximum load, A8, [ %]
Ductility ;:::; 3,5
(10 % quantile)
Maximum D-value of deflected tensile
:>28%
test for 7-wire strand with d;:: 12.Smm
Relaxation at 1 000 ho urs for initial
stress of 70 % of actual tensile strength, ~2,5%
P1000
Rela xation b
Relaxation at 1 000 hours for initial
stress of 80 % of actual tensile strength, ~4,5%
P1000
Stress-corrosion resistance should be
Stress-
Stress-corrosion resistance at 80% of tested in accordance with the relevant
corros ion
actual tensile strength product standard and comply with
r esistance
corresponding specified values
NOTE All strength classes apply unless the National Annex excludes specific classes, see 5.3.2(1).
a Different fatigue properties can be set in the relevant standard by specifying higher values of the fatigue
stress range and/or increasing the number of cycles that is to be confirmed by testing.
b Relaxation losses are very sensitive to the temperature of the prestressing steel, see 8.9. Relaxation losses
apply at a mean temperature of 20 °C.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
267
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Ta ble C.7 - St rength, fatigue, ductility and relaxation properties of pres tressing b a r s

Bars - Strength class

Prope rty
Y1030 YlOSO YllOO Y1230
Tensile yield strength Rpo.1 [MPa), 5 %
2: 835 2: 950 2: 900 2: 1080
quantile
Stre ngth
Tensile strength Rm [MPa), 5 % quantile 2: 1030 2: 1050 2: 1100 2: 1230
Tensile strength Rm [MPa) 95 % quantile $ 1180 $ 1210 $ 1260 $ 1370

200 for plain bars cf>r $ 40 mm

Fatigue stress range [MPa) for 150 for plain bars cf>p > 40 mm
Fa tigue• N 2: 2 x 106 cycles with an upper limit of
0,7 /pk (10 % quantile) 180 for threaded bars cf>p $ 40 mm
120 for threaded bars cf>p > 40 mm
Characteristic value of stress ratio
2: 1,10
(Rm/Rpo.i)k (10 % quantile)
Ductility
Elongation at maximum load, Ag1 [ %]
2: 3,5
(10 % quantile)
Relaxation at 1 000 hours for initial
$ 6 % for cf>r $ 15 mm
stress of 70 % of actual tensile strength,
$ 4 % for cf>p > 15 mm
p1000
Relaxa tionb
Maximum Relaxation at 1 000 hours for
Value to be determined by testing if
initial stress of 80 % of actual tensile
stressing intended to> 0,7 /pk·
strength, P 1000
Stress-corrosion resistance should be
Stress-
Stress-corrosion resistance at 80% of tested in accordance with the relevant
corrosion
actual tensile strength product standard and comply with
resistance
corresponding specified values
NOTE All strength classes apply unless the National Annex excludes specific classes, 5.3.2(1).
a Different fatigue properties can be set in the relevant standard by specifying higher values of the fatigue
stress range and/or increasing the number of cycles that is to be confirmed by testing.
b Relaxation losses are ve1y sensitive to the temperature of the prestressing steel, see 8.9. Relaxation losses
apply at a mean temperature of 20 °C.

C.6 Couplers
(1) Couplers for members designed in accordance wit h this Eurocode should comply with the relevant
standards for couplers .
NOTE 1 The National Annex can specify relevant standards for couplers.

NOTE 2 EAD 160129 is available for the assessment and determination of properties of cou plers req uired for design
to this Eurocode.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
268
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(2) Couplers for splicing of reinforcing steel bars shall be capable of developing the ultimate tensile
strength Rm, and the maximum compressive force with yield strength Re. For failures in the coupler, or in
the bar inside coupler, the measured elongation on the reinforcing bar outside the length of the
mechanical splice shall not be less than 0.7Ag,, where Ag1 is the characteristic value for the re inforcement
bar.
(3) The permanent slip value measured for a simple coupler, cons isting of no more than two load-
transmitting components, should not exceed 0,10 mm.
For couplers consisting of more than two load-transmitting components,
a) the permanent slip value should not exceed 0,10 mm; or
b) the strain measured across the splice at a load equivalent to 0,65 Re should not exceed 0,16% or the
actual value measured on the reference bar, whichever is the greater.
(4) If couplers are used in members subjected to fatigue, they should comply with fatigue stress range
of at least 35 MPa for N ;:: 107 cycles with an upper stress limit of 0,6 /yk of the connected bars (10%
quantile) in order to comply with the S-N curve given in Table E.1 (NOP).
NOTE Other fatigue stress ranges need to be specified if LlORsk in Table E.1 (NOP) is modi fied in the National
Annex.

C.7 Headed bars

(1) Headed bars for members designed in accordance with this Eurocode should comply with the
relevant standards for headed bars.
NOTE 1 The National Annex can specify relevant standards for headed bars.

NOTE 2 EAD 160003 and EAD 160012 are available for the assessment and determination of properties of
double headed studs and for headed reinforcement, respectively, for design to this Eurocode.

(2) Heads at the end of reinforcing steel bars shall be connected with a strength 2!:Rm As of the bar. The
head shall be of sufficient strength to transfer the anchorage force to the concrete.
(3) If double-headed studs or bars are designed as shear or punching shear reinforcement, the
requirements of Table C.8 should be fulfilled.

Table C.8 - Properties of double-headed studs and bars for shear reinforcement.

Property Requirement
Diameter of heads c/>h (related to bar diameter cf>) c/>h ;::; 3¢
Characteristic resistance to fatigue loading llaRsk in testing for N;::; 2 x 106
LlURsk;::; 80 MPa
cycles based on an upper stress limit of 0,6/yk

(4) The head should be at 90° to the bar axis and the bearing surface may be sloped;:: 80° to the bar
axis unless justified by testing appropriate to the design situation under consideration.

C.8 Post-installed reinforcing steel systems

(1) The reinforcing steel should comply with the properties according to C.4.
(2) Anchoring mortars for post-installed reinforcing steel systems are for the purpose of this
Eurocode grouped in bond efficiency classes which should develop a minimum mean bond strength fbm.rqd
according to Table C.9, when tested and assessed in accordance with relevant standards for anchoring
mortars accounting for the conditions in C.8(3).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
269
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

NOTE 1 The National Annex can specify relevant standards for anchoring mortars.

NOTE 2 EAD 330087 is available for the assessment and determination of properti es of anchoring mortars
requ ired for design to this Eurocode.

NOTE 3 Permissibl e use conditions and information required for design of th e post-installed reinforcing steel
systems to this Eurocode can be found in European Technical Product Specifications.

Ta ble C.9 - Required minimum mean bond s trength/bm,rqd [MPa)

Required minimum mean bond strength as a function

Bond efficiency class of concrete str ength /ck (MPa )
Bond efficiency factor k b.pi
12 16 20 30 40 50

CPl-1,0 1,0 7,7 8,9 10,0 12,2 14,1 15,8

CPl-0,9 0,9 na 8,0 9,0 11.0 12,7 14,2

CPl-0,8 0,8 na na 8,0 9,8 11,3 12,6

CPl-0,7 0,7 na na na 8,6 9,9 11,1

na = not allowed

NOTE 1 Values for intermediate concrete strength may be interpolated linearly.

NOTE 2 Post-installed reinforcing bars with a mean bond strength fi,m.nid < 7,7 MPa are not covered by this
Eurocode.

(3) The specification and determination of the mean bond strength /bm.rqd should take into accou nt the
following influencing factors:
a) Environmental conditions: corrosion res istance (acco unting for the maximum allowable chloride
content of the concrete and the mortar for the intended application according to EN 206), alkalinity
and possible sulphuro us atmosphere, in-serv ice temperatu re co nditions, freeze/thaw conditions,
creep behaviour under sustained loads. Adequate corrosion protection may be assumed if post-
installed reinforcing steel bars are used in concrete members in environmental conditions according
to exposure classes XO and XCl (see Table 6.1) or if they are produced from corrosion resistant steel;

b) Installation conditions: drilling method, drilling tools including drilling aids, hole preparation tool
(e.g. roughening tool), cleaning devices, mortar injection devices (dispenser, nozzle, etc.), concrete
condi tion at installation (dry, wet), installation direction (downward, horizontal, overh ead), concrete
temperature at installation, working and curing time of the anchoring mortar and robustness of
installation;

c) Load bearing behaviour: stiffness of anchoring mortar;

d) Intended uses: range of reinforcing steel bar diameters (for each drilling method), concrete strength
classes and types of loading (static, quasi-static, fatigue).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
270
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

AnnexD
(informative)

Evaluation of early-age and long-term cracking due to restraint

D.1 Use of this annex

(1) This informative Annex provides complementary guidance on the evaluation of early-age and long-
term cracking due to restraint in general with special emphasis on through-cracking.
NOTE Nationa l choice on the application of this Informative Annex is given in the National Annex. If the
Nationa l Annex conta ins no information on the application of this Informative Annex, it can be used.

D.2 Scope and field of application

(1) This Informative Annex applies to all types of members and structures.

D.3 General
(1) The main objective of the analysis is to evaluate the cracking risk, Rcr, or provide guidance on crack
calculations if cracking is expected to occur. The cracking risk may be expressed in terms of the ratio
between the maximum tensile stress, Oct. and the tensile resistance of concrete at the moment which is
being considered fc1,err(t), reduced by a factor of 0,8 in order to account for the effects of sustained loading
(see Formula (D.1)):

Rcr(t) = Oct(t) (D.l)

0 ,8fct,eff( t)

where fc1.err(t) may be taken as fctm(t) according to B.4(2).

It is the age at loading that should be adjusted in the aging functions.
(2) The amount of through-cracking may be reduced by using concretes with low heat production
during hydration, concretes with low coefficient of thermal expansion, cooling pipes in the hardening
concrete, heating cables in the restraining structural elements, reduced fresh concrete temperature, or
by reducing the degree of rest raint for the hardening concrete st ruct ural element (i.e. if possible, break
the bond between the hardening concrete and rest raining st ructure in order to reduce the degree of
restraint).
NOTE Figure D.1 shows the assumed temperature history for a structural concrete member where
T c; is the fresh concrete temperature;

Tc.max is the maximum concrete temperature due to hydration heat;

To is the temperature of the restraining structure; and

lffm1n is long term maximum temperature drop.

Correspondingly, Figure D.2 shows the resulting d iagram of stresses in concrete.

(3) Compression in concrete due to favourable effects from the heating phase may be considered.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
271
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

NOTE Assuming that there are no add itional external actions, the most unfavourable moment in time for early-
age cracking is t<r;t, corresponding to the moment when thermal equilibrium with the restraining structure is
achieved (within 2 2C) and the greater part of basic shrinkage has already developed.

(4) For long-term cracking, the effects of temperature variation (l!.Tm;n) and drying shrinkage should
be considered. In Figure D.2, t2 is the time when the str esses in the critical position change from
compression to tension (determined from the temperature history). Alternatively tz may be ass umed to
be 2 days.

T
Tc.max

t
l!.T min

Figure D.1 - Assumed temperature history for a structural concrete member over time
+a

t
Key
+O' tensile stress

Figure D.2 - Corresponding stress diagram due to hydration heat and shrinkage of concrete
overtime

D.4 Assessment of temperature history

D.4.1 General

(1) A reliable temperat ure calculation or estimate should be made to achieve accurate stress/strain or
crack width calculation. For th is purpose, computer programs, hand calculations and diagrams from
handbooks and guidelines may be used.
NOTE The most decisive parameters, referred to Figure 0.1 are:
the fresh concrete temperature (T<1);

the start time for stress development (t•or);

ambient temperature history;

insulation conditions;

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
272
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

climatic conditions, such as wind velocity and solar radiation;

temperature of the restraining structure (To); and

the additiona l, long-term maximum temperature drop (LiTmin).

where tctor marks the end of the dormant phase. Typically, it varies between 8 and 13 hours after placing, the default
value being 10 hours. This parameter can be strongly influenced by admixtures, and it is important that its value be
taken into consideration when evaluating the mechanical properties of concrete (tensile strength and modu lus of
elasticity) as well as the value of shrinkage and the temperature development curves.

(2) tdor may be determined from the compressive strength development, from ultrasonic stiffness or
heat release measurements, or from restrained shrinkage tests. In absence of more accurate values those
provided in Table D.l may be used.

Table D.1 - Values for the s tart time of stress development l.tor

Concrete Start time of stress development l.tor (days]

strength /ck
Class CR• Class CN• Class CS•
:::; 35 MPa 0,35 0,45 0,50
> 35 MPa
0,30 0,40 0,45
< 60 MPa
~ 60 MPa 0,30 0,35 0,40
• See B.3(1) .

(3) In absence of better data, To may generally be taken as the ambient temperature.

D.4.2 Material properties related t o temperature development

(1) In order to determine the tempe rature history of concrete due to cement hydration, the following
material properties should be known:
Total amount of hydration heat (Q(t) (kj/kg binder)) released during hydration and its development
with time. Q(t) may be determined in accordance with EN 12390-14 or EN 12390-15;

Heat conductivity: The values for the heat conductivity may vary within the range 1,2 to 3,0
J/(s · m · K). In absence of better data, a default value of 2,5 J/(s · m · K) may be adopted;

Surface convectivity: The surface convectivity may vary in the range from about 3,3)/(s · m 2 · K) for
18 mm plywood formwork and no wind to 15 J/(s m 2 • K) for a free concrete surface with 5 m/s wind;

Heat capacity: The heat capacity corresponds to the specific heat multiplied by the concrete density.
The specific heat varies typically in the range 0,85 to 1,15 kj/(kg · K), and the default value may be
assumed as 1,0 kj/(kg · K).

NOTE The amount of heat of hydration and development with time are strongly dependent on binder fineness
and composition and on the water/binder (w/b)-ratio. Furthermore, the early strength class of cement strongly
influences the binder content, and therefore also the amount of hydration heat.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
273
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

D.5 Stress calculations

(1) The following stress calculations may be used when aiming to limit the risk of cracking.
(2) It may be assumed that the risk that the member will crack is sufficiently low if Formula (0.2) is
met:

Rcr(t) < Rea.er (0 .2)

where Rea.er is a project specific parameter related to the admissible risk of cracking, where R ea,cr may be
assumed as 1,0.
(3) When assessing Rcr(t), the dormant time, tdor, should be subtracted from the concrete age to
determine the tensile resistance and the modulus of elasticity of concrete. Coefficient /Jee. describing the
evolution of concrete properties with time (see Formula (B.2)) should then be corrected as follows
(Formula (0.3)) :

f3cc(t) = exp [sc (i- tref~tdor

tT
tdor) . 28 - tdor l
tref - tdor
(0.3)

NOTE Formula (B.2) is a simplified version of Formula (D.3) which assumes that tdor = 0.

(4) Rer(t) should be determined at least for the following situations:

At the time when temperature equilibrium between the recently cast element and the restraining
structure is achieved. For this verification, it is not necessary to consider drying shrinkage or long-term
temperature variations.
The maximum tensile stress to be considered for this verification may be determined using
Formula (0.4):

(0 .4)

where
Rax.1 is the restraint factor (see 9.2.3( 4)) corresponding to the boundary conditions present after
concreting;
Ee( ti ) is the modulus of elasticity of concrete at time ti (see Figure 0.2). ti may be replaced by
maturity, i.e. corrected for the temperature history in accordance with Formula (B.18);
T c,max is the maximum temperature in concrete after casting due to hydration heat;
To is the temperature of the restraining structure;
k remr is a factor accounting for the reduction in temperature from t 1to ti (see Figure 0.1) and may
be taken as 0,9;
X<fJs< accounts for short term creep relaxation which is significant, in spite of the short time, due
to the low maturity of concrete and the presence of hyd ration heat. Its value may be
estimated as 0,55.
Long term analysis: for this verification, the effects of long-term temperature variation and drying
shrinkage should be considered. The maximum tensile stress may be determined using Formula (0.5):

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
274
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(D.5)

where
Rox.2 is the restraint factor (see 9.2.3(4)) corresponding to the boundary conditions present
when the maximum temperature drop is expected to occur;
Rox.3 is the restraint factor (see 9.2.3(4)) corresponding to the boundary conditions prevalent
during the development of drying shrinkage;
aTmin is the maximum characteristic temperature drop with respect to the temperature
considered at casting To;
x is the aging coefficient which may be taken as 0,8;
Ec.2a is the tangent modulus of elasticity of concrete at an age of28 days.
Formula (D.5) may be modified to account for the release of restraint that may occur in time, such as
when formwo rk is removed.

D.6 Crack width calculations

(1) If cracking due to the imposed deformations does occur (Rcr > Rea,cr), the crack width may be
determined according to 9.2.3.
(2) For members restrained at the ends Formula (9.11) applies.
(3) For members restrained at the edges, in Formula (9.13), Raxf rrcc may be taken as:
for early-age cracking:

Raxffree = Rax.1 (kTempacth (Tc.max- To)+[tcbsCtcrit)-fcbsCtz)J) (D.6)

for long-term cracking:

Raxffree = Rax.1(kTempacth(Tc.max- To) + [fcbs(t) - fcbs(tz)l) (D.7)

+ Rax,zactht!Tmin+ Rax,3 · [tcds(t) - fcctsCtz)J

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
275
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

AnnexE
(normative)

Additional rules for fatigue verification

E.1 Use of this annex

(1) This normat ive Annex contains additional provisions to Clause 10 for a refined fatigue verification of
structures.

E.2 Scope and field of application

(1) This Normative Annex covers fatigue verification of struct ures using:
damage equivalent stresses acco rding to E.4; or

explicit verifications using Palmgren-Miner Rule according to E.S.

E.3 General
(1) For explicit verifications of bridges acco rding to Annex E, the fatigue load models defined in
EN 1991-2 shall be used. For other structures, the fatigue load should be defined according to EN 1990
on a project-specific basis.

E.4 Verification using damage equivalent stress range

E.4.1 General
(1) In the method of damage equivalent stress range the actual operational loading is represented by
N* cycles of a single equivalent stress range under the equivalent fatigue load models.

E.4.2 Verification for reinforcement

(1) For reinforcing or prestressing steel and couplers adequate fatigue resistance may be assumed if
Formula (E.l) is satisfied:
• tiuRsk ( N*)
YFf · Llus.equ (N ) :::;; Ys (E.1)

where
tiURsk(N*) is the stress range at N* cycles from the appropriate S-N curves given in Figure E.1 and
Tables E.l (NOP) and E.2 (NOP);
tius.equ(N*) is the damage equivalent stress range for different types of reinforcement and considering
the number ofloading cycles N*. For buildings tias,equ(N*) may be approximated by £las.max;
Cius.max is the maximum reinforcing steel stress range under the relevant load combinations.
NOTE 1 Tables E.1 (NOP) and E.2 (NOP) apply unless other values of the fatigue stress range and/or the number
of cycles are given in the National Annex and confirmed by testing in accordance with the relevant standards for
reinforcing steel and prestressing steel.

NOTE 2 For road and railway bridges Llas,cqu(N*) is given in K.10.2.1.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
276
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

lgfla
1

flaRsk

lgN
Key
1 reinforcing and prestress ing steel at yield

Figure E.1 - Shape of the characteristic fatigue strength curve (S-N curves for reinforcing and
prestressing steel)

Table E.1 (NDP) - Design parameters for S-N curves for carbon reinforcing steel

auRsk 5 %-quantile (Test <Tmax 0,6/yk)

stress
Type of reinforcing steel Diameter
flaRsk (MPa] N* exponent
kfl kf2
<P :S 12 mm 160
Bars• 12 mm < <P =::; 16 mm 140
5 9
16 mm < <P =::; 20 mm 130
2. 106
<P > 20 mm 130
Tack welded harsh. and ¢:S12mm 100
3 5
welded fabrics <P > 12 mm 80
Couplers< - 35 107 3 5
• Values for bent parts of bars should be obtained using a reduction factor Sr = 0,35 + 0,026 · </lmand /<P. The
reduction factor Sr may be omitted for s hear reinforcement with 90° stirrups <P ~ 16 mm and depth
h:::: 600 mm.
b Values for llansk of tack welded bars apply for a dis tance of S<P at each s ide of the weld.
c Values for couplers apply unless more accurate S-N curves are ava ilable and confirmed by testing.
NOTE The 10 % quantile values for material accord ing to Table C.1 and Table C.3 are based on a confidence
level of90 % whereas confidence levels proba bilities for design flOllsk (5 % quantile values) are 75 % a ccording
to EN 1990:2023, Annex D.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
277
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

T able E.2 (NDP) - Parameters for S-N curve s for pres tressing steel

stress exponent (MPa)

'1<1Rsk
S-N curve of prest ressing s teel N*
k11 k12 at N* cycles•
pre-tensioning 106 5 9 185
post-tensioning
- single strands in plastic ducts 106 5 9 185
- straight tendonsh or curved tendonsb in
106 5 9 150
plast ic ducts
- curved tendonsb in steel ducts 106 3 7 120
- anchoring devices and couplers 106 5 5 80
NOTE Values in Table E.2 (NOP) apply for prestressing steel complying with Tables C.3 to C.7 and prestressing
systems complying with 5.4.
a Values correspond to prestressing steel embedded in concrete.
b Applies to tendons with wires and strands; tendons with bars are not covered.

E.4 .3 Ve rification for concrete

(1) A satisfactory fatigue resistance may be assumed for concrete under compression, if the following
condition in Formula (E.2) is fulfilled:

I
l<1cd,max.equ I + 0, 43 l - <1cd,min,equ ~ l I (E.2)
fcd,fat <1cd,max,equ

where

fed.fat is the des ign fatigue strength of concrete according to Formula (10.5);
l<1c<1,max,equl is the upper stress of the damage equivalent stress amplitude for N = 106 cycles;
la cd,min,equl is the lower stress of the damage equivalent stress amplitude for N = 106 cycles.
NOTE For road and railway bridges, Ocd,cqu.max and Ocd.cqu,min are given in K.10.2.

E.5 Explicit verifications using Palmgren-Miner Rule

E.5.1 Verification conditions

(1) Calculation of design service life at varying stress amplitudes may be based on linear damage
theory (Palm9ren-Miner Rule) according t o Formula (E.3). Action effects due to cyclic loads may be
arranged in design stress-levels (action effect-levels) each with constant amplitude and a corresponding
number of load cycles, n;.
m

Lt=l
n·
_! <
N-
'
1 (E.3)

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
278
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

where

n; is the number of acting stress cycles for each design stress-level "i";
N; is the number of cycles to fatigue failure according to E.5.2 for each design stress-level "i" with
constant amplitude;
m is t he number of design stress-levels with constant amplitude.

E.5.2 Verification procedure for reinforcing and prestressing steel

(1) The damage of a single stress range l:l<J may be determined by using the corresponding S-N curves
(Figure E.1) for re inforcement.

(E.4)

where

I'f uA <J5 >

_
Ll <JRsk..
k r = krt (E.5)
Ys · YFf

if l:l<Js < Ll<JRs k k r= krz (E.6)

Ys · YFf
NOTE The parameters for reinforcement are given in Table E.1 (NOP) and Table E.2 (NDP) respectively.

E.5.3 Verification procedure for concrete under compression

(1) The nu mber of cycles to fatigue failure N; may be calculated for each stress-level using the S-N
curves for concrete under compressive fatigue loading in Figure E.2, Formula (E. 7).

N; = lQkl (E.7)

where

1
l<!cd,max.i I
_
k; = C. --;:::==fc=d=,f=
at=
(E.8)
l - 1;cd,min,i.1
cd,max1 1

where

C = 14 may be taken for concret e under compression and not permanently submerged in water;
<Jed.max is the maximum compressive stress in stress-level "i", <Jed.max= YFf • <Jc.max;

<Jcd,min is the minimum compressive stress in stress-level "i", <Jed.min = YFr · <Jc.min;
fed.rat is the design fatigue strength of concrete according to Formula (10.5).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
279
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Ecd.max.i

1
Ed . .
,
09 l~~:i==::::::::=::J c ,mm,1
0,8 0,8
0,7 0,6
0,6 0,4
0,5 0,2
0,4 l-----+---->,..----1
0,3 1 - - - - + - - -->.I 0
0,2 1-----+-------i
0,1 >-----+------<

0
0 s 10 lgN;

E . _ (]c d,m1n,1
. .
Lower compressive stress level .. i":
cd,min,i - ;
Jed.fat
E _ (]cd,nlax,1.
Upper compressive stress level ,,i": cd.max,i - r
I cd.fat

Figure E.2 - Shape of the characteristic fatigue strength curves (S-N-curves for concrete under
compression)

(2) When verifying struts (e.g. for checking shear),[cd,ratin Formula (E.8) should be replaced by vf~d,fat·

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
280
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Annex F
(infor mative)

Safety formats for non-linear analysis

F.1 Use of this annex

(1) This informative Annex provides supplementary guidance to non-linear analyses procedures for
concrete structures.
NOTE Nationa l choice on the application of this Informative Annex is given in the National Annex. If the
Nationa l Annex conta ins no information on the application of this Informative Annex, it can be used.

F.2 Scope and field of application

(1) This Informative Annex covers the use of the partial factor method, the global factor method and full
probabilistic method for non-linear analyses of concrete structures at ULS.

F.3 General
(1) Verification of ultimate limit states by non-linear analysis should be performed by numerical
simulations in compliance with the requirements of7.3.4.
(2) Annex F shall be applied consistently to EN 1990.
(3) The software used in non-linear verification of the ultimate limit state should be validated by
comparison between numerical and experimental benchmark results. Similarly, the choices made with
respect to the specific numerical model should be tested by sensitivity analysis.
This covers general validation attempts:
basic material tests;

structural tests with the characterization of relevant failure modes;

and project specific attempts:

mesh sensitivity tests;

solution method tests.

(4) The analysis process adopted by a non-linear simulation in order to evaluate the structural
resistance shall be defined according to engineering judgement consistently with the considered
combination of the actions at ultimate limit state.
NOTE The analysis process may account for the loading sequence due to staged construction methods.

(5) The verification requires that the design value of the actions in the considered combination,
determined according to EN 1990, shall not be greater than the design value of the associated structural
resistance (see Formula (F.l)):
(F.1)

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
281
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

where

Frt is the design value of the actions;

Rd is the design value of the structural resistance.
(6) The design value of the structural resistance may be determined by us ing one of the following
safety formats:
Partial factor method (PFM) as described in F.4;

Global factor method (GFM) as described in F.5;

Full probabilistic method (FPM) as described in F.6.

F.4 Partial factor method (PFM)

(1) The design value of the structural resistance is obtained as
R{Xd;ad}
Rd= - -- (F.2)
YRd

where
R{ ...} is the structural resistance based on the numerical simulation;
Xd is the design value of the material property calculated adopting partial safety factors
according to Table A.1 line (g) accounting for materials and geometrical uncertainties;
ad is the design value of the geometric property according to Annex A or EN 1990, if not
accounted for in Xd;
YRd is the partial safety factor which accounts for model uncertainty according to F.7.
NOTE The structural resistance R{ ...} can be evaluated for different levels of appropriate actions which can be
increased from their initial values by incremental steps, such that the design values of the actions in the considered
combination are reached in the same step. The incremental process of the actions should be continued until
structural failure is reached. The strnctural resistance R{ ...} corresponds to the values of the actions which lead to
structural failure.

(2) Alternatively, in case the concrete tensile strength is neglected, the design value of the resistance
may be calculated on the basis of the design values fcd,fyd and /pd according to 5.1.6, 5.2.4 and 5.3.3(1). If
the statistic values of the model uncertainties according to F. 7 are more favourable than the values given
in Table A.3, then the partial safety factors ye and rs defined in Table 4.3 (NOP) may be used. Otherwise,
they shall be adapted according to Annex A.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
282
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

F.5 Global factor method (GFM)

F.5.1 General

(1) The design value of structural resistance is obtained as

Rm{X;a)
Rd = - . - - (F.3)
YR · YRd
where
Rm{ ...} is the mean value of s tructural resistance based on the numerical simulation and shall be
estimated by means of a probabilistic analysis including uncertainties related to material X
and geometric a properties.
Alternatively, the approximated value derived by Formula (F.4) may be adopted:
Rm{X;a) =R{Xm; anom} (F.4)
where
R{ ...} is the structural resistance based on the numerical simulation;
Xm is the mean value of the material property;
Gnom is the nominal value of the geometric property according to EN 1990;
YR' is the global resistance factor for the uncertainties of materials properties and geometry
according to F.5.2;
YR<1 is the partial safety factor accounting for the model uncertainty according to F.7.
NOTE The structural resistance R{ ...} can be evaluated for different levels of appropriate actions which can be
increased from their initial values by incremental steps, such that the design values of the actions in the considered
combination are reached in the same step. The incremental process of the actions should be continued until
structural failure is reached. The structural resistance R{ ...}corresponds to the values of th e actions which lead to
structural failure.

F.5.2 Determination of the global resistance factor

(1) The global resistance factor may be evaluated with Formula (F.5):

YR = exp(aR · Ptgt · Vn) (F.5)

where
aR is t he sensitivity factor for dominant resistance variable;
f3tgt is the target value of the reliability index according to Table A.4 (NOP);
V.~ is the coefficient of variation of structural resistance. It accounts for material and geometrical
uncertainties and shall be estimated by means of a probabilistic analysis of the structural
resistance.
Alternatively, the approximated value derived by Formula (F.6) may be adopted:

(F.6)

where
VR.M is the coefficient of variation of structural resistance accounting for uncertainties of
material properties evaluated according to Formula (F.7):

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
283
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

VRM
1 I (R{Xm; anom})
=-- n (F.7)
' 1,65 R{Xk; anoml
where Xk is the characteristic value of the material property;
Vn.c is the coefficient of variation of structural resistance related to geometrical uncertaint ies
evaluated in line with Annex A.
NOTE 1 As a further simplification, in absence of a numerical estimation of the value of Vl\,M on the safety side,
Vn,M=0,15 can be used, unless the Na tional Annex gives other specifications.
NOTE 2 The bias factor in Formula (F.4) is equal to 1,00 assuming that the bias factors related to geometric and
material uncertainties are considered in the mean and characteristic values of material parameters.

NOTE 3 Formulae (F.5) and (F.7) are determ ined assum ing that bias factors on structural resistance related to
geometric and material uncertainties are considered in the mean values of material parameters.

F.5.3 Additional material parameters

(1) Information to be used for the description of the mean values of the material properties can be
found in Annex A.
(2) Other material properties used in the analysis should be included in the evaluation of the model
un certainty determined according to F.7.
(3) The design values and the characteristic values of other concrete properties not defined in this
standard may be determined from the corresponding strength values, i.e. fed, fck or /td. /tk according to
Annex A.

F.6 Full probabilistic method

(1) The full probabilistic method shall be according to EN 1990:2023, Annex C.
(2) The uncertainties of the random variables which are taken into account shall be consistent with
EN 1990 and Annex A.
(3) The model uncertainty random variable shall be characterised according to F.7.

F.7 Model uncertainty

(1) The partial safety factor YRd should be derived by probabilistic calibrations.
NOTE The value of YRd can be different depending on the adopted software, choices made with respect to the
analysis and also depends on the relevant failure modes.

(2) If probabilistic calculation according to (1) is not performed, Yn<1 should be set to fixed value.
NOTE Unless the National Annex gives different values, the value of YRd can be taken as:
YRd =1,30 for numerical models in general accounting for also statistical uncertainty;
YRd =1,06 when 10 beam elements are used an d bending fa ilure is the determining failure mode.
The proposed values for YRd refer to a reliability index /31g1 =3,8 for a SO-years reference period.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
284
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(3) In case of probabilistic calibration, the model uncertainty is described by the ratio 8;:
R .
ej =~ (F.8)
Rnum,i

where

R exp,i is the structural resistance obtained from experiment i;

R num,i is the structural resistance obtained from non-linear numerical simulation of experiment i.
(4) The material parameters for the material models used in the non-linear analyses with the scope to
perform probabilistic cali bration of model uncertainty shall be derived from the mean parameters
available from benchmark experiments. If their derivation from known measured parameters is not
available, default values should be used th roughout the validation study.
(5) The statistical parameters of model uncertainty may be represented by its mean value (or bias
factor) µa and coefficient of variation Vo based on a lognormal distribution. The statistical u ncertainty
should be reflected in the methods used for estimation of the statistical parameters µe and Ve.
(6) The par tial factor YRd fo r model uncerta inty may be obtained assuming a lognor mal probabilistic
distribution as:

exp(aR · fltgt · Ve)

YRd = µ9
(F.9)

where

aR is t he sensitivity fact or for non-dominant variab les: aR= 0,32;

/Jcgt is the reliability index according to EN 1990 or Annex A.
(7) When the design structural resistance is evaluated according to F.4 and F.5, in case the response of
the non-linear numerical model of the structure turns out to be sensitive to influence of the probabilistic
distributions of materials propert ies, the partial safety factor Y R<1 derived according to (1) or (2) shall be
incr eased.
(8) The sensitivity of the response of non-linear numerical model t o influence of the probabilistic
distributions of materials properties may be assessed by means of three preli minary non -linear
numerical simulati ons using:
a) mean concrete properties combined with design reinforcement propert ies;

b) design concret e properties combined with mean reinforcement pr opert ies;

c) des ign concrete properties combined with design reinforcement p roperties.

If the results in terms of structural resistance of a) and/orb) are unfavourable with respect to the one of
c), the response of the non-li near numerical model is sensitive.
NOTE Un less more detailed probabilistic investigation of structural resistance is performed or the Nationa l
Annex g ives other specifications, an increase of the partial safety factor YRd of 15 % applies.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
285
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

AnnexG
(normative)

Design of membrane-, shell- and slab elements

G.1 Use of this annex

(1) This normative Annex contains additional provisions for the design of planar members. The
formulations presented in G.3 and G.4 are consistent with the clauses and design provisions in Clause 8
and G.5 gives additional provisions to 9.2.

G.2 Scope and field of application

(1) This Normative Annex covers the design of planar members without discontinuities. Other more
refined methods complying with 7.3.3 or 7.3.4 may be used.
(2) Effects of prestressing may be taken into account according to 7.6.1.

G.3 Design of membrane elements in ULS

(1) In locations where C1Edx and C1Edy are both compressive and C1Edx · C1Edy > T 2 Edxy. design of
reinforcement is not required. However, the maximum principal compressive stress s hould not exceed
fct1. Otherwise, the membrane forces are carried by tensile reinforcements in x- and y directions and a
compression field inclined at an angle 8 to x-axis as shown in Figure G.1 with a strength ofv · fcrt.

y Edy y Edy

- I T Edxy l - 1 - r Edxy l

' 'l A ,,
U cd
,/
/

-l - t ,,.
(1C~ I T Edxyl IT Edxyl
I-
v
I"-
"
I'..
v,'
r '' '
"
'/ tu;- dx
v cd
v
/

V
/
'CD
/
lu;- dx

/ 7" / ' J
"I
Py

Px
1 -
I
'
x
Py /

Px
I
I

- x

Figure G.l - In-plane stresses in membrane element and definition of compression stress field
inclination 9

(2) The tensile strengths provided by reinforcement are:

ftrtx = Pxh d,x (G.1)

[t<1y = Py/yd,y (G.2)

where Px and py are the geometric reinforcement ratios along the x- andy-axes, respectively.
NOTE The yield strength can be different in the x- and y-directions.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
286
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(3) The necessary reinforcement and the compressive concrete stress may be determined by:

a Edx + lrEdxylcote :5 f tdx (G.3)

lrEdxyl (G.4)
O"Edy + cote :5 ftdy

<Ted = l•Ectxyl(cote + tane) :5 v · f~d (G.5)

where cote should be chosen to avoid negative values of[tdx and/tdy·

The choice of cote to obtain the least amount of required reinforcement resistances /tdx* and /tdy*
(optimum reinforcement) is given in Table G.1,
where
e* is the strut inclination corresponding to the optimal re inforcement for membrane
elements;
/tdx*, /td/ are the tensile strength along the x- and y-axes, respectively, corresponding to the
optimal reinforcement for membrane elements;
Ocd* is the compression s tress in the concrete inclined at the angle e* corresponding to the
optimal reinforcement for membrane elements.
In order to ensure the required deformation capacity, and unless more refined calculations are
performed, the reinforcement derived from Formulae (G.3) and (G.4) for each direction should not
deviate significantly from the re inforcement resistances /tdx *and /td/ determined according to Table G.1.
These limitations may be expressed by:

and (G.6)
(G.7)

Table G.1 - Optimum reinforcement, concrete stress and strut inclination for membrane
e lements

Conditions cote* /tdx* /tdy* Ucd*

<1Edx ~ - lrEdxyl
1 0Edx + lrEdxyl <1Edy + lrEdxyl 2lrEdxyl
<1Edy ~ - lrEdxyl
<1Edx :5 <1Edy 2
- aEdx
<1Edx < -lrEdxyl
<1Ectx<1Edy :5 r~dxy
lrEdxyl
0
rEdxy
UEcty+ -1 - I
0Edx
laEdxl ( 1+(;:::/)
<1Edx ~ <1Edy 2 2
lrEdxyl rEdxy
0Edy < - lrEdxyl <1Edx +-
, - , 0 laEdyl ( 1+(;Ed:;) )
- aEdy <1Edy
<1Ectx<1Edy :5 r~dxy

(4) The reinforcement should be fully anchored at free edges, e.g. by headed bars, U- bars or similar.
(5) In absence of a refined calculation, the reduction factor of concrete strength may be assumed as:
v= 0,4 (G.8)

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
287
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(6) A more refined calculation of the reducti on factor of concrete strength may be performed using:
1
v = 1,0 + 110 · E1 ::; 1,0 (G.9)

where E1 is the principal strain transverse to the direction of the concrete stress field accounting for strain
compatibility and considering concrete as cracked without tensile strength.
(7) The value of the principal strain E1 in Formulae (G.9) may be estimated from one of th e two
following formulae:

Ei = Ex + (Ex + 0,001)cot 2 8 (G.10)

(Ey + 0,001) (G.11)

E1 = Ey + cotze
where Ex and Ey are the normal strains (positive as tension) in the x- andy-axes. A simple estimate of Ei
may be obtained by using the following guidelines in cases where cote is known:
a) Formulae (G.10), with Ex taken as fyd/Es, may be used in cases where ftdy = 0.
Formulae (G.11), with Ey taken as fyd/ Es, may be used in cases where ftdx = 0.

b) E1 is the lar ger of Formulae (G.10) and (G.11), with Ex and Ey taken as fyd/Es, in cases wh ere
reinforcement is required in both directions.

c) Et may be taken asfc,d/Ecd if/tdx andftdy according to calculations are smaller thanfctd. and provided
the member is not cracked due to other types of action.

d) In (a) and (b) above,fyd/Es may be replaced by fyd/(AEs), if the reinforcement in both directions is
increased by a factor of).> 1 beyond the required amount, where). is the ratio between t he provided
amount and the required amount.

G.4 Design of shell- and slab elements in ULS

(1) Tension reinforcement to resist combinations of in-plane forces, bending moments and torsional
moments in shell elements (Figure G.2 a)) may be determined by adopting a sandwich model (Figure G.2
b )), where the sect ional forces are transformed int o a set of statically equivalent in-plane stresses acting
in the top and bottom layer of the sandwich model. The design tension reinforcement in each of the two
layers may then be calculated by the method outlined above for in-plane stress conditions (membrane
elements, see G.3).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
288
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

a) shell element b) sandwich model

Key
1 top layer
2 bottom layer
3 intermediate layer

m Edx; m Edy design bending moments per unit length

mEdxy design torsional moment per unit length
nEdx; nEdy design in-plane normal force per unit length
n edxy design in-plane s hear force per unit length
VEdx; VEdy design out of plane shear force per unit length
All design actions are positive as shown.

Figure G.2 - Statically equivalent set of in-plane stresses

(2) The set of statically equivalent in-plane stresses may be calculated as follows:
a) Stresses in bottom layer:

(G.12)

(G.13)

(G.14)

b) Stresses in top layer:

(G.15)

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
289
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

1
I znEdy mEdy (G.16)
CTEd
y
= -t - - -
t .-
z
1
I znEdxy mEdxy (G.17)
'l'
Edxy -- t +t-·z-
where

t is the thickness of the top and bottom layer;

z is the internal lever arm between the top and bottom layer.
(3) If beneficial, the intermediate layer may also be utilized to carry portions of the in-plane forces
(nEdx, n Edy and n E<1xy). In that case, the set of equivalent stresses in the layers should be modified
acco rdingly.
(4) Out of plane shear forces, VE<1x and VEdy. shall be verified according to 8.2 using the design shear force
according to Formula (8.21).
(5) The particular case where n Edx = n Edy = n Edxy = 0 (slabs without membrane forces) and
lmEdxyl < 0,07d2fcd may be treated accord ing to 8.1.3; Tables G.2 and G.3 giving the least amount of
required reinforcement (optimum reinforcement) or the following formulae:

(G.18)

lmEdxyl
mRdy ;::: mEdy + (G.19)
cot8 bot

m / Rdx;::: - mEdx + cotBtoplmEdxyl (G.20)

/ lmEdxy l
m Rdy ;::: -mEdy + cot8top (G.21)

Where Btop and Bbot denote the inclination of the compression stress fields in the top and the bottom layers
carrying torsion, respectively. The values for cotB1op and cotBbot are positive and may be chosen freely, but
should for each of the four formulae lead to a required moment capacity that is between 0,4 to 2,5 times
the corresponding optimum moment capacity (see Tables G.2 and G.3).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
290
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Table G.2 - Optimum tension reinforcement in bottom layer expressed as requir ed design
moment capacities for slab elements

Conditions Required capacity m Rdx Required capacity m Rdy

mEdx 2:: -lmEdxyl
mRdx 2:: mEdx + lmEdxyl mRdy 2:: mEdy + lmEdxyl
m Edy 2:: - lmEdxyl

m Edx :5 m Edy
2
mEdxy
mEdx < -lmEdxy l 0 m Rdy 2:: mEdy + I I
2 mEdx
mEdxmEdy :5 m Edxy

m Edx 2:: m Edy 2

mEdxy
m Edy <-
lmEdxyl mRdx 2:: m sdx + ImEdy I 0
2
mEdxmEdy :5 m Edxy

m Edx <0
m Edy <0 0 0
2
mEdxmEdy > mEdxy

NOTE Hogging moments with negative sign.

Table G.3 - Optimum tension reinfor cement in top layer expr essed as r equired design moment
capacities for slab elements

Conditions Required capacity m' Rdx Required capacity m' Rdy

mEdx :5 lmEdxyl
m ' Rdx 2:: - mEdx + lmEdxy l m'Rcty 2:: - mEdy + lmEdxyl
mEdy :5 lmEdxyl

mEdx 2:: mEdy

m2
, > Edxy
mEdx > lmEdxyl 0 m Rdy - - mEdy + ImEdx I
mEdxmEdy :5m~dxy
mEdx :5 mEdy
2
, mEdxy
mEdy > lmEdxyl m Rdx 2:: - mEdx + ImEdy I 0
11'1£dxmEdy :5m~dxy
mEdx > 0
mEdy > 0 0 0
2
11'1£dxmEdy >mEdxy

NOTE Hogging moments with negative sign.

G.5 Refined control of cracking in membrane elements in SLS

(1) If in mem bers reinforced in two orthogonal directions the angle 8 between the axis of principal
compressive strain and the di rection of the rei nforcement in the x-direction is la rger than 15° and smaller
than 75°, the crack width may be calculated with Formula (9.8), provided t hat Sr,m,ca1 and (t:sm - t:cm) are
determined with account for the crack inclination 8, as follows.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
291
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(2) The mean spacing between cracks inclined at angle 8 with the x-direction may be determined as
follows:
1
Sr,m,cal = -~. ~8~--~
sm + cos 8- (G.22)
Sr,m,cal,x Sr,m,cal,y
where Sr,m,ca~x and Sr,m,ca~y correspond to the mean crack spacing related to pure tension in the x- and y-
direction, respectively, and may be calculated according to 9.2.3(6).
(3) The strain difference (Esm- Ecm) in the direction perpendicular to the inclined cracks (direction of
principal tensile strain) may be calculated as follows:

Esm - Ecm = (Esmx - Ecmx) + (Esmy - Ecmy) + lezl (G.23)

with

CTsx -
k Sr,m,cal fct,eff (l
t . s r,m,caI,xsin8 . -Ppx,eff .
+ aePpx,eff) (1 - k t )asx
)
Esmx - Ecmx = max E ; E (G.24)
( s s

CJ' _ k . Sr,m,cal . fct,eff . ( 1 + a P ) )

- - sy t Sr,m,caJ,yCOS8 Ppy,eff e py,eff . (1 - kt)CTsy
Esmy Ecmy - max E • E (G.25)
( s s

lrEdxy l · (cot8 + tan8)

lezl = E (G.26)
cm
where

CTs.x and CJ's.y are the reinforcement stresses in the x- and y-direction, respectively,
assuming cracked sections;
Prx.err, Pry.err and k, may be determined according to 9.2.3(3);
/ct,eff may be taken as 0,5/ctm;
cot8 may be determined from a linear elastic analysis.
(4) A better estimate of cot8 may be obtained by solving Formula (G.27):

lrEdxyl CO t 4 B + -
'----'-" CJ'E-
dx cot 3 - -
(]'Edy
- cot8 - lt'Edxyl =O (G.27)
8
Px Px Py Py
where CJ'Edx. CJ'Edy and TEdxy are the stresses (see Figure G.1) at the point where the crack width is being
determined and Px and py are defined in G.3(2).
(5) The provisions for crack width control in membrane elements above may also be applied to the layers
of the sandwich model (see Figure G.2).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
292
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

AnnexH
(infor mative)

Guidance on design of concrete structures for water-tightness

H.1 Use of this annex

(1) This informative Annex provides supplementary guidance on the design of concrete structures that
shall be tight against leakage either from water inside storage volumes, or external water like ground
water.
NOTE National choice on the application of this Informative Annex is given in the Natio nal Annex. If the
Nationa l Annex contains no information on the application of this Informative Annex, it can be used.

H.2 Scope and field of application

(1) This Informative Annex applies mainly to water tightness of concrete structures. It may be used also
for other liquids if it can be shown that the liquid behaviour is similar to water.

H.3 General

(1) Concrete in watertight structures should have an adequate composition to obtain low permeability
i.e. should have a low water-cement ratio, be rich in fines and meet limitation of maximum aggregate size
when the dimensions are close to the minimum values given in (2).
(2) Minimum thickness of members where tightness class TC 0 (see Table H.l) is satisfactory should
be 120 mm. A minimum thickness of 150 mm should be provided for other tightness classes.
(3) The concrete sections should be designed with adequate reinforcement to ensure good crack
distribution and limitation of crack-widths in accordance with 9.2.

H.4 Tightness classes

H.4.1 Classification

(1) Water retaining st ructures may be classified in relation to the degree of required protection against
leakage according to Table H.1.
NOTE 1 All concretes permit the passage of small quant ities ofliquids and gases by diffusion.

Table H.1 - Classification of tightness

Tightness
Requirements for leakage
Class
TC 0 Some degree of leakage acceptable, or leakage of water irrelevant.
Leakage to be limited to a small amount. Some surface staining or damp patches
TC 1
acceptable.
TC 2 Leakage to be minimal. Appearance not to be impaired by staining.
TC 3 No leakage is permitted.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
293
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

NOTE 2 The tightness classes can be defined quantitatively on a project-specific basis by specifying the leakage
rate and relating it to the crack opening by using H.4.2(7).

H.4.2 Tightness requirements

(1) Appropriate limits to cracking depending on the tightness class of the member considered should
be selected, paying due regard to the required function of the structure. In the absence of more specific
requirements, the following may be adopted:

TC 0 - the provisions of9.2.1 may be adopted.

TC 1 - the width of any cracks expected to pass through the full thickness of the section should be limited
to Wk,1;m1 given in (2) and the provisions of (5) and (6) should be satisfied. 9.2.1 applies where the
full thickness of the section is not cracked.
TC 2 - cracks which may be expected to pass through the full thickness of the section should generally
be avoided unless appropriate measures (e.g. liners, water proof membranes or water barriers)
have been incorporated.
TC 3 - generally, special measures (e.g. liners or prestress) will be required to ensure water-tightness.
(2) The values of W1<,Jim1 may be defined on a project-specific basis. They may be defined as a function
of the ratio ho/h of the hydrostatic head ho to the thickness of the member h, as follows:
for hv/h ~ 5: W 1<.1im.1 = 0,20 mm;
for ho/h;::: 35: Wk. lhn.1 = 0,05 mm.
For intermediate values of ho/h, linear interpolation may be used. For the purposes of design Wk.cal may
be assumed to be ~ W1<,11m.
(3) Limitation of the crack widths to these values typically results in the effective sealing of the cracks
within a relatively short time. To account for pressurized structures, in the previous expressions ho may
be substituted by the ratio of the pressure to the specific weight of water CP/Ywater).
(4) To provide adequate assurance for structures of classes TC 2 or TC 3 that cracks do not pass
through the full width of a section, the design value of the depth of the compression zone should be at
least Xm1n under the q uasi-permanent combination of actions. Where a section is subjected to alternate
actions, cracks should be considered to pass through the full thickness of the section unless it can be
shown that some part of the section thickness will always rema in in compression. This thickness of
concrete in compression should normally be at least Xmin under all appropriate combinations of actions.
The action effects may be calculated on the assu mption of linear elastic material behaviour ass uming that
concrete in tension is neglected.
NOTE Xmin is the lesser of 50 mm or 0,2/i where h is the member thickness unless the National Annex gives
different values.

(5) Cracks through which water flows may be expected to heal in members which are not subjected to
significant changes of loading or temperature during service. In the absence of more reliable information,
healing may be assumed where the expected range of strain in the reinforcement, ass uming cracked
properties, at a section under service conditions is less than 150 · 10-6.
NOTE If self-healing is unlikely to occur, any crack which passes through the full thickness of the section can
lead to leakage, regardless of the crack width.

(6) Design of members that are subjected to tensile stresses due to the restraint of shrinkage or
thermal movements should account for these effects according to Annex D.
NOTE Annex D gives information on the evaluation of early-age and long-term cracking due to restraint.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
294
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(7) The leakage rate q may be approximately estimated on t he basis of an equivalent crack width under
the assumption of a laminar flow given by:

q = W k,cal,e3 • flp · fw,p/(96 h · l'/visc) (H.1)

where the equivalent crack width is

2 2
3 2wk,cal,1 · w k,ca l,2
wk,cal,e = (H.2)
wk,cal,l + w k,ca l,2
!lp is t he pressure difference (N/m 2 );
iw,p is the length of the passing crack [m];
l'/visc is dynamic viscosity (ry = 1,3 · 10-3 Ns/m2 for water);
h is depth of the cross-section [m).
W k.ca1, 1 and W k.ca1,2 are the crack widths on the two surfaces calculated for the nominal concrete cover.
NOTE As the leakage rate depends on the crack width, which exhibits a large scatter both in itself as well as in
the actual cracking pattern wh ich will form in a real structure, real values ofleakage will deviate from the calculated
values.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
295
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Annex I
(informative)

Assessment of Existing Structures

1.1 Use of this annex

(1) This informative Annex provides supplementary guidance for the assessment of existing structures
in plain, reinforced and prestressed concrete.
NOTE 1 National choice on the app li cation of this Informative Annex is given in the Nationa l Annex. If the
National Annex conta ins no information on the application of this Informative Annex, it can be used.

NOTE 2 The Eurocodes provide rules that are primarily intended for the design of new structures, although the
p rinciples of EN 1990 can also be applied for existing structu res, with additional or amended provisions.

1.2 Scope and field of application

(1) This Informative Annex applies to:
the assessment of existing concrete structures;

the assessment of the retained parts of existing concrete structures, that are being modified,
extended, strengthened or retrofitted, in case of projects where new structural parts are to be
combined with retained parts from the existing concrete structures.

(2) This Informative Annex does not apply to design of new structural parts that will be integrated in
an existing concrete structure.
(3) This informative annex covers:
addi tional rules for materials and system not defined in Clause 5 (e.g. plain bars);

additional rules for assessing existing structures where detailing does not comply with the
provisions in Clauses 11 and 12;

additional rules for anchorage of plain bars;

some considerations for deterioration of existing structures.

1.3 General
(1) All clauses of this Eurocode are generally applicable to the assessment of existing concrete
struct ures unless substituted by the provisions given in Annex I.
(2) This annex does not provide predictive methods for estimating dete rioration rates associated with
the various deterioration mechanisms for concrete structures. These should be undertaken using
methods specified by the relevant a uthority o r, where not specified, as agreed for a specific assessment
by the relevant parties.
(3) Design values dete rmined in accordance with this Eurocode may be interpreted as assessment
values for the purpose of Annex I.
(4) The following assumptions apply for the assessment of existing concrete structures:

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
296
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

the structure will be used and maintained in accordance with the assessment assumptions;

adequate supervision and quality control is provided during the assessment process;

reasonable skill and care appropriate to the circumstances is exercised in the assessment, based on
the knowledge and good practice generally available at the time the structure is assessed;

the assessment of the structure is made by appropriately qualified and experienced personnel.

1.4 Basis of assessment

1.4.1 General rules

1.4.1.1 Basic requirements

(1) For details not fulfilling the requirements of this Eurocode, the consequence for the structural
safety should be identified. In these cases, assessment based on adequate models and testing (in
accordance with EN 1990) may be used.
1.4.1.2 Effects to be considered in the assessment of deteriorated structures

(1) In case of concrete structures affected by deterioration, where applicable the assessment should
take into account the following effects:
reduced concrete section due to delamination and spalling;

reduction of cross sectional area and ductility of the reinforcement;

stress concentration due to localized corrosion (e.g. prestressing steel);

stress corrosion (e.g. prestressing steel);

reduced concrete-steel bond;

loss of mechanical properties of concrete (e.g. sulphate attack, AAR and DEF, frost attack, leaching
and acid attack);

cracking or expansion of concrete (swelling due to AAR and DEF).

NOTE 1 The most common deterioration mechanisms which can affect concrete structures are:

reinforcement corrosion;

external sulphate attack;

Alkali-Aggregate Reaction (AAR) and other expansive reactions (e.g. Delayed Ettringite Formation, DEF);

frost attack;

leaching and acid attack.

NOTE 2 Formulae given in this Euro code can be invalid in case of deterioration (e.g. Young modulus of concrete
in case of AAR, steel ductility in case of pitting corrosion).

NOTE 3 Pitting corrosion due to ch lorides is often not accompanied by other types of corrosion and hence it can
be hardly detected by visual inspection of the structural member surface.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
297
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

NOTE 4 Some older types of quenched and tempered prestressing steel can have a lower toughness and a higher
risk for stress corrosion.

NOTE 5 The effect of deterioration can influence also model uncertainties, geometrical aspects etc. and, hence,
the resistance models.

1.4.2 Verification by the partial factor method

1.4 .2.1 Pa rtia l factors for assessm e nt

(1) In the absence of tests made on the existing structures to assess the mechanical characteristics of
materials, the partial factors for materials given in Table 4.3 (NOP) should be used for assessment.
(2) If tests are made on the existing structure to assess the mechanical characteristics of materials or
update geometric parameters, the partial factors for materials given in Table 4.3 (NOP) may be adjusted
by us ing the actual mean values and coefficients of variation derived by tests unless the coefficient of
variation of a measured parameter is significantly greater than the value normally assumed as reference
value for new structures, in that case the corresponding partial factors should be adjusted as follows :
For concrete strength the partial factor should be adjusted if the coefficient of variation of concrete
core strength Vfc.is is greater than Vfc,is.lim· The results of tests undertaken earlier (e.g. during the
construction) may also be used for this purpose. Vfc.is.lim is a parameter which depends on the
number of test results according to Table 1.1 (NOP).

For re inforcement samples the partial factor should be adjusted if the coefficient of variation of yield
strength Vfy is greater than Vry.lim· The results of tests undertaken earlier (e.g. during the
construction) may also be used for this purpose. Vry.lim is a parameter which depends on the number
oftest results according to Table 1.2 {NOP).

For other parameters the partial factor should be adjusted in a comparable way

NOTE 1 The values of Vrc,is,lim given in Table 1.1 (NOP) and Vry.lim given in Table 1.2 (NOP) apply unless the
National Annex gives different values.

NOTE 2 Information from test results can be combined with prior information if available.

NOTE 3 The values given in Table 1.1 (NOP) and Table 1.2 (NOP) are derived assum ing a target reliability index
Ptg< = 3,8. If a different target value is used (see EN 1990), the values in Table 1.1 (NOP) and Table 1.2 (NOP) can be
rearranged. For a target reliability index Ptg< < 3,8 the values in the tables are conservative.

NOTE 4 For the adjustment of partial factors for materials, see Annex A.

Table 1.1 (NDP) - Values ofVrc,is,lim as function of the number oftes t res ults n

n• 8 10 12 16 20 30 ()()

Vrc.is,l im 0,13 0,15 0,17 0,20 0,21 0,23 0,29

a n is the number oftest results available for the evaluated test region

Table 1.2 (NDP) - Values of Vfy,lim as function of the number oftest results n

n 5 8 10 12 16 20 30 ()()

Vry,lim 0,025 0,050 0,060 0,065 0,080 0,085 0,095 0,120

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
298
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

1.5 Materials
1.5.1 General

(1) For materials not meeting the requirements of the relevant standards referred to from this
document, the mechanical characteristics to be used according to this Eurocode, should be derived from
tests and/or design and construction records and the use of the provisions in this Eurocode or of
alternative approaches present in technical and scientific literat ure should be justified.
(2) Testing of materials should be undertaken in accordance with the relevant standards. If such tests
cannot be performed, alternative test methods may be used when specified by the relevant authority or,
where not specified, agreed for a specific assessment by the relevant parties. The effect of the alternative
test method should be taken into account when deriving the mechanical characteristics to be used
according to this Eurocode.

1.5.2 Concrete

1.5.2.1 General

(1) EN 13791:2019, Clause 8 should be used for the determination of the characteristic value {ck.is
insitu compressive strength of concrete cores.
(2) The investigation of concrete should aim mainly to determine the compressive strength in specific
areas of the structure. If deterioration does not significantly influence the other mechanical properties
(e.g. modulus of elasticity, tensile strength), these may be determined indirectly based on the
compressive strengt h, by using the formulae included in 5.1, if no specific investigation is conducted.
(3) If fck is assessed by using insitu testing, this may be estimated from fck,is according to Formula (1.1):

_ fck,is
t.ck - -kµJc- (1.1)

where the values of kµfcare given in Table 1.3 (NOP).

NOTE The values of kµrc in Table 1.3 (NOP) apply unless the National Annex provides other values.

Table 1.3 (NDP) - Parameter kµfc considering the representativeness of the insitu compressive
concrete strength assessed according to EN 13791:2019, Clause 8 in Formula (1.1)

Regions and conditions of the s tructural member where the cores a re

kµfc
extracted•
a) Cores extracted only from the bottom parts of the concrete masses during
casting (lower 70 % of the depth of concrete during casting) not necessarily 0,95
representing the governing region for the verification
b) Cores extracted from different regions representing all conditions in the
structural member, but not necessarily representing the governing region for 0,90
the verification
c) Cores extracted from the region governing for the verification 0,85
a The insitu concrete compressive strength can exhibit significant variations depending on the location
(strength typically smaller in the upper part of the element during casting)

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
299
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(4) If D1ower or Dupper are not known, they may be replaced by Dmax· Dmax may be assessed by testing
on the existing structure or by using original design and construction records.
1.5.2.2 Assessment assumptions

(1) When the concrete strength is assessed in an existing structure, the factor ktc in 5.1.6(1) shall take
into account the effects of stress level and duration of loading.
NOTE The following value of k ,c applies unless the National Annex gives different values:

- k,c = 0,85 in case the effect of the permanent action (and/or variable actions of duration> 1 hour) represents
100 % of the total effect at assessment level;

- k,c = 1,00 in case the effect of the variable action with duration< 1 hour represents at least 20 % of the total
effect at assessment level;

for intermediate cases (effect of variable actions with duration < 1 hour is between 0 % and 20 % of the total load
effect at assessment level), k ,c can be determined by linear interpolation between 0,85 and 1,00.

1.5.3 Reinforcing steel

(1) Where the characteristic values of the properties of reinforcing steel are assessed from testing
samples extracted from a structure, the number, location and size of the test specimens should be selected
to be representative of the members being assessed. In this case, the properties of re inforcing steel should
be tested in accordance with EN ISO 15630 (all parts). Shorter samples may be tested if:
the test results give no grounds for justified doubts;

no signs of deterioration are discerned;

from experience it is known that the ult imate resistance is not sensitive to applied length of
specimens.

NOTE 1 The strengths of different size and types of reinforcing steel can have significantly different probability
distributions.

NOTE 2 As it is not usually known which reinforcing steel originates from a single batch, there can be a need to
investigate the possibility of multiple batches being used with in the location being assessed. This can require a
larger number of specimens being tested and some engineering judgement to be used regarding the data analysis
and the scope of app lication of the resulting strengths.

NOTE 3 Information from test results can be combined with prior information if available.

(2) Where the characteristic value of the properties of reinforcing st eel is calculated based on sample
testing, the characteristic value Xk should be determined as given in Formula (1.2):

(1.2)

where

mx = ~ I lnx; (1.3)

where

n is the number of samples and the value of kn may be taken from Tables 1.4 and 1.5 for 5 % and
10 o/o characteristic value respectively.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
300
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

For the evaluation of sx and when using Tables 1.4 and 1.5, one of two cases should be considered:
Case 1: The row 'Vx known' should be used if the coefficient of variation Vx, or a realistic upper bound of
it, is known from prior knowledge; in this case sx should be taken from Formula (1.4):

sx = j1n(V.} + 1) (1.4)

Case 2: The row 'Vx unknown' should be used if the coefficient of variation Vx is not known from prior
knowledge and so needs to be estimated from the sample; in this case sx and Vx should be taken from
Formulae (1.5) and (1.6), respectively:

sx = Jn ~ 1 L(In x, - mx) 2 (1.5)

Sx
Vx = - (1.6)
mx

Table 1.4 - Values of kn for the 5 % characteristic value

n 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 20 30 00

Vx 2,31 2,01 1,89 1,83 1,80 1,77 1,74 1,72 1,70 1,68 1,67 1,64
Known
Vxunknown - - 3,37 2,63 2,33 2,18 2,00 1,92 1,82 1,76 1,73 1,64

Table 1.5 - Values of kn for the 10 % characteristic value

n 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 10 15 20 30 00

Vx
1,81 1,57 1,48 1,43 1,40 1,38 1,36 1,34 1,32 1,31 1,30 1,28
known
Vx
- - 2,18 1,83 1,68 1,59 1,50 1,45 1,39 1,36 1,33 1,28
unknown
(3) If sufficient information is available, the mechanical characteristics of ribbed bars may be
determined based on marking on the bar surface.

1.5.4 Prestressing steel

(1) 1.5.3 applies also for prestressing s teel.

1.6 Durability - Minimum cover for bond

(1) If the actual cover is less than Cmin,b the effect on the anchorage and lap length may be determined
according to 1.11.4.l.
NOTE The actual cover to evaluate the anchorage and lap le ngth can be assessed by using original design and
construction records and/or testing on the existing structure.

(2) Cmin,b for square section plain bars should be based on c/>sq,eq defined in 1.11.4.1.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
301
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

I. 7 Structural analysis
I.7 .1 Methods of analysis

1.7.1 .1 General

(1) When linear analysis with redistribution, plastic analysis or non-linear analysis is performed, the
effect of reduced ductility of deteriorated concrete and reinforcement should be taken into account,
where relevant.
1.7.1 .2 Linear elastic analysis with redistribution

(1) In addition to 7.3.2, linear elastic analysis with redistribution under the ultimate limit state may be
carried out if shear forces and support reactions used in assessment are taken as the greater of those
calculated either prior to, or after redistribution.

I.7 .2 Prestressed members and structures

1.7.2.1 General

(1) When tendon corrosion is encountered in the assessment, the normal rules for prestressed
concrete should be modified by taking into account the following:
a) Strands, wires or bars which have suffered sectional loss that has resulted in them being unable to
sustain their prestress force should be considered ineffective at that section. The strength of a section
at the ultimate limit state should be based on the remaining cross sectional area of the effective
strands, wires or bars only.
b) Bonded post-tensioning tendons which are ineffective locally can re-anchor and become fully
effective elsewhere. Such tendons should be considered in the assessment only if the quality of
grouting in the ducts allows anchorage of the design strength of the prestressing steel.
c) Where there is evidence of extensive inadequate grouting, the possible re-anchorage of tendons
should not be considered in the assessment without further investigation. If the grouting is too poor
to allow re-anchorage of tendons, the member should be treated as unbonded and assessed
accordingly.
d) The reduction of ductility due to corrosion should be taken into account.
1.7.2.2 Prestress ing force

(1) The maximum prestressing force assumed to be applied should be derived from the original design
and construction records or, if not available from documented information for the applied prestressing
system valid at the time of construction. If the prestressing level is not known, the effect of variation in
the prestressing force should be subject to sensitivity analysis. The actual prestressing force may be
measured by insitu testing if no sectional loss is detected.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
302
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

1.8 Ultimate Limit States (ULS)

1.8.1 General

(1) The section properties used to assess section resistance of deteriorated structures should be
consistent with those used in the analysis where relevant.
(2) The following should be considered as possible consequences of reinforcement corrosion, causing
cracking and spalling of concrete cover, on cross sectional d imensions of concrete to be considered:
for corrosion penetration depth Px ;:::: 0,2 mm to 0,4 mm, or crack widths~ lmm, a reduced concrete
section may be considered due to spalling ignoring the cover depth around the corroded bars;

for low/medium Px (i.e. Px < 0,2 mm to 0,4 mm), or crack widths< 1 mm, it may be assumed that the
complete concrete section contributes to the resistance with a reduced compressive strength of
concrete due to cracking.

NOTE Concrete spalling does not only depend on the level of corrosion but also on the ratio oflongitudinal and
transverse reinforcement, diameter of the bars, etc.

(3) The following should be considered as possible consequences of corrosion on ordinary

reinforcement:
for compressed ordinary reinforcement, a reduced reinforcement strength should be considered due
to possible bar buckling before the maximum load is reached, if stirrups are heavily corroded
(relevant Px or pits);

in shear the possibility of premature failure of stirrups due to pitting corrosion should be considered;

for pitting corrosion or Px ;:::: 0,2 mm to 0,4 mm:

a reduction of elongation at maximum stress can be expected and should be considered for the
verifications at ULS;
a concentration of the active stress at pits should be considered;
values of Px < 0,2 mm to 0,4 mm may be assumed not to affect the stress-strain deformation
relationships of ordinary reinforcement.

1.8.2 Bending with or without axial force

(1) Where aspects of detailing are present that do not comply with the provisions of th is Eurocode the
effects on the resistance should be assessed.
NOTE In addition to the effects on bond, low concrete cover can be relevant for other effects such as buckling
of bars in compression.

1.8.3 Shear

1.8.3.1 Detailed verification of members not requiring shear reinforcement

(1) Where more refined verification is needed for the purpose of assessment of existing structures, as
an alternative to 8.2.2 (2) to (5), the design value of the shear stress resistance of members without shear
reinforcement may be calculated as follows:

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
303
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

2/3 rt:
v Jck
l"Rd,c = 0,33 . Ydef
-2- . d {1.7)
Yv 1 + 24yd e1· · ev · -ddg

where
ev is the strain in the longitudinal reinforcement according to (2) which considers implicitly all
effects covered by 8.2.2(3) to (5);
Yder is a partial safety factor which covers the uncertainties related to the calculation of the
deformation.
NOTE Yder = 1,33 unless the National Annex gives a different value.

The shear stress resistance l"Rc1 shall be not smaller than the design value of the shear st ress l"Ed calculated
according to 8.2.1{3) for a cross section defined with the principles of8.2.2 (1), but located not closer than
d/2 from a support, a concent rated load or a discontinuity.
(2) The strain in the longitudinal tensile re inforcement f v at control section to be used in Formula (1.7)
should be calculated according to the assumptions of8.l.l. For planar members, it refers to the principal
direction of the shear force according to 8.2.1(5), a non-linear cross-sectional analysis of the structure
may be performed and the obtained internal forces as well as the strain Ev may be averaged over the same
width defined in 8.2.1(6).
(3) For linear members with an effective depth d > 500 mm, the approach described in (1) and (2)
should be used instead of the method of 8.2.2 or, alternatively, the resistances according to
Formula (8.27) should be multiplied with following coefficient:

d )1/ 10
kvd = 1,35 ( lOOp1 ~g :::; 1,0 (1.8)

1.8.3.2 Detailed verification of members requiring design shear reinforcement

(1) The assessment of members requiring design shear reinforcement may be conducted stepwise as
follows:
a) with the simplified method according to 8.2.3(1) to (6) without explicit calculation of strains;
b) with the refined method according to 8.2.3(7) with explicit calculation of strains;
c) according to Annex G where the strain compatibility is accounted for;
d) with a refined nonlinear analysis according to 7.3.4.
(2) For members not complying with the requirement of maximum longitudinal spacing SJ.max of shea r
reinforcement according to Table 12.1 unless more refined models are used, the shear resistance 1"11<1,sy
according to Formula (8.42) should be multiplied with coefficient kns and the stress in the compression
field a cd according to Formula (8.44) should be divided by coefficient kns which can be calculated as
follows:
s
k
ns
= 1 ---
zcot9 (1.9)

(3) If the transverse spacing of shear legs in an existing member is larger than the maximum value
given in 12.3.1and12.4.1 for beams and slabs respectively, and if both 8.2.1(1) a) and 8.2.1(1) b) are not
fulfilled, the shear resistance should be evaluated by considering the value for the width of the cross
section bw given in Formula (I.10) unless more refined models (e.g. models consistent with 8.3.5(2)) that
consider the existing shear legs are used to evaluate shear resistance.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
304
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

n
bw= L bw,i (1.10)
i=l
where

n is the number oflegs in the cross section;

bw,i = bw.i-1 + bw.i+l (1.11)
bi-1
bw,i- 1 ::; S tr,2max (1.12)
{
2
bi+l
bw,i+l ::; S
2 (1.13)
{ tr.max
2
Str.max is the maximum value of the transverse spacing of shear legs given in in 12.3.l and 12.4.1
for beams and slabs respectively;
bw,i-l and bw,i+l are defined in Figure 1.1.

I bw i I
i ~w i-\ (w i •l i
i- 1 . . . i + 1

b;. 1

a) edge leg b) interior leg

Figure 1.1 - Definition of bw,i (beam/slab cross section)

(4) The favourable effect of the presence of compression flanges may be accounted for by determining
the location of the governing control section considering an additional distance cr with respect to
concentrated loads or reaction forces acting on compression flanges as shown in Figure 1.2:

cr = 3tr~A:
~ (1.14)

where Ar = min{br ·tr; 6t1} and Aw = min{bw · z; Sha,}.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
305
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

O,Sb O,Sb

w
I I I

t
a) near concentrated load

~Jl-!Y'
i i I I
I I
!' !' I I
I

'

b) near bearing

Key
1 control section

Figure 1.2 - Loca tion of control section in presence of compression flanges with or without
shear reinforcement

1.8.3.3 Shear at interfaces

(1) In the parts of a composite slab where the spacing between interface reinforcement in the shear
transfer direction does not fulfil the requirements of 8.2.6(9), the interface reinforcement should be
considered in interface shear verifications only for the parts of the slab (in the shear transfer direction)
that have a length, for each reinforcing bar crossing the interface, equal to 1,25h ::; 150 mm per each side
(in the shear transfer direction) of the bar unless more refined models that consider the existing interface
reinforcement are used to evaluate shear resistance at the interface.
(2) In the parts of a composite slab where the spacing between interface reinforcement perpendicular
to the shear transfer direction does not fulfil the requirements of 8.2.6(9), the interface reinforcement
should be considered in shear at interface verifications only for that part of the slab that has a width, for
each reinforcing bar crossing the interface, equal to 2,Sh::; 375 mm(::; the distance from the edge for an
edge bar) per each side of the bar unless mo re refined models that consider the existing interface
reinforcement are used to evaluate shear resis tance at interface.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
306
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

1.8.4 Torsion and combined actions

(1) Unless more refined methods of analysis are used, stirrups having spacing larger than the minimum
of u/8, band h, shall not be considered in the evaluation of torsional resistance.

1.8.5 Detailed verification of punching

1.8.5.1 Punching shear resistance of slabs without shear reinforcement

(1) The favourable effect of compressive membrane action around internal columns without
significant openings, inserts or slab edges at a distance less than 5dv from the control perimeter bo.s, may
be considered by multiplying parameter kvb in Formula (8.94) by t he following enhancement factor:

lJpm = 0,95 (~)i ·(p~J~ ~ 1

(1.15)

(2) As an alternative to 8.4.3, the design punching shear stress resistance 1°Rd of slabs without shear
reinforcement to be compared with 1°Ed according to 8.4.2(6) or (7) may be calculated as follows:
2/3 f'T
1°Rd,c -
_ O75 . Ydef .
, 2
vfc k d
(1.16)
Yv 1 + lSyd f · 1/J. _ v
e ddg

where
in radians is the maximum rotation of the slab around the supported area according to (3)
which considers explicitly all effects covered by (1) and 8.4.3(2) to (4).
NOT E For Ytler see 1.8.3.1(1).

(3) The rotation l/J may be calculated on the basis of a non-linear analysis of the structure and
accounting for cracking, tension-stiffening effects, yielding of the reinforcement, membrane action and
any other non-linear effects relevant for providing an accurate assessment of the structure. The
governing value of l/J is the maximum relative rotation between centre of the supporting area and a
distance 2dv from the control perimeter.
1.8.5.2 Punching shear resistance of slabs with shear reinforcement

(1) The des ign punching shear stress resistance of slabs with shear reinforcement, in case the strain-
based approach described in 1.8.5.1(2) and (3) is used, may be calculated as:

'Rd.cs = 'Rd,c + 17s · Pw · f ywd ~ Pw · f ywd (1.17)

where

TRd.c should be calculated according to For mula (1.16);

= 7' 5£ . f,• 1/J ( dv )

5
17s . 1 + 150. ,i.. ~ 0,8 (1.18)
ywd 'l'W

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
307
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

(2) For the verification of the maximum shear resistance T Rd,max. the coefficient T/sys in Formula (8.109)
may be calculated in a more refined manner according to:

T/sys
dsys
= 1,15d (bo)
+ 0,63 d
114
- so
0,85d;:: 1.0 (1.19)
v v sys

where d sys and soare defined in Figure 1.3. For variable distances so, the average over the control perimeter
should be used in Formula (1.19). For slabs with shear reinforcement not complying with the detailing
rules of Clause 12, 1.8.5.3 applies.

j
:../
2
b) !r-rn
..,,;:
!rltJ
~

c)
- -
1-
rn
~

a) - .:i ( 51
d)
..,,
a) overview
b) top of head
c) level of axis of reinforcement inside the bend
d) limit of bend
Key
1 support
2 anchorage details in b) to d)

Figure 1.3 - Definition of parameter dsys

(3) Alternatively, the maximum shear resistance T Rd,max may be calculated with the strain-based
approach described in 1.8.5.1(2) and (3) according to:

TRd,max = T/sys,sb · TRd,c (1.20)

where

TRd,c is calculated according to Formula (1.16) using the rotation \fl due to the external actions or
with the actions which correspond to TRd.max (in this case, an iteration is needed), and
T/sys,sb may be assumed as:

d )3/ 2 b 1/2 1
1.0 ~ 1Jsys,sb = 3 . ( dsys . (do) S ~ 4.0 (1.21)
v v l+S·...fil
dv

where

So,t =0.8 . So + 0.2 . St ;:: So

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
308
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(4) The verification for punching outside the shear reinforced zone, in case the strain-based approach
described in 1.8.5.1 (2) and (3) is used, may be conducted alternatively to 8.4.4(7) and (8) in a similar
manner as slabs without shear reinforcement by considering the shear resisting effective depth dv,out
according to Figure 8.23 and the outer control perimeter defined in Figure 8.24.
1.8 .5.3 Verification of punching in s labs with s hear reinforcement not complying with the
detailing rules of Clause 12

(1) The maximum punching shear resistance of slabs with shear reinforcement not complying with the
requirements of 12.5.1 may be calculated according to 1.8.5.2(2) or (3) with following modifications:
if the distance so between the column edge and the first reinforcement unit is smaller than the lower
limit according to Figure 12.7: the distance s1 instead of so, should be used in Formulae (I.19) or (I.21 ),

if t he distance so between the column edge and t he first reinforcement unit is larger t han t he upper
limit according to Figure 12.7: Formulae (I.19) or (1.21) are applicable,

if t he shear reinforcement doesn't enclose at least the 3rd layer of longitudinal reinforcement
according to Figure 12.6, coefficient 1,15 in Formula (1.19) should be replaced by 0,85.

1.8.6 Partially loaded areas

(1) If there are no external tensile forces nor restra int which can induce cracking in the direction parallel
to the direction of the load, and no expected or known pre-existing cracks in this direction, tensile
reinforcement may be omitted, provided that the design stress applied on the loaded area does not exceed
0Rd.t :

<1Rd.t =
ffu ·kpart
Yc (I.22)

if max{ao; bo} ~ 3do:

Ac1 1
kpart = A · ~ (1.2 3)
co 1 - _£Q.
Act

if max{ao; bo} > 3do:

di 1
kpart = d . - -d- (1.24)
o 1 - _Q
d1
where

do = min{ao; bo} according to 8.6(2);

di block dimension parallel to do.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
309
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

1.9 Serviceability Limit States (SLS)

1.9.1 General

(1) Assessment of serviceability limit states by calculation according to Clause 9 should be performed
when:
a) investigating existing serviceability problems;
b) the assessment of structural safety relies on particular serviceability criteria being satisfied;
c) required by 1.9.1(2).
In the other cases the serviceability limit state verifications may be performed using site-based
observations and/or measurements.
(2) If the target value for reliability index ~ for ultimate limit states is reduced to a value lower than
that given in EN 1990, the reinforcement and the concrete stresses at the characteristic combination of
actions should be limited.
NOTE The limits on reinforcement and concrete stresses at the characteristic combination of actions are given
in Table 1.6 (NOP) unless the National Annex gives different values.

Table 1.6 (NDP) - Limits on reinforcement and the concrete stresses at the characteristic
combination of actions

<le$ 0,60fck cr5 $ 0,80fyk Clp $ 0,80fpk

1.9.2 Crack control

(1) For plain bars, Formula (9.15) shall not be applied and Formula (1.25) may be used.

<P
Sr,m.cal = 2c + 0,56-- $ 1,3(h - x) (I.25)
Pp.eff

1.10 Fatigue
(1) Where there is a particular concern regarding the fatigue performance of the structure, the need
for a fatigue verification should be specified by the relevant authority or, where not specified, agreed for
a specific assessment by the relevant parties.
NOTE 1 Examples of particular concerns regarding the fatigue performance can include:

(i) fatigue-sensitive members where it is known that there is:

welded reinforcement;
corroded reinforcement;
mechanically connected reinforcing bars;
bent parts of bars with mandrel diameter smaller than the minimum values according to specifications;
reduced cross sectional area and/or reduced bond area of bars which can cause stress concentrations.
(ii) inadequately restrained external tendons can vibrate excessively and be more susceptible to fatigue failure.

NOTE 2 The influence of the surface qua lity of reinforcement (e.g. corrosion, notches) on the fatigue strength can
be considered by taking into consideration the loading history and stress concentration arising from deterioration.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
310
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(2) When the rules of Annex E are used for the assessment of an existing structure, once corrosion has
started the fatigue res istance of bars may be determined by reducing the stress exponent in
Table E.1 (NOP) for straight and bent carbon reinforcing steel to kf2 = 5.

1.11 Detailing of reinforcement and post-tensioning tendons

1.11.1 General
(1) Provisions of Clause 11 apply also to plain bars unless Annex I gives different provisions.

l.11.2Spacing of bars

(1) For the calculation of anchorage length, if the clear distance Cs (horizontal and vertical) between
individual parallel bars is lower than Dupper + 5mm, the bars should be considered as arranged in
bundles.
NOTE The actual c5 to evaluate the anchorage length can be assessed by using original design and construction
records and/or testing on the existing structure.

(2) For the calculation of anchorage and lap length, if the clear distance Cs is less than 2¢ the effect on
the anchorage and lap length may be determined according to 1.11.4.l.
(3) 11.2(4) shall not be applied in assessment of existing structures.

1.11.3 Permissible mandrel diameter for bent bars

NOTE For bars that do not comply with EN 10080, the minimum mandrel diameter to satisfy 11.3(1) can be
found in the national technical standards in force at the time of the original design.

I.11.4Anchorage of reinforcing steel in tension and compression

1.11.4 .1 Anchorage of straight bars

(1) The nominal cover, as defined by Figure 11.3 c), may be assessed by using original design and
construction records and/or updated based on testing on the existing structure.
(2) The minimum value of lbct in Formula (11.3) and in 11.4.2(6) (i.e. 10¢) may be reduced to 5¢ if
visual inspections demonstrate that the area where anchorage develops is uncracked in the present
condition.
(3) For plain straight bars with O'sd :::; 300 MPa, the design anchorage length !bd may be taken from
Formula (1.26) :
3 5 ~17
- =
lbct ( 1307]1) . ( -Ye )z'l 2
. (
-O'sct )4173 . (2
-5 )3 • . (1,5¢)
- - > 10 (1.26)
</J 1,5 435 fck Cct -

where

ratio c~:<I>)~ 0,5;

7]1, 7Jz, 7] 3 and 7]4 are coefficients that take account of the position of the bars during concreting and in
particular:
7]1 = 1J2 = 7] 3 = 7] 4 = 1,0 for bars in good bond conditions;
1]1 = 3,1, 7] 2 = 1,6, 7] 3 = 0,9 and 7] 4 = 0,6 in all other cases.

NOTE 1 For details on good bond conditions, see Figure 11.4.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
311
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

NOTE 2 Some studies on small diameter (i.e.</> ::; 16 mm) cold drawn plain reinforcement demonstrate that such
bars have a much smoother surface and exhibit lower bond strengths attained at higher slips compared with hot
rolled bars. Thus, the des ign anchorage length of small diameter cold drawn plain bars is longer than that evaluated
by using Formula (1.26).

(4) All provisions for anchorage of plain bars may be used also for square section plain bars with
parameter</> replaced by an eq uivalent diameter of the square bar </>sq,eq given by Formula (1.27):

</>sq,eq = J~ Asq
(1.27)

where Asq is the area of the square cross section of the pla in bar.
(5) 11.4.2(5) and 11.4.2(6) shall not be applied to plain bars.
(6) 11.4.2(5) should not be applied to ribbed and indented bars if cd < <f>.
(7) If cd < </> all provisions for ancho rage of ribbed, indented and plain bars may be used with
parameter cd replaced by <I> and by increasing lbd in Formulae (11.3) and (1.26) by a factor k 1bs.c· k 1bs.c
should be taken from Table 1.7.
NOTE Corner and edge bars are defined in Figure 11.3.

Table I.7 - Parameter ktbs,c for f bd w h en cd < 4>

Case Position of bar c,/2 Cx Cy ktbs,c
1 corner ?. </> ?. </> < </>
2b corner 1
< </> ?. </> < </>
Cy
3 edge ?. </> - < </> 0,5 + 0,5 </>
4b edge < </> - < </>
5 corner ?. </> < </> ?. </> 1

6b corner < </> < </> ?. </> 0,5 + 0,5 ~

1 1 c .
if _ < nun,xy l
Cmin,xy 3- </> <
</>
7• corner ?. </> < </> < </> 1 c . 1
if 111111.xy < -
0,1 + 0,7 Cm;,xy </> 3

1
8 edge < </> - ?. </>
0,5 + 0,5 ~¢
a In case 7 Cm in,xy = min( Cx; Cy)
b In cases 2, 4 and 6, bars having c5 /2 < <P shall be considered as bundled.

(8) For ribbed bars having fR lower than minimum values of relative rib area fR of Table C.1, lbd•
evaluated according to 11.4.2, should be increased depending on the actual fR·

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
312
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(9) The reduction in bond strength due to corrosion, where relevant, which highly depends on the
confinement to the bar, concrete quality and environment, should be assessed and lbd in Formulae (11.3)
and (1.26) increased accordingly.
(10) For corroded reinforcement, in addition to (9), the effect on bond of concrete cover spalling should
be considered and it may be taken into account by using the reduced cover thickness in Formulae (11.3)
and (1.26).
(11) The effect of surface scaling on bond due to frost attack may be accounted for by use of the reduced
cover in Formulae (11.3) and (1.26).
Residual bond capacity of ribbed bars not confined by links and of plain bars in freeze-thaw damaged
concrete may be assessed using tensile strength measurements on cores taken from the affected
structure. Concrete compressive strength f ck in Formulae (11.3) and (1.26) may be substituted by
residual characteristic compressive cylinder strength of concrete after freeze-thaw attack f ck ,ft given by
Formula (I.28) :

f ck,ft = 3,3 · fc~·~.is;0,05 (1.28)

where

}• Ctk ,IS;0,05
· is the characteristic measured insitu tensile strength of concrete (5 % fractile).
NOTE Bond strength of ribbed bars is not degraded as severely where bars are properly confined by secondary
reinforcement.

1.11.4 .2 Anchorage of bars with bends and hooks

(1) For existing structures, the provisions of 11.4.4 for standard hook and bend anchorage in tension
complying with Figure 11.6 should be substituted by the following.
The design value of the reinforcement stress at the cross section u; d to be anchored by bond over lbd may
be taken from Formula (1.29):

(1.29)

where

(1.30)

ratio (~) :::; 3,0;

o1 and Oz are coefficients that take account of the position of the bars during concreting and in
particular:
01 = Oz = 1,0 for bars in good bond conditions;
in all other cases:
o = 0,8 and Oz = 1,0 for ribbed and indented bars;
1

01 = 0,3 and Oz = 2,0 for plain bars.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
313
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Formulae (1.29) and (1.30) apply if:

for ribbed bars:

l
~d ~ 5 ifthe provision ofl.11.4.1(2) is fulfilled;

I
~ > 10 in all other cases,·
</> -
l
; ~ 10 for plain bars;
NOTE For the definition of good bond conditions, see 11.4.2(4).

1.11.SLaps of reinforcing steel in tension and compression and mechanical couplers

(1) The minimum values of the design lap length given in Table 11.3 may be reduced to:
S<f> for ribbed and indented bars if the laps are made with straight bars or with bends and hooks (tension
only) and ifthe provis ion ofl.11.4.1(2) is fulfilled;

10</> for plain bars if the laps are made with straight bars or with bends and hooks (tension only).

1.12 Detailing of members and particular rules - Minimum reinforcement rules

(1) 12.1(6) may be neglected for existing structures. However, for members having less longitudinal
reinforcement than As.min given in 12.2 t he consequence for the structural safety should be identified.
(2) If the provisions of 12.2(6) are not fulfilled, the reinforcement resistance should be evaluated by
using the actual anchorage length.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
314
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Annex J
(infor mative)

Strengthening of Existing Concrete Structures with CFRP

J.1 Use of this annex

(1) This informative Annex contains rules for strengthening of existing structures assessed in
accordance with this Eurocode comprising plain, reinforced, and/or pres tressed normal weight concrete.
NOTE National choice on the application of this Informative Annex is given in the National Annex. If the
Nationa l Annex conta ins no information on the application of this Informative Annex, it can be used.

J.2 Scope and field of application

(1) This Informative Annex applies to the strengthening of plain, reinforced, and/or prestressed
normal weight concrete structures assessed in accordance with this Eurocode, comprising adhesively
bonded reinforcement (ABR) which is either externally bonded to the surface (EBR) or near surface
mounted in the concrete (NSM). The reinforcement material can be in the form of
Prefabricated carbon FRP (CFRP) strips (EBR or NSM) or bars (NSM);

lnsitu lay-up carbon fibre (CF) sheets (EBR).

NOTE For general aspects of existing structures, Annex I can be considered unless specifically omitted or
supplemented in Annex J.

J.3 General
(1) All provisions of this Eurocode in Clauses 1to14 apply unless specifically omitted or supplemented
in Annex).

J.4 Basis of design

(1) Partial factors for ABR reinforcement yr and YBA shall be applied.
NOTE The values Yr and YBA are those given in Table J.1 (NOP) unless the National Annex gives different values.

Table J.1 (NDP) - Partial factors for ABR strengthening

Tensile strength Bond st rength

Design situation CFRP strips lnsitu lay-up
Failure in concrete or adhesive
and bars CF sheets
Designation Yr YBA

Persistent and transient 1,30 1,40 1,50

Accidental 1,10 1,15 1,15
Serviceability 1,00 1,00 1,00
Fatigue 1,30 1,40 1,50

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
315
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

J.5 Materials
J.5.1 General

(1) ABR strengthening systems suitable for design in accordance with this Eurocode shall satisfy the
requirements of).15.
(2) ABR strengthening systems used for structures in accordance with this Eurocode shall comply with
the relevant product standards.
NOTE 1 Where harmonized product standards are not available for a strengthening system, the National Annex
can specify the relevant product standard for ABR strengthening systems.

NOTE 2 ISO 10406 can be used for determination of selected properties.

(3) Annex ) provides design rules for members strengthened with ABR reinforcement within the
following limits of declared properties:
interlaminar shear strength of CFRP strips according to EN ISO 14130 shall be equal or larger than
the adhesive bond strength for any system;
mean modulus of elasticity of CFRP strips: 150 000 MPa 5 Ef 5 250 000 MPa;
elastic stiffness per unit width of CF sheets: 20 kN/mm 5 Ef · Afibr 5 400 kN/mm;
total CF cross section per unit width of CF sheets in the total of all layers determined in the direction
of the tension action effect applied to the system:
100 mm 2 /m 5 Atfbc 5 1 800 mm 2 /m.
characteristic tensile strength of the adhesive fAtk• determined in accordance with EN 1504-4 shall
be fAtk ~ 14 N/mm 2.
(4) ABR shall not be used for concrete substrates where deterioration is imminent or present unless
proper concrete repair provisions have been taken.

J.5.2 Properties

(1) The following properties for CFRP strips and CF sheets are required for design of ABR
strengthening systems in accordance with this standard:
fruk characteristic short-term tensile strength of the ABR, determined in accordance with ISO 10406
(all parts);
,.,,. reduction factor applied to the tensile strength;

Ef average mean value of modulus of elasticity of the ABR in longitudinal direction, determined in
accordance with ISO 10406 (all parts);

Efuk characteristic ultimate strain;

Ac cross sectional area.
(2) The cross sectional area of CFRP strips should be taken as Ar = br · tr where br is the width and tf
the thickness of the cross section.
(3) The cross sectional area of CF sheets should be obtained from relevant production data.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
316
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(4) For CF sheets the thickness tr. which is an effective value, has to be determined considering the
number of layers as follows:
(l.l)

where
nr is the number oflayers;
Ar is the cross sectional area of the fibres per meter of a single layer of CF sheet;
kr = 0,85 for nr > 3, or 1 otherwise.
(5) The following properties for the adhesive are required for design of ABR strengthening systems in
accordance with this standard:
characteristic compressive strength of the adhesive fA ck determined in accordance with EN 1504-4;

characteristic tens ile strength of the adhesive fAtk• determined in accordance with EN 1504-4.

NOTE 1 Material properties can vary with temperature. Hence, maximum and minimum temperatures for the
design life of the strengthening system, calculated in accordance with EN 1991-4 for the application of the system
to be us ed, need to be known and specified.

NOTE 2 Material properties can vary w ith environmental conditions and exposure to alkal i. Hence,
environm ental conditions a nd exposure to alkali that will be e ncountered through the design life of the
st rengthening system for the application of the system to be used, need to be known and specified.

J.5.3 Design assumptions

(1) The value of design tensile strength of the ABR (CFRP and CF sheets) shall be taken as:

T/t · fruk
frud = Yr (J.2)

where

TJr is a reduction factor applied to the tensile strength of the ABR for the relevant exposure
conditions determined in accordance with ISO 10406 (all parts) as appropriate.
(2) T/r may be taken as 0, 7 unless more accurate information is available based on test data for the AB R.
(3) The strain corresponding to the short-term design strength, Erud• shall be calculated according to
the following Formula (J.3):

frud
l':fud = Er (J.3)

(4) The design stress-strain diagram for carbon fibre reinforcement should be taken as in Figure j .1.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
317
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

Figure J.1 - Design stress- strain diagram for CFRP reinforcement

(5) A method for determining fctm,surf is provided in Formula (J.34). Where this is applied it shall be
validated by site testing in accordance with EN 1542 prior to execution.

J.6 Durability
(1) The durability of the strengthening system should be ensured, for the design life of the structure,
considering the exposure classes in accordance with Table 6.1, with additional protective measures if
necessary.
(2) The durability of the strengthening system should be ensured, for the design life of the structure,
taking into acco unt exposure to direct UV radiation (direct or indirect solar radiation by reflection on
snow or water) and the risk of repeated or permanent penetration of moisture, with additional protective
measures if necessary.
(3) Thermal effects shall be considered from e.g. asphalt on a strengthened bridge deck

J. 7 Structural analysis
(1) Unless more rigorous a nalysis is undertaken, members strengthened with ABR should not be
analysed using linear elastic analysis with redistribution or plastic analysis.
(2) A member should be assessed against accidental loss of ABR as follows:
The ABR should be designed such that under the effects of permanent actions the member is able to
prevent collapse without ABR by addressing the following:

The strengthening is detailed in a manner that protects it against damage from vandalism or
accidental mechanical damage;

Member collapse will not result in progressive collapse of the structure;

Protection from fire damage is provided.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
318
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

J.8 Ultimate Limit States (ULS)

J.8.1 Bending with or without axial force

J.8.1 .1 General

(1) When determining the ultimate moment resistance of reinforced or prestressed concrete cross
sections strengthened in flexure with ABR, the following assumptions in addition to 8.1.1(2) should be
made:
th e compressive strength of ABR is ignored;

the slip between CFRP reinforcement and the concrete substrate is neglected.

(2) The strain state of the existing reinforcement and concrete members being strengthened in
bending shall be determined prior to strengthening under the relevant effects of act ions. Strains arising
from additional bending effects after strengthening should be superimposed to these when verifying the
capacity of the strengthened member.
(3) Unless more rigorous analysis is undertaken, the provisions in this Eurocode should not be applied
to concrete with fck ::; 12 MPa or fck > SO MPa.
(4) The tensile force in the ABR shall be determined wit h the str ain distributi on according t o 8.1.l.
(S) The pre-strain of the reinforcement in the existing structure, the yield point of the reinforcement
and the st rain limits of the ABR according to J.S shall be considered.
NOTE 1 The tension resistance of the EBR strengthening is generally limited by the bond resistance calculated
in accordance with J.11.

NOTE 2 The tension resistance of a NSM system is sometimes limited by the bond resistance calculated in
accordance with J.11.

J.8 .1 .2 Concrete columns confined with closed CFRP wrapping

(1) CFRP reinforcement for confinement sh ould be applied for the full length of the column being
strengthened.
(2) The confining effect provided by adhesively bonded CFRP may be considered in design of axially-
loaded members under the following conditions, where:
the characteristic concrete strength fck is less than SO MPa;

the diameter of a circular column, D, or equivalent diamete r of a rectangular or square column, Deq ;::
l SO mm;

the first order eccentricity satisfies the condition _!Q_ ::; 0,20;
Dcq

the slenderness satisfies the condition l0 / Deq ::; 40 ;

the corner radius for rectangular cross sections is re;:: 20 mm;

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
319
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:20 23 (E)

The increase in compressive strength from CFRP confinement shall be considered in determining
slenderness effects.
(3) For the design of CFRP confined concrete cross sections the following simplified bilinear stress-
strain relationship may be used:

f ed · Ee
for 0 ~ Ee ~ 0,00175 (J.4)
<Fe = 0,00175
. (Ee - 0,00175)
<Fe = fed +fl/ed (Ecu - 0,00175) for 0,00175 ~ Ee ~ Ec11 (J.5)

NOTE The value of Ecu can be taken as 0,006 unless more accurate information is available.

(4) The increase in compressive strength of concrete fl fed in columns r esulting from confinement using
CFRP may be calculated as follows:
For circula r columns:

~ tr · frud < 0 07
flfed =0 or D ·fed '
(J.6)

tr ~ tr· frud > 0 07

flfed = kee · D · frud or D. fed - '
(J.7)

where Dis the diameter of the circular column.

NOTE1 The va lue of k cc can be taken as 2,5 for circular columns unless more accurate information is available.

Where helical and/or intermittent wrapping is used on circular columns, the value of frud in Formulae
(J.6) and (J.7) should be factored by kh according to Formula (J.8), where geometrical parameters are
defined in Figure J.2.
2
k - (sr - br)) . ( 1 ) Q.8)
h - (1 - 2 ·D 1 + (tan/Jr) 2

For r e ctangula r columns:

(b) ke t Deq
2
·k · F
< 0,07
llfcd =0 for - f r Jfud (J.9)
h ·fed
2
b) tr · kr · frud >
for (h k e Deq . fed _ 0,07 ().10)

where
2·b·h
Deq = b+ h (J.11)

(b - 2 · rc) 2 + (h - 2 · 7(:) 2
ke = 1 - 3. b. h Q.12)

kr = {1,0 · ;~ · ( 2 - ;~) for r, < 50 mm (J.13)

1,0 for r, ~ 50 mm

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
320
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Where helical and/or intermittent wrapping is used on rectangular or square columns (see Figure J.2),
the value of ffud in Formulae Q.9) and Q.10) should be factored by kh according to Formula Q.14), where
geometrical parameters are defined in Figure J.2.

Sf - bf) ( Sf - bf) ( 1 )
kh = (1 - ~ . 1 - 2T . 1 + (tanPr) 2 Q.14)

NOTE 2 The value of k cc can be taken as 1,5 for square and rectangular columns unless more accurate
information is available.

Unless more rigorous analysis is undertaken, Formulae (J.9) and (].10) should not be used for columns
with h/b>2.
(5) The confining effect of CFRP may be ignored in creep calculations for concrete columns.

h b

a) effectively confined concrete in rectangular b) confinement with discrete strips

cross-section

c) confinement with helically applied strips

Key
1 confined concrete

Figure J.2 - Configuration of CFRP wrapping

J.8.2 Shear

J.8.2.1 General verification procedure

(1) In principle, shear resistance shall be in accordance with 8.2. If a shear resistance analysis according
to 8.2 shows unsufficient shear res istance, shear strengthening in accordance with J.8.2.3 may be applied.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
321
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

J.8 .2 .2 Detailed verification for members not requiring des ign s hear reinforcement

(1) When determining the design val ue of the shear stress resistance in acco rdance with Formulae (8.27)
or (8.33), the FRP reinforcement applied for st rengthening should not be considered in the term As1·
J.8 .2 .3 Members requiring design shear reinforcement

(1) In principle, shear resistance of internal reinforcement shall be calculated in accordance with 8.2.3.
(2) The p rovisions in this Annex apply for shear strengthening of rectangular and T-shaped cross sections
without anchorage devices.
(3) The provisions apply to strengthening systems applied discrete or continuous (see Figure J.3).

1 11111111 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

t s, b1

a) Discrete application of the str engthening b) Continuous application of the

system strengthening system

D •••
c) Closed wrapped CFRP system d) Open CFRP strengthening applications

Figure J.3 - Definition of notation used to describe CFRP strengthening applications

(4) The shear resistance of a sect ion strengt hened with CFRP may be taken as:

TRct,CFRP = TRd + TRct.r :5 0,5 . V . f ed Q.15)

where

rRd f = -Ar · Hwd · (cot8 + cota ) · s .m a

- Q.16)
1 1
' Sr bw

2 · tr· br
Ar _ · sina1 for discrete CFRP strips or CF sheets
- - Sf Q.17)
Sr
{ 2 · tr· sinar for continuous CF sheets

is the angle formed between the st rengt hening system and the longitudinal member axis;
is design shear s trength of the strengthening system calculated in accordance with
frwd
Formulae (1.18), (1.19), (1.20) or (1.23)
are in accordance with 8.2.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
322
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Unless more rigorous analysis is undertaken, e should be taken as 45 degrees for the calculation of TRd
and TRd,f·
(5) The following may be used to determine the design shear strengt h of closed wrapped CFRP systems
as defined in Figure j.3 c).

[Fwd = 0,8 · kr · [Fud (J.18)

where
fFud should be determined using Formula (J.2) and kr should be determined using Formula (J.13).
(6) Formulae (l.19) and (l.20) may be used to determine the design shear strength of open discrete
CFRP systems as defined in Figure J.3. In both cases /rwd is limited by the value determined with Formula
(J.18).
Where the anchorage length into the compression zone of the member of all CFRP st rips, lb1., is less than
lbf,max,k• frwd should be determined using the Formula (l.19), where e and ar are defined in Figure j.4.
2 n ·St
{Fwd = 3 Lbf,max,k · [( cote + cota ) · sma
. ] fbfRd (J.19)
1 1
Where the anchorage length into the compression zone of the member of some CFRP strips, lbf, is less
than lbf,max,k• !fwd should be determined using Formula (J.20):

2
fFd = [1 - (1 - m·sr )m] !ibfRd (J.20)
w 3 lbr,max,k · [(cote + cota1) · sina1] n

Where the parameters ar. m and n are defined in Formulae (J.21), (J.22) and in Figure J.4 and lbf,max,k and
lbmct shall be determined using J.11.1.1.

n = .mteger (hr(cote + cotar)) (J.21)

Sf

. (lbfmax k(cote + cotar)sinar)

m = mteger ---""'-'-
' ------- (J.22)
Sf

(7) Formula (J.23) may be used t o determine the design shear strength of open cont inuous CFRP sheet
systems.
2 hrf sinar hr
- · . fb[Rd for - .- < lbfmaxk
_ 3 lbf,max,k smar · ·
Jifwd - 1l (J.23)
h1
{ l __ bf,max,k .
- >
for -s inar
[ 3 hrf sinaJ !bfRd - lb 1,max,k

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
323
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

•••
m
n
htlcot 8 + cot <If)
Key

1 shear crack
2 strips w ith inclination ar
m strips with lbr < lbr.max.k
n strips intersecting shear crack

Figure J.4 - Illustration of ABR stirrups intersecting shear crack

J.8.3 Torsion and combined actions

(1) When applying 8.3, the CFRP re inforcement shall not be cons idered.

J.8.4 Punching
(1) This Annex does not apply for strengthening for punching shear.

J.8.5 Design with strut-and-tie models and stress fields

(1) ABR systems may be used as tension reinforcing in ties according to the provisions of 8.5 and ).11
s ubject to strain compatibility being demonstrated.
(2) Anchorage of ABR and transfer of forces to nodes used for strengthening in ties should be ensured
in accordance with 8.5.

J.9 Serviceability Limit States (SLS)

(1) Deflections of beams or slabs strengt hened with ABR may be estimated by ignoring the slip
between the CFRP and concrete and transforming the area of CFRP to steel by taking account of the
modular ratio. Pre-existing deflections shall be considered by using the appropriate provisions of
EN 1990.
(2) The stress in the carbon fibre reinforcement shall be limited as follows:

<If:::; 0,8 · fyk · Er/ Es Q.24)

(3) Verification of stresses in existing reinforcement and concrete stresses according to 9.2.1 and
Annex 1.9 shall be done considering the stress states before and after st rengt hening.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
324
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

J.10 Fatigue
J.10.1 Basic fatigue analysis for externally bonded CFRP sys tems

(1) A fatigue check for EBR may be omitted where the following condition is satisfied:

AFfE,equ :5 AFrRd.fatl = 0,35 · fctm,sur/ 14 · fbfRd · br · tr (J.25)

where
AFmct,fan is the basic fatigue resistance;
lbmct is the limiting design strength of the bond in the area being considered calculated in
accordance with J.11;
fctm,surr may either be determined by testing or estimated with Formula (J.34);
AFm.equ = max{br ·tr· Afmct,max ; Frnct.cr} (J.26)
Afrnct.max is the maximum difference in CFRP stress under the relevant load combination
between cracks (refer to Figure J.5) within the strengthened area;
Frnct.cr is the force in CFRP at first crack in the strengthened area.

J.10.2 Refined fatigue analysis for externally bonded CFRP systems

(1) If the condition in Formula (J.25) cannot be satisfied, the following condition should be assessed
under the combination of actions stated in Clause 10 according to:
AFfk.B
AFmct.fat :5 AFmct,fat2 = arat2 · - y- - (l.27)
BA

where

AFmct.rat is the design force range due to forces at the crack edge, AFr.max - AFr.min• and;
AFr.min is the minimum value of br · tr · Afmct under the relevant combination of actions specified
in 10.2;
AFr.max is the maximum value of br · tr · Afmct under the relevant combination of actions specified
in 10.2.
The difference in CFRP tension stress between cracks Aft5 d calculated according to Formula (J.28) is
defined in Figure J.5.
Fmd.b - Frnct.a
Afrnct =- -br.-tr- - (J.28)

where
AFfk,B = br · tr · Affk,B and Af fk.B is calculated according to Formula (J.48);
AFr.max
arat2 = - crat · AFmct + Crat (l.29)

AFr.max is the maximum value of AFr unde r the combination of actions according to 10.2;

(J.30)

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
325
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

N• the number of stress cycles;

kf3 = 23,2 for N* < 2 · 106 ;
kf3 = 45,4 for N* ~ 2 · 106 .

J.10.3 Near surface mounted CFRP strips

(1) Near surface mou nted strips t hat satisfy the following conditions under the combination of actions
stated in Clause 10 may be deemed adequate in fatigue.
a) The number of stress cycles is less than 2 · 106;
b) The maximum force in the NSM CFRP system, taking the shift of the tension envelope into account,
does not exceed Fr,NSM.max• where Fr.NSM,max is calculated using Formula (J.31);
c) The strip stress range l:i.<Jr complies with the provisions stated in Formula (J.32).

Fr,NsM,max = 0,6 · fbfRd · br · tr (1.31)

500
!:i.ar::;; - (J.32)
tr
where
l:i.Frmax - l:i.Frmin
l:i.ar = . . (J.33)
br . tr

J.11 Bond and anchorage ofCFRP systems

J.11.1Anchorage of ABR strengthening systems
J.11.1.1 Basic anchorage resistance - CFRP to concrete for EBR strengthening

J.11.1.1 .1 General

(1) The required anchorage length ofEBR, calculated in accordance with j.11.1.1, should be curtailed
as described in j.11.1.2.
(2) The surface tensile s trength fctm.surf of the prepared concrete surface to be bonded is of decisive
importance for the bond resistance. If the surface tensile strength cannot be determined on the member,
it may be estimated as a function of the position during concreting according to Formula (J.34).

fctm,surf = kc.surf · fctm (J.34)

where

0,3 + 0,6 . ( fck

60 - 0,2 ) for concreting posit ion: top

kc.surf= 0,4 + 0,5 . (fck

60 - 0,2 ) for concreting posit ion: side

0,6 + 0,3 . ( fck

60 - 0,2 ) for concreting position: bottom

J.11.1.1.2 Simplified method

(1) The following simplified method may be used to determine the anchorage resistance for EBR.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
326
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

fbfRd
0,2
= YBA f11 trEr ( fem · fctm.surf
)o.s
(J.35)

where

l bf (2- lbf ) < 1 if lbf < lbf,max,k

fJ1 = { ~bf,max,k lbf,max,k (J.36)
if lbf ~ lbf,max,k

Er . tr
lbf,max,k = 1,5 oS (J.37)
Ucm ' fctm,surf) ,
J.11.1.1.3 Refined method

(1) If more accurate data for the EBR system is known based on production data, the following more
refined analysis may be used to determine anchorage resistance. The design bond strength of the
anchorage, of the EBR system may be taken as the following:

.JrJcc · ktc · ktt { fbfk,max · lbf (2 - lbf ) where lbr < lbf,max,k
f bfRd = YBA · lbf,max,k lbf,max.k (J.38)
f bfk,max where lbf ~ lbf,max,k

where

2 Er· tr · srok
lbr,max,k = -k - - · (J.39)
sys,b3 Tflk

/bfk,max = (J.40)

Sfok = 0,2 · ksys,b2 (J.41)

Tflk = 0,37 · ksys,bt · (fem · fctm,surr)0' 5 (J.42)

NOTE The value of ksys,bi = 1,0, ksys,b 2 = 1,0 and ksys,b 3 = 1,0 can be used unless more accurate information
is available based on production data of the EBR system.

J.11.1.2 EBR anchorage requirements - flexure

J.11.1.2.1 General

(1) Anchorage of the strengthening system to the concrete surface of a member in flexure shall be
provided to avoid the following failure mechanisms:
end anchorage as described in J.11.1.2.2;

intermediate crack debonding as described in ).11.1.2.3;

end cover separation as described in J.11.1.2.4;

shear induced separation as described in ).11.1.2.5.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
327
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

J.11.1.2.2 End anchorage

(1) The EBR shall be anchored by an anchorage length beyond the section where the design resistance
of the unstrengthened existing section is at least as great as the design effects resulting from the relevant
limit state.
(2) EBR shall be curtailed according to one of the following conditions:
where member strengthening is undertaken, the curtailment shall take account of a,, calculated
in accordance with 12.3.2;
where local strengthening is undertaken, the EBR should extend a distance /bf + h beyond the
section where it is needed.
(3) The anchorage resistance lbmd should be calculated using Formulae (J.35) or (J.38).
J.11.1 .2.3 Intermediate crack debonding

(1) Where J.11.1.1.3 is used to determine the anchorage length of EBR, the anchorage capacity between
flexural cracks shall be sufficient to resist the difference in tensile forces in the system between cracks.
(2) Formula (J.43) may be used to determine the capacity of the strengthening system between
adjacent flexural cracks.
(3) Formula (J.43) may be applied where the strain in the CFRP does not exceeds 10 mm/m.
(J.43)
where

t:../iEd is calculated according to Formula (J.28);

6.fmd is the bond resistance between adjacent cracks.
(4) Unless a more accurate analysis is undertaken, 6./md and t:../fEd should be calculated using the
minimum crack spacing, Ser.min (see Figure J.5), where Ser.min may be determined as follows :

Mer
Ser.min = 1.5 . 0, 85 . h . Fibs1n (J.44)

With the bond st rength per length:

n

fbsm =I i= l
n s,i · </>i ·TC· f bsm (J.45)

The mean bond stress of the reinforcing steel may be determined by:

~ - {Kvbl · 0,43 · !cm~

Jbsm - t
for ribbed bars
(J.46)
Kvb2 · 0,28 · fcm2 for plane bars

The following should be used for good bond conditions Kvbi = KvbZ = 1 and for medium bond conditions
Kvb l = 0,7 and Kvb2 = 0,5.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
328
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

3
I
I
Ser.min
.I

Key
1 FfEd,a force in CFRP at Crack A

2 FfEd,b force in CFRP at Crack B

3 CFRP strip
4 Crack A
5 Crack B

Figure J.5 - CFRP between flexural cracks

(5) The bond resistance between adjacent cracks, t:.frn.d may be determined us ing Formula (J.47) by
taking account of the beneficial effects of bond friction, t:.ffk.F• and clamping from curvature of t he beam,
t:.fr1<,e. in addition to the adhesive bond resistance between the cracks, t:.ffk.B as follows:

(J.47)

,Jscr,min
t:.ffk.B = 0,84 · ksys,b l · Vfem · fetm,surr · tr (l.48)

s . 4/3
r:. r.
Jfk.F
= r -0,9 . er.mm
f em tr (l.49)

K S . 1/ 3
r:, r _ ~. er,mm (J.50)
Jfk,c - hr tr

where

Kh = 2 000 for reinforced concrete members;

Kh = 0 for prestressed concrete members;
hr = min{lOO mm,h}.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
329
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(6) Unless a more accurate analysis is undertaken, 6.frnd may be calculated by ignoring slip of the CFRP.
(7) In the region where stirrups are required in accordance with J.11.1.2.5, verification of intermediate
crack debonding is not required.
J.11.1.2.4 End cover s eparation

(1) The maximum design shear force CVEd) at the end of the CFRP reinforcement shall be less than the
design resistance value against concrete cover separation VRd.ctE calculated in accordance to
Formula (J.51):

(J.51)

Where the condition in Formula (J.51) is not met, shear strengthening at the end of the longitudinal
strengthening shall be provided in accordance with Formula (J.52) with anchorage satisfying the
provisions of this Eurocode.

frwct ~ lbmct . tan8 (J.52)

where fbfRd is the CFRP anchorage capacity for the flexural strengthening system being designed.
Stirrups for end cover separation should be detailed as shown in Figure J.6.
Dimensions in millimetres

..'
..
... ..
~so
... /\ ...
./; \ \ .
/I \ \
1 2 1 ./ I 2 \ ".._
. I \ \

~- .
""-:. ·.
•,,:::~: • •••••• /1 Ed.min •• • •

-+!-+o--
~so ' ······-,.;····
..........._ - - _ Ed.ma!.-__..
........ / ~~--
~so

Key
1 end stirrup
2 flexural strengthening

Figure J.6 - CFRP shear stirrup arrangement to avoid end cover separation

J.11.1.2.5 Shear induce d separation

(1) Where the limits in Formula (J.53) or (J.54) are exceeded for members strengthened with EBR in
flexure, additional EBR stirrups shall be provided.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
330
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

TEct · O'swct < {75 MPa for ribbed steel bars

TRd - 25 MPa for plain ro und steel bars (J.53)

where TRct is calculated according to Formula (8.62) and O'swd according to Formula (8.63).
2
TEd ~ 0,33 'fc'l (J.54)

Where stirrups are required in accordance with Formulae (J.53) or (J.54), additional transverse EBR
stirrups should be provided to resist the shear force in Formula (J.55) with adequate anchorage.

(J.55)

J.11.1.3 Basic anchorage resistance - CFRP strips to concrete for NSM CFRP strengthening

(1) The design bond capacity per strip should be determined according to Formula (J.56) or (J.57).
For lbr ~ 115mm:

FbfRd = 0,95 · br · -rbAd · a//4 · lbr · (0,4 - 0,0015 · lbf) (J.56)

For lbr > 115mm:

FbfRd = 0,95 · br · rbAd · ar1/ 4 · ( 26,2 + 0,065 ·tan h (;~) · (lbf - 115)) (J.57)

where ar is the distance from the longitud inal axis of the strip to the free edge
(l.58)

The maximum design strength of the adhesive according for NSM CFRP systems may be obtained from
Formula (J.59):

(J.59)

where the maximum characteristic bond strength of the adhesive may be obtained from Formula (J.60):

rbAk = 0,6 . ( 2 . iAtk - 2 . fltk + fAck . f Atk + fAck) . fAtk (J.60)

where the definitions of fAck and fAtk are given in ).5.

rbck = 4,5 · ft;;;. (J.61)

The value of abA may be taken as 0,5 unless more accurate information is available based on production
data of NSM CFRP strips.
The value of abc may be taken as (1'/cc · k 1c · ktt) 0·5 unless more accurate information is available based
on production data of NSM CFRP strips, with 1'/w ktc and ku in accordance with 5.1.6.
NOTE For round and square CFRP bars further considerations for Fiord (e.g. bond tests) are necessary.

(2) The NSM anchorage should comply with provisions of j.11.1.2.4 for end cover separation.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
331
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(3) Where the limit in Formula (J.54) in J.11.1.2.5 is exceeded additional CFRP stirrups shall be provided
for NSM.

J.12 Detailing of members and particular rules

f.12.1 Flexural strengthening with externally bonded CFRP

(1) The following should be applied to the centre-to-centre spacing s r. of EBR CFRP strips:

Sf.max :5 0,2 times distance between points of zero moments;

Sf.max :5 3 times slab thickness;

Sf.max :5 0,4 times cantilever length;

Sf.max :5 400 mm.

(2) The distance of the longitudinal edge of the strip from the member edge should be at least
equivalent to the nominal concrete cover Cnom of the internal reinforcement.

J.12.2 Flexural strengthening with NSM CFRP

(1) Where slots are cut into the cover concrete for bonding of NSM CFRP systems, they should be
located such that the cover is not adversely compromised when considering the acc uracy of installation
equipment along with adequate tolerance for installation.
(2) The geometrical limits for slots and edge distances and spacing, for NSM CFRP bars and strips
should be in accordance with Table (J.2).

Table J.2 - Geometrical limits for slots and edge distances and spacing, in mm.

Geometrical limits Square NSM CFRP bars Round NSM CFRP bars NSM CFRP strips
tr+ 2 :5 0r + 2 :5 tr + 2 :5
The slot width hs1ot
hslot :5 tr+ 6 hs1ot :5 0r + 6 hs1ot :5 tr + 4
hr + 1 :5 tslot 0, + 1:::;
The slot depth t 510 t :5 b1 + 3
hr :5 tslot
ts iot :5 0r + 3 :::; br + 2
tr :::; br
Distance from slot to
edge ar in
ar ;:::: 4 · br ar ;:::: 4 · br ar ;:::: 4 · br
accordance with
Figure ).7
The centre-to-centre
spacing of max(br; Dupper}
max{ 3 · hsiot; Dupper} max{ 3 · hs1ot; Dupper}
adhesively bonded
CFRP reinforcement :5 s1 :5 min{0,2 · 10 b; 3 · h} :5 sr :5 min{0,2 · 10 b; 3 · h} :5 Sr :5 min{0,2 ·lob; 3 · h}
Sf

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
332
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Figure J.7 - Geometrical limits for slots and edge distances and spacings of strips
(3) Near curved edges of slabs and beams with NSM CFRP bars, a minimum edge distance of 150 mm
in the direction of centre of curvature should be maintained.
(4) The radius of curvature of the NSM CFRP strips shall be at least 2 m.

J.12.3 Permissible radius for b ending of CFRP

(1) Straight prefabricated CFRP bars should not be designed to be arranged at a radius that is less than
1 000 times their thickness unless stresses that arise from the bending process are considered in
determining the tensile strength fruk·

J.12.4Permissible layers of CF sheets and CFRP strips

(1) CF sheets should be bonded in no more than five layers for flexural or shear strengthening and a
maximum of ten layers for strengthening columns.
(2) CFRP strips should be bonded in no more than two layers. The maximum thickness of the CFRP strip
cross section excluding the adhesive should not exceed 3 mm.
(3) No more than a single NSM strip or bar should be bonded into one slot.

J.12.5 Lapping of closed wrapped strengthening systems

(1) For strengthening with closed wrapped sheets and strips req ui red lap length for the strengthening
system has to be considered.

J.13 Additional rules for precast concrete elements and structures

NOTE There are no add itional requirements.

J.14 Lightly reinforced concrete structures

NOTE There are no additional requ irements.

J.15 Material requirements for ABR strengthening systems

(1) ABR strengthening systems used for structures in accordance with this Eurocode shall comply with
the releva nt product standa rds.
(2) The properties of CFRP strips, except7]r, may be determined according to ISO 10406-3. The properties
of CF sheets, except 7Jr, may be determined according to ISO 10406-2.
(3) Recommended values for the parameters 77r, kcc, ksys.bl• ksys,bz, ksys,b 3, abA• and abc are provided in
this Annex. These values may alternatively be obtained using production data where available.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
333
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

AnnexK
(normative)

Bridges

K.1 Use of this annex

(1) This normative Annex contains additional provisions for design of bridges.
NOTE 1 NDPs in Clauses 1to14 and Annexes A to Scan be given different values in the National Annex for bridge
applications.

NOTE 2 More restrictive provisions to Clauses 1 to 14 and Annexes A to S can be given in the National Annex as
set out in this annex, or as specified by the relevant authority.

K.2 Scope and field of application

(1) This Normative Annex applies to b ri dges. The provisions of Clauses 1to14 and all normative annexes
apply to bridges unless otherwise stated in this No rmative Annex. The adoption of Informative Annexes
for bridges is indicated in the country's National Annex.

K.3 Terms, definitions and symbols

NOTE There are no additiona l requirements.

K.4 Basis of design

NOTE There are no additional requirements.

K.5 Materials
(1) In addition to Clause 5, the following paragraphs shall be applied.
(2) In addition to 5.2, the types of reinforcing steel, the maximum bar diameters, the strength classes
and the ductility classes may be further restricted.
NOTE The content of 5.2 applies unless the National Annex gives more restrictive provisions.

K.6 Durability and concrete cover

(1) In addition to Clause 6, the following paragraphs shall be applied.
(2) Where de-icing salts are used, exposed concrete surfaces above, adjacent to and in the ground
below the carriageway should be considered as being affected by de-icing salts according to Figure K.1.
NOTE The exposure classes, dimensions and distances of Zones I, II and Ill are given in Figure K.1 unless the
National Annex uses a different figure or gives different values.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
334
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Dimensions in metres

6 1 2 1 6

a) Road bridges

b) Inside of tunnel
Key
1 Zone I: XD3 + XF4
2 Zone II: XDl + XF2
3 Zone Ill: XC3
4 Tra ffic d irection

a Distance to ground surface in a)

Figure K.1 - Exposure classes for structures along roads

(3) Protection by waterproofing systems may be considered when determining the exposure classes
for bridge decks.
NOTE Exposure classes for bridge decks protected by waterproofing systems are: XDl for bridge deck top
surface; XD3 inside, top side and outside of curbs; and XD3 for surfaces under expansion joints directly affected by
water containing de-icing sa lts unless the Nationa l Annex gives different values.

(4) In addition to 6.5.2.3 and Table 6.6, more restrictive rules for minimum concrete cover for post-
tensioning ducts may be given.
NOTE The contents of 6.5.2.3 and Table 6.6 apply unless the National Annex gives more restrictive provisions.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
3 35
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

K. 7 Structural analysis
(1) In addition to Clause 7, the following paragraphs shall be applied.
(2) Instead of 7.1(6), more restrictive rules regarding what stiffnesses may be neglected in analysis and
design may be specified.
NOTE The contents of 7.1(6) apply unless the National Annex gives more restrictive provisions.

(3) Instead of 7.2.1.1(3) a nd 7.2.1.1(5) more restrictive provisions may be given for geometric
imperfections by a country in the National Annex within the limits given in Clause 7.
NOTE The contents of 7.2.1.1(3) and 7.2.1.1(5) apply unless the National Annex gives more restrictive
provisions.

(4) 7.2.2(4) and 7.2.3(6) shall not be applied.

(5) Stress increase in tendons according to 7.6.5(3) without detailed calculation shall not be applied.

K.8 Ultimate limit states (ULS)

(1) In addition to Clause 8, the following paragraphs shall be applied.
(2) In addition to 8.1.4, more restrictive provisions may be given by a country in the National Annex for
specific design situations within the limits of 8.1.4.
NOTE The contents of 8.1.4 apply unless the National Annex gives more restrictive provisions.

(3) Instead of 8.2.3(4) and 8.2.3(6) more restrictive values for cot0 and v may be given by a coun try in
the National Annex within the limits of8.2.3.
NOTE The values given in 8.2.3( 4) and 8.2.3(6) apply unless the National Annex gives more restrictive values.

(4) Instead of 8.2.5(3) more restrictive values for cot0f may be given by a country in the National Annex
within the limits of8.2.5.
NOTE The va lues given in 8.2.5(3) apply unless the National Annex gives more restrictive values.

(5) Instead of 8.2.6(6), more restrictive values Dlower > 8 mm may be specified by a coun try in the
National Annex within the limits of 8.2.6.
NOTE The values given in 8.2.6(6) apply unless the National Annex gives more restrictive values.

(6) Instead of 8.6(2), more restrictive values for vpart may be given by a country in the National Annex
within the limits of8.6.
NOTE The va lues given in 8.6(2) app ly unless the National Annex gives more restrictive values.

K.9 Serviceability limit states (SLS)

(1) In addition to Clause 9, the following paragraphs shall be applied.
(2) In addition to Clause 9, more restrictive provisions for serviceability limit state design (SLS) may
be given.
NOTE The contents of Clause 9 app ly unless the National Annex gives more restrictive provisions.

(3) In addition to 9.2.1(6) and Table 9.2 (NOP), in the t ransient design situation (e.g. construction or
maintenance) crack widths should be limited to W1im.ca1 for quasi-permanent load combination.
NOTE 1 The value wt1m,ca1 = 0,5 mm applies unless the National Annex gives different values.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
336
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

NOTE 2 The decompression criteria for frequent combination of action can be substituted by a stress limit of /ctm
or /ctm(t) fort< 28 days at the extreme fibre in the tensile zone unless the National Annex gives a different value.

(4) 9.3.2 and 9.3.3 shall not be applied.

(5) In addition to 9.4(2) and 9.4(4), additional damping effected by pavement, railings and other non-
structural components may be considered on the basis of experimental evidence.
NOTE Values for structural damping of railway bridges can be found in EN 1991-2:2021, Table 8.6 (NOP), and for
footbridges in EN 1991-2:2021, Annex G.

K.10Fatigue verification
K.10.1 General

(1) In addition to Clause 10 and E.4, the following paragraphs shall be applied when using damage
equivalent stress range.
NOTE A fatigue verification can generally be omitted for the following structures and members:

footbridges, with the exception of structural components with wind and rain induced vibrations;

buried arch and frame structures with a minimum earth cover of1,00 m for road bridges and 1,50 m for railway
bridges, respectively;

foundations of bridges except those of frame and arch structures in railway bridges;

piers and columns which do not have moment connection to superstructures;

abutments of road and railway bridges which do not have moment connection to superstructures, except for
deck slabs of abutments.

(2) In addition to 10.7, more restrictive provisions for shear at interfaces may be given.
NOTE The contents of 10.7 apply unless the National Annex gives more restrictive provisions.

K.10.2 General rules using damage equivalent stress range

(1) The relevant fatigue load models for fatigue verification of bridges using the method of damage
equivalent stress range (FLM3 for road bridges, LM71 for railway bridges) given in EN 1991-2 and
procedures for the calculation of the equivalent stress range .llas.cqu for superstructures of road and
railway bridges given in EN 1990 should be used.

K.10.3 Verification for reinforcement using damage equivalent stress range

K.10.3.1 General

(1) For road and railway bridges th e damage equivalent stress range for reinforcement verification in
Formula (E.l) should be calculated according to Formula (K.1):

Llas,equ = Llas.Ec ·As (K.1)

where

.llas.Ec is the reinforcement stress range caused by the following fatigue load models:
For road bridges: based on the load combination given in 10.2 with fatigue load model 3
(FLM3) according to EN 1991-2 with the axle loads increased by the following factors:

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
337
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

1,75 for verification at intermediate supports in continuous bridges,

1,40 for verification in other areas.
For railway bridges: load model 71 (and where required SW/0) according to EN 1991-2;
As is the damage equivalent factor for fatigue.
(2) The correction factor As reflects the influence of span, annual traffic volume, design service life,
multiple lanes/tracks, and may be calculated by Formula (K.2):

As = qJ · As.I · As.2 · As,3 · As,4 (K.2)

where
As,1 is a factor accounting for member type (e.g. continuous beam) and takes into account the
damaging effect of traffic depending on the critical length of the influence line or area;
As,2 is a factor that takes into account the traffic volume;
As,3 is a factor that takes into account the design service life of the bridge;
As,4 is a factor to be applied when the structural element is loaded by more than one lane/track;
<p equals the damage equivalent impact factor (/)fat controlled by the surface roughness according
to EN 1991-2, Annex B for road bridges and the dynamic factor </J according to EN 1991-2 for
railway bridges, respectively.

K.10.3.2 Road bridges

(1) For road bridges As.1 should be determined from Figures K.2 and K.3 to take into account the critical
length of the influence line and the shape of S-N-curve.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
338
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Ast
2
"
1,8

1,6
"

" v v-
_.......
--- 1

~ 2
1.4
--- ~
~

--- 3

------
~v _..
1,2 ~

1
~

i---
---
l----
~

0,8 . . . .. .. . . .. .. ... . . . . . . ...

0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 x
Key
1 couplers for reinforcing steel
2 curved tendons in steel ducts
3 reinforcing steel (straight and bent); pre-tensioning (all); post-tensioning (strand in plastic ducts or straight
tendons in steel ducts)
X critical length of influence line [m]

Figure K.2 - .ils,1 value for fatigue verification in the intermediate support area of road bridges

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
339
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Verification in span and for carriageway slab

As1
2
f-

1,8
l a)
f- /
lb)
1,6 /

,,..,. .. 2 c) 2 a)
1.4 /
i_-
2b)
1,2
I/ /
/'
'"/
/'

.......-
3b) Sa)+ 4 a) + 4b)
3c) + 4c)I / '
" I
1
f-

0,8 . . ... . ... .... . . ...

0 2 4 6 810 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 x
Key
1) couplers for reinforcing steel a) continuous member
2) cmved tendons in steel ducts b) single span member
3) re inforcing s tee l (straight and bent); pre-tensioning c) deck s lab
(all); post-tensioning (strand in plastic ducts or
s traight te ndons in s teel ducts)
4) shear reinforcement
X critical length of influe nce line [m)

Figure K.3 - .As,1 value for fatigue verification in span and for local elements of road bridges

(2) For road bridges ?.s,2 reflects the influence of the annual t raffic volume and may be calculated by
Formula (K.3) also depending on the traffic type:
1/k r2
N
- ( obs ) (K.3)
As,2 = Q . 2,0 . 106

where
Nobs is the number oflorries per year according to EN 1991-2:2023, Table 6.7;
kf2 is the slope of the appropriate S-N-Line to be taken from Tables E.1 (NOP) and E.2 (NOP);
Q is a factor for traffic type according to Table K.1.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
340
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Table K.1 - Factors for traffic type of r oad bridges

-
Q-factor for traffic type (see EN 1991-2)
slope of S-N curve
long distance medium distance local traffic
ktz = 5 1,0 0,90 0,73
kri = 7 1,0 0,92 0,78
kri = 9 1,0 0,94 0,82

(3) As,3 reflects the influence of the service life and may be calculated from Formula (K.4):

N )1/kf2
I.5 3 =~
( 100
(K.4)
'

where

Nye•.-. is the design service life of the bridge;

krz is the slope of appropriate S-N line to be taken from Tables E.1 (NOP) and E.2 (NOP).
(4) As,4 reflects the influence of multiple lanes/t racks and may be calculated by Formula (K.5):

1 _ L... Nobs,1. )t/kr2

"'
ll5 4 - (K.5)
'
( Nobs,l

where

N obs.1 is the number of lorries expected on lane i per year;

N obs.1 is the number of lorries on the slow Jane per year.

K.10.3.3 Railway bridges

(1) For railway bridges, As.1 accounts for the critical length of the influence line and the traffic mix. The
values of As.1 for standard traffic mix and heavy traffic mix may be taken from Table K.2. The values have
been calculated on the basis of a constant ratio of bending moments to stress ranges.
The values given for traffic mix correspond to the combination of train types given in Annex 0 of
EN 1991-2:2023.
Values of As,1 for a critical length of influence line between 2 m and 20 m may be obtained from the
For mula (K.6):

As,1 (L) = As,1 (2 m) + [As,i(20 m) - As,1 (2 m)] ·(lg L - 0,3) (K.6)

where

L is the critical length of the influence li ne [m];

As.1(2 m) is the As,1 value for L = 2 m;
As,1 (20 m) is the As,1value for L = 20 m.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
341
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Ta ble K.2 - A.s,1 values for s imply s upporte d and continuous members of railway bridges

a) s imply s upported members b) continuous m emb ers (interior s p a n)

L [m] STM HTM L [m] STM HTM

:5 2 0,90 0,95 :5 2 0,95 1,05

(1) (1)
;::: 20 0,65 0,70 ;::: 20 0,50 0,55
:5 2 1.00 1.05 :5 2 1,00 1,15
(2) (2)
;::: 20 0,70 0,70 ;::: 20 0,55 0,55
:5 2 1,25 1,35 :5 2 1,25 1,40
(3) (3)
;::: 20 0,75 0,75 ;::: 20 0,55 0,55
:5 2 0,80 0,85 :5 2 0,75 0,90
(4) (4)
;::: 20 0,40 0.40 ;::: 20 0,35 0,30
d) continuous members (intermediate
c) continuous members (end span)
support area)
L [m] STM HTM L [m] STM HTM

:5 2 0,90 1.00 :5 2 0,85 0,85

(1) (1)
;::: 20 0,65 0,65 ;::: 20 0,70 0,75
:5 2 1,05 1,15 :5 2 0,90 0,95
(2) (2)
;::: 20 0,65 0,65 ;::: 20 0,70 0,75
:5 2 1.30 1.45 :5 2 1,10 1,10
(3) (3)
;::: 20 0,65 0,70 ;::: 20 0,75 0,80
:5 2 0,80 0,90 :5 2 0,70 0,70
(4) (4)
;::: 20 0,35 0,35 ;::: 20 0,35 0,40
STM standard traffic mix
HTM heavy traffic mix
(1) reinforcing steel, pre-tensioning (all), post-tensioning (tendons in plastic ducts and straight
tendons in steel ducts); S·N curve with k11 = 5, kri = 9 and N* = 10° (values may be changed due
to changes in kn and kri or N* );
(2) post-tensioning (curved tendons in steel ducts); S-N curve with kn = 3, kri = 7 and N* = 10°
(values may be changed due to changes in kn and kn or N*);
(3) couplers (prestressing steel); S-N curve with kn = 5, kr:z =Sand N* = 10° (values may be changed
due to changes in kn and kn or N* );
(4) couplers (reinforcing steel); welded bars including tack welding and butt joints; S·N curve with
kn = 3, krl = 5 and N* = 107 (values may be changed du e to changes in kn and krl or N*).

NOTE 1 Interpolation between the given L-va lues according to Formula (K.6) may be carried out
NOTE 2 Different N* values can be considered as follows: As.J,N'new = As. 1,N"old (N*otd/N*new) 1/kn

(2) No values of As,1 for a light traffic mix are given in Table K.2. For bridges designed to carry a light
traffic mix the values for As.1 to be used may be based either on the values given in Table K.2 for standard
traffic mix or on values det ermined from detailed calculations.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
342
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(3) il,,2 reflects the influence of the annual t raffic volume. ils.2 may be calculated by Formula (K.4).

(4) ils,3 reflects the influence of the service life and may be calculated from Formula (K.7):

A _ Nyears ) 1/krz (K.7)

s,3 - ( 100

where

N ycars is the design service life of the bridge;

kri is the slope of appropriate S-N curve to be taken from Tables E.l (NOP) and E.2 (NOP).
(5) For railway structures carrying multiple tracks, the fatigue loading should be applied to a maximum
of two tracks in the most unfavourable positions (see pr EN 1991-2). The effect of loading from two tracks
may be calculated by Formula (K.8):
1
A5 ,4 -_ ( n 5t + (1 - n 5 t ) · s 1krz + (1 - n 5t ) · s 2kr2) /kri (K.8)

where
L'w1
S1 = - - (K.9)
L'iat+2
L'ia2
Sz = - - (K.10)
L'ia1+2
where
is the proportion of traffic that crosses the bridge simultaneously (suggested value
nst = 0,12);

L'ia1, L'ioz is the stress range due to load model 71 on one track at the section to be checked;
is the st ress range at t he same section due to the load model LM71 on any two tracks,
according to EN 1991-2;
is the slope of the appropriate S-N curve from Tables E.l (NOP) and E.2 (NOP).
If only compressive stresses occur under traffic loads on a track, the corresponding value should be Si = 0.

K.10.4 Verification for concrete using damage equivalent stress range

K.10.4.1 Road bridges

(1) Road bridges should be verified for the combination ofactions in Formula (10.1) with the load
model 3 (FLM3) according to EN 1991-2.
NOTE Fatigue verification of members of road bridges in which the maximum concrete stress under characteristic
load combination is limited to ac ~ 0,6 [ck can be om itted.
K.10.4.2 Railway bridges

(1) For railway bridges, the upper and lower stresses of the damage equivalent stress amplitude used
in Formula (E. 2) should be calculated according to Formula (K.11)

= YFf ' ( Oc,pcrm + Ac ( CTc,max,71 - CTc,pcrm))

CTcd,max.C<lu
(K.11)
Ocd,min.equ = YFf. ( Oc,pe rm - Ac (ac,perm - O'c,min,71))

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
343
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

where

Oc,perm is the compressive concrete stress caused by the combination of actions in Formula
(10.1), without load model 71;
ac,max,71 is the maximum compressive stress caused by the combination of actions in Formula
(10.1) including load model 71 and the dynamic factor <P according to EN 1991-2;
Oc,min,71 is the minimum compressive stress under the combination of actions in Formula (10.1)
including load model 71 and the dynamic factor <P according to EN 1991-2;
is a correction factor to calculate the upper and lower stresses of the damage equivalent
stress spectrum from the stresses caused by load model 71.
(2) The correction factor Ac accounts for the permanent stress, the span, annual traffic volume, design
service life and multiple tracks. It should be calculated from Formula (K.12):

Ac = Ac,o · Ac,1 · Ac.z,3 · Ac,1 (K.12)

where

Ac,o is a factor to take account of the permanent stress;

A.:, 1 is a factor accounting for member type (e.g. continuous beam) that takes into account the
damaging effect of traffic depending on the critical length of the influence line or area;
Ac,2,3 is a factor to account for the traffic volume and the design service life of the bridge;
Ac.1 is a factor to be applied when the structural member is loaded by more than one track
(3) fl.c.o reflects the influence of the permanent stress and may be calculated from Formula (K.13)

ilC,Q = 0 94 + 0 2 af.c.perm >- 1

I I for the compression zone (K.13}
cd,fat

Ac.o = 1 for the precompressed tensile zone (including prestressing effect)

(4) Ac.1 is a function of the critical length of the influence line and the traffic. For standard traffic mix
and heavy traffic mix it may be taken from Table K.3.
Values of Ac,1 for critical lengths of influence lines between 2 m and 20 m may be obtained by applying
Formula (K.6) with As,1 replaced by A.:,1.
(5) Ac.2.3 reflects the influence of annual traffic volume and design service life and may be calculated
from Formula (K.14):

1 [ Vol ] 1 [Nyea rs] (K.14)

ilc,2,3 = 1 +3lg 25·106 +3 lg loO

where

Vol is the volume of traffic (tonnes/years/track);

Nyears is the design service life of the bridge.
(6) Ac,4 reflects the effect of loading from more than one track. For structures carrying multiple tracks,
the fatigue loading should be applied to a maximum of two tracks in the most unfavourable positions (see
EN 1991-2). The effect ofloading from two tracks may be calculated from Formulae (K.15) a nd (K.16):

Ac,4 = 1 + (1/8) lg nst 2: 0,54 fora S 0,8 (K.15)

Ac.4 = 1 fora> 0,8 (K.16}

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
344
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

. max{IO'ct I; luczl}
with a= I I (K.17)
O'c1+2
where

ns, is the proportion of traffic crossing the bridge simultaneously (recommended value
ns; = 0,12);
O'c1, O'c2 is the compressive stress caused by load model 71 on one track, including the dynamic
factor for load model 71 according to EN 1991-2;
O'c1+2 is the compressive st ress caused by load model 71 on two tracks, including the dynamic
factor for load model 71 according to EN 1991-2.
(7) No values of ilc.1 are given in Table K.3 for a light traffic mix. For bridges designed to carry a light
traffic mix the values for ilc,1 to be used may be based either on the values given in Table K.3 for standard
traffic mix or on values derived from detailed calculat ions.

Table K.3 - Ac,1 values for simply supported and continuous members of railway bridges

a) Simply supported members b) Continuous members (interior span)

L (m) STM HTM L (m) STM HTM

~2 0,70 0,70 ~2 0,75 0,90

(1) (1)
;::: 20 0,75 0,75 ;::: 20 0,55 0,55
~ 2 0,95 1,00 ~ 2 1,05 1,15
(2) (2)
;::: 20 0,90 0,90 ;::: 20 0,65 0,70
d) Continuous members (intermediate
c) Continous members (end span)
support area)
L [m) STM HTM L [m] STM HTM

~2 0,75 0,80 ~2 0,70 0,75

(1) (1)
;::: 20 0,70 0,70 ;::: 20 0,85 0,85
~2 1,10 1,20 ~ 2 1,10 1,15
(2) (2)
;::: 20 0,70 0,70 ;::: 20 0,80 0,85
STM - standard traffic mix,
HTM - heavy traffic mix
(1) compression zone
(2) precompressed tensile zone
NOTE Interpolation between the given L-values accord ing to Formula (K.6) is allowed, with ils,1 replaced
by Ac,l·

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
345
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

K.11 Detailing of reinforcement and post-tensioning tendons

(1) In addition to Clause 11, the following paragraphs shall be applied.
(2) In addition to 11.2, more restrictive provisions for bundles may be given by a country in the
National Annex within the limits of Clause 11.
NOTE The contents of 11.2 apply unless the Nationa l Annex gives more restrictive provisions.

(3) In addition to 11.4, more restrictive provisions for methods of anchorage may be given by a country
in the National Annex within the limits of 11.4.
NOTE The contents of 11.4 apply unless the National Annex gives more restrictive provisions.

(4) In addition to 11.5, more restrictive provisions for types of laps may be given by a country in the
National Annex within the limits given in 11.5.
NOTE The contents of11.5 apply unless the National Annex gives more restrictive provisions.

(5) In addition to 11.6, more restrictive provisions for post-tensioning tendons may be given by a
country in the National Annex within the limits given in 11.6.
NOTE The contents of 11.6 apply unless the National Annex gives more restrictive provisions.

K.12 Detailing of members and particular rules

K.12.1 General
(1) In addition to Clause 12, the following paragraphs shall be applied.
(2) 12.9 shall not be applied.
(3) Voids in structural members should be drained.

K.12.2 Minimum reinforcement rules

(1) Brittle failure of bridges due to loss of cross section of prestressing tendons (e.g. due to corrosion)
should be prevented. Methods a) orb) below may be applied:
a) Check that the structure with the remaining prestressing has sufficient strength for the traffic load
combination. The requirement may be verified by the follow ing procedure:

1) Calculate the maximum sagging and hogging bending moments in each span due to the relevant
combination of actions, MEd·
2) Determine the reduced cross sectional area ofprestressing, Ap.red, and corresponding prestressing
load resultants that make the tensile stress reach the relevant tensile strength at the extreme
tension fibre when the section is subject to M Ed· Immediate and time-dependent prestressing
losses should be taken into consideration.
3) Calculate the ultimate flexural capacity, Mnt1,red, of the section with reduced cross s ectional area of
prestressing, A p,rcd. and ordinary reinforcement using material partial safety factors for accidental
design situations.
4) Check that Mnd.rcd ~ MEd·
b) Ensure that there is sufficient longitudinal reinforcement to compensate for the loss of resistance
when the tensile strength of the concrete is exceeded and the section cracks.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
346
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

If tensile stresses occur anywhere in the section for the relevant load combination (statically
determinated effects of prestressing ignored, but indeterminated effects included, see 7.6.1(1)),
longitudinal reinforcement should be at least:

Mrep
A . =-- (K.18)
s,min Z . fyk

where

Mrep cracking moment with extreme fibre tension reaching the relevant tensile strength for sections
without prestressing. At the joint of segmental precast elements Mrer = O;
z lever arm at the ultimate limit state related to the reinforcing steel.
NOTE: The relevant load combinations for determining M Ed and for checking whether tensile stresses occur are the
frequent combination and the characteristic combination, respectively, and fam is the relevant tensile strength of
concrete unless the National Annex gives different combinations and tensile strengths.

K.12.3 Bridges with external or unbonded internal tendons

(1) External prestressing tendons should be inspectable and replaceable. For internal unbonded
tendons, the anchorages should be inspectable.
(2) Bridges should be verified to ensure that any one tendon of the external and, if specified in the
project specification, any one of the unbonded tendons can be replaced. A project specific load
combination with permissible live loads (traffic) should be defined for the replacement.
(3) When designing members for anchorage and deviation of external tendons, deviation forces
accounting for an angular tolerance of ±3° should be taken into account.
(4) The risk of vibration of external tendons induced between tendon fix points by traffic loads should
be controlled by adequate detailing of tendon supports. Without more detailed analysis, spacing of
tendon support points should be limited to 12 m for railway bridges and 18 m for road bridges.

K.12.4 Cable stayed, extradosed and suspension bridges

(1) For stay cables, extradosed cables and hangers for cable supported members and st ruct ures, the
general provisions of EN 1990:2023, A.2, should be applied.
(2) For ultimate limit state verifications, the design value of tension resistance should be assumed in
accordance with EN 1993-1-11.
(3) In addition to 10.4(1), for prestressing cables which extend above or below the bridge deck and in
which
the variations of tensile stress under frequent t raffic loads are less than 100 MPa;
the vibrations caused by wind are negligible;
the maximum tensile stress under the characteristic combinations at SLS should be:

max C1cable ::; ,60C1uk if llarreq::; 50 MPa (K.19)

llarreq ) - o,2s
max C1cable::; 0,46 . ( 140 MPa . a uk if 50 MPa < llarreq ::; 100 MPa (K.2 0)

where

auk is the characteristic breaking strength of the cable: auk= Fuk/ Am;
llarreq is the variation of the tensile stress under frequent traffic loads.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
347
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(4) When cables are used as hangers to suspend the deck of bow-string bridges, the sequence of
tensioning and the level of pretensioning after losses should ensure that u nder the characteristic
combination at SLS a residual stress of at least 100 MPa is present in all hangers.

K.13Additional rules for precast concrete elements and structures

(1) In addition to Clause 13, the follow ing paragraphs shall be applied.
(2) In addition to 13.5.1 and Table 13.1. more restrictive rules for minimum concrete cover and for
spacing of pre-tensioning tendons may be given.
NOTE The contents of 13.5.1 and Table 13.1 for minimum concrete cover and for spacing of pre-tensioning
tendons apply unless the National Annex gives more restrictive provisions.

(3) 13.6, 13.7.1(9), (11), (12), (13), 13.6.3 and 13.8 shall not be applied ..
(4) In the case of segmental construction with precast elements and without internal bonded tendons
in the tension chord, the effect of opening of the joint at ULS shall be considered. In these conditions, in
the absence of a more detailed analys is, the force in the tension chord should be assumed to remain
unchanged after the joints have opened. In consequence, as the applied load increases and the joints open
e
(Figure K.4), the concrete stress field inclination within the web increases. The depth of concrete
section available for the flow of the web compression field decreases to a value of Zred (see
Formula (K.21)). The shear capacity may be evaluated in accordance with 8.2.3 by assuming a value of e
derived from the minimum value of residual depth Zred·

Zred = bw ·VEd r (cote+ tane)

V ·Jed
(K.21)

The prestressing force should be increased, if necessary, so that, at ULS under the combination of bending
moment and shear, the joint opening is limited to the value h - Zred as calculated above.
NOTE The minimum value of Zred is O,Sh unless the National Annex gives a different value.

(5) Shear reinforcement should be provided within a distance Zred ·cote, but not greater than the
segment length, from both edges of the joint, having the area per unit length according to Formula (K.22):

(K.22)
s Zred · fywd · cote

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
348
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

1 2 3

Key
1 axes of theoretical tie
2 axes of theoretical struts
3 Tension chord of truss (external tendon)
4 Field A: arrangement of stirrups with Bmax (cote = 1,0)
5 Field B: arrangement of stirrups with Bmin (cot 8 = 2,5)

Figure K.4 - Diagon al s tress fields in the web across a joint between segments

(6) In the case of segmental construction with precast box elements s ubject to torsion and no in ternal
bonded prestressing in the tension region, the opening of a joint to an extent greater than the thickness
of the corresponding flange should not be permitted unless a sufficient strength can be demonstrated
with refined design models accounting for this opening of the joint.
NOTE Such amount of joint opening induces a substantial modification of the torsional resisting mechanism.

K.14Plain and lightly reinforced concrete structures

NOTE There are no additional requirements.

K.15 Amendments to Annex G

(1) In addition to Annex G, more restrictive provisions for des ign of membrane-, shell- and slab-
elements may be given.
NOTE The contents of Annex Gapply unless the National Annex gives more restrictive provisions.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
349
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

AnnexL
(informative)

Steel Fibre Reinforced Concrete Structures

L.1 Use of this annex

(1) This informative Annex provides supplementary rules for structures which comprise steel fibre
reinforced concrete (SFRC).
NOTE National choice on the app li cation of this Informative Annex is given in the Nationa l Annex. If the
National Annex conta ins no information on the application of this Informative Annex, it can be used.

L.2 Scope and field of application

(1) This Informative Annex covers the design of concrete structures which comprise steel fibre reinforced
concrete with or without re inforcing steel, pretensioning or post-tensioni ng tendons.
(2) This Informative Annex applies to normal weight and heavy weight, precast or cast in place concrete
in accordance with 5.1.1.
NOTE Slabs on ground that are not required for the structura l stability (e.g. industria l floors) are not intended
to be designed with these provisions, and can be designed based on alternative provisions due to the specific
requirements and conditions of such appli cations.

L.3 General
(1) All provisions of this Eurocode in Clauses 1to14 apply unless specifically omitted or supplemented
in Annex L.

L.4 Basis of design - Partial factors for materials

(1) Partial factors for SFRC in tension rsr-shall be applied for the limit states in accordance with Table L.1
(NOP). For SFRC in compression, the values ye given in Table 4.3 (NOP) apply.
NOTE The values of y,, g iven in Table L.1 (N DP) apply unless the National Annex gives d ifferent values

Table L.1 (NDP) - Partial factors for SFRC in tension

Design situations - Limit states y,,

Persistent and transient design situations 1,50
Accidental design s ituations 1,20
Serviceability limit states 1,00

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
350
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

L.5 Materials
L.5.1 Properties

(1) Characteristic residual strengths /R.1k and fR.3k for concrete reinforced with steel fibres shall be
determined according to EN 14651. They shall be classified into both the strength classes SC (1,0; 1,5; 2,0;
2,5; 3,0; 3.5; 4,0; 4 .5; 5,0; 6,0; 7,0; 8,0) and the ductili ty classes a) toe) according to Table L. 2.
NOTE 1 The classification is denominated accord ing to /R.tkand /R.3k values. The selection of the strength class is
obtained by comparing the experimentally determined/R, tkWith the limits defining the strength classes, specified in
brackets. The ductility class, denominated by a Jetter, is selected by comparing the experimentally determinedfa.3k
with the va lues of Table L.2.

NOTE 2 /R.tkand /R.3k to use for design correspond to the values obtained from classifying the strength class and
ductility class according to Table L.2, respectively.

NOTE 3 Values of characteristic residual flexural strength used in this Eurocode correspond to those determined
using EN 14651 at the age t.-erdefined in 5.1.3(2).

Table L.2 - Performance classes for SFRC [MPa]

Ductility Strength classes SC CfR.1k ~ Sl) Analytical

classes 1 ,0 1,5 2,0 2,5 3,0 3,5 4, 0 4,5 5,0 6,0 7,0 8,0 formulae

a 0,5 0,8 1,0 1,3 1,5 1,8 2,0 2,3 2,5 3,0 3,5 4,0 fR.3k°?. 0,5SC
b 0,7 1,1 1,4 1,8 2,1 2,5 2,8 3,2 3,5 4,2 4,9 5,6 fR.3k°?. 0,7SC
c 0,9 1,4 1,8 2,3 2,7 3,2 3,6 4,1 4,5 5,4 6,3 7,2 fR.3k°?. 0,9SC
d 1,1 1,7 2,2 2,8 3,3 3,9 4,4 5,0 5,5 6,6 7,7 8,8 fR.3k°?.1,1SC
e 1,3 2,0 2,6 3,3 3,9 4,6 5,2 5,9 6,5 7,8 9,1 10,4 fR,3k "?. l,3SC

NOTE 4 All strength classes apply unless the National Annex excludes specific classes.

NOTE 5 Intermediate classes can be used, if included in the National Annex.

L.5.2 Strength

(1) T he characteristic residual flexural strengths fR.tk and fR.Jk necessary for design correspond to the
classificati on values defined in L.5.1.
(2) If requi red, the strength of SFRC should be specified for times t that can be befor e or after trcr for a
number of stages (e.g. demoulding, removal of propping, t ransfer of prest ress ).

L.5.3 Elastic deformation

(1) The values of the modulus of elasticity, the Poisson's ratio and the thermal expansion coefficient may
be taken according to 5.1.
(2) Values of the modulus of elasticity and Poisson's ratio may be sub ject to higher variation than for
ordinary concrete when steel fibres are introduced into the mix. Where they are a significant component
of action effects, they should be determined by testing.

L.5.4 Creep and shrinkage

(1) Creep and shrinkage properties m ay be taken accord ing to 5.1.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
351
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

NOTE Creep in uniaxial tension affects only elastic strain, but fibres work in cracked condition and therefore
the effect on structural behaviour can be usually neglected.

(2) Values of creep and shrinkage may be subject to higher variation than for ordinary concrete when
steel fibres are introduced into the mix. Where they a re a significant component of action effects, they
should be determined by testing.

L.5.5 Design assumptions

L.5.5.1 Design residual tensile strengths

(1) For design according to Annex L, Formula (L. 1) should be satisfied:

f R,tkf fctk;0,05 2:: 0,5 (L.l)
(2) The values of the design residual tensile strength./F1sd and/Ftud should be taken as follows according to
the rigid-plastic model (Figure L.2 a)):
!Fts,ef = Ko · KG · 0,37 · fR.tk (L.2)
fFtu,ef = Ko • KG . 0,33 . fR,3k (L.3)

fFtsd = fFts.er/YsF (L.4)

fFtud = fFtu,er/YsF (L.5)

(3) The factor accounting for fibre orientation should be taken as Ko = 0,5 unless otherwise specified in
Annex Lor verified by testing.
(4) For bending moments, shear and punching shear forces, torsion, crack width control and deflections
in slabs and beams made of concrete with consistency classes S2- S5 in accordance with EN 206, Jq) = 1,0
may be used. Note that Ko = 1,0 corresponds to the orientation factor expected for test specimens
according to EN 14651.
NOTE For concrete consistency SS, the provision given in (6) appli es in case of SFRC without additional
longitudinal reinforcement having a depth under 250 mm.

(5) More accurate information based on production of SFRC and well-founded theoretical approaches
may be used to establish more accurate values for Jq}. For favourable effects, an orientation factor Jq) > 1,0
may be applied if experimentally verified. When Ko > 1,0 is applied in one direction, the Ko in the
orthogonal direction must be considered lower than 1,0.
(6) For self compacting concrete, Ko in every direction should be experimentally determined by using
specimens and casting methods representative for the real structure. For design the value of Ko shall not
exceed 1.7.
(7) The factor accoun ting for the effect of member s ize on the coefficient of variation l<G shall be calculated
according to (L.6). When A'kmax is set equal to 0,7 based on L.15(5), a maximum value of 1,3 shall be
considered for !<(;. For torsion, l<G = 1,0 shall be used.
KG = 1,0 + Act · 0,5 :::; 1,5 (L.6)
where
Act area of the tension zone (in m 2 ) of the cross section involved in the failure of an equilibrium
system.
(8) For shear, Act should be calculated along the surface of the shear crack, using the angle of the shear
crack calculated in accordance with 8.2.
(9) Formula (5.4) in 5.1.6 may be used for determination of Y/cc unless more accurate values are obtained
from testing.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
352
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

L.5.5.2 Stress-strain relation for s tructural analysis

(1) For structural analysis the constitutive law given in Figure L.1 may be used. The parameters should
be determined as:
fFn,ef = Ko . KG . 0,37fR,lk (L.7)
!Ft3,ef = Ko. KG. (0,57fR.3k - 0,26/R,l k) (L.8)

Gftu = Wuf lcs :5 2,5 mmf lcs :5 Gftud (L.9)

l = {min {h; sr.m.cal.F} for members subjected to combined axial and bending
(L.10)
cs sr.m,cal,F for members subjected to uniaxial tension
Ectm = fctmf Ecm and EF,o = 2 · Ec1m, see figure L.1 (L.11)
Where Sr,m,cal,F is the mean crack spacing defined in L. 9.3, Formula (L.26).
As a simplification a constant value of lcs = 125 mm may be used unless explicitly precluded in this
standard.
NOTE 1 The value of EFtud is 0,02 unless the National Annex gives a different value.

NOTE 2 Simplified stress distributions in cross sections used to determine the resistance to bending with axial
force at the ultimate limit states are provided in L.8.1.

NOTE 3 For box girders or U·shaped sections without longitudinal reinforcement in a flange or slab, subjected
to predominately uniaxial tension, sr.m.cal,F should be taken as the distance between adjacent webs.

NOTE 4 The structural characteristic length modifies the localized crack opening in an equ ivalent average strain
between two following cracks, or, in case of a single crack, in the strain accumulated in an equivalent segment,
treated as an elasto-softening hinge.

In millimetres
a

/ crr.n -

I\
f Ftl, cf
f Ft3, ef
!
I

Ectm EF,O =0,5/Jcs E

Figure L.1 - Constitutive law of SFRC in uniaxial tension for s tructural analysis

(2) The relation between acand c,in compression in Formula (5.6) may be used to model the response of
SFRC to short-term uniaxial compression provided the following modifications in the parameters are
made:
(L.12)
and, for Cc1 :5 £:5 Ccu1:

k = 1 + J 82- 20
2,2fR.1k
(L.13)

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
353
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

and
fcul =k · fc1 (L.14)

L.6 Durability - Minimum cover

(1) For SFRC, the concrete cover due to durability requirements Cmin,dur according to 6.5.2.2 shall only
apply to the embedded re inforcement, not to the steel fibres.
(2) To avoid fibre accumulation, a minimum cover of Cmin = 20 mm to embedded reinforcement shall be
used for all SFRC members.
(3) For ULS design of SFRC in exposure classes XC2-XC4, XD1-XD3, and XS1-XS3, designed to be
uncracked at SLS, the tensile strength of SFRC at the greatest distance from the neutral axis shall be
disregarded within a layer of Cr,<1ur = 10 mm from the exposed surface.
(4) For ULS and SLS design ofSFRC in exposure classes XC2-XC4, XD1-XD3, and XS1-XS3 designed to be
cracked at SLS, the residual tensile strength of SFRC at the greatest distance from the neutral axis shall
be disregarded with a distance of Cf,dur=kdur·Cmin,dur from the exposed surface unless provisions (5) or ( 6)
are satisfied.
If the characteristic crack width calculated in accordance with 9.2 is less than the crack width limit w1;m,<:.1l
stated in Table 9.2 (NOP) and L.9, the values of Cr,<1ur may be reduced as follows:
WK.cal
Cfdur
1
= k dttr Cmindur -
1
- ;::: 10 mm
Wli m,cal
(L.15)

NOTE The va lue of kdur is 0,50 unless the National Annex gives a different va lue for use in a Country.

(5) If stainless steel fibres are used, the residual tensile strength of SFRC through the full cross-section
may be used.
(6) The residual tensile strength of SFRC throughout the full cross-section may be used during the
construction phase.

L.7 Structural analysis - Plastic analysis

(1) Plastic analysis of SFRC structures without any direct check of rotation capacity may be used for the
ultimate limit state analysis of the following structure types:
Foundations and slabs supported directly on ground even without any ordinary reinforcement.

For statically indeterminate foundations elements on piles (rafts and slabs) without reinforcing steel,
subject to the following conditions:

the ductility class is at least c; and

ifthe member is needed for structural stability Kc fR,3k/fctm,n ;::: 1,0.

For statically indeterminate foundation elements on piles (rafts and slabs) and elevated slabs with
reinforcing steel, subject to the following conditions:

- two-way systems with L,/Ly'.5.1,5 and As ~ As.min as defined in Clause L.12 (L,>Ly);

- one-way systems and two-way systems with L,/L y >1,5 and As ~ ffducf As,min with As,minas defined in
Clause L.12 (L,>Ly).
NOTE The va lue «due•= 2,0 applies unless the National Annex gives a different value for use in a Country.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
354
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(2) For members not fulfilling the requirements of (1), methods based on plastic analysis, or linear
analysis with redistribution, shall only be applied where the deformation capacity of the critical sections
is demonstrated to be sufficient by calculation for the envisaged failure mechanisms to be formed.
NOTE Due to possible localisation effects occurring at yielding of longitudina l reinforcement, minimum
reinforcement as prescribed in L.12.1 is not su fficient to generally allow plastic analys is without verification of the
deformation capacity.

(3) Methods to be used for verification of plastic deformation capacity shall take local variations in
residual tensile strength into account.

L.8 Ultimate Limit States (ULS)

L.8.1 Bending with or without axial force

(1) A simplified rigid plastic approach for the residual tensile strength according to Figure L.2 a) may be
used for ultimate limit state design of a member subjected to bending with or without axial compression,
for ductility classes a, band c.
For classes d and e this approach should only be used to determine the ULS moment capacity at the design
tensile strain limit.
(2) The tensile strain limit relevant to the simplified rigid plastic approach should be calculated from
Formula (L. 16) with ll'tud as defined in L.5.5.2(1):
t'ftu = t'Ftud (L.16)
(3) For the design of steel fibre reinforced cross sections a bi-linear residual tensile st ress distribution
according to Figure L.2 b) may be used with parameters as defined in L.5.5.2(1) and:
fFttd = !'Ftl,effYsF (L.17)

fFt3d = fFt3,er/YsF (L.18)

(4) The stress distribution according to Formula (8.4) for concrete in compression may be modified for
SFRC by applying t'c2 = 0,002 5 and t'cu = 0,006.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
355
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(]

a) Plastic distribution

(]

f Ft3d
F!ld t:J================:
UI =-. o
0,1%o = 0,5//cs
b) bi-linear distribution
Figure L.2 - Simplified stress distributions for SFRC

L.8.2 Shear

L.8.2.1 General verification procedure

(1) Shear reinforcement may be omitted in regions of the SFRC member where 'l'Ed s 'l'Rd,cf according to
L.8.2.2.
(2) If (1) is not met, shear reinforcement shall be designed according to L.8.2.3 to satisfy 'l'Ed s 'l'Rd,sf·

(3) Steel fibres shall not be taken into account for members resisting shear in combination with axial
tension arising from externally applied loads. For compressive axial forces (e.g. prestressing), L.8.2.2 and
L.8.2.3 apply in combination with the specific provisions in 8.2.2 and 8.2.3.
L.8.2.2 Detailed verification for members without shear reinforcement

(1) For SFRC with longitudinal reinforcement bars in the tensile zone, the design value of the shear
strength should be taken as:
'l'Rd,cF = 1'/cF . 'Rd,c + 1'/F . fFt ud ;::: 1'/cF . 'Rdc,min + 1'/F . fFtud (L.19)
where
1'/cF = max {1,2 - O,SfFtuk; 0,4} $ 1,0 (L.20)
l'/F = 1,0;
Thdc,min is determined in accordance with 8.2.1(4).
'Rd,c is defined acc. (8.27), or (8.32) if compressive normal forces shall be accounted for.
(2) When, on the basis of the design shear calculation, no shear reinforcement is required, minimum
shear reinforcement may be needed according to L.12.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
356
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

L.8.2.3 Members with shear reinforcement

(1) For members with SFRC that require design shear reinforcement, and have steel fibres and
longitudinal reinforcement bars in the tensile zone, the design value of the shear strength should be taken
as:
TRd,sF = (17sw · Pw · fywd + 17F · fFt ud) · cote ;::: Pw · fywd · cote (L.21)
where
l]sw = 0, 75 and l] F = 1,0.

L.8.3 Torsion - Torsional resistance of compact or closed sections

(1) The torsional resistance in the transverse and longitudinal d irections of SFRC members should be
taken as:
•t,Rd,swF = 17sw• t,Rd,sw + 11F fFt ud ;::: •t,Rd,sw (L.22)
•t,Rd,s lF = 17s w •t,Rd,sl + 11F fFtud ;::: •t,Rd,s l (L.23)
where
Tt,Rd,sw F and Tt,Rd,slF replace Tt,Rd,sw and Tt,Rd.s l respectively in Formula (8.81).
l]sw = 0,75 and Y/ F = 1,0.
(2) Where a member is s ubject to torsion in combination with shear and bending, fibre contribution to
design resistances should only be as one of the two approaches:
the fibre contribution is used to resist tors ional action effects only;

the fibre contribution is used to resist tensile forces arising from shear and bending action effects,
with fibre contribution to sectional resistance disregarded in determining axial tension and tors ional
resistances.

(3) Minimum re inforcement according to L.12.1 shall always be provided for beams.

L.8.4 Punching

L.8.4.1 Punching shear r esistance of SFRC slabs without shear reinforcement

(1) The design punching shear stress resistance ofSFRC slabs with flexural reinforcement complying with
L.12.1 should be calculated as follows:
LRd,cF = 1Jc ' TRd,c + l]p ' fFtud ;::: 1Jc ' LRdc,min + fFtud (L.24)
where
ll c = TRd,c / TEd :::; 1,0;
1ii<1,c according to 8.4.3(1);
1]F = 0,4;
1ildc,min according to 8.2.1(4);
TR<1,cr replaces TRd.c in 8.4.1(2) b) and c).
(2) Unless more rigorous analysis is undertaken, Formula (L. 24) shall not be applied to members subject
to punching s hear in combination with axial tension arising from externally applied loads.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
357
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(3) Formula (L.24) may be used in combination with 8.4.3(4) to cater for applied axial compressive action
effects.
L.8.4 .2 Punching s hear res is tance of SFRC s la bs with s hear reinforcement

(1) Where shear reinforcement is required in SFRC slabs with flexural reinforcement complying with
L.12.1, Formula (8.104) may be replaced by Formula (L.25) :
TRd,csF = T/c · •Rct,c + T/sw · Pw · f ywd + T/F · fFtud ;;?: Pw · fywd + T/F · fFtud (L.25)
where
Compliance with 8.4.1 shall be achieved for punching shear where •Rd,csF replaces TRd,cs in 8.4.1(2) d).
T/c and T/sw are defined in L.8.4.1(1) and in L.8.3(1);
T/F = 0,4.
(2) Formula (L.25) may be used in combination with 8.4.3(4) to cater for applied axial compressive action
effects.

L.8.5 Design with strut-and-tie models - Ties

(1) Fibres may be used in ties in place of the transverse reinforcement.

(2) Fibres may substitute up to 30 % of the total required main longitudinal reinforcement in ties. A
maximum s tress of f Fts.crand f Ftud may be assumed for serviceability and ultimate limit state respectively
in the concrete areas involved.

L.8.6 Partially loaded areas

(1) Fibres may be used to replace the transverse reinforcement required to resist transverse tensile
stresses arising from action effects in partially loaded areas. For the design, the idealised tensile post-
cracking behaviour (see L.5.5.2 and L.8.1) may be used.

L.9 Serviceability Limit States (SLS) - Crack control

L.9.1 General considerations

(1) The stress and crack width limits in Table 9.1 (NOP) and Table 9.2 (NOP) may be applied to members
reinforced with steel fibres.
(2) In determining stresses and crack widths for use of Table 9.1 (NOP) and Table 9.2 (NOP), cr,durshall be
disregarded from the concrete section in accordance with L.6(3) and (4).

L.9.2 Minimum reinforcement areas to avoid yielding

(1) The reinforcement areas calculated by Formulae (9.2) to (9.4) to avoid yielding may be adjusted for
the fibre contribution in accordance with L.8.1. The stress in the tensile reinforcement as shall be
considered according to L.9.3(2).

L.9.3 Refined control of cracking

(1) The mean crack spacing for members subjected to bending reinforced with steel fibres and
longitudinal bars should be calculated as the minimum between these two values:
a) the multi-cracking pattern associated typically to the presence of conventional reinforcement when
the spacing of bonded reinforcement in the tension zone is s ~ 10¢:

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
358
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Sr m cal F
· · •
= 1,5 · c + - - ·Pp.off
kO'kb
7,2
- <P- · (1 - ar) (L. 26)

where:

a,. = 0,37·Kor.c·KG"fR1k
tm
< l O
- , (L.27)

and the remaining parameters are as defined in 9.2.3.

b) the single crack or the crack d istance typ ically assoc iated to the spacing of bonded re inforcement in
the tension zone whens> 10¢:
Sr,m,ca l,F =h - X (L.28)
Note that for the conversion into maximum crack w idth (Sr.max.ca1.F), kw equal to 1,7 and 1,3 applies for cases
a) and b), respectively.
NOTE 1 If the reinforcement is not homogeneously distributed in the cross-section, more than one Sr,m,cat,F can be
adopted in the same cross-section.

NOTE 2 For cross sections or parts of a cross section without longitudinal reinforcement subjected to
predominately uniaxial tens ion, Sr,m,cal,F is the distance between adjacent webs.

(2) The stress in the tensile reinforcement as in Formula (9.11), should be calculated using the provis ions
of L.8.1 with partial material factors for serviceability limit state.

L.10 Fatigue
(1) For fatigue verification of SFRC members, the contribution of fibr es should be neglected unless the
fibre effect can be demonstrated from sufficient and specific testing.

L.11 Detailing of reinforcement and post-tensioning tendons

L.11.1 General

(1) Steel fibres shall not be used to replace re inforcement across a construction joint.
(2) The residual tensile s trength of SFRC shall be disregarded at construction joints.

L.11.2 Spacing of bars

(1) A clear bar distance~ kFtimes the fibre length should be used.
NOTE 1 The va lue of kF = 2,0 applies unless the National Annex gives a different value.

NOTE 2 Smaller distances are possible if sufficient practical experience is available or special measures are
foreseen.

L.12 Detailing of members and particular rules

L.12.1 Minimum reinforcement rules
(1) In members reinforced with steel fibres with or with out axial force, minimum reinforcement shall be
provided so that:
MR.min (NEd) 2:: McrCNEd) (L. 29)
where

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
359
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

M1~111in is the bending strength of the section with A s,min in presence of the co-existing axial force NE,.,
the effects of the fibres included by the effective residual tensile strength fFn1,er and the stress
distributions in L.8.1 used. The reduction in As.min due to the fibre contribution should fulfil the
limits described in the s ubsequent clauses.
(2) In members subjected to axial tension, A s.min, shall meet the following requirement:
(L.30)
Similarly as above the effects of the fibres are included by the residual tensile strength, and the reduction
As.min due to the fibre contribution should fulfil limits described in the subsequent clauses.

(3) The minimum shear reinforcement ratio PFw,min for members reinforced with steel fibres requiring
shear or torsion reinforcement may be taken as:
PFw,min = Pw,min - !Ftu,etf fyk 2': 0 (L.31)
where

fFtu.ef 2': 0,08 · & (L.32)

(4) The minimum torsion reinforcement ratio PFw,min for members reinforced with steel fibres
requiring longitudinal and transverse reinforcement may be taken as follows for both types of
reinforcement:
1
PFw,min = Pw,min - fFtu,etf fyk 2': 0.3 '""
1yk
(L.33)

L.12.2 Beams

L.1 2.2.1 Longitudinal reinforcement

(1) The minimum longitudinal re inforcement in beams should not be replaced by steel fibres.
L.12.2.2 Shear and torsion reinforcement

(1) The shear and torsion reinforcement in beams may be fully replaced by steel fibres if the provis ions
in L.12.1 are fulfilled.

L.12.3 Slabs

L.12.3.1 General

(1) The longitudinal reinforcement in slabs may be partly replaced by steel fibres subject to the
provisions in L.12.1.
(2) The replacement of minimum longitudinal tensile reinforcement should be limited to a fraction kAsof
A s,min·

NOTE The value of kAs = 0,50 applies unless the National Annex gives a different value for use in a country.

(3) The minimum secondary tensile reinforcement in one-way slabs may be fully replaced by steel fibres.
L.12.3.2 Shear reinforcement

(1) The shear reinforcement in slabs may be fully replaced by steel fibres if Formula (L. 34) is fulfilled:
f'Ftu,erffyk 2': Pw,min (L.34)
where fFtu,eraccording to Formula (L.3).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
360
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(2) The minimum depth given in 12.4.2(2) does not apply for SFRC slabs wit h fibres as the only shear
reinforcement.

L.12.4 Walls and deep beams

(1) Vertical and horizontal mi nimum reinforcement in walls A s.mln.v a nd A s.min.ii may be fully replaced by
the steel fibres, taking into account the residual tensile strength / F1u,er according to Formula (L.3).

L.12.5 Tying systems for robustness of buildings

(1) Fibre reinforcement shall not be considered in the calculation of tie reinforcement.

L.13 Additional rules for precast concrete elements and structures

L.13.1 Concrete - Strength of SFRC
(1) Where quality control measures in accordance with the relevant execution standard are applied, the
characteristic values /R.tk and /R.3k may be determined using Kk.max = 1,0 if Kc = 1,0. In this case residual
strength and ductility classes according to Table L.2 may be neglected.

L.13.2 Connections and supports

(1) 8.5.5 or 8.6 should be used to determine the capacity of connection in compression without
considering steel fibres of SFRC.

L.14 Lightly reinforced SFRC structures

L.14.1 General
(1) This clause provides additional rules for steel fibre reinforced structural members where the
minimum reinforcement provided is less than the requirements in L.12.
To avoid brittle failure, Clause L.14 may only be applied for statically indeterminate st ructures such as:
elastically supported structures, anchored underwater concrete slabs, piled slabs, shell-type components
and monolithic, prefabricated containers, segmental lining.
(2) Linear elastic, plastic and non-linear analysis may be used.
(3) For members constructed with joints to avoid uncontrolled cracking, it should be ensured that brittle
failure of these members does not lead to collapse of the structure.
(4) Members using SFRC and designed in accordance with this clause do not preclude the provision of
steel reinforcement needed to satisfy serviceability, nor reinforcement in certain parts of the members.
Any reinforcement may be taken into account for the local verification of ultimate limit states as well as
for the checks of the serviceability limit states.
(5) Members subject to imposed deformations should comply with provisions of L.12.

L.14.2 Concrete
(1) When tensile stresses are considered for the design resistance of steel fibre reinforced concrete
members, linear elastic analysis may be applied with the design residual tensile design strength using
Formula (L.5) in L.5.5.1 as stress limit.
(2) For design of steel fib re re inforced concrete members according to L.14, tensile stresses accordi ng to
the stress strain diagrams in L.8.1 may be considered in the design.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
361
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

L.14.3 Ultimate limit states (ULS) - Shear resistance of lightly reinforced SFRC
members without longitudinal reinforcement

(1) Unless more rigorous analysis is un dertaken, the des ign value of shear strength of lightly reinforced
SFRC members may be taken as:

TRct.cF = fFtud (L.35)

NOTE Punching shear for concrete structures with reinforcement quantities less than the minimum is not
covered by this standard, and can be assessed by rigorous analysis.

L.14.4 Serviceability limit states (SLS)

(1) For SFRC members without longitudinal bars, and structural hardening behaviour s ubjected to
bending with or without axial compression, the mean crack spacing can be determined as defined in
Formula (L.28).
(2) (Esm- tern) in Formula (9.11) should be replaced with the strain in the SFRC member calculated using
the provisions of L.8.1 with partial material factors for the serviceability limit state.

L.14.5 Detailing of members and particular rules

L.14.5.1 SFRC Column footing on rock

(1) For design of SFRC,/Ftsd and / Ftud may be taken into account in accordance with L.5.5.1(2).
L.14.5.2 Foundations directly on ground

(1) For continuously ground supported rafts and foundation beams, a minimum residual strength SC= 1,0
and ductility class b according to Table L.2 should be applied.
L.14.5.3 Foundations on piles

(1) For rafts and s labs on piles, a minimum residual strength SC = 2,0 and ductility class c according to
Table L.2 or Formula (L.29) should be applied.
L.14.5.4 Tunnel lining segments

(1) For tunnel lining segments without additional longitudinal reinforcement, a minimum residual
strength SC = 4,0 and ductility class c according to Table L.2 should replace Formula (L.29).

L.15 Requirements for Materials: SFRC

(1) The test report of a SFRC shall contain the load-CM OD curve or the load-deflection curve and the limit
of proportionality LOP according to EN 14651.
(2) If a new steel fibre concrete mix is used, an initial test shall be carried out by the producer in order to
obtain a mixture des ign that meets the specified characteristic res idual flexural strength according to
L.5.1(1).
(3) The initial assessment shall demonstrate, that the documented procedures guarantee a uniform fibre
distribution in t he batch.
(4) The tes t series shall comprise of at least s ix specimens of dimensions 150 mm/150 mm/550-700 mm
according t o EN 14651.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
362
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(5) Determination of/R. tk and/R,3k shall be based on a log-normal distribution according to EN 1990 (5%
quantile, 75% confidence level). Unless explicitly agreed otherwise, the coefficient of variation shall be
assumed unknown. The value of Kk,max in EN 206 shall be taken as 0,6. In the case the COV on the material
extracted by the structure should be also checked, a higher value equal to 0,7 could be used if the COV :S:
0,15.
(6) Linear interpolation of the residual strength / R.t k and /R.3k between two quantified fibre dosages with
no more than 20 kg/m 3 difference in dosage is permitted for concretes with the same concrete mix design,
fibre type and consistency. The amount of liquefying admixtures can be adjusted to achieve the requ ired
consistency.
In identity tests, an increase of one class of only / R,tkor / R.3k may be accepted if both / 11.;k-values are higher
than those of the specified performance classes.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
3 63
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

AnnexM
(normative)

Lightweight aggregate concrete structures

M.1 Use of this annex

(1) This normative Annex contains additional provisions for all concretes made with natural or artificial
mineral lightweight aggregates with closed structure. The provisions of this Eurocode apply for concrete
members with lightweight aggregates unless modified in this Annex M.

M.2 Scope and field of application

(1) This Normative Annex applies to all concretes made with natural or artificial mineral lightweight
aggregates with closed structure unless reliable experience indicates that provisions different from those
given can be adopted safely.
(2) This Normative Annex does not apply to aerated concrete either autoclaved or normally cured nor to
lightweight aggregate concrete with an open structure.

M.3 General
(1) Lightweight aggregate concrete should be classified according to EN 206 by:
its oven-dry density as shown in Table M.1. Alternatively, the oven-dry density may be specified as a
target value;

its compressive strength/ck= 12 MPa to 80 MPa according to LC12/13 to LC80/88.

(2) All clauses of this standard are generally applicable unless substituted by special provisions given
in Table M.2.

Table M.1 - Density classes and corresponding design densities ofLWAC according to EN 206

Density class
Analytical formula•
Dl,O Dl,2 Dl,4 Dl,6 Dl,8 D2,0
Oven-dry 801 1001 1 201 1401 1601 1801
density
Pc - 1000 - 1200 - 1400 - 1600 - 1800 - 2 000
-
(kg/m3)
Coefficient 0,45 0,55 0,64 0,73 0,82 0,91 Pc
'7hv,fc T/lw,fc = 2 200
Coefficient Pc
171w,f<t
0,67 0,73 0,78 0,84 0,89 0,95 l71w,fct = 0,40 + 0,60 2 200

Coefficient
0,21 0,30 0,40 0,53 0,67 0,83 Pc 2
1]tw,Ec l71w,Ec = (2 200)
• The upper value of the density P< should be used in Formulae 171w,fo l71w,fct and 11tw,Ec·

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
364
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1 :2023 (E)

Ta ble M.2 - Special provis ions for LWAC

Refer en ce Values a nd terms to be

Provisions and formulae for lightweight aggr egate
to original modified for lightweight
concrete
cla use aggregate concre te
Maximum compressive
5.1.3(3) /ck $ 80 MPa
strength

Mean value of concrete fem= 17 MPa for /ck= 12 MPa;

Table 5.1 cylinder compressive /cm= 22 MPa for /ck= 16 MPa;
strength /cm values given in Table 5.1 for /ck ~ 20 MPa.
The tensile strength may be obtained by multiplying the
Concrete tensile strength
Table 5.1 values given in Table 5.1 by coefficient 1)1w,re1 given in
/ctm, /ctk.o.os, fctJ<.o.95
Table M.1.
An estimate of the mean values of the secant modulus Ecm
may be obtained by multiplying the values for normal dens ity
5.1.4 Modulus of elasticity Ecm
concrete according to 5.1.4 by coefficient 1)1w.Ec given in
Table M.l.
The creep coefficient <p may be assumed equal to the value of
5.1.5(2), normal density concrete multi plied by:
Creep coefficient
Table 5.2 - 1,3 · l)Jw,Ec for /ck $ 16 MPa;
- T]lw,Ec for /ck ~ 20 MPa.
Shrinkage values may be obtained by multiplying the value
5.1.5(4), Nominal total shrinkage for normal density concrete in Table 5.3 by:
Table 5.3 values Ecs.soy - 1,5 for /ck $ 16 MPa;
- 1,2 for /ck ~ 20 MPa.
The influence of the increased brittleness oflightweight
concrete on the design strength fed shall be accounted by
replacing Formula (5.4) by :
Design value of concrete
5.1.6(1) t. 1/3
compressive strength /ct1 _ ( ck,ref)
T/cc - T/Jw.fc---rck $ 1

where coefficient 1)1w,rc is given in Table M.l

Unless more accurate information is available, the linear
Linear coefficient of
5.1.6(6) coefficient of thermal expansion may be taken equal to
thermal expansion 8. 10-6 °c- 1
Table 6.3
Minimum cover Cmin,dur
(NOP), The values of Cmin,dur given in Tables 6.3 (NOP) and 6.4 (NOP)
due to durability
Table 6.4 should be increased by 5 mm.
requirement
(NOP)
Table 6.5 Minimum cover Cmin,b for The value of Cmin,b given in Table 6.5 (NOP) should be
(NOP) bond increased by 5 mm.
Formulae (8.9) and (8.10) shall be replaced by:
8.1.4(2) Confined concrete !.::.fed = O"czd

!.::.fed = 0 880"3/ 4. ll/4

' C2d Cd

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
365
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Reference Values a n d terms to be

Provisions an d formulae for ligh tweight aggregate
to original modified for lightweight
concrete
clause aggregate concrete
Parameter ddg affecting
the resistance of confined
8.1.4(2),
concrete, the shear
8.2.1( 4), The parameter d dg taking account of concrete type and its
resistance of members not
8.2.2(2) aggregate properties shall be assumed as ddg = 16 mm.
requiring design shear
8.4.3(1)
reinforcement and the
punching shear resistance
Formula (8.126) shall be replaced by:
8.6(2) Partially loaded a reas 'llw.fc
O'Rdu = f~d · [Act/AcoJ - 2- ::; 171w,fc · Vpart · f~d
The basic ratios of span/ effective depth for reinforced
9.3.2(1),
Deflection control concrete members given in Table 9.3, should be multipied by
Table 9.3
l]lw,Eco.ts.
The required minimum mandrel d iameter to avoid concrete
11.3(4) and Permissible mandrel
failures according to 11.3(4) and 11.3(5) shall be increased
11.3(5) diamet er for bent bars
by factor l/1J1w.rct (coefficient 1]1w.rct according to Table M.1)
The design anchorage lengths fbct according to 11.4.2 and the
11.4.2, Anchorages and laps of design lengths of lap splices .e,d according to 11.5.2 shall be
11.5.2 bars increased by factor l/IJtw.fct (coefficient 1]1w,fct according to
Table M.1)
11,4.7 Anchorage of headed bars In Form ula (11.8), Vpart should be replaced by VpartlJJw.fc·
The creep coefficient cp(t,to) may be assumed equal to the
value of normal density concrete according to Formula (B.5)
B.5(1) Creep coefficient multiplied by:
- l.3·171w,Ec for fck !> 16 MPa;
- 1]1w,Ec for/ck<:: 20 MPa
The total shrinkage values may be obtained by mult iplying
the value for normal density concrete in Formula (B.23) by:
B.6(1) Shrinkage strain
- 1,5 for/ck ::; 16 MPa;
- 1,2 for /ck~ 20 MPa.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
366
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

AnnexN
(infor mative)

Recycled aggregates concrete structures

N.1 Use of this annex

(1) This informative Annex provides supplementary rules for structures made of recycled aggregates
concrete. The provisions of this Eurocode apply for concrete members with recycled aggregates concrete
unless modified in this Annex N.
NOTE National choice on the application of this Informative Annex is given in the National Annex. If the
National Annex contains no information on the application of this Informative Annex, it can be used.

N.2 Scope and field of application

(1) This Informative Annex applies to structures made of recycled aggregates concrete.

N.3 General
(1) Concrete with recycled aggregates may be used where the use of recycled aggregates will not
impair load-bearing capacity and durability performance of the structures as well as service performance
like appearance or wear, or represents a risk of polluting ground water or air. Recycled aggregates may
be used in normal concrete production without any particular consent if done in accordance with the
provisions of EN 206.
(2) If the percentage of recycled aggregates exceeds the limits given in EN 206 and if the properties
listed in 5.1.2(2) for concrete with recycled aggregates are relevant to the design in accordance with this
Eurocode, these properties should be determined by testing in accordance with EN 206. The exposure
resistance class should be determined based on durability performance testing.
(3) In order to facilitate recycling, the following may be ass umed for type A recycled aggregate as
defined in EN 206. For type B recycled aggregate, the subst itution rate limits provided below should be
decreased by SO %.
a) For reinforced concrete:

1) when the substitution rate of recycled aggregates (quantity of fine and coarse recycled
aggregates/total quantity of aggregates) aRA::; 0,20 there is no change in the mechanical
properties;
2) when 0,20 < a RA::; 0,40 the values of properties in Table N.l should be used or values should be
determined by testing;
3) when aRA > 0,40 the propert ies in Table N.l should be deter mined by testing using an identified
batch of aggregates.
b) For prestressed concrete:

1) when 0 < al\J, ::; 0,20 the values of properties in Table N.1 should be used or values should be
deter mined by testing;
2) when a RA > 0,20 the p roperties in Table N.1 should be determined by testing us ing an identified
batch of aggregat e.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
367
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Table N.1 - Special provisions for recycled aggregates concrete

Reference Values a nd terms to be

Provisions and formulae for recycled aggregates
to original modified for recycled
concrete•
clause aggregates concrete
Maximum compressive
5.1.3(3) /ck :::; 50 MPa
strength

Concrete tensile strength Determine by testing if relevant.

Table 5.1
/ ctm, / ctk,O.os, /cik, 0,95 Alternatively may be used: fctm = 0,3 · f/i/ 3
Determine by testing if relevant.
5.1.4 Modulus of elasticity E cm Alternatively, the following may be used:
Ecm = 7JERA · f/./,3 where 7JERA = kE · (1 - 0,25 · aRA).
Determine by testing if relevant.
5.1.5(2),
Creep coefficient Alternatively the creep coefficient for basic and drying creep
Table 5.2
should be multiplied by a factor 7JcRA = 1 + 0,6 · a RA-
Determine by testing if relevant.
5.1.5(4),
Shrinkage strain Alternatively the basic and drying shrinkages should be
Table 5.3
multiplied by a factor 7JshRA = 1 + 0,8 · a RA.
Multiply in 5.1.6(3), Formulae (5.9) and (5.10) the values e c1
and &cut respectively, by 7/cc = 1 + 0,33 · aRA:

5.1.6(3) Stress-strain relationship Ec1(%0) = 7/cc ( 0,7fL) :5 2,8 %0

{~~)
4

Ecul (%0) = 7/cc ( 2,8 + 14 ( 1 - ) :5 3,5 %0

5.1.6(5) Density Pc = 2 500 - 220aRA

Determine ERC by testing if relevant.
For concrete including recycled aggregate, the same
minimum cover depth for durability Cmin,dur applies provided
the material pertains the same exposure res istance class
(ERC) as concrete including natural aggregate only.
Table 6.3 Adaptation of the limiting values and/or performance
Minimum cover Cmin.dur
(NOP), thresholds ensuring compliance with ERCs for concrete
due to durability
Table 6.4 including recycled aggregate are given in EN 206
requirement
(NOP) complemented by the provisions valid in the place of use.
If the ERC is not determined, the values of Cm1n.dur given in
6.5.2.2 should be increased by +5 mm in case of exposure
classes XC2, XC3 and XC4, and by+ 10 mm in case of all XD / XS-
exposure classes.

8.2.1( 4) Shear resistance of

Shear strength without shear reinforcement: Multiply in
members not requiring
8.2.2(2) 8.2.1(4), Formula (8.20) and in 8.2.2(2), Formula (8.27) by
design shear
77, = 1 - 0,2 · aRA-
reinforcement

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
368
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Reference Values and terms to be

Provisions a nd formulae for recycled aggregates
to origina l modified for recycled
concrete•
clause aggregates concrete
Table 9.3 Simplified deflection Span/depth ratios should be multiplied by t he coefficient
control by span/depth- 1/(1 + 0.12·aRA).
ratio
9.3.4(3)
( = 1 - f3tRA (Usr/
Us ;: : 0
General method for
deflection calculations with f3tRA = 1,0 for a single short term loading and
f3tRA = 0,25 for sustained loads or many cycles of repeated
loading.
Determine by testing if relevant.
B.5(1) Creep coefficient Alternatively the creep coefficient for basic and drying creep
should be multiplied by a factor 1'/ccRA = 1 + 0,6 · aRA (high
dispersion of the results).
Determine by testing if relevant.
B.6(1) Shrinkage strain Alternatively the basic and drying shrinkages should be
multiplied by a factor 1'/shRA = 1 + 0,8 · aRA (high dispersion
of the results).
• In Formulae is trRA the substitution rate of recycled concrete aggregates (varying from 0 to 1):
quantity of fine and coarse recycled aggregates
aRA =
total quantity of aggregates

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
369
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

AnnexO
(informative)

Simplified approaches for second order effects

0.1 Use of this Annex

(1) This informative Annex 0 provides complementary guidance to 7.4 for second order structural
analysis of members and systems.
NOTE National choice on the application of this Informative Annex is given in the National Annex. If the
National Annex contains no information on the application of this Informative Annex, it can be used.

0.2 Scope and field of application

(1) This Informative Annex 0 provides conservative simplified methods for design against second
order effects, including:
a formulation for the determination of the buckling load for reasonably symmetrical building
structures (see 0.3) and isolated membe rs (see 0.4);

a slenderness criterion for isolated members to below which second order effects may be neglected
(see 0.6);

a conservative simplified method to evaluate the second order effects of isolated members based on
a nominal curvature (see 0.7); and

simplified criteria to determine second order effects by the second order elastic method or by a
moment magnification factor (see 0.8).

0.3 Critical load of building structures

(1) For multilevel, reasonably symmetrical building structures having distinct bracing members
(typically shear walls) with reasonably constant bending stiffness along the height, and with
approximately equal loading on each level and negligible global torsional action, the global buckling load,
Fvs, may be taken as:
When shear deformations may be neglected:

FvB = FvBB (0.1)

When shear deformations may not be neglected:
1 1 - l

FvB = (FvBB + FvB) (0.2)

where

Fvss is the buckling load of a cantilever, (without shear deformation) with a rotational restraint at
the base, that may be taken as:

Fvss = n 7,8ns
5+ 1,6
L( +
1
1 Eli)
- 2
3,9fr; L
(0.3)

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
370
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Fvss is t he buckling load due to localised lateral storey deformations to be included when shear
deformation is significant. Considering the solid portion of shear walls it may be taken as the
cracked shear stiffness:
fvss = kc · Gcd · Ac (0.4)
where
ns is the number of storeys;
L is t he total height of the building above the base (foundation or top of a rigid basement);
El = (kcEcdlc )/(1 + q>eff.s) is the sum of the bending stiffnesses of all bracing members;
I, is the second moment of area of the gross concrete cross-section;
Ecd is the design value of the modulus of elasticity, see 7.4.3.3(3);
'7>eff,s is the effective creep coefficient for glo bal second order effects, see 7.4.2(2);
Gcd "' 0.4Ecd is the design value of the elastic shear modulus;
kc reflects the extent of cracking and the effect of non-linear material properties and may
be taken as:
kc= 0.4 in the general case;
kc= 0,8 ifit can be shown that the tensile stress in the bracing members under the effect
of the characteristic combination ofactions at t he critical sections is less than/ctd·
fr is the sum of rotational restraint stiffnesses at the base of the bracing members;
8 EI
fr = M 'T (0.5)

e is the rotation for bending moment M.

(2) In cases where the global buckling load Fvo is not well defined, the Formula (0.6) may be used:
FH,OEd
Fvs =- - Fv,Ed
FH, tEd
(0.6)

where

f H.tEd is a fictitious horizontal force, giving the same bending moments as the vertical load Fv.Ed
acting on the deformed structure, with deformation caused by F 11,0Ed and calculated with an
effective stiffness according to 7.4 .3.2(1);
F11.0Ed is the first order horizontal force due to wind, imperfections, etc.

0.4 Critical load of isolated members

(1) For use in simplified second order analyses, the elastic buckling load (Ns) and effective length lo of
a compression member are defined by:
Tt2£/
Ns = y (0.7)
0

where
EI is a representative effective stiffness, in the considered plane of bending;
lo is the effective length that may be determined using Formulae (0.9) or (0.10).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
371
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

0.5 Slenderness ratio and effective length of isolated members

(1) The slendern ess ratio is defined as follows :

}. = lo/i (0.8)
where

~Alec
L. -- ~Ac is t he radius of gyration of the uncracked concrete section.

(2) In the definition of t he effective length /o, t he stiffness of rest raining members should include the
effect of cracking unless they can be shown to be unc racked in ULS.
(3) For compression members in regular frames the effective length lo may be determined in the
following way:
For braced members:

(0.9)

For unbraced members:

.j(l + 2,4frt + 2.4frz) · (1 + 2,4fr1) · (1 + 2.4frz)

10 = 1- ----------------- (0.10)
1 + 1,2fr1 + 1,2frz
where
fr 1,fr2 are the relative flexibilities of rotational restraints at ends 1 and 2 respectively; since fully
rigid restraint is rare in practice, a minimum value of 0,1 should be taken for fr1and fr2.
e El
fr = M ' / (0.11)
e is the rotation of restraining members for bending moment M, see also (2);
El is the bending stiffness of the compression member, see also (4);
I is the clear height of the compression member between end restraints.
NOTE fr= 0 is the theoretical limit for rigid rotational restraint and fr = oo represents the limit for no rotational
restraint at al l.

(4) If an adjacent compression member (column) in a node is likely to contribute to the rotation at
buckling, the (EI/I) in the definition off, should be replaced by [(EI/I),+ (EI /l)b], with a and b
representing t he compression member above and below the node.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
372
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

0.6 Slenderness criteria for isolated members

(1) As an alternative to 7.4.1(3) second order effects may be ignored if the slenderness A. is smaller
than il1;m (see Formula (0.12)):
ABC
AJim = 20 .Jn (0.12)

where

A = 1/(1 + 0,2<petT,b) (if <perr is not known, A= 0,7 may be used);

B = ../1 + 2w (if w is not known, B = 1,1 may be used);
c = 1,7 - rm (if rm is not known, C = 0,7 may be used);
<petT,b is the effective creep ratio for local effects, see 7.4.2(2);
w is the mechanical reinforcement ratio;
A, is the total area oflongitudinal reinforcement;
n is the non-dimensional axial force;
rm = 1,0 for unbraced members and for braced members in which the first order moments arise
only from or predominantly from imperfections or transverse loading, otherwise = Moi/Mo2;
moment ratio (see Figure 0.1);
(2) In cases with biaxial bending, the slenderness criterion may be checked separately in each principal
plane of bending.

0. 7 Simplified analysis of isolated members based on nominal curvature

0 .7 .1 General

(1) This method is pr imarily suitable for isolated members with constant axial force and a well defined
effective length lo (see 0.5). The method gives a nominal second order moment based on a deflection,
which in turn is based on the effective length and an estimated maximum curvature (see also Figure 7.4).

0.7.2 Design moments

(1) The design moment should be taken as:

MEd = max{MoEd + Mz; Moz;IM01 - O,SMz - 2 INEctl. ed} (0.13)

where

Mof.d is the 1" order moment, including the effect of imperfections, see (2);
M2 is t he nominal 2nd order moment, see (3).
e; should be determined according to 7.2.1.2(5)
Mo1, Mo2 are the first order moments at both supports 1 and 2, see Figure 0.1.
The maximum value of MEd depends on the distributions of MoEd and M2 over the member length; the latter
may be taken as parabolic or sinusoidal over the effective length.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
3 73
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

H Ho2

HoEd • 112

0,5H 2 Wo1 - O,SH2 - 21 N,J el

a) b) c)

a) First order moments b) Additional second order c) Envelope of design moments

moments

Figure 0 .1 - First order moments, additional second order moments and moment envelope in a
braced column

(2) For unbraced single compression members and for compression members in braced frame
systems, with significant transverse loads on the member MoE<1 is equal to the absolute largest value of
the first order moment over the height of the member.
For compression members in braced frame systems, without significant transverse loads on the member:

MoEd = Cm· Mo2 (0.14)

where

Cm = 0,6 + 0,4rm;::: 0,4 (0.15)

rm= 1 in case IM02I < 0,05 N gd . h, otherwise rm = Mo1/Mo2 (0.16)

CmM02 is an eq uivalent moment assumed to be constant over the length and therefore c11r = 8
(corresponding to constant moment).
(3) The nominal second order moment M2 at the critical section should be taken as:

(0.17)

where

lij 1
ez=-- (0.18)
C1;r r

C1/r is a total curvature distribution factor;

1/r is the member's equilibrium curvature including second order effects (1/r = (tc + t s)/d). In the
absence of more accurate design, 1/r may be taken equal to the nominal curvature in 0.7.3.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
374
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(4) The C1/r factor depends on the total curvature distribution along the member (due to first plus
second order moments and the non-linear moment-curvature relationship of the cross-sections). For
single unbraced members with constant cross-section, c,1, = 10 may be used, if more accurate values are
not justified. For braced members, C1/r = 8 may be adopted.

0.7.3 Nominal curvature

(1) For members with constant symmetrical cross-sections (incl. re inforcement), the following
curvature may be used:
1 1
- =k · k · - (0.19)
r r 'P 1
0
where
k, is a coefficient depending on the axial force, see 0.7.3(3);
k.p is a coefficient accounting for creep, see 0.7.3(4);
1/ro = 2 Eyd/(d - d');
Eyd =/rd/Es;
d is the effective depth; see also 0.7.3(2);
d' is t he cover measured to the centroid of the compression reinforcement.
(2) If all reinforcement is not concentrated on opposite sides, but part of it is distributed parallel to the
plane of bending, d - d' is defined as:

d - d' = 2is for general sections and (h/2) + is for rectangular s ections; (0.20)
where

is is the rad ius of gyration of the total group oflongitudinal reinforcement.

(3) k, in Formula (0.19) may be taken as 1,0 as a first approximation. If a more refined calculation is
needed, k, may be taken as:
n - n
kr = u <
-
1 (0.21)
nu - nbal

where

n = INEdl/(Ac/cd), is the non dimensional axial force;

nu = l + w;
nbal is t he value of n at maximum moment resistance; the value nbal = 0,4 may be used;
W = As/rd/(Ac/cd);
As is the total area of the longitudinal reinforcement;
(4) k.p in Formula (0.19) should be taken as:

kcp = 1 + Ptck <f'eff,b;::; 1 (0.22)

where

<{Jeff,b is the effective creep ratio for local effects, see 7.4.2(2);
Ptck = 0,35 + /ck/200 - .:l/150.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
375
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

0.8 Second order elastic method

0.8.1 General

(1) The determination of the second order effects may be carried out using either a second order
(geometric non-linear) elastic analysis or a theoretical solution based on the magnification factor, both
satisfying the general principles of 7.4.1. Non-linear material behaviour (cracking, non-linear materials,
creep and tension stiffening) shall be taken into account by means of an effective stiffness.
(2) Member stiffnesses may in principle be chosen within relatively wide limits provided equilibrium
and compatibility are satisfied as described in (3) and ( 4).
NOTE Optimal design will require several iterations.

(3) For compression members with approximately constant axial force, constant section and
reinforcement along the member length, it suffices to satisfy equilibrium and curvature compatibility at
the most critical section.
(4) In other cases, equilibrium and curvature compatibility shall be satisfied at a sufficient number of
sections to ensure a safe design, i.e., the member sections shall be designed for corresponding values of
N E<1, M Ed and curvature (1/r = MEd/EI) obtained with the assumed bending stiffness values El at these
sections.
(5) For global analysis as a simplification, the value of the stiffnesses may be taken as:

El = 0,4Ecdlc for walls and columns;

El = 0,3Ecctlc for reinforced concrete beams and slabs;
El = Ecdlc for uncracked concrete beams and slabs due to prestressing.
When using such an approximation, and in order to prevent false force redistributions, the stiffness of
restraining elements should be reduced in the same proportion.
Where simplified properties are used for global analysis, local 2 11d order effects in slender members shall
be accounted for either by a local analysis using 0.8.2, by the simplified method in 0.7, or with an effective
stiffness that fulfils (2).

0 .8 .2 Moment magnification method

(1) In case of a global or a local analysis the total design moment, including the second order moment,
may be expressed as a magnification of the bending moment from a first order linear analysis, namely:

Mea = Moea [1 + INa/~: 1 _1] (0.23)

where
MoEd is the first order moment;
f3c is a coefficient which depends on the distribution of first and second order moments, see (3);
Ne is the buckling load based on the effective stiffness according to 7.4.3.2 or 0.8.1.
NOTE Magn ification factors applicable to specific situations can be found in literature.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
376
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(2) Alternatively, for global analysis, second order effects may be obtained by fictitious magnification
of the horizontal forces according to Formula (0.24)

FEd,2 = FH,OEd [1- IN:d/Ns l] (0.24)

(3) For isolated members with constant cross-section and axial force, the second order moment may
normally be assumed to have a sinusoidal shaped distribution. Then
(0.25)

where
c,1, is a coefficient which depends on the distribution of first and second order moments (for
instance, Ct/r = 8 for a constant first order moment distribution, Ct/r = 9,6 for a parabolic
distribution and Ci / r = 12 for a triangular distribution, etc.).

(4) For members without transverse load, differing first order end moments Mo1 and Moz may be
replaced by an equivalent constant first order moment according to 0.7.2(2). Consistent with the
ass um ption of a constant first order moment, Ct/r = 8 s hould be used.
NOTE The value of c11r = 8 also applies to members bent in double curvature. In some cases, depending on
slenderness and axial force, the end moments can be greater than the magnified equivalent moment.

(5) Where 0.8.2(3) or (4) is not applicable, /Jc= 1 may be used.

NOTE This is also applicable to the global analysis of certain types of structures, e.g. structures braced by shear
walls and similar, where the principal action effect is bending in bracing members.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
377
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

AnnexP
(informative)

Alternative cover approach for durability

P.1 Use of this Annex

(1) This informative Annex provides an alternative approach to design cover for durability without use
of Exposure Resistance Classes (ERC) as defi ned in 6.4. In th is case, the res istance of the cover depends
on the value of concrete cover and the concrete mix requirements based on Deemed-to-Satisfy values for
the limiting values of concrete composition acco rding to EN 206:2013, Annex F (see P.3).
NOTE National choice on the app lication of this Informative Annex is given in the Nationa l Annex. If the
National Annex conta ins no information on the application of this Informative Annex, it can be used.

P.2 Scope and field of application

(1) This Informative Annex applies to the design of cover for durability of concrete without the use of
Exposure Resistance Classes (ERC) as defined in 6.4.
(2) Except for 6.4, 6.5.2.1(1) and 6.5.2.2, all provisions of Clause 6 apply.

P.3 Minimum cover

(1) The greater value fo r Cm1n satisfying the requi rements for both bond and environmental conditions
shall be used.
Cmin =max {Cmin.b; Cmin.d ur + llCdur,y - llCd ur,st - llCt1ur,ad<1; 10 mm} (P.1)
where

Cm1n.b is the minimum cover due to bond requirement, see 6.5.2.3;

Cm1n.d ur is the minimum cover due to environmental conditions, see P.3(2);
llcd ur.r is the additive safety element, see P.3(3);
llcd ur,st is the reduction of minimum cover for use of stainless steel, see P.3( 4);
llcd ur,add is the reduction of minimum cover for use of additional protection, see P.3(5).
(2) The minimum cover values for reinforcing steel and prestressing steel in normal weight concrete
taking account of the exposure classes and the structural classes shall be taken as Cm1n.d ur·
NOTE The recommended Structural Class (design working life of SO years) is 54 for the indicative concrete
strengths given in Table P.4 and the recommended modifications to the stru,tural class are given in Table P.1. The
recommended values of Cmin.dur are given in Table P.2 (carbon reinforcing steel) and Table P.3 (prestressing steel).

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
378
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Table P.1- Recommended s tructural classification

Exposure Class accor ding to Table 6.1
Criterion
XO XCl XC2/XC3 XC4 XDl XD2/XS1 XD3/XS2/XS3
Design Working Life of increase increase increase increase increase increase increase class
100 years class by 2 class by 2 class by 2 class by 2 class by 2 class by 2 by2
;::: C30/37 ;::: C30/37 ;::: C35/45 ;::: C40/SO ;::: C40/SO ;::: C40/50 ;::: C45/55
Strength Classa.b reduce reduce reduce reduce reduce reduce reduce class
class by 1 class by 1 class by 1 class by 1 class by 1 class by 1 byl
Member with slab
geometry (position of
reduce reduce reduce reduce reduce reduce reduce class
reinforcement not
class by 1 class by 1 class by 1 class by 1 class by 1 class by 1 by 1
affected by construction
process)
Special Quality Control
reduce reduce reduce reduce reduce reduce reduce class
of the concrete
class by 1 class by 1 class by 1 class by 1 class by 1 class by 1 byl
production ensured
a The strength class and w / c ratio are considered to be related values. A special composition (type of cement,
w/c value, fine fillers) with the intent to produce low permeability may be considered.
b The limit may be reduced by one strength class if air entrainment of more than 4 % is applied.

Table P.2- Values of minimum cover Cmin,dur [mm] for carbon reinforcing steel

Structural Exposure Class according to Table 6.1

Class XO XCl XC2/XC3 XC4 XD1/XS1 XD2 /XS2 XD3 / XS3
Sl 10 10 10 15 20 25 30
S2 10 10 15 20 25 30 35
S3 10 10 20 25 30 35 40
S4 10 15 25 30 35 40 45
SS 15 20 30 35 40 45 50
S6 20 25 35 40 45 so 55

Table P.3- Values of minimum cover Cm;n,dur [mm] for prestressing steel

Structural Exposure Class according to Table 6.1

Class XO XCl XC2/XC3 XC4 XD1/XS1 XD2/XS2 XD3/XS3
Sl 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
S2 10 15 25 30 35 40 45
S3 10 20 30 35 40 45 50
S4 10 2S 35 40 4S 50 55
SS 15 30 40 45 50 55 60
S6 20 35 45 50 55 60 65

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
379
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(3) The concrete cover may be increased by an additive safety element Lkctur.r· The recommended value
is 0 mm.
(4) Where stainless steel is used or where other special measures have been taken, the minimum cover
may be reduced by Llcdur,st- For such situations the effects on all relevant material properties should be
considered, including bond. The recommended value, without further specification, is 0 mm.
(5) For concrete with additional protect ion (e.g. coating) the minimum cover may be reduced by b.Cdur,add·
The recommended value, witho ut further specification, is 0 mm.

P.4 Indicative strength classes for durability

(1) The choice of adequately durable concrete for corrosion protection of reinforcement and
protection from concrete attack, requires consideration of the composition of concrete. This may result
in a higher compressive strength of the concrete than is required for structural design. The relationship
between concrete strength classes and exposure classes (see Table 6.1) may be described by indicative
strength classes. The recommended values are given in Table P.4.

Table P.4 - Indicative minimum strength classes

Corrosion
Chloride-induced from
Carbonation-induced Chloride-induced
sea-water
1 XCl XC2 XC3 I XC4 XDl I XD2 XD3 XSl XS2 XS3
2 C20/25 C25/30 C30/37 C30/37 C35/45 C30/37 C35/45
Concrete damag e
No risk Freeze/ Thaw Attack Chemical Attack
3 XO XFl XF2 XF3 XAl XA2 XA3
4 C12/15 C30/37 C25/30 C30/37 C30/37 C35/45
NOTE For Exposure Classes see Table 6.1.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
380
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

AnnexQ
(normative)

Stainless reinforcing steel

Q.1 Use of this annex

(1) This normative Annex contains additional provisions for stainless reinforcing steel.

Q.2 Scope and field of application

(1) This Normative Annex applies to ribbed and indented stainless reinforcing steel. The provisions of
this Eurocode apply to stainless reinforcing steel unless modified in this Annex Q.
(2) This Normative Annex does not cover cast-in fasten ings used to ancho r steel plates or members to
the surface of concrete structur es.
NOTE Fastenings can be designed according to EN 1992-4, and exposed steel members in accordance with
EN 1993-1-1.

Q.3 General
(1) Special provisions for s tainless reinforcing steel are given in Table Q.1.

Table Q.1 - Special provisions for stainless reinforcing steel

Reference Values and terms to be

to original modified for stainless Provisions and formulae for stainless reinforcing steel
clause reinforcing steel
Stainless steels used for structures in accordance with this
Eurocode shall comply with the relevant standards for
stainless steel.
5.2.1(5) New clause NOTE 1 The National Annex can specify relevant standards for
stainless reinforcing steel.
NOTE2 The harmonised product standard EN 10370 for
stainless steel is currently under development.
New term/o.2k in Tables
5.2.2(2)
5.4 and 5.5 introduced.
Characteristic value of k = (ft/fo,2)k
NOTE3 Further guidance for welding of stainless steel can be
5.2.3(2) New note added.
found in the relevant standard for stainless steel.
(2) For design either of the following assumptions may be
made (see Figure 5.2):
New terms/o.zk
5.2.4(2) a) an inclined post-elastic branch with a strain limit of
introduced.
Eu<1 :S: Euklrs and a maximum stress of k · fo.2k/Ys at Euk,
where k = (ft/fo.2)k.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
381
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:20 23 (E)

Refer e n ce Valu es a nd terms to b e

to origina l modified for st a inless Provis io n s a n d formu lae for stainless reinfor cing s teel
clau se reinfor cin g s t eel
(3) The design value of the modulus of elasticity Es for
stainless steel may be assumed to be 200 000 MPa unless a
5.2.4(3) New terms added. more accur ate value is obtained from production data.
NOTE4 The E-moduli of stainless steel depend on the alloy and
can be between 150 000 MPa and 200 000 MPa.
(5) The coefficient of thermal expansion may be taken as
5.2.4(5) New terms added. 10 · 10·6 K-1 for stainless reinforcing steel unless a more
a s.th=
accurate value is obtained from production data.

6.5.2.2 New rules added. See Q.4.

Q.4 Minimum cover for durability

(1) Unless more r efined methods are used, the durability design with stainless reinforcing steel may
be based on Stainless Steel Resistance Classes (SSRC) as defined in Table Q.2.
NOTE For an alternative approach to design cover for durability without use of Exposure Resistance
Classes (ERC) see Annex P.

T able Q.2 - Classifica t ion of corros io n r esista n ce of stainless reinfor cin g ste e l d ep e nden t on th e
Pitting Re s is tance Equ iva lent PRE

Stainless Pitting Inform a tive exa mples EN 10088-1

St eel Resis tance
Description
Res is tance Equ ivale nt Ferri tic Duplex Aus tenitic
Class PRE•
SSRCO Oto 9 Carbon steel reinforcement - - -
SSRCl 10 to 16 Chromium steels 1.4003 - -
1.4301
SSRC2 17 to 22 Chromium Nickel steels - 1.4482
1.4307
1.4401
Chromium Nickel steels with
SSRC3 23 to 30
Molybdenum
- 1.4362 1.4404
1.4571
Steels with increased content
SSRC4 ~ 31 of Chromium and - 1.4462 1.4529
Molybdenum
a Calculation of the Pitting Resistance Equivalent: PRE= Cr+ 3,3 · Mo+ n · N; Cr, Mo and Nin M.- %.
With: n = 0 for ferritic steels, n = 16 for Duplex steels and n = 30 for austenitic steels.
The calculation of the Pitting Resistance Equivalent is a useful / practical indication when classifying
stainless steels. Other factors can negatively influence the corrosion resistance. The results of the test could
be used as input parameters for the service life design.

(2) Where stainless reinforcing steel is used, the minimum cover Cmin,dur in Table Q.3 (NOP) may be
used.
NOTE The values given in Table Q.3 (NDP) apply unless the National Annex gives different values.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
382
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1 :2 0 23 (E)

Ta ble Q.3 (NDP) - Minimum concr e t e cover Cmin,dur to stainless steel reinfor ce m e nt

Exposu re Stainless Steel Resistan ce Class•

Exposure
Res is ta nce Class
Class SSRCl SSRC2 SSRC3 SSRC4
ERC
XC l 0 0 0 0
:5 XRC7
XC2 0 0 0 0
:5 XRC4 0 0 0 0
XC 3
:5 XRC7 15 0 0 0
:5 XRC4 15 0 0 0
XC4
:5XRC7 20 0 0 0
::; XRDS0,5 10 0 0 0
:5 XRDSl,5 20 10 0 0
XD1, XS1 :5 XRDS3 25 15 10 0
:5 XRDS6 35 25 15 0
:5 XRDSlO 45 35 25 15
:5 XRDS0,5 15 10 10 0
:5 XRDS1,5 25 20 15 0
XD2,XD3,
:5 XRDS3 35 30 20 10
XS2,XS3
:5 XRDS6 50 40 30 20
:5 XRDSlO 65 50 40 30
NOTE 1 The tabulated cover values apply for a design service life of SO years unless the National Annex
excludes some classes or gives other va lues.
NOTE2 For a design se1vice life of 100 years Cmin.dur in Table Q.3 (N DP) should be increased by + 10 mm for all
ERC classes unless the National Annex excludes some classes or gives other va lues.
NOTE 3 In case of combined action of carbonation and chloride induced corrosion, Cmin,dur in Table Q.3 (NOP)
should be increased by 20 mm or a higher stainless steel resistance class should be chosen un less the National
Annex gives other values.
NOTE4 As alternative to the class system of Table Q.3 (NOP) a performance-oriented service life design may
be applied if the input parameters out of technical product specifications are available.
a For stainless steel corrosion resistance classes see Table Q.2.

(3) If welding of stainless reinforcing steel is necessary, the sensitivity of in tercrystalline corrosion
(stress corrosion cracking) shall be taken into account for the select ion of th e appropr iate stainless steel.

Q.5 Fatigue verification

(1) The values given in 10.4(1) may be used for stainless reinforcing steel complying with the provis ions
of C.4.2.
(2) The values given in Table E.1 (NOP) may be used for stainless reinforcing steel complying with the
provisions of C.4.2.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
38 3
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

AnnexR
(informative)

Embedded FRP reinforcement

R.1 Use of this annex

(1) This informative Annex contains supplementary guidance for the design of new structures reinforced
with non-prestressed glass and carbon fibre rei nforceme nt.
NOTE National choice on the app li cation of this Informative Annex is given in the Nationa l Annex. If the
National Annex conta ins no information on the application of this Informative Annex, it can be used.

R.2 Scope and field of application

(1) This Informative Annex applies only to profiled or roughened glass and carbon fibre reinforced
polymer (FRP) reinfo rcement bars and mesh. Prestressed FRP is not covered.
(2) This Informative Annex does not apply for use of FRP reinforcement in lightweight concrete and in
concrete made with recycled aggregate, i.e. Annexes M and N do not apply.
(3) This Informative Annex applies to members with FRP reinforcement s ubjected to predominantly
static loads, i.e. Clause 10 and Annex E do not apply to members with FRP reinforcement.

R.3 General
(1) The provisions of t his Eurocode apply for concrete members with FRP reinforcement unless modified
in this Annex R.

R.4 Verification- Partial factors for FRP reinforcement

(1) The partial factor for material YFRP shall be used for FRP reinforcement.
NOTE The values of the partial factors for FRP reinforcement are those in Table R.1 (NOP) unless the National
Annex gives different va lues.

Table R.1 (NDP} - Partial factors for FRP reinforcement

Design Situation YmP

Persistent and transient design situation 1,50
Accidental design sit uation 1,10
Serviceability limit state 1.00

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
384
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

R.5 Materials
R.5.1 General

(1) Embedded FRP reinforcement materials suitable for design in accordance with this Eurocode shall
satisfy the requirements of R.15.
(2) Embedded FRP reinforcement materials used for structures in accordance with this Eurocode shall
comply with the relevant product standards for FRP.
NOTE 1 As long as harmonized product standards are not available, the National Annex can specify the relevant
standards for embedded FRP reinforcement materials.
NOTE 2 ISO 10406 can be used for determ ination of selected properties.

(3) Annex R provides design rules for member reinforced with embedded FRP re inforcement within
the following limits of applicability:
Minimum modulus of elasticity of Em ;::; 40 000 MPa;

Ratio offrtk,tooa/ Em ;::; 0,005;

characteristic compressive strength of concrete fck ;::; 20 MPa;

members with Pir ::;; 0,05.

R.5.2 Properties

(1) Specified properties and related conditions of fibre reinforced polymer systems that are requ ired
for design to this Eurocode shall include at least the following:
frtko determined in accordance with ISO 10406-1;

Em determined in accordance with ISO 10406-1;

nominal diameter.

(2) The following properties of the FRP reinforcement should be available to ensure a performance as
assumed in design:
section sizes and tolerance on size;

minimum characteristic short-term tensile strength;

minimum long-term characteristic tensile strength;

mod ulus of elasticity;

long term bond strength fbd.iooa;

strain of FRP shear reinforcement ErwRd at design tensile strength of FRP shear reinforcement frwRd;
installation temperature;
maximum temperature of the FRP reinforcement for the design life of the st ructure;

minimum temperature of the FRP re inforcement for the design life of the structure;
exposure classification, in accordance with Table 6.1;

durability requ irements.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
385
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

R.5.3 Design assumptions

(1) Design should be based on the nominal cross section area of the reinforcement.
(2) The value of the design tensile strength of embedded FRP reinforcement shall be taken as:

/ttk,lOOa
ind=--'-- (R.1)
YFRP

where

frtk,1ooa design long-term strength. When not directly determined from production data, it can be
obtained with Formula (R.2),
frtk,tooa = Ct · Cc · Ce · f nko (R.2)
Ct is the factor considering temperature effects. The following values may be used for
Ct:
C, = 1,0 for indoor and unde rground environments;
C, = 0,8 for outdoor members if heating through solar radiation cannot be excluded;

C, is the coefficient between the strength under sustained load and the strength under
short-term load. The factor may be determined according ISO 10406-1, Clause 12. The
value shall be taken as 0,35 for Glass FRP reinforcement and 0,8 for Carbon FRP
reinforcement unless more accurate val ues are determined.
Ce is the coefficient between the strength after ageing and before ageing. The factor may be
determined according to the test concept in ISO 10406-1 with exposure to 60 °C for a
duration of 3 000 h. The value shall be taken as 0,7 unless more accurate values are
determined.
NOTE Further guidance for the estimation of C1 can be found in fib Bulletin 40.

(3) The stress-strain relationship should be taken as illustrated in Figure R. l.

f ftkO

f ftk, !OOa

f FtJJ.

Figure R.1 - Design stress -strain-diagram for FRP reinforcement

(4) FRP reinforcement shall be used as tension reinforcement only.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
386
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(5) The mean density of FRP for the purposes of design may be taken as 2 000 kg/m3 for GFRP
reinforcement and 1650 kg/m3 for CFRP reinforcement.
(6) Unless production data gives more accurate values, the coefficient of thermal expansion in
longitudinal direction may be taken as aFRP.th = 5 · 10-6 K- 1 for GFRP bars and amr.tl1 = 0 for CFRP bars.

R.6 Durability - Concrete cover

(1) The value Cmi n,dur =0 may be taken for FRP reinforcement in Formula (6.2).
(2) Unless more accurate information is available based on test data, the cover for bond for FRP
reinforcement should be taken as Cm;n,b;::: 2¢r. But at least the minimum cover for FRP reinforcement shall
be taken as Cmin.b 2:: l,5¢r and Cmin ,b 2:: 10 mm.
(3) Direct contact of carbon FRP reinforcement bars with steel reinforcement should be avoided.

R. 7 Structural analysis
(1) For straight FRP-bars installed in a curved shape the bending stress shall be taken into account as
permanent action.
(2) Linear elastic analysis with redistribution according to 7.3.2 shall not be undertaken for members
with FRP reinforcement.
(3) Plastic analysis according to 7.3.3 shall not be undertaken for members with FRP reinforcement.
(4) Non-linear analysis according to 7.3.4 may be u ndertaken us ing the model outlined in Figure R.1
with design strength, fftd• and corresponding design ruptur e strain, EfRd ·

R.8 Ultimate Limit States (ULS)

R8.1 Bending with or without axial forces

(1) The tensile strain in FRP re inforcement shall be li mited to the des ign rupture strain, Emd·
(2) FRP reinforcement shall not be considered as compression reinforcement.
(3) Unless more rigorous analysis is undertaken the benefit of the confining effect of FRP
reinforcement should be reduced by the ratio Em/ E5 in any direction t hat confinement is considered.

R.8.2 Shear

(1) For members reinforced with longitudinal FRP re inforcement without requi ring shear
reinforcement, the minimum shear resistance in 8.2.1( 4) may be calculated as:

11 !ck . Em. ddg

TRdc,min = Yv fftkO Es d
(R.3)

(2) The provisions in 8.2.2 may be used provided that the p 1 of longitudinal FRP reinforcement in
Formula (8.28) is reduced by the ratio Em/E5 . The provisions in 8.2.2 for determining shear resistance
in presence of tension axial forces should not be applied if the height of the compression zone in the
cracked state of the section is less than O,ld.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
387
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(3) The provisions outlined in 8.2.3 may be used subject to the following modifications:
The a ngle of inclination of the compression field should be replaced by:

cote= 0,8 (R.4)

The shear res istance for members requi ri ng shear re inforcement may be determined by:

TRd.f = TRd,c + Pw · frwRd ·cote$ 0,17 ·fed (R.5)

where

f twRd = ffwk,1ooafYFRP $ EfwRd · EfwR (R.6)

where

ErwRd = 0,0023 + 1/15 · Ern · An · (0,8 · d) 2 · 10-15 $ 0,007 (R.7)

An cross-sectional area of longitudinal FRP reinforcement, considering for slabs a widt h of
lm.
(4) The provision outlined in 8.2.5 may be used subject to the following alterations:
fyd is replaced by frtd;

cote = 1,0 is used;

v =0,35 is used.
(5) The provisions outlined in 8.2.6 for determining the shear resistance at an interface may be used
subject to the following modifications:
Formula (8.76) shall be replaced by

ffu
TRdi = Cv1 · - - + µv · O'n $ 0,17 ·fed (R.8)
Ye
8.2.6(7) and Formula (8. 77) do not apply for FRP reinforcement.

R.8.3 T orsion

(1) The provisions of 8.3.4 may be used for members with FRP reinforcement subject to the following
alterations:
fyd is replaced by fftd• where fftd should be limited by f ttd $ 0,004 · Em;

fywd is replaced by ffwRd• according to Formula (R.6), where ffwRd should be limited by ffwRd $
0,004 · EfwR;
A51 is replaced by An;
cote = 1,0 is used;
v = 0,35 is used,
(2) For combined shear and torsion the compatibility of strains has to be ensured due to the different
approaches for shear and for tors ion. The required shear rei nforcement shall be the sum of that due to
shear and due to torsion.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
388
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

R.8.4 Punching

(1) The provisions in 8.4.3 shall not be applied to concrete members with longitudinal FRP
reinforcement. The design punching shear stress resistance rRd,c may be calculated in accordance to the
shear resistance in R.8.2.
(2) The provisions in 8.4.4 shall not be applied to concrete members with longitudinal FRP
reinforcement requiring punching shear reinforcement.

R.8.5 Design with strut-and-tie models and stress fields

(1) Design with strut-and-tie models and stress fields for concrete structure reinforced with FRP
reinforcement are not covered by this Eurocode.

R.9 Serviceability Limit States (SLS) - Special rules for FRP reinforcement
R.9.1 General

(1) Provision 9.1(5) shall not be applied.

R.9.2 Stress limitation and crack control

(1) Provision 9.2.1(2) does not apply for FRP reinforcement.

(2) In contrast to 9.2.1(4), by applying a sufficient web surface reinforcement according to S.5, a
verification of the crack width by calculation may not be omitted for FRP re inforcement.
(3) Tables 9.1 (NOP) and 9.2 (NOP) do not apply for members reinforced only with FRP reinforcement.
Tables R.2 and R.3 should be applied.

Table R.2 - Verifications, stress and crack width limits for appearance

Calcula tion of Verification of

minimum reinforcement
Verification Verification of crack width
reinforcement s tresses to avoid
according to 9.2.2 according to 9.2.3 failure at SLS
Combination of Characteristic
Cracking forces Quasi-permanent
actions for calculating combination of
acco rding to 9.2.2 combination of actions
<1f actions
Limiting value of W iim.cal = 0,4 mm
crack width W11m.ca1 or <Jr ~ /rtd <Jr ~ 0,8/r1d
stress ar <Jr ~fftd

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
389
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Table R.3 - Ve rifi cations, s tress a nd cra ck width limits for dura bility

Combina tion of actions

Exposure Class
quasi-p e rmanent characteristic
XC,XF, XD W iim,cal = 0,4 mmc <Jc :S 0,6/c:ka.b

• No limitation in serviceability conditions is necessary for stresses under bearings, partially loaded areas and
plates of headed bars.
b The compressive stress a c may be increased to 0,66fek if the cover is increased by 10 mm or confinement by
transverse reinforcement is provided.
c In absence of appearance conditions, fasteners, punctual wheel pressure, lap splice or freeze thaw this limit
may be relaxed to values up to 0,7 mm.

(4) The provisions relevant to steel reinforcement in 9.2.2, 9.2.3 and Annex S may be applied to
concrete w ith FRP reinforcement w ith the following mod ifications under the assumption that the bond
behaviour of the FRP r einforcement is similar as for steel reinforcement:
a5 is replaced by <Jf resp. <Js,lim by O'f,lim;

fyk is replaced by fftd;

E5 is replaced by Em;

As is replaced by Ar· (Em/ Es) in all r elevant formulae in these clauses;

9.2.2(3) deali ng with prestress ing does not apply.

R.9.3 Deflection control

(1) Table 9.3 in 9.3.2(1) should not be used for structures with FRP reinforcement.
(2) 9.3.3 does not apply for structures with FRP reinforcement.

R.10 Fatigue
(1) This Eurocode does not provide rules for fatigue utilising FRP reinforcement.

R.11 Detailing ofFRP reinforcement

R.11.1 General
(1) Without further evidence, the provisions in Clause 11 and Clause R.11 should only be used for
straight FRP reinforcement.

R.11. 2 Spacing of bars

NOTE See 11.2.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
390
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

R.11.3 Permissible mandrel diameters for bent bars

(1) The minimum diameter to which a bar may be bent shall be such as to avoid:
damaging the FRP reinforcement (see (2)); and

failure of the concrete inside the bend of the bar (crushing, splitting or spalling of re inforcement
cover), see (3) and (4).

(2) The mandrel diameter of FRP reinforcement may be found in the Technical Product Specification.
Bending on site and re-bending (straightening) is not permitted.
The mandrel diameter should be at least:
¢.nand,min = 4¢1' for ¢1' S 16 mm;

(Anand.min = 7 ¢1' for ¢1' > 16 mm.

NOTE Bending of FRP bars is done under controlled factory and warm conditions on ly.

(3) Provided thatfrt<1 s 25/ccJ and res 1,5, verification of the concrete inside the bend may be omitted for:
stirrups in compliance with 12.3.3(4);

standard hook and bend anchorages complying with Figure 11.6 at a clear distance c. ~ 1,5¢ from an
edge parallel to the bend and a clear distance between bars Cs ~ 3¢according to Figure 11.6c; and

all bends with an angle llbend s 45° at a clear distance c. ~ 2,5¢ from an edge parallel to t he bend, a
clear distance between bars Cs ~ 5¢ and a length ~ 2¢ of the straight segments between multiple
bends.

(4) In cases not complying with (3) the design value of the stress in the FRP bar ot1d should be verified to
avoid concrete failures inside the bend according to Formula (R.9):

Oltd s 25 . /cd (R.9)

R.11.4 Anchorage ofFRP reinforcement in tens ion and compression

(1) Provisions for anchorage in 11.4 may be applied to determine the anchorage lengths of FRP
reinforcement only where additions and modifications in Annex R are used in the determination of
relevant parameters.
(2) Only the methods of anchorage according to Figure 11.2 a), b) and c) in 11.4.1(6) may be used for
FRP reinforcement.
(3) Formula (R.10) may be applied to determine the anchorage length of FRP reinforcement:
1 1 1

lbd = k 1b. k . ¢ . ( -O'ftd)n" . (25)2

- . ( -¢r ) 3 . (1,5.
-- ¢r)2 > 10¢ (R.10)
cp f 21 7 fck 20 Cd - f

where

na = 1,0 for O'ftd S 21 7 MPa;

n<T =1,5 for O'ftd > 217 MPa;

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
391
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

lbd shall be limited also to

lbd <:: ( r/Jrf 4) · ( Clf tctl fbct, 1ooa) (R.11)

NOTE The va lue of !bct.iooa = 1,5 MPa applies unless more accurate information is available based on
production data.

(4) Where the clear distance between FRP reinforcement bars Cs < 7,5 · r/Jr, concrete cover spalling shall
be prevented by limiting the design strain to liffid s 0,003 5 in straight bars or with by confining the
anchorage zone.
(5) Unless more rigorous analysis is undertaken the provisions in 11.4.3 for bundles should not be used
for FRP bars.
(6) The provisions in 11.4.4 may be applied with the assumpti on, that only the st raight part is considered
for determ ining the anchorage length and design long-term tensile s trength /rwRd is considered.
(7) The provisions in 11.4.S shall not be applied for FRP reinforcement.
(8) The provis ions in 11.4.6 may be applied with the ass umption, that only the straight part is considered
for determining the anchorage length and design long-term tensile strength /rwRd is considered.
(9) The provis ions in 11.4.7 and 11.4.8 shall not be applied for FRP reinforcement.

R.11.5 Laps of FRP reinforcement in tension

(1) Provisions for laps in 11.5 should only be used for FRP reinforcement within the provisions stated
in Annex R.
(2) Laps of FRP reinforcement to FRP reinforcement or other reinforcement types shall be situated in
zones where the stress in the reinforcement at ultimate li mit state is less than 80 % of the design strength.
(3) The provisions in 1 1.5.3 for bundles should not be used, if no further proof is done.
(4) The provisions in 11.5.4 may be applied with the assumption, that only the straight part is considered
for determining the anchorage length and design long-term tensile strengthfrwRd is considered.
(5) The provisions in 11.5.5, 11.5.6 and 11.5.7 shall not be used for FRP reinforcement.

R.11.6 Post-tensioning tendons

(1) The provis ions in 11.6 do not apply for FRP reinforcement.

R.11.7 Deviation forces due to curved tensile and compressive chords

NOTE See 11. 7

R.12 Detailing of members and particular rules

R.12.1 General

(1) Annex R does not provide rules for FRP reinforcement utilized for robustness of concrete
structures in case of progressive collapse as punching or concrete shear failure .
(2) Detailing of members shall be consistent with the design models adopted considering the rules
given in Annex R.
(3) All provisions of Clause 12 apply unless specifically omitted or supplemented in Clause R.12. The
bond behaviour and properties of the embedded FRP reinforcement should comply wit h Clause R.15.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
392
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(4) If not mentioned otherwise, the following modifications apply to all relevant provisions in
Clause 12:
fyk is replaced by fftd;

E5 is replaced by Ern;

A5 is replaced by Ar.

(5) Annex R does not provide rules for bent-up FRP bars.

R.12.2 Minimum reinforcement rules

(1) The minimum FRP reinforcement Ar.min in members with pure tension may be determined as
follows:

An,min = Ac · f ctm/fFtd (R.12)

(2) Provision 12.2(3) does not apply for FRP reinforcement.
(3) Minimum FRP reinforcement shall generally be anchored and lapped according to Clause R11 for a
stress level f 1td·

R.12.3 Beams
(1) FRP re inforcement in beams, longitudinal and transverse, should be detailed in accordance with
the requirements of Table 12.l (NOP) using s i,max < 250 mm.
(2) The minimum reinforcement should be distributed over the width and proportionally over the
height of the tension zone.
(3) The minimum reinforcement required should be fully provided between the supports.
(4) The minimum re inforcement required for cantilevers shall be provided for the total length of the
cantilevers.
(5) For members with and without shear reinfo rcement, it may be assumed a 1 = d.
(6) Provision 12.3.2(6) does not apply for FRP reinforcement.
(7) The shear reinforcement shall only consist of a combination of:
stirrups/links enclosing the longitudinal tension reinforcement and the compression zone;
cages, ladders, etc. which are cast in without enclosing the longitudinal reinforcement but are
properly anchored in the compression and tension zones.
(8) Anchorages with headed bars or welded /connected transverse reinforcement are not covered.
(9) Laps on legs of stirrups in shear re inforcement may be used and designed accordi ng to R.11.3 for a
stress level f Ftd·
(10) Provisions in 12.3.4 do not apply for FRP reinforcement.

R.12.4 Slabs
(1) Reinforcement in slabs should be detailed in accordance with the requirements of Table 12.2 (NOP)
using SsJab, max• SJ,max• Sbu,max and Str,max < 250 mmm.
(2) The minimum height of the concrete slab is 200 mm if shear reinforcement is provided.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
393
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

(3) This Eurocode does not provide rules for Ar.min for robustness in case of progressive collapse
utilising FRP reinforcement in slabs.
(4) Maximum longitudinal spacing SJ.max of shear stirrups is 0,3d instead of 0,75d.
(5) Provision 12.4.2(5) does not apply for FRP reinforcement.

R.12.5 Slab-column connections and column bases

(1) Annex R does not provide rules for utilising FRP reinforcement for punching.

R.12.6 Columns
(1) Annex R does not provide rules for utilising FRP reinforcement for reinforcement under
compression.

R.12.7 Walls and deep beams

(1) Reinforcement in walls and deep beams should be detailed in accordance with the requirements of
Table 12.4 (NOP) using Si.max< 250 mm.

R.12.8 Foundations
(1) Annex R does not provide rules for FRP re inforcement in foundations according to 12.8.

R.12.9 Tying systems for robustness of buildings

(1) The provisions of 12.9 may be applied for members with FRP reinforcement.

R.12.10 Supports, bearings and expansion joints

(1) The provis ions of 12.10 may be applied for members with FRP reinforcement.

R.13 Additional rules for precast concrete elements and structures

(1) Additional provisions for precast concrete elements in Clause 13 may be applied for members with
FRP reinforcement with the following restrictions and alterations.
(2) Provisions in 13.3, 13.4.2 and 13.5 do not apply as heat-curing and prestressing are not covered by
Annex R.
(3) In 13.7.1(9), Formula (13.14) shall be replaced by:

Ar= 0,2 5 · t/h · FEd f fftd (R.13)

with fnd :5 0,004 ·Em.

(4) Provisions in 13.7.1(13) does not apply.
(5) Provisions in 13.7.3 for pocket foundations do not apply.

R.14 Lightly reinforced concrete structures

NOTE There are no additiona l requirements.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
394
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

R.15 Material requirements for FRP reinforcement

(1) For the design to this Eurocode, embedded FRP reinforcement shall comply with the relevant
product standards.
(2) Annex R provides design rules for member reinforced with embedded FRP re inforcement within
the following limits of declared properties determined in accordance with ISO 10406 or the relevant
product standards:
Minimum strength retention after alkali-resistance test without stress according to ISO 10406-1 or
to the relevant product standards shall be greater than 0, 7frtko

Minimum value of/bd,tOOa :2: 1,5 MPa.

NOTE All limitations and required properties provided in Clause R.S a lso apply.

R.16 Surface reinforcement for large diameter bars

(1) When determining the surface reinforcement in accordance with S.5, the different moduli of
elasticity, elongation at fracture and bond properties of the main reinforcement and the surface
reinforcement shall be taken into account.
(2) The surface reinforcement shall not fail before the ULS is reached.
(3) The surface reinforcement shall be:

Ar.surf = 0,01 . Act . Esf EfR (R.14)

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
395
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

AnnexS
(informative)

Minimum reinforcement for crack control and simplified control of

cracking

S.1 Use of this annex

(1) This informative Annex provides additional information for crack width control, covering both
minimu m re inforcement for crack control and s implified control of cracking.
NOTE National choice on the application of this Informative Annex is given in the National Annex. If the
National Annex contains no information on the application of this Informative Annex, it can be used.

S.2 Scope and field of application

(1) This Informative Annex includes:
A formulation to determine the minimum reinforcement required to limit the crack width when, even
though the characteristic service forces acting on a given section are not expected to produce
cracking, cracking can nevertheless occur due to action effects not explicitly accounted for in design.
This formulation can be used, for instance (but not only), to determine the base reinforcement of
slabs or beams (see Clause S.3);

a simplified and conservative formulation to determine the crack width based of the general
formulation of9.2.3. (see Clause S.4); and

empirical rules for surface reinforcement to control crack widths in members reinforced with large
bar diameters (see Clause S.5).

S.3 Minimum reinforcement areas for crack width control

(1) Unless a more refined calculation shows lesser areas to be adequate, the required minimum areas
of reinforcement to control crack width may be calculated as follows. In profiled cross sections like T-
beams and box girders, minimum reinforcement should be determined for the individual parts of the
section (webs, flanges). In addition to the requirements in 9.2.2, the reinforcement necessary in the part
of the cross section under consideration may be determined by Formulae (S.l), (S.2) or (S.3), as
appropriate.
a) For pure bending:

h - hc.eff
0,8 h fct,effAc,eff
As,min,wl = -----'""------- (S.1)
O"s,li m
A s.min,w2 = 0

NOTE 1 For minimum reinforcement to avoid yielding, see 9.2.2(2).

b) For pure tension:

A _ A _ !.ct,effAc.eff (S.2)
$,min,\Vl - $, m in_,W2 - (J
s,lim

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
396
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

c) For a combination of bending and axial force:

( 0,5 - 0,4
h - he
h '
eff) N Ed + 0,8 h - hhe'eff fct,effAc,eff { <:: 0

As,min,wl = <J .
s,hm :::;
fct effAe eff
' •
(S.3)
<ls,lim
A
s,mm,wz
. = NEd _
(J .
A .
s,mm,w t
{:::; As.min.w1
>0
s,hm -

where

Ac.err is the area of the part of the section under consideration;

A s,min,wl is the area of minimum reinforcing steel to be placed at the most tensioned face of the
part of the section under consideration to control cracking;
A s,min,w2 is the area of minimum reinforcing steel to be placed at the least tensioned face of the
part of the section under consideration to control cracking;
is the design axial force at the serviceability limit state acting on the part of the section
under consideration (tensile force positive). N td should be determined considering the
characteristic values of prestress and axial forces under the relevant combination of
actions;
Us,lim is the maximum stress permitted in the reinforcement immediately after formation of
the crack <ls,ti111 may be taken as the yield stress or a lower stress according to
Formula (S.4), if necessary, to limit the crack width. In absence of other methods, for
ribbed or indented reinforcing steel, <ls.um may be taken as:

(~) (-c+ + E~ ~~lim,ea~ Z

(S.4)
2
<ls,lim :5 ka1fet,eff · C ka2 k <P .)
'I' w - s impl et,efl
r'

ki . = {(1,2 ~ - 0,1) for bending

-,sunpl
r
Of .
1, or pure tension
k
1
= {4,8 for bending
" 6,0 for tension
k
2
= {0,4 for bending
" 0,3 for tension

kw is a factor converting the mean crack width into a calculated crack width, see 9.2.3(2);
f ct,eff is the mean value of the tensile st rength of the concrete effective at the time when the
cracks may first be expected to occur: fc~err = fc,m fort<:: trcr or [ct.err= fc,m(t), if cracking is
expected at t < trer;
NOTE 2 For more information, see Annex D.

k11 is a coefficient which allows for the effect of non-uniform self-equilibrating stresses,
which lead to a reduction of t he apparent tensile strength which may be taken as:

kh = 0,8 - 0,6(min{b; h}- 0,3) {~ ~'.~ (S.5)

where hand b [m] are the dimensions of the part of the section under consideration.

NOTE 3 For consideration of thick members, see 9.2.2.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
39 7
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:20 23 (E)

S.4 Simplified control of cracking

NOTE Clause S.4 is a simplification of 9.2.3. A conservative value is assumed for the effective tension area and
tension stiffening effects are estimated as a 10 % reduction in the steel stress obtained considering a fully cracked
section.

(1) The rules given in 9.2.3 may be complied with by restricting either the bar diameter cf> according to
Formula (S.6) or the bar spacing St according to Formula (S.7).

(S.6)
"' < ' ·pp
21 ( W1·un,ca 1 _ 1' S . c )
'l' - a u
J ,
. 1 • 0,9 Ess
-d ·kn s impl ·kb simpl kw· kir,s1mp

where

k . _ {( 1 - 3,5 ahy) if one face is in compresion

fl,Slmp l -
1,00 if both faces are in tension
k .
l/r,s1mpl
= {25 (-dh - 1) ·Pp + 1,15 · _dh - 0,15 for bending
1,00 for tension
k . = {0,9 for good bond conditions
b.snnpl 1,2 for poor bond conditions
2
3,45 · Pp W11m,cal
s, ::;; u - 1,5 . c (S.7)
k,,,,.,, ·k,,,,.J • "'-"•'' ·
2
a 2 2 k ·k · ·09·2 )
T E,

where

is the reinforcement ratio corresponding to the tensioned face under

consideration. When considering the least t ensioned face of an element with both
faces in tension, kt;r,simpt may be set equal to 1,0 conservatively;
a is the distance from the concrete surface to the centre of the first layer of bars;
St is the bar spacing;
is the stress permitted in the reinforcement closest to the most tensioned
concrete surface after formation of all cracks. Us may be taken as the calculated
stress according to loads or a lower stress Us,limaccording to Formula (S.4 );
Dy cover to the centre of the external bar in they -direction
(2) Cracking due to shear and torsion may be assumed to be controlled if the detailing rules given in
Clause 12 are observed. For cases where verification of cracking due to shear a nd torsion is considered
r elevant, G.5 should be used.

S.5 Surface reinforcement for large diameter bars

(1) In lieu of a verification of the crack width for large diameter bars by calculation, a constructive web
surface reinforcement may be used.
(2) This surface reinfo rcement to limit crack widths or to resist spalling should be used where the main
reinforcement is made up of:
- bars with diameter cf> > 32 mm; or

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
398
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

bundled bars with equivalent diameter </>b > 32 mm.

(3) This surface reinforcement As,surf should consist of wire mesh or small diameter bars in the two
directions parallel and orthogonal to the tension reinforcement in the beam and be placed outside the
links in the cover as indicated in Figure S.l.

As.surf;::: O,OlAct,ext (in each direction) (S.8)

Dimensions in millimetres

\
A s,surf
/\
C>
C>
,I \.
'°V I

I I I I I I I I I I I I

S surf ~150 S surf ~150

NOT E x is the depth of the neutral axis at ULS.

Figure S.1 - Surface reinforcement for large diameter bars and bundles

(4) Where the cover to reinforcement is greater than 70 mm, s imilar s urface reinforcement s hould be
used, with an area of O,OOSAct,ext in each direction.
(5) The longitudinal bars of the surface reinforcement may be taken into account as longitudinal
bending reinforcement and the transverse bars as shear reinforcement provided that they meet the
requ irements for the arrangement and ancho rage of these types of reinforcement.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
399
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1-1:2023 (E)

Bibliography

References contained in recommendations (i.e. "should" clauses)

The following documents are referred to in the text in such a way that some or all of their content
constitutes highly recommended choices or course of action of this document. Subject to national
regulation and/or any relevant contractual provisions, alternative documents could be used/adopted
where technically justified. For dated references, only the edition cited applies. For undated references,
the latest edition of the referenced document (including any amendments) applies.
[1] EN 12390-13, Testing hardened concrete - Part 13: Determination of secant modulus of elasticity
in compression

[2] EN 12390-16, Testing hardened concrete - Part 16: Determination of the shrinkage ofconcrete

[3] EN ISO 15630 (all parts), Steel for the reinforcement and pres tressing ofconcrete - Test methods
{ISO 15630 (all parts))

[4] EN 1536, Execution ofspecial geotechnica/ work - Bored piles

[5] EN 1538, Execution ofspecial geotechnica/ work - Diaphragm walls

[6] EN 1993-1-11, Eurocode 3: Design ofsteel structures - Part 1-11: Design ofstructures with tension
components

[7] EN 12390-17, Testing hardened concrete - Part 17: Determination of creep of concrete in
compression

[8] EN 13369, Common rules for precast concrete products

References contained in permissions (i.e. "may" clauses)

The following documents are referred to in the text in such a way that some or all of their content
expresses a course of action permissible within the limits of the Eurocodes. For dated references, only
the edition cited applies. For undated references, the latest edition of the referenced document (including
any amendments) applies.
[9] EN 196-2, Method oftesting cement- Part 2: Chemical analysis ofcement

[10] EN 10088-1, Stainless steels - Part 1: List of stainless steels

[11] EN 12390-14, Testing hardened concrete - Part 14: Semi-adiabatic method for the determination
of heat released by concrete during its hardening process

[12] EN 12390-15, Testing hardened concrete- Part 15: Adiabatic method for the determination of heat
released by concrete during its hardening process

[13] EN 13577, Chemical attack on concrete - Determination of aggressive carbon dioxide content in
water

[14] EN 16502, Test method for the determination of the degree of soil acidity according to Baumann-
Gully

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
400
 BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

(15] EN ISO 7980, Water quality - Determination of calcium and magnesium - Atomic absorption
spectrometric method {ISO 7980)

(16] ISO 4316, Surface active aoents - Determination of pH of aqueous solutions - Potentiometric
method

(17] ISO 7150-1, Water quality- Determination of ammonium - Part 1: Manual spectrometric method

References contained in possibilities (i.e. "can" clauses) and notes

The following documents are cited informatively in the document, for example in "can" clauses and in
notes.
(18] EN 197-1, Cement - Part 1: Composition, specifications and conformity criteria for common
cements

(19] EN 1993-1-11, Eurocode 3: Desi9n of steel structures - Part 1-11: Desi9n ofstructures with tension
components

(20] EN 1998 (all parts), Eurocode 8: Desi9n ofstructures for earthquake resistance

(21] EN 100801, Steel for the reinforcement ofconcrete - Weldable reinforcin9 steel - General

(22] EN 10138 (all parts)2, Steel for the prestressing of concrete

(23] EN 103703, Steel for the reinforcement ofconcrete - Stainless steel

(24] EN 12620, Ag9regates for concrete

(25] EN 14199, Execution of special 9eotechnical works - Micropiles

(26] EAD 160003, Double headed studs for the increase of punching shear resistance of flat slabs or
footin9s and 9round slabs

(27] EAD 160004, Post-tensioning kits for prestressing of structures

(28] EAD 160012, Headed reinforcement steel bars

(29] EAD 160129, Couplers for mechanical splices of reinforcin9 steel bars

(30] EAD 330087, Systems for post-installed rebar connections with mortar

(31] fib Bulletin 40, FRP reinforcement in RC structures. Technical report. {160 pages, ISBN 978-2-88394-
080-2, September 2007)

1 Under revision. Stage at the time of publication: prEN 10080.

2 Under preparation. Stage at the time of publication: prEN 10138.
3 Under preparation. Stage at the time of publication: prEN 10370.

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
401
BS EN 1992-1-1:2023
EN 1992-1 -1:2023 (E)

Other

[32] EN 1504-2, Products and systems for the protection and repair of concrete structures - Definitions,
requirements, quality control and evaluation of conformity - Part 2: Surface protection systems for
concrete

[33] EN 12504 (all parts}, Testin9 concrete in structures

[34] fib Bulletin 75, Polymer-duct systems for internal bonded post-tensionin9. Recommendation (172
pages, ISBN 978-2-88394-115-1. December 2014.)

@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
402
@seismicisolation
@seismicisolation
This page deliberately left blank
NO COPYING WITHOUT BSI PERMISSION EXCEPT AS PERMlm D BY COPYRIGHT LAW

British Standards Institution (BSI)

BSI is the national body responsible for preparing British Standards and other
standards-related publications, information and services.
BSI is incorporated by Royal Charter. British Standards and other standardization
products are published by BSI Standards Limited.

About us Reproducing extracts

We bring together business, industry. government. consumers. innovators For permission to 1eproduce content from BSI publications contact the BSI
and others to shape their combined experience and expertise into standards Copyright and Licensing team.
·based solutions.
The knowledge embodied in our standards has been carefully assembled in Subscriptions
a dependable format and refined through our open consultation p<ocess. Our range of subscription se<vices are designed to make using suindards
Organiuitions of all ~zes and across all sectors choose st<>ndards to help easier for you For further info<mation on our subscription products go to bsigroup.
them achieve their goals. com/subscriptions.
With British Standards Online (BSOL) you'll have instant access to over 55,000
Information on standards British and adopted European and international standards fcom your desktop.
We can pro111de you with the knowledge that your organiuition needs It~ available 24n and is refreshed daily so you'll always be up to date.
to succeed. find out more about British St<>ndards by 111~tin g our website at You can keep m touch with standards developments and receive substantial
bsigroup.comlstandards or cont<>cting our Custome< Services team or discounts on the purchase pnce of standards, both m single copy and subscription
Knowledge Centre. format. by becoming a BSI Subscribing Member.

Buying standards PLUS is an updabng service exclusive to BSI Subscribing Members. You will
automatically receive the latest hard copy of your standards when they're
You can buy and download PDF versions of BSI publications. including British and revised or replaced.
adopted European and inte<national standards. through our website at bsigroup.
comfshop. where hard copies can also be purchased. To find out m0<e about becoming a BSI Subscribing Member and the benefits
of membe1ship. please visit bsigroup com/shop.
~you need international and foreign standards from other Standards Development
Organiuitions. hard copies can be ordered fcom our Customer Services team. With a Multi-User Network licence (MUNL) you are able to host standards
publications on your intranel. Lieeoces can covet as f~iv or as many users as you
Copyright in BSI publications wish. With updates supplied as soon as they're available, you can be sure your
documentation is current. For further information. email cse<[email protected].
All the content in BSI publications, including British Standards, is the property
of and copyrighted by BSI or some pe1son 0< entity that owns copyright in the Revisions
information used (such as the inte<national standardization bodies) and has
formally licensed such inf0<mation to BSI for commercial publication and use. Our British Standards and othe1publications are updated by amendment or revision.

Save for the provisions below, you may not transfer, share 0< disseminate any We continually improve the quality of our products and seMCes to benefit your
portion of the standard to any othe< person. You may not adapt, distribvte, business. If you find an inaccuracy or ambiguity within a British Standard or other
commeroally exploit or publicly display the st<>ndard 01 any portion thereof in any BSI publication please inform the Knowledge Cent1e.
manner whatsoever w ithout BSI~ prior written consent.
Useful Contacts
Storing and using standards Customer Serv ices
Standards purchased in soft copy format: Tel: +44 345 086 9001
A British Standard purchased in soft COrYf format is licensed to a sole named Email: [email protected]
user for personal or internal company use only.
Subscriptions
The standard may be stored on more than one device provided that it is Tel: +44 34S 086 9001
accessible by the sole named user only and that only one copy is accessed at Email: [email protected]
any one time.
A single paper copy may be printed for personal or internal company use only. Knowledge Centre
Tel: +44 20 8996 7004
Standards purchased m hard copy format: Email: [email protected]
A British Standard purchased in hard copy format is fo1 personal 01 internal
company use only. Copyri ght & Licensing
It may not be further reproduced - in any f01mat - to create an additional copy. Tel: +44 20 8996 7070
This includes scanning of the document. Email: [email protected]
~you need more than one copy of the document, or if you W1Sh to share the BSI Group Headquarters
document on an internal netw0rk, you can save money by choosing a subscription
product (see 'Subsc1iptions'). 389 Ch1swick High Road London W4 4AL UK

bsi. @seismicisolation
@seismicisolation